JP7335615B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a starting hole and a big winning hole are provided in a game area where a game ball can flow down, and when a game ball enters the starting hole, a special pattern is variably displayed on a special pattern display device, and a big win is achieved. When the jackpot symbols indicating the lottery result are stopped and displayed, a jackpot game advantageous to the player is executed. When the special symbols are variably displayed, the game effect is performed by the effect image displayed on the image display device, the sound output from the speaker, and the lighting/blinking operation of the light emitter such as the lamp.

For example, in Patent Document 1, there are cases where the pattern is changed with the winning of the game ball to the first start hole, and the case where the pattern is changed with the win of the game ball to the second start hole. It is stated that there is

JP 2019-155132 A

However, in the gaming machine as described in the above patent document, there is room for further improvement in the presentation of the game in terms of enhancing the interest of the game.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

The present invention has the following configurations. Note that the reference numerals indicate an example of correspondence with the constituent elements illustrated in the drawings for the purpose of promoting understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.
The gaming machine of the present invention executes a special game when a first start condition is established (a game ball enters the first start hole) or a second start condition is met (a game ball enters the second start hole). and a gaming machine capable of executing the special game according to the determination result of the determining means, wherein the game state is a first game state (normal) and a game state higher than the first game state. It can be controlled to a second game state (probability variable, time saving) advantageous to the player, and the second effect (post-ready effect) is executed after the first effect (pre-reach effect) based on the establishment of the start condition. It is possible to execute a notification effect (reach-loss variation pattern, reach-hit variation pattern) that notifies whether the special game is to be executed or not, and a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means (buttons, levers) that can be operated by the player. The vibration effect generates an operation effective period and performs an operation prompting display, and a first vibration effect (with operation) executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation prompting display Vibration production: Vibration production with advance notice of dialogue, vibration production with win-loss production), and a second vibration production that does not generate the operation valid period and is executed without the operation prompting display (vibration production without operation: look-ahead Vibration production, vibration production with step-up notice), and the first vibration production is a suggestive production (decision production), and the second vibration production (pre-reading vibration production) can be executed during the first production (pre-reach production), and is performed before the determination by the determination means It can be executed according to the result of the preliminary determination as to whether or not to execute the special game, and the suggestive effect (hitting/losing effect ) associated with the first vibration effect (vibration effect in win-lose effect) can be executed so that the vibration period (4 seconds → 5 seconds, total 9 seconds or 4 seconds) is longer, and the second vibration effect Predetermined role performance is executed when the first vibration effect (vibration effect in win-lose effect) accompanying the suggestion effect (win-lose effect) is executed rather than when the (predictive vibration effect) is executed. than when the notification effect (reach per variation pattern) for notifying the execution of the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition when the second game state (probability variable, time saving) is executed , When the notification effect (ready hit variation pattern) for notifying the execution of the special game is performed based on the establishment of the first start condition when the first game state (normal) is performed, the first The second vibration effect (read-ahead vibration effect) is likely to be executed during the first effect (during the pre-reach effect).

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to this embodiment; FIG. It is a perspective view showing a normal state, a protruded state, and a depressed state of the production button. It is an enlarged front view of the game information display device. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of a game control device. 3 is a block diagram of an image control unit; FIG. It is a diagram showing (1) a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol, and (2) a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol. It is a diagram showing (1) a special symbol determination table for big win, and (2) a special symbol determination table for loss. It is a figure which shows a jackpot game control table. It is a figure which shows a big winning a prize opening-and-closing control table. It is a figure which shows a game state setting data table. It is a diagram showing a special figure variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving gaming state. It is a diagram showing a special figure variation pattern determination table for the time saving gaming state. (1) It is a figure which shows the prior determination table for non time saving gaming states, and the prior determination table for (2) time saving gaming states. (1) hit determination table for normal symbols, (2) stop design determination table for normal symbols, (3) fluctuation pattern determination table for normal symbols, (4) opening mode determination table for the second start port. It is a diagram. 4 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by a main control board; 4 is a flowchart of input control processing by a main control board; It is a flow chart of the first starting port detection switch input processing by the main control board. It is a flow chart of the second start opening detection switch input processing by the main control board. It is a flow chart of gate detection switch input processing by the main control board. It is a flow chart of the special figure special electric control processing by the main control board. It is a flow chart of special symbol memory determination processing by the main control board. It is a flowchart of a big hit determination process by the main control board. It is a flow chart of special symbol variation processing by the main control board. It is a flow chart of special symbol stop processing by the main control board. It is a flowchart of a big hit game process by the main control board. It is a flowchart of special game end processing by the main control board. It is a flow chart of the general figure general electric control processing by the main control board. It is a flow chart of normal symbol variation processing by the main control board. It is a flowchart of auxiliary game processing by the main control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a flow chart of the main processing by the production control unit. It is a flow chart of timer interrupt processing by the production control unit. It is a flow chart of command analysis processing by the production control unit. It is a flow chart of command analysis processing by the production control unit. It is a figure which shows a production|presentation mode setting table. It is a flow chart of continuous announcement effect determination processing by the effect control unit 130m. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a continuous announcement effect type determination table for normal mode; It is a figure which shows the continuous announcement production|presentation classification determination table for probability variation / time saving modes. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a continuous announcement scenario determination table for normal mode; It is a figure which shows the continuation notice scenario determination table for probability variation / time saving modes. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation production pattern decision processing. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation production|presentation pattern determination table for normal modes. It is a figure which shows the variation production|presentation pattern determination table for probability variation / time saving mode. It is a flow chart which shows big hit notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the advance notice determination table before a reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a dialog announcement pattern determination table; It is a figure which shows a step-up notice pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows a development production|presentation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows a cut-in effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows a decided effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the information table for decision success effects. It is a figure which shows the execution start timing and end timing of determination success production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the vibration production|presentation information table for big-hit pattern matching. It is a figure which shows a re-lottery production|presentation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the execution frequency of button vibration after deciding success production|presentation is started. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a fixed effect pattern determination table; It is a figure which shows a revival production|presentation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a continuous announcement effect and a step-up announcement effect are executed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a continuous announcement effect and a step-up announcement effect are executed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a button vibration forewarning effect and a speech forewarning effect are executed; It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case pseudo-continuous production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case a development production|presentation is performed and develops into SP ready-to-win production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case a development production|presentation is performed and develops into SPSP ready-to-win production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in which cut-in production|presentation is performed during SP reach production|presentation. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of a continuation of FIG. 66; It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case determination production|presentation is performed during SPSP ready-to-win production|presentation (battle production|presentation). It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case determination production|presentation is performed during SPSP ready-to-win production|presentation (mission production|presentation). It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case promotion is successful by re-lottery production|presentation. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of a continuation of FIGS. 68, 69, and 70; FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case a revival production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of production|presentation in case setting change is carried out to time saving mode from normal mode. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of production|presentation in case setting change is carried out to time saving mode from normal mode. It is a figure which shows the production example of the big-hit fluctuation|variation production|presentation based on the 1st start opening prize-winning at the time of probability variable mode. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of a continuation of FIG. 77; It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation at the time of operating an operation means during a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows various vibration production|presentations performed by specific production|presentation. It is a diagram showing a continuous announcement effect type determination table for the variable probability mode according to the modification. It is a rear view which shows the state which assembled|attached each unit to the base frame. 81 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG. 80; FIG. It is a figure explaining the main board|substrate protection case which concerns on an example of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the main board|substrate protection case containing a base. It is a side view which shows the aspect at the time of attaching a main board|substrate protection case to a base. It is a figure explaining the main board|substrate protection case which concerns on the other example of this embodiment. Figure 86 is a rear perspective view of the main board protection case of Figure 85; It is a figure explaining the state which removed the main board|substrate protection case of FIG. 85 from the base. It is a figure which shows the modification of the position display part provided in a main board|substrate case. It is a figure which shows the modification of the position display part provided in a main board|substrate case. It is a figure which shows the modification of the position display part provided in a main board|substrate case. It is a figure which shows the modification which forms an identification mark in a main board|substrate case. It is a figure which shows the modification which forms an identification mark in a main board|substrate case. It is a figure which shows the modification of a main board|substrate case. It is the figure which looked at the seal|sticker part and main ROM from the rear diagonal upper direction. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a main-control board. It is the figure which showed the structure of the printed circuit board used for a main control board. FIG. 97 is a view showing a main board case that accommodates the main control board shown in FIGS. 95 and 96; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main board case including the pedestal of the main board case; FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a procedure for assembling a cutting member, an unsealing seal, and a cap to the sealing base, centering on the protruding piece of the upper case piece. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a state immediately before the cutting member, the unsealing seal, and the cap are attached to the sealing base. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which an unsealing prohibition seal is adhered to the sealing base; FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which a cap is attached to the unsealing prohibition seal; FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the cap is detached and the unsealing prohibition seal is broken; FIG. 4 is a surface view and a partially enlarged view of an example of an unsealable seal. It is a figure which shows the components layout of the payout control board in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of a payout control board protection case. It is an exploded perspective view of a payout control board case. It is an exploded perspective view of a payout control board case. 4 is a diagram for explaining the structure of an image control board; FIG. It is the figure which showed the structure of the printed circuit board used for an image control board. It is the figure which expanded and showed a part of printed wiring board used for an image control board. It is a front view explaining the structure of a production|presentation control board protection case. It is an exploded perspective view of a production control board case. It is an exploded perspective view of a production control board case. It is a figure for demonstrating the other structure of the main control board which concerns on this embodiment. FIG. 116 is a view showing the main board case of the present embodiment in which the main control board described with reference to FIG. 115 is accommodated; 116 is an exploded perspective view including the pedestal of the main board case shown in FIG. 115; FIG. It is a figure explaining another structure of the main control board which concerns on this embodiment. FIG. 119 is a front view of the main board case of the present embodiment in which the main control board described in FIG. 118 is accommodated; 120 is an exploded perspective view including the pedestal of the main board case shown in FIG. 119; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device and the performance display unit when RWM is cleared; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device, the performance display section, and the setting display section when the settings are changed when the gaming machine is separately provided with the performance display section and the setting display section. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device, the performance display section, and the setting display section when the settings are changed when the gaming machine is separately provided with the performance display section and the setting display section. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device and the performance display unit when confirming settings in a case where the gaming machine includes the performance display unit that also serves as the setting display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device, the performance display section, and the setting display section at the time of setting confirmation when the gaming machine is separately provided with the performance display section and the setting display section.

Hereinafter, this embodiment will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment.
In the pachinko game machine as the game machine 1, an opening/closing frame 2B (game frame) is attached to the outer frame 2A attached to the island structure of the game hall so as to be freely opened and closed, and an opening/closing door 3 is attached to the opening/closing frame 2B so as to be freely opened and closed. ing. A window 3a is formed in the opening/closing door 3, and a transparent plate 3b is attached to the window 3a. The left end portion of the opening/closing door 3 is supported by the left end portion of the opening/closing frame 2B so as to be rotatable about the vertical axis, and the right end portion of the opening/closing door 3 is equipped with a key cylinder 3c for locking the opening/closing door 3 to the opening/closing frame 2B. It is A game board 4 is attached to the opening/closing frame 2B, a game area 4a is formed between the game board 4 and a transparent plate 3b on the front side of the game board 4, and the game area 4a is opened and closed by an opening/closing door 3. .

The open/close door 3 includes an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker above the window 3a, a frame lighting device 27 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a storage tray 5 (receiving tray) for storing game balls below the window 3a. ) is provided, and the storage tray 5 is provided with a performance button device 6A and a selection button device 6B functioning as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various performances. At the left end of the opening/closing door 3, a performance lever device 6C is provided that functions as an input device for performing operations related to various performances.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations above the opening/closing door 3, and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to produce music and voice effects. A plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs) of the frame lighting device 27 are provided in the peripheral portion of the window 3a. Perform lighting effects. In addition, the lighting device 27 for the frame is a notification LED that is controlled to light/blink when an opening of the opening/closing door 3 or a payout abnormality in which game balls cannot be put out from the payout device 100 (see FIG. 4) occurs. It has

The production button device 6A includes a production button 6a capable of performing a determination operation (operation input) and a button operation production, a production button detection switch 6b (see FIG. 4) for detecting a pressing operation on the production button 6a, A button drive motor 6c (see FIG. 4) for changing the production button 6a between a normal state and a projecting state positioned above the normal state, and a vibration state in which the production button 6a vibrates in a predetermined manner from the normal state. A button vibration motor 6d (see FIG. 4) for changing, and a button light emitting LED 6e (see FIG. 4) for changing the effect button 6a between a non-lighting state and a light emitting state in which light is emitted in a predetermined manner are provided. When the player operates the effect button 6a in a predetermined operation mode, it is possible to input predetermined information to the control section (the effect control section 130m) of the gaming machine 1. FIG.

The production button 6a has a normal state (non-protruding state) (Fig. 2(a)), which is a normal operating position, and a protruding state (Fig. 2(b)), which protrudes to an operating position higher than the normal state. The state in which the pressing operation is detected can be changed from the normal state to the depressed state (FIG. 2(c)) that is retracted downward.

The state shown in FIG. 2(a) is a normal state in which only the tip portion is slightly projected upward from the surrounding surface of the storage tray 5. As shown in FIG.
The protruded state is the state shown in FIG. 2(b), in which the storage plate 5 protrudes several times (about 7 to 10 times) higher than the normal state from the surrounding surface of the storage tray 5. As shown in FIG.
The depressed state is the state shown in FIG.
The effect button device 6A has a structure in which the effect button 6a can be changed into a normal state, a projecting state, and a depressed state. When the production button 6a in the normal state or the protruding state is pressed to enter the pressed state, the pressing operation is detected, and then, when the pressing operation is released, the pressed state returns to the normal state. The direction in which the effect button 6a moves between the normal position (normal position), the projecting position (projecting position), and the pressed position where the pressing operation is detected (pressed position) is performed. This is the advance/retreat direction of the button 6a.

Predetermined operation modes of the effect button 6a include "single hit" in which the effect button 6a is operated once from the normal position or the projected position to the pressed position, "long press" in which the effect button 6a is continuously operated to the pressed position, and the effect button 6a. is classified as a "continuous hit" in which the is continuously operated multiple times from the normal position to the pressed position. It should be noted that it is possible to detect any one of the "single hit", "long press", and "continuous hits" by the effect button detection SW 6b. In the case of "long press", the duration of the long press operation is detected, and in the case of "continuous press", the number of operations is detected.

The production button 6a has a housing made of a transparent member that can transmit light, and when the button light emission LED 6e emits light in a predetermined color (white, blue, red, rainbow, etc.), the light of the predetermined color is emitted to the outside of the production button 6a. The effect button 6a is illuminated (lighted) by being transmitted.

The effect button 6a can vibrate in a predetermined effect mode (vibration time, vibration intensity, vibration pattern, etc.) by the driving force of the button vibration motor 6d. The performance button 6a can be operated even while the performance button 6a is vibrating.
When it is difficult for the player to visually determine whether or not the effect button 6a is vibrating, the player can confirm whether or not the effect button 6a is vibrating by touching the effect button 6a. .

The selection button device 6B includes a cross key button 6f (hereinafter referred to as cross key 6f) (up key button , down key button, right key button, left key button) and a cross key detection switch 6g (see FIG. 4) for detecting the operation of the cross key 6f. Predetermined information can be input to the control unit (production control unit 130m) of the game machine 1. FIG.

The production lever device 6C includes a production lever 6h that can perform a decision operation (operation input) and a lever operation production, a production lever detection switch 6i that detects the operation of the production lever 6h, and a normal state and a predetermined state of the production lever 6h. A vibration motor 6j for changing the vibrating state to a vibrating state in a manner, a lever light emitting LED 6k for changing the effect lever 6h between a non-lighting state and a light emitting state to emit light in a predetermined state, and a normal state and a normal state for the directing lever 6h. A lever drive motor (not shown) is provided for changing the state to a protruded state located above the state.

The production lever device 6C has a structure in which the production lever 6h can be changed into a normal state, a protruded state, and a tilted state.
The production lever 6h has an operation rod that can be operated in multiple directions (for example, four directions, front, rear, left, and right, and eight directions including oblique directions) by the player holding and tilting it with an operating hand. A trigger button (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position of the operating stem (for example, a position where the forefinger of the operating hand touches when the player grips the operating stem).

When the player grips and tilts the operating stem with the operating hand and pushes and pulls the trigger button with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger), the effect lever detection switch 6i tilts the operating stem and pushes and pulls the trigger button. As the operation is detected, it becomes possible to input predetermined information to the control section (the effect control section 130m) of the game machine 1. FIG.
A vibrating motor 6j is built in the operation stem of the production lever 6h, and it vibrates when the operation stem is tilted or vibrates without being tilted.

The effect lever 6h can be changed between a normal state (non-protruding state: FIG. 1), which is a normal operating position, and a protruding state that protrudes upward from the normal state by the driving force of the lever drive motor.

A shooting handle 7 is attached to the lower right side of the storage dish 5. - 特許庁When the shooting handle 7 is rotated, the game balls introduced to the shooting position from the storage tray 5 are shot. Fires continuously every 6 seconds. The shot game ball is guided by the guide rail 8 and introduced to the upper part of the game area 4a. When the player operates a shooting stop button (not shown) provided on the shooting handle 7, shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped. A vibration motor for vibrating the shooting handle 7 may be provided inside the shooting handle 7 to vibrate the shooting handle 7 .

As shown in FIG. 1, in the game area 4a, in addition to a large number of obstacle nails K, there are a first starting port 10, a starting port device 11 having an opening/closing type second starting port 11a, a gate 12, and an opening/closing type big prize. A large winning opening device 13 having an opening 13a and a plurality of general winning openings 14 are provided in the illustrated arrangement so that a game ball can enter (win a prize). As shown in FIG. 4, the first starting hole 10, the gate 12, and the plurality of general winning holes 14 are respectively provided with a first starting hole detection switch 10a, a gate detection switch 12a, and a plurality of A general winning hole detection switch 14a is provided. It should be noted that, in the embodiments, the terms "entering the ball" and "winning a prize" include "passing".

The starting port device 11 opens and closes the second starting port 11a, the opening and closing member 11b that opens and closes the second starting port 11a, the second starting port detection switch 11c that detects the game ball that has won the second starting port 11a, and the opening and closing member 11b. It has a second starting port opening/closing solenoid 11d to be driven, and the second starting port 11a can operate between a closed state in which game balls are difficult or impossible to win and an open state in which game balls are easy to win.

Between the first starting hole 10 and the second starting hole 11a, there is provided a winning hole lamp NR (FIG. 4) for causing the periphery of the first starting hole 10 and the second starting hole 11a to emit light in a predetermined manner. It is possible to perform a lighting effect by lighting the winning entrance lamp NR.

The large winning slot device 13 includes a large winning slot 13a, an opening/closing member 13b for opening and closing the large winning slot 13a, a large winning slot detecting switch 13c for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning slot 13a, and a large winning slot for driving the opening/closing member 13b. Having a winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d, the big winning opening 13a can operate between a closed state in which game balls are difficult or impossible to win and an open state in which game balls can easily win.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the shooting handle 7 to shoot the game ball into the game area 4a, the game ball is shot by the amount of rotation operation (rotation angle) of the shooting handle 7. By adjusting the intensity, it is possible to distinguish between so-called "left-handed" and "right-handed" hitting. In "left hitting", the game ball falls in the left side game area 4a1 located on the left side of the center role 15, and in "right hitting", the game ball passes through the right hitting passage formed above the center role 15. It moves to the right side game area 4a2 located on the right side of the center accessory 15 and falls toward the downstream direction of the right side game area 4a2.

When the game ball launched into the game area 4a wins any of a plurality of winning holes 10, 11a, 13a, 20a, 14, winning holes 10, 11a, 13a, 20a, 14 per winning of one game ball A set number of game balls (several to 10 or so) are paid out to a storage tray 5 as prize balls, and none of the plurality of prize winning ports 10, 11a, 13a, 20a, 14 win. In this case, it is finally discharged to the outside of the game area 4a from the discharge port 28 formed at the most downstream part of the game area 4a.

When the game ball shot to the game area 4a wins the first starting hole 10 or the second starting hole 11a, a big winning lottery (special game determination) is performed, and when winning the big winning lottery, the big winning mouth 13a opens. A game (special game) occurs. When the game ball passes through the gate 12, a winning lottery is performed, and when winning the winning lottery, an auxiliary game is generated in which the second starting port 11a is opened in a predetermined mode (opening time, number of times of opening and closing).

A center accessory 15 is attached to substantially the center of the game board 4 . The center accessory 15 is provided with a frame (ornamental frame) 15a for restricting entry of game balls into the interior, and this frame 15a is fitted and mounted in an opening (not shown) formed in the game board 4. A warp device 15b is provided on the left side of the frame 15a to allow the game balls flowing down the game area 4a to be introduced into the frame 15a. A center stage 15c on which a game ball can roll is provided at the bottom of the frame 15a, and a game ball introduced into the frame 15a by the warp device 15b passes through the warp passage of the warp device 15b to the center stage 15c. , and flows down below the frame 15a.

A first image display device 16 (main liquid crystal) made up of a liquid crystal display is provided on the central inner part side of the performance space 15A defined inside the frame 15a of the center accessory 15 . On the upper side of the presentation space 15A, there are a first movable presentation member 17A imitating a "sword" and a second image display device 18 (sub-liquid crystal) consisting of a liquid crystal display in a shape imitating a "signboard" of the title of the gaming machine 1. A second movable effect member 17B is provided. The second movable effect member 17B is arranged in front of the first movable effect member 17A. A third movable effect member 17C imitating a "sword" larger than the "sword" of the first movable effect member 17A is provided on the right end side of the effect space 15A.

The first movable effect member 17A is composed of a sheath part imitating a scabbard and a blade part housed in the sheath part. It is possible to move, and from the state in which the blade is housed in the scabbard, it is possible to perform a performance action in which the blade is moved to the left and pulled out of the scabbard.

The second movable effect member 17B can move vertically by being driven by the board driving device 17 (stepping motor), and moves downward from the upper side of the effect space 15A to move the image display device 16. It is possible to perform an effect action that appears on the front side of the screen.

The third movable effect member 17C is composed of a sheath part imitating a scabbard and a blade part housed in the sheath part. It is possible to move, and from the state in which the blade is housed in the scabbard, it is possible to perform a performance action in which the blade is lifted and pulled out of the scabbard. Note that FIG. 1 shows a state in which the blade portion is housed in the sheath portion.

Further, the third movable effect member 17C is driven by a board driving device 17 (stepping motor), and is capable of tilting the blade portion with the lower portion of the third movable effect member 17C as a fulcrum. From the pulled out state, it is possible to tilt toward the front side of the central area of the screen of the image display device 16 to perform an effect action such as slashing the opponent with a sword.

In addition, the first movable effect member 17A, the second movable effect member 17B and the third movable effect member 17C are each provided with a plurality of LEDs (light emitting units), and a predetermined mode is provided during standby or during execution of the effect operation. It is possible to perform a light-emitting effect in which the blade part, logo, etc. emit light.

Further, the first movable effect member 17A, the second movable effect member 17B, and the third movable effect member 17C are each controlled by the driving force of the accessory vibration motor of the board driving device 17 in a predetermined manner (vibration time, vibration intensity, vibration, etc.). pattern, etc.). The first movable effect member 17A, the second movable effect member 17B, and the third movable effect member 17C can each perform the effect action while vibrating. Further, the first movable effect member 17A, the second movable effect member 17B and the third movable effect member 17C can each vibrate at the standby position without performing the effect motion, and vibrate at the effect position moved from the standby position. It is possible.

The first image display device 16 performs various presentation displays according to the progress (development) of the game. As the effect display, the customer waiting effect performed while the special symbol variable display is not executed on the special symbol display device described later, the variable effect and the jackpot game that perform the effect corresponding to the special symbol variable display on the special symbol display device There is a jackpot performance etc. that is performed during the execution of.

On the screen of the first image display device 16, there are variable display areas (left area, center area, right area) for displaying three production patterns 16a (left design, middle design, right design), A mode display area or the like indicating the effect mode is formed.

The production pattern 16a includes an identification portion consisting of code information of numbers or characters indicating "1" to "9" or "one" to "nine", and a character image ( For example, there are a production pattern composed of a decorative portion including predetermined decoration information (associated information) such as an animal character such as a cat or a dog and a decorative frame image, and a production pattern composed only of an identification portion.

In the stop display of the effect pattern 16a, the effect pattern 16a is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time in a predetermined mode (losing mode, big win mode) indicating the result of the big win lottery. The jackpot mode is a combination of the same effect symbols 16a such as "777", and the losing mode is other modes.

In the present embodiment, the variable display mode of the production pattern 16a is scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may be scrolled in the horizontal direction, or may be switched on the spot, rotated (rotated), or the like. may be

In addition, during the execution of the variable performance including the variable display of the performance pattern 16a, various performance images (moving images) such as background images and characters are displayed according to the result of the big winning lottery, so that the big winning lottery is possible. It is designed to heighten the player's expectation of winning with respect to the result.

On the screen of the first image display device 16, a first pending icon display area 16b for displaying a number of first pending icons (for example, "○") corresponding to the first special figure pending number (U1), a second A second pending icon display area 16c for displaying a number of second pending icons (for example, "●") corresponding to the special figure pending number (U2), and a variable display of the special design being executed (production design 16a) A variable icon display area 16d and the like for displaying the corresponding variable icon (for example, "⊚") are formed.

Also, on the screen of the first image display device 16, the first reserved number display area 16e for displaying the first reserved number indicating the current first special symbol reserved number (U1), and the current second special symbol A second reserved number display area 16f for displaying a second reserved number indicating the number of reservations (U2), a special pattern TZ that is variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern and the variable display of the effect pattern 16a is displayed. A special pattern display area for is formed.

The special symbol TZ is composed only of an identification portion consisting of code information of numerals "1" to "9", and is displayed in a reduced size smaller than the display size of the effect symbol 16a. The variable display of the special symbols TZ in the special symbol display area is a constant display mode (numbers are switched in order) during the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbols and the variable display of the effect symbols 16a to the stop display. In addition, it is always displayed in a visible state without disappearing from the screen or being blocked by the performance operations of the movable performance members 17A to 17C.
On the other hand, the variable display of the production pattern 16a may become invisible from the screen as the production progresses. The variable display of the special pattern corresponds to the variable display of the performance pattern 16a, and since it continues to be displayed in a visible state regardless of the progress of the performance, it also has a role of the variable display of the performance pattern.

In addition, the display of the reserved numbers in the first and second reserved number display areas 16e and 16f is always visible without disappearing from the screen or being blocked by the production operation of the movable production member 17, like the special symbols. displayed when possible.

The first pending icon display area 16b is divided into a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section from the side closer to the variable icon display area 16d. - The fourth display unit displays the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first special figure reserved number (U1).

The second reserved icon display area 16c is divided into a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section from the side closer to the variable icon display area 16d. ~ In the fourth display portion, the number of second pending icons corresponding to the number of second special figure pending (U2) is displayed.

The second image display device 18 can be operated in a predetermined direction by being driven by the board driving device 17 . Specifically, between the standby position (first position) located near the upper end of the first image display device 16 and the rendering position (second position) located near the center of the first image display device 16 Movement production is performed by moving in the vertical direction (rising, descending). For example, a movement effect is performed by operating the effect button 6a. Note that the movement direction of the second image display device 18 may be the left-right direction and the front-rear direction.

Outside the game area 4a and outside the guide rail 8 outside the game board 4, a first game information display device 19 for displaying game information relating to the progress of the game is provided at the lower left portion.
As shown in FIG. 3A, the first game information display device 19 has a plurality of LEDs (light emitting units) arranged in four inclined rows along the outer guide rail 8 and the left end and the lower end of the game board 4. have. These multiple (32 pieces) LEDs (light emitting units) are the first special symbol first indicator 19a, the second special symbol first indicator 19b, the normal symbol first indicator 19c, the first special symbol reserve first display Device 19d, second special symbol reservation first display 19e, normal symbol reservation first display 19f, high probability game state display 19g, time saving game state display 19h, round number display 19i, right hand first display 19j constitutes a status confirmation display 19k.
As shown in FIG. 4, the first game information display device 19 is controlled by the main control board 110 .

The first special symbol first display device 19a is composed of six LEDs (light-emitting parts), and the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol is performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 10. Then, the first special symbol first indicator 19a performs a variable display of the first special symbol in which six LEDs (light emitting units) flash at predetermined intervals or in an order, and after a predetermined period of time has passed, the result of the jackpot lottery is displayed. The stop display of the first special symbol in which the LED (light-emitting part) lights up in combination (big win mode, losing mode) is performed, and the result of the big win lottery of the first special symbol is notified. In addition, in the case of winning a jackpot, it is possible to determine the type of jackpot, which will be described later, by a combined lighting display of six LEDs.

The second special symbol first display 19b is composed of six LEDs (light-emitting parts), and the second special symbol jackpot lottery is performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 11a. When the second special symbol first display 19b, six LEDs (light-emitting parts) blink at predetermined intervals or in order to perform a variable display of the second special symbol. The result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol is notified by stop display of the second special symbol in which the LED (light emitting part) lights up in a combination (big win mode, losing mode). In addition, in the case of winning a jackpot, it is possible to determine the type of jackpot, which will be described later, by a combined lighting display of six LEDs.

In addition, in this embodiment, "big win" means a state in which it is decided to execute a big winning game in the big winning lottery of the first special symbol or the big winning lottery of the second special symbol. The "jackpot game" means an opening game, a round game in which the big winning port 13a is changed from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner, and the end of a predetermined number of round games (for example, 4 times, 16 times, etc.). It means performing an ending game that indicates the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 13a in each round game are predetermined, even before the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time are reached, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the big winning opening 13a. When (for example, 9) are won, one round game ends. In addition, in this embodiment, any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games having different degrees of advantage for the player can be generated.

The normal symbol first display 19c is composed of three LEDs (light emitting units), and when a normal symbol winning lottery is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the gate 12, the normal symbol first display 19c is performed. , three LEDs (light-emitting units) blink at a predetermined interval or in a certain order to perform a variable display of normal patterns, and after a predetermined time has passed, the LEDs light up in a combination (hitting mode, losing mode) that indicates the result of the winning lottery. The normal symbols are stopped and displayed, and the result of the winning lottery for the normal symbols is reported. In addition, in the case of winning, it is possible to determine the type of winning, which will be described later, by the combined lighting display of the three LEDs.

The first special symbol reservation first display 19d is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units), and is the number of first special symbol reservations stored when the game ball wins the first start port 10. It is for displaying the number of special figure reservations, and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of the first special figure reservations. In addition, the first special figure reservation is stored up to four, but it may be less than four.

The second special symbol reservation first display 19e is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units), and is the number of second special symbol reservations stored when the game ball wins the second start port 11a. It is for displaying the number of special figure reservations, and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second special figure reservations. In addition, although the second special figure reservation is stored up to four, it may be less than four.

The normal design reservation first display 19f is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units), and is for displaying the normal design reservation number, which is the number of normal design reservations stored when the game ball passes through the gate 12. It lights up or blinks in a manner that indicates the number of normal map reservations. It should be noted that, although the general pattern reservation is stored up to four at maximum, it may be less than four.

1st special symbol reservation number, 2nd special symbol reservation number and general pattern reservation number, 1st special symbol reservation 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol reservation 1st display 19e, normal symbol reservation 1st display 19f Both of the two LEDs (light emitting units) are turned off and the number of reservations is "0", only one LED (light emitting unit) is lit and the number of reservations is "1", etc. Only one LED (light emitting unit) is lit and the number of reservations is "2", both LEDs (light emitting units) are lit and the number of reservations is "3", both LEDs (light emitting units) ) flashes to notify that the number of pending is "4".

The high-probability gaming state display 19g is composed of one LED (light-emitting part), and is for indicating that the high-probability gaming state is in the high-probability gaming state, which will be described later. The LED (light emitting part) starts to light up, continues to light up during the high probability game state, and turns off when the high probability game state ends.

The time saving game state display 19h is composed of one LED (light emitting part), and is for displaying that it is in the time saving game state at the time of the time saving game state (high probability time saving game state or low probability game state). When the time-saving game state is entered, the LED (light-emitting part) starts lighting, continues to light up during the time-saving game state, and turns off when the time-saving game state ends.

When the high probability time-saving gaming state, the LEDs (light emitting units) of both the high probability gaming state indicator 19a and the time-saving gaming state indicator 19h light up. When the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the LED (light-emitting portion) of the time-saving gaming state indicator 19h lights up. At the time of the low probability non-time saving gaming state, the LED (light emitting part) of the high probability gaming state indicator 10a and the time saving gaming state indicator 19h does not light up.

The round number display 19i is composed of seven LEDs (light emitting parts) and is for displaying the number of rounds when a big win state (special game state) occurs, and the number of rounds is displayed in a predetermined manner at the start of the big win game. The lighting of the LED (light-emitting portion) is started at , and the lighting of the LED (light-emitting portion) continues during the jackpot game, and the LED (light-emitting portion) is turned off when the jackpot game ends. For example, if the jackpot game has 16 rounds, the 4th to 6th LEDs (light emitting units) from the top light up, and if the jackpot game has 4 rounds, the 1st and 3rd LEDs from the top. The 1st and 6th LEDs (light emitting units) are lit. That is, the number of rounds is displayed by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of each of seven LEDs (light emitting units) predetermined for each number of rounds.

The right-handed first display 19j is composed of one LED (light-emitting part), and is used to indicate whether or not the so-called "right-handed" of shooting a game ball into the right game area 4a2 is recommended. When the game state is "time-saving game state", or when a jackpot game (special game) is being played, that is, when "right-handed" is recommended, the LED lights up. However, when right-handed hitting is not recommended (that is, so-called "left-handed hitting" is recommended), the LED is extinguished.

In addition, the right-handed first display 19j starts lighting the LED (light emitting unit) at the start of the opening effect in the jackpot game regardless of the type of jackpot (probability variable jackpot, normal jackpot), and during the jackpot game LED ( light-emitting part) continues lighting, and when the high-probability time-saving game state or low-probability time-saving game state that shifts after the end of the jackpot game ends, the LED (light-emitting part) is turned off. In addition, when winning the jackpot lottery during the high-probability time-saving game state or the low-probability time-saving game state, the lighting of the LED (light emitting part) is continued. In addition, if it does not shift to the high probability time-saving game state or the low probability time-saving game state after the jackpot game, the LED (light emitting unit) is turned off after the end of the jackpot game. That is, once the lighting of the LED (light-emitting portion) of the right-handed first display 19j is started, the lighting of the LED (light-emitting portion) continues until the game state in which the right-handed player should hit is completed. .

The status confirmation display 19k is composed of one LED (light emitting unit) and is for indicating that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode is set, which will be described later. When the transition is made, the LED starts lighting, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is turned off. Thus, since the state confirmation display 19k indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front (surface) of the game machine 1, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. It is possible to easily check whether or not Incidentally, the installation position of the status confirmation display 19k may be the front (surface) of the game machine 1, and may be installed in other places.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the same display mode (lighting display) is displayed regardless of whether the mode is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. may be recognizably displayed. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the state confirmation display 19k may be illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the state confirmation display 19k may be blinked. and vice versa.

Also, in this embodiment, the state confirmation display 19k is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol first display 19a, the second special symbol first display 19b, the first special symbol reservation first display 19d, the second special symbol reservation first Since the indicator 19e, the normal symbol reservation first indicator 19f, the status indicators 19g, 19h, the round number indicator 19i, etc. are turned off, even if one or more LEDs of these indicators are turned on. good.

As shown in FIG. 1, outside the game area 4a and outside the guide rail 8 on the outside of the game board 4, below the first game information display device 19 in the lower left corner, game information related to the progress of the game is displayed. A second game information display device 20 for displaying is provided.

As shown in FIG. 3B, the second game information display device 20 has a plurality of (10) LEDs (light emitting units) arranged in a triangular shape. These multiple LEDs (light emitting units) are the first special symbol second indicator 20a, the second special symbol second indicator 20b, the normal symbol second indicator 20c, the first special symbol reservation second indicator 20d, the second 2 special symbol reservation second display 20e, normal symbol reservation second display 20f, right hitting second display 20g.
As shown in FIG. 4 , the second game information display device 20 is controlled by the effect control board 130 .

The first special symbol second display device 20a is composed of one LED (light emitting part), and the LED (light emitting part) blinks with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol first display device 19a. is started, and blinking of the LED (light emitting part) is continued during the variable display of the first special symbol. Then, the LED is lit or extinguished along with the stopping of the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol first indicator 19a to notify the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol.
When the first special pattern jackpot lottery is won, the LED (light emitting part) lights up, and the lighting of the LED (light emitting part) continues until the next variable display is started after the jackpot game ends.
When the first special symbol jackpot lottery is lost, the LED (light emitting part) is turned off, and the LED (light emitting part) is kept turned off until the next variable display is started.

The second special symbol second display device 20b is composed of one LED (light emitting part), and the LED (light emitting part) blinks with the start of the second special symbol fluctuation on the second special symbol first display device 19b. , and continues blinking of the LED (light-emitting part) during the variable display of the second special symbol. Then, the LED is lit or extinguished along with the stopping of the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol first display 19b to notify the result of the big hit lottery of the second special symbol.
When the second special pattern jackpot lottery is won, the LED (light emitting part) lights up, and the lighting of the LED (light emitting part) continues until the next variable display is started after the jackpot game ends.
When the winning lottery for the second special symbol is defeated, the LED (light emitting part) is extinguished, and the extinguishing of the LED (light emitting part) continues until the next variable display is started.

In addition, the display of the first special symbol second display 20a or the second special symbol second display 20b is the first effect symbol 16a displayed in the left area of the screen of the first image display device 16, and the central area Since it is the fourth design following the second design 16a to be displayed and the third design 16a to be displayed in the right area, it may be referred to as the fourth design.
In addition, the variation start timing and variation stop timing of the first and second special symbol second displays 20a and 20b are synchronized with the variation start timing and variation stop timing of the effect symbol 16a displayed on the first image display device 16. ing.

The production control board 130 receives the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the fluctuation display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern first display 19a is started, and the production control board. Display control data is created based on the fact that the special symbol variation display data is set in the effect control unit 130m of 130, the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20, the first The effect control board 130 receives the first special symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variable display on the special symbol second display 20a is started and the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped. , based on the fact that the special symbol stop display data is set, the display control data is created, the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20, the first special symbol second display The movement of the device 20a stops.
In addition, the display mode of the second special symbol second display 20b is also the same as the above-described display mode of the first special symbol second display 20a.

In addition, according to the special symbol variation pattern designation command, the mode (lighting or extinguishing) of the special symbol first display device 19a, 19b when the special symbol is stopped is determined, and the effect control is performed according to the end of the variation display of the special symbol. You may make it stop by the display mode of the production|presentation design predetermined by the board|substrate 130 (130m of production|presentation control parts).

The normal symbol second display device 20c is composed of one LED (light emitting part), and starts blinking of the LED (light emitting part) with the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol first display device 19c, and the normal symbol. During the variable display of , the LED (light-emitting part) continues blinking. Then, the LED is lit or extinguished along with the stoppage of fluctuation in the normal symbol first display 19c, and the result of the winning lottery for the normal symbol is notified.
When winning a winning lottery for normal symbols, an LED (light-emitting part) lights up, and the LED (light-emitting part) continues to light until the next variable display is started after the winning game is finished.
When the lottery for the normal symbol is lost, the LED (light emitting part) is extinguished, and the LED (light emitting part) continues to be extinguished until the next variable display is started.

A production control board 130 receives a general pattern fluctuation pattern specifying command transmitted from a main control board 110 when the normal pattern first display device 19c starts to display a normal pattern, and the production control board 130 controls production. The display control data is created based on the fact that the normal symbol fluctuation display data is set in the part 130m, and the created display control data is normally output to the second symbol display device 20c, so that the second normal symbol display device 20c is started, and when the variable display of normal symbols is stopped, the production control board 130 receives the normal design determination command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the production control section 130m of the production control board 130 The display control data is created based on the setting of the normal symbol stop display data, and the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20, so that the normal symbol second display device 20c fluctuates. stops.

The first special symbol reservation second display device 20d is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units) in the same manner as the first special symbol reservation first display device 19d described above, and the game ball enters the first start port 10. It is for displaying the first special figure reservation number, which is the number of the first special figure reservation stored when the ball), and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of the first special figure reservation. In addition, the first special figure reservation is stored up to four, but it may be less than four.

Regarding the first special figure reservation number, both of the two LEDs (light emitting units) are turned off and the number of reservations is "0", only one LED (light emitting unit) is lit and the number of reservations is "1" that only the other LED (light emitting unit) is lit and the number of reservations is "2"; that both LEDs (light emitting units) are lit and the number of reservations is "3"; Both LEDs (light emitting units) flash to indicate a pending number of "4".

The effect control board 130 receives a special symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the number of first special symbol reservations increases or decreases, and the effect control part 130m of the effect control board 130 receives the first special symbol reservation display data. is set, the display control data is created, and the created display control data is output to the second gaming state display device 20, so that the display of the first special symbol holding second display 20d (lighting , flashing or extinguishing) is performed.

The display (lighting, blinking) timing and erasing (extinguishing) timing of the first special symbol reservation second display device 20d are synchronized with the display timing and erasure timing of the first reservation icon displayed on the first image display device 16. , is synchronized with the numerical change timing of the first pending number display area 16e.

The second special symbol reservation second display 20e is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units) in the same manner as the above-described second special symbol reservation first display 19e, and the game ball wins (wins) in the second start port 11a. It is for displaying the second special figure reservation number, which is the number of the second special figure reservation stored when the ball), and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of the second special figure reservation. In addition, although the second special figure reservation is stored up to four, it may be less than four.

Regarding the second special figure reservation number, both of the two LEDs (light emitting units) are turned off and the number of reservations is "0", only one LED (light emitting unit) is lit and the number of reservations is "1" that only the other LED (light emitting unit) is lit and the number of reservations is "2"; that both LEDs (light emitting units) are lit and the number of reservations is "3"; Both LEDs (light emitting units) flash to indicate a pending number of "4".

The performance control board 130 receives the special symbol storage specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the second special symbol reservation number increases or decreases, and the second special symbol reservation display data is set in the performance control section 130m. Based on the display control data is created, the created display control data is output to the second gaming state display device 20, display of the second special symbol holding second display 20e (lighting, blinking or extinguishing) is done.

The display (lighting, blinking) timing and erasing (extinguishing) timing of the second special symbol reservation second display 20e are synchronized with the display timing and erasing timing of the second reservation icon displayed on the first image display device 16. , is synchronized with the numerical value change timing of the second pending number display area 16f.

The normal symbol reservation second display 20f is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units) in the same manner as the above-described normal symbol reservation first display 19f, and is stored when the game ball passes through the gate 12. It is intended to display the number of normal pattern reservations, which is the number of, and lights or blinks in a manner that indicates the number of normal pattern reservations. It should be noted that, although the general pattern reservation is stored up to four at maximum, it may be less than four.

The production control board 130 receives the normal pattern storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the normal pattern reservation number increases or decreases, and the display is based on the setting of the normal pattern reservation display data in the production control unit 130m. Control data is created and the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20, so that the display (lighting, blinking or extinguishing) of the normal symbol reservation second display 20f is performed.

Regarding the normal figure holding number, both of the two LEDs (light emitting part) are turned off and the holding number is "0", only one LED (light emitting part) is lit and the holding number is "1" that only the other LED (light emitting unit) is lit and the number of reservations is "2", that both LEDs (light emitting units) are lit and the number of reservations is "3", and both The LED (light-emitting part) flashes to indicate that the number of reservations is "4".

The right-handed second display 20g is composed of one LED (light emitting part), and when the game state becomes "high probability short working hours gaming state" or "low probability short working hours gaming state", the second start port 11a in the right game area 4a2 Due to the board structure provided with the "right-handed" aiming to win the game ball to the second start port 11a is recommended, so the LED starts lighting, high probability time saving game state or low probability time saving The lighting of the LED continues until the game state ends, and on the other hand, when the game state is the "low probability non-time-saving game state", the board surface structure provided with the first start port 10 in the left side game area 4a1 Since "left-handed hitting" for the purpose of winning the game ball to the 1 start hole 10 is recommended, the LED does not light up.

Specifically, the production control board 130 receives the game state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when controlling the game in the low probability time-saving game state or the high probability time-saving game state, and hits right with the production control unit 130m A display control command is created based on the display data being set, and the created display control command is output to the second gaming state display device 20, thereby starting the display of the right-handed second display device 20g. When the game state is changed, the production control board 130 receives the game state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the game state is not the low probability time saving game state or the high probability time saving game state in the production control unit 130m. When it is determined, the right-handed erase data is set, the display control data is created, and the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20, so that the right-handed second display 20g is displayed. exit.

When the right-handed second display device 20g enters the "jackpot gaming state", the right-handed second display 20g has a board structure in which the large winning opening 13a is provided in the right side game area 4a2. ' is recommended, the LED is turned on, and the LED is kept turned on until the jackpot game state ends.

Specifically, when the jackpot game (opening) is started, the effect control board 130 receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the right-handed display data is set in the effect control unit 130m. When a display control command is created based on the display control command, and the created display control command is output to the second game state display device 20, the display of the right-handed second display device 20g is started and the game state is changed. The game state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received by the production control board 130, and the game state is determined not to be a low-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability game state, or a jackpot game state by the production control unit 130m. , right-handed erasure data is set, display control data is created, and the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20, thereby ending the display of the right-handed second display 20g.

Here, in the vicinity (upper side) of the right-handed second indicator 20g, there is a notation of "right-handed", and when the LED (light emitting part) of the right-handed second indicator 20g is lit, "right-handed" is recommended. It is clearly shown that the Therefore, the display of hitting to the right is easier for the player to visually recognize than the first display 19j of hitting to the right of the first game information display device 19 in which nothing is displayed.

The second game information display device 20 may be provided closer to the first image display device 16 than the first game information display device 19 is. In this case, the second game information display device 20 is at a prominent position for the player, so the second game information display device 20 is easier to visually recognize than the first game information display device 19 .

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described. FIG. 4 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The control configuration of this embodiment includes a main control board 110 that controls overall progress of the game (basic action), and a payout control that controls the payout of game balls based on receipt of a payout control command from the main control board 110. Board 120, production control board 130 for controlling game-related production based on reception of production control commands from main control board 110, main control board 110, payout control board 120 and power supply board for supplying power to production control board 130 160 is provided.

Communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured so that commands can be sent and received in both directions, and communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is controlled by the main control board 110. It is configured to be able to transmit commands only in one direction to the board 130 .

The main control unit 110A of the main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs and the like, a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.

The input/output ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning opening detecting switch 14a, a gate detecting switch 12a, a first starting opening detecting switch 10a, a second starting opening detecting switch 11c, a second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, and a big winning opening. Detection switch 13c, big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d, magnetic detection sensor 58a, radio wave detection sensor 58b, RAM clear switch 58c, setting key switch 58d, out ball detection switch 58e, first special symbol first display 19a, second special Design first display 19b, normal design first display 19c, first special design reservation first display 19d, second special design reservation first display 19e, normal design reservation first display 19f, high probability game state Indicator 19g, time-saving game state indicator 19h, round number indicator 19i, right-handed first indicator 19j, state confirmation indicator 19k, game information output terminal board 90, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 are connected. ing.

The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a game control program stored in the main RAM 110b, and uses the main RAM 110c as a work area to perform game-related arithmetic processing. Thereby, control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.) and various output devices (solenoids, various displays 19a to 19k of the first game information display device 19, etc.) are controlled. , control processing for transmitting and receiving various control commands, and control processing for transmitting game information to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (such as a hall computer) via the game information output terminal board 90 .

An information display device 113 (performance display monitor) connected to the main control board 110 has a plurality of (for example, four) 7-segment displays for displaying performance information and set values that enable the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 to be grasped. consists of instruments. The two 7-segment displays constitute an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information, and the remaining two 7-segment displays indicate setting values and numerical values of the performance information. A numeric segment is configured to display numeric information.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launcher 26 to control the launch of game balls.
The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program and the like, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The input/output ports of the payout control unit 121 include an open detection switch 31a of the open/close door 3, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 100, and a game ball from the payout device 100. A payout motor 100b for putting out balls and a ball detection switch 101a for detecting that game balls are stored in the game ball storage unit 101 are connected.

The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and uses the payout RAM 121c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing regarding the payout of game balls. Thereby, control processing for paying out game balls from the payout device 100 according to the payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing for transmitting the command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, etc. conduct.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input/output port, and the like. The input/output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the ball feeding solenoid 43, the touch sensor 7a, the firing volume 7b, the firing solenoid 26a, and the like.

When the shooting control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 7 by means of a touch signal input from the touch sensor 7a, it allows the energization of the ball feed solenoid 43 and the shooting solenoid 26a to launch the ball. When a change in the rotation angle of the firing handle 7 is detected by the detection signal from the volume 7b, the ball feed solenoid 43 is driven, and the firing solenoid is adjusted so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 7. 26a is driven to shoot game balls (99.9 balls/minute).

The production control board 130 is based on the reception of the production control command from the production control unit 130m and the production control unit 130m, which comprehensively controls the progress of production based on the reception of the production control command from the main control board 110. Image control unit 140 that performs voice output control processing, various light emitting members (such as LEDs) and various drive sources (solenoids, motors, etc.) based on the reception of performance control commands from the performance control unit 130m Lamp control that performs control processing A portion 150 is provided.

The performance control unit 130m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores a performance control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.
The input/output ports of the production control unit 130m include production button detection switch 6b, cross key detection switch 6g, production lever detection switch 6i, first special symbol second display 20a, second special symbol second display 20b, normal A symbol second display 20c, a first special symbol reservation second display 20d, a second special symbol second display 20e, a normal symbol reservation second display 20f, and a right-handed second display 20g are connected.

The sub CPU 130a of the effect control unit 130m receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding the effect while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area. Thereby, control processing for determining the effect mode of the variable effect, control processing for transmitting the effect control command based on the determination result to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, various input devices (detection switch etc.) and control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting device, motor, various displays 20a to 20g of the second game information display device 20, etc.).

(Configuration of image control unit)
Here, the configuration of the image control unit 140 will be described using FIG.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the image control section 140. As shown in FIG.
The image control unit 140 performs image display control of the image display devices 16 and 18 and audio control of the audio output device 9, so that it includes an overall CPU 141, an overall RAM 142, an overall ROM 143, a CGROM 144, a crystal oscillator 145, a VRAM 146, a VDP (Video Display Processor). ) 200 (drawing control unit). The VDP 200 includes an audio control circuit 300 having an audio control unit (audio LSI) and an audio ROM for controlling audio output in the gaming machine 1 .

The overall CPU 141 instructs the VDP 200 to display the image data stored in the CGROM 144 on the image display devices 16 and 18 based on the later-described effect pattern designation command received from the effect control unit 130m. Such an instruction is performed by setting data in the control register 201 of the VDP 200 and outputting a display list composed of drawing control commands.
Also, upon receiving a V-blank interrupt signal or a drawing end signal from the VDP 200, the general CPU 141 appropriately performs interrupt processing.

The supervising CPU 141 also instructs the audio control circuit 300 included in the VDP 200 to output music and sounds based on predetermined audio data to the audio output device 9 based on the effect pattern designation command received from the effect control unit 130m. .
The general RAM 142 is built in the general CPU 141 , functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the general CPU 141 , and temporarily stores data read from the general ROM 143 .

The supervising ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM, and is used for generating a program for control processing of the supervising CPU 141, pattern arrangement information in which the pattern number of the effect pattern 16a and the type of the effect pattern 16a are associated, and a display list. A display list generation program, animation pattern information for displaying animation of effect patterns, animation scene information, and the like are stored.

The animation pattern is referred to when the animation of the production pattern is displayed, and stores the combination of animation scene information included in the production pattern, the display order of each animation scene information, and the like. In addition, animation scene information stores information such as wait frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, etc. are doing.

The CGROM 144 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and stores compressed image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in an image of a predetermined range (eg, 32×32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information that designates a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. Further, the CGROM 144 stores uncompressed palette data in which color number information specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other. It should be noted that the CGROM 144 may be configured to compress only a portion of the image data without compressing all of the image data. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used. The CGROM 144 also stores a large amount of audio data.

The crystal oscillator 145 outputs a pulse signal to the clock generation circuit 205 of the VDP 200, and divides the pulse signal to generate a system clock for the VDP 200 to control the clock generation circuit 205, and the image display devices 16 and 18. A synchronizing signal or the like for synchronizing with is generated.

The VRAM 146 is composed of an SRAM capable of writing or reading image data at high speed. The VRAM 146 also includes a display list storage area 146a for temporarily storing a display list output from the general CPU 141, a development storage area 146b for storing image data decompressed by the decompression circuit 206, and an image drawing or display area. It has a first frame buffer 146c and a second frame buffer 146d for. The VRAM 146 also stores palette data. The first and second frame buffers 146c and 146d are alternately switched between a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer" each time drawing is started.

The VDP 200 is a so-called image processor, and reads image data from either the first frame buffer 146c or the second frame buffer 146d (frame buffer for display) based on instructions from the general CPU 141, and based on the read image data. Then, a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated and output to the image display devices 16 and 18 . In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the VDP 200 is not only an image processor, but also has an audio output function.

The VDP 200 includes a control register 201, a CG bus I/F 202, a CPU I/F 203, a clock generation circuit 205, an expansion circuit 206, a drawing circuit 207, a display circuit 208, a memory controller 209, and an audio control circuit 300. and

The control register 201 is a register for the VDP 200 to control drawing and display, and writing and reading data to and from the control register 201 controls drawing and display. The supervising CPU 141 can write data to and read data from the control register 201 via the CPU I/F 203 .
The control register 201 includes a system control register for making basic settings necessary for the operation of the VDP 200, a data transfer register for making settings necessary for transferring data, and a drawing register for making settings for controlling drawing. A register, a bus interface register for making settings necessary for accessing the bus, an expansion register for making settings necessary for decompressing a compressed image, and a display register for making settings for controlling the display. It has a register.

A CG bus I/F 202 is an interface circuit for communication with the CGROM 144 , and image data from the CGROM 144 is input to the VDP 200 via the CG bus I/F 202 .
Also, the CPU I/F 203 is an interface circuit for communication with the general CPU 141 . The supervising CPU 141 inputs an interrupt signal.

A data transfer circuit 204 transfers data between various devices.
Specifically, data transfer between the general CPU 141 and the VRAM 146, data transfer between the CGROM 144 and the VRAM 146, and data transfer between various storage areas (including frame buffers) of the VRAM 146 are performed.
A clock generation circuit 205 receives a pulse signal from the crystal oscillator 145 and generates a system clock that determines the processing speed of the VDP 200 . It also generates a synchronous signal generation clock and outputs the synchronous signal to the image display devices 16 and 18 via the display circuit 208 .

The decompression circuit 206 is a circuit for decompressing the image data compressed in the CGROM 144, and stores the decompressed image data in the decompression storage area 146b.
The drawing circuit 207 is a circuit that performs sequence control using a display list composed of a group of drawing control commands.
The display circuit 208 generates an RGB signal (analog signal) indicating color data of an image as a video signal from the image data (digital signal) stored in the “frame buffer for display” in the VRAM 146, and displays the generated video signal ( RGB signals) to the image display devices 16 and 18. Furthermore, the display circuit 208 also outputs synchronization signals (vertical synchronization signal, horizontal synchronization signal, etc.) for synchronizing the image display devices 16 and 18 to the image display devices 16 and 18 .
In the present embodiment, RGB signals obtained by converting digital signals into analog signals are output to the image display devices 16 and 18 as video signals, but video signals may be output as digital signals.
The memory controller 209 performs control to switch between the “drawing frame buffer” and the “display frame buffer” when receiving an instruction to switch the frame buffer from the general CPU 141 .

The voice control circuit 300 reads out a predetermined program based on commands transmitted from the performance control board 130 and controls voice output in the voice output device 9 .
The audio control circuit 300 uses audio data stored in the CGROM 144 to output music and audio. In this case, the CGROM 144 is assumed to include a sound source ROM for storing audio data. Note that the audio control circuit 300 may not be included in the VDP 200 and may be provided independently within the image control section 140 .

As shown in FIG. 4, the lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, and an input/output port. .
Input/output ports of the lamp control base 150 are connected to the board driving device 17, the board lighting device 23, the frame lighting device 27, the button drive motor 6c, the button vibration motor 6d, and the button light emission LED 6e.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and uses the lamp RAM 150c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to lighting effects and character effects. As a result, the board driving device 17 (movable effect members 17A to 17C), the board lighting device 23, the frame lighting device 27, the button driving motor 6c, the button vibration motor 6d, the button light emission LED 6e, the lever vibration motor 6j, and the lever light emission. Control processing of the LED 6k is performed.

The lamp ROM 150b stores the lighting/blinking pattern data and emission color pattern data of the board illumination device 23 and the frame illumination device 27 according to the presentation content set by the presentation control unit 130m, and the operation patterns of the movable presentation members 17A to 17C. data, projecting operation pattern of the production button 6a, vibration operation pattern data of the production button 6a, vibration operation pattern data of the production lever 6h, and the like are stored.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the game machine 1 from the power supply voltage supplied from the power plug 161, and supplies the main power supply to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120). , effect control board 130, various electronic components). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred, and a power failure detection circuit 162 that outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of a power failure (power failure). A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 at the time of (power failure).

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal goes high, the main CPU 110a becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal goes low, the main CPU 110a stops operating.

The backup power supply circuit 163 has a capacitor that stores electricity when the game machine 1 is energized. supply. As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and payout RAM 121c are retained even at the time of power failure (power failure), and after recovery from power failure (power failure), the control state of the game is restored to the state before power failure (power failure). can be restored. A backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 .

(Description of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described.
The game state that can be taken as a gaming machine is a "low probability game state" or "high probability game state" as a state related to a special symbol jackpot lottery, and a "non-time-saving game" as a state related to the operation of the opening and closing member 11b of the second start port 11a. state” or “time-saving game state”. The states (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state) relating to the jackpot lottery and the states relating to the operation of the opening/closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a (non-time-saving gaming state, time-saving gaming state) are associated with each other. can also be independent. In other words,
(1) When it is a “low probability gaming state” and a “time saving gaming state”,
(2) When it is "low probability gaming state" and "non-time-saving gaming state",
(3) In the case of "high probability gaming state" and "time saving gaming state",
(4) In the case of "high probability gaming state" and "non-time-saving gaming state",
can be set.
In this embodiment, the game states (1) to (3) can be taken.
In addition, the game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "low-probability game state" and the "non-time-saving game state". will be referred to as "normal game state".

In the present embodiment, the "low probability gaming state" means that in the special symbol jackpot lottery performed on the condition that the game ball enters the first start port 10 or the second start port 11a, the jackpot winning probability is For example, it refers to a game state set as low as 1/299. On the other hand, the "high-probability gaming state" refers to a gaming state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is improved compared to the low-probability gaming state, and the probability of winning the jackpot is set as high as 1/59.8, for example. .
Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state", which is an advantageous gaming state for the player. It should be noted that the change from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is after the jackpot game is completed. In the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability gaming state is called "probability variable jackpot", and the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is called "normal jackpot".

In this embodiment, the "non-time-saving gaming state" means that in the normal design winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 12, the average fluctuation time of the normal design corresponding to the lottery result is " It is a game state that is set longer than the time-saving game state and in which the opening time of the second start port 11a when winning is likely to be set short. For example, when the game ball passes through the gate 12, a winning lottery for normal symbols is performed, and the normal symbols are variably displayed on the normal symbol first display device. Stop display after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second starting port 11a is controlled in an open mode for 0.2 seconds, for example, after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the “time-saving gaming state” means that in the winning lottery of normal symbols performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 12, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols corresponding to the lottery result is “non- It is a game state in which the opening time of the second starting port 11a is set to be longer than that of the time-saving game state and when a winning is won. Furthermore, in the "non-time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning the winning lottery of normal symbols is set as low as, for example, 1/128, and in the "time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning the winning lottery of normal symbols is low. For example, it is set as high as 127/128.
Therefore, in the "time-saving gaming state", when the game ball passes through the gate 12, the second starting port 11a is more likely to be controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time-saving gaming state". As a result, in the "time-saving game state", the game ball is likely to enter the second starting port 11a, so that the player can proceed with the game advantageously without consuming the game ball.

In addition, in the embodiment, the "time-saving gaming state" is more advantageous than the "non-time-saving gaming state" in terms of the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second start port 11a, and the winning probability of the winning lottery of the normal symbols. is set to However, the "time-saving gaming state" may be set so that only one of the variation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second starting port 11a, and the winning probability of the winning lottery of the normal symbols is advantageous. In addition, in the "non-time-saving gaming state", the winning probability in the winning lottery of normal symbols may be set to 0/128, for example.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 14. FIG.

(jackpot determination table)
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a big hit determination table for making a big hit determination based on the special figure determination information acquired by winning the game ball to the starting ports 10 and 11a. Specifically, FIG. 6 (1) is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol for performing a jackpot determination based on the special figure determination information acquired by winning the game ball to the first start port 10. , FIG. 6 (2) is a second special symbol jackpot determination table for performing a jackpot determination based on the special symbol determination information acquired by winning a game ball to the second start port 11a, FIG. In the tables of 1) and FIG. 6(2), the probability of being determined as a big win (probability of winning a big win) is the same.

As shown in FIGS. 6(1) and 6(2), the jackpot determination table includes a probability game state, a jackpot determination obtained when a game ball wins the first start port 10 or the second start port 11a. A jackpot determination value for determining a random number (special figure determination information) and a jackpot determination result are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 6(1) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. It is determined whether it is a ``big hit'' or a ``losing'' based on the random number value for judging a big hit.

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 6(1), when it is in the low probability gaming state, one jackpot determination random value of "3" is determined to be a "jackpot". . On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, 10 big-hit determination random numbers of "3", "7", . If it is a random value for judging a big hit other than the above, it is judged as "losing". Therefore, since the random number range for judging a big win is 0 to 299, the probability of being judged as a big win in the low probability game state is 1/300, and it is judged as a big win in the high probability game state. The odds are 10/300, up ten times.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the big hit determination result. Specifically, FIG. 7(1) is a special symbol determination table for big wins, which is referred to for determining the stop symbol of the special symbols at the time of a big win, and FIG. 7(2) is a table at the time of a loss. It is a special symbol determination table for losing which is referred to for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 7 (1), in the special symbol determination table for big hits, the type of the starting opening when the game ball wins in the starting opening, and the game ball in the first starting opening 10 or the second starting opening 11a The jackpot design judgment value (random number for special design judgment) for judging the random number for special design judgment for the jackpot acquired when the is entered, the judgment result (type of special design), and the special design ( Special figure stop design data) and the production design designation command which is transmitted to production control board 130 as the information which shows the kind of special design are matched.

As shown in FIG. 7 (2), the special symbol determination table for losing includes the type of starting opening when a game ball wins in the starting opening, and the game ball in the first starting opening 10 or the second starting opening 11a. Losing pattern judgment value ((random number for special design judgment), judgment result (type of special design), and special design (Special figure stop design data) is associated with the performance design specification command transmitted to the performance control board 130 as information indicating the type of special design. As shown, a plurality of losing special symbols and special symbol determination values may be associated with each other.

The specific first special symbol for losing shown in FIG. 7 (2) is shifted to a time-saving game state in which the game state is a state where the game ball is easy to win in the second start port 11a when the low-probability non-time-saving game state. It is a design that will be an opportunity to The specific first special symbol for losing has a lower probability of being selected than the first special symbol for losing, and is set to a probability of 1/150. In addition, even if the specific first special symbol is selected, the probability game state remains in the low probability game state and is not shifted to the high probability game state.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 7, and selects the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data) based on the type of the starting hole in which the game ball has won and the random number value for judging the jackpot symbol. to decide. Then, when the special symbols start to fluctuate, based on the determined special symbol type (special symbol stop symbol data), a performance symbol designation command as information indicating the type of special symbol is determined. Here, one command of the performance symbol designation command is composed of 2-byte data, 1-byte MODE data for identifying the classification of the control command, and 1-byte DATA indicating the content of the control command to be executed. data. This also applies to a variation pattern specification command and the like, which will be described later.

Here, as will be described later, the type of special symbol for the big win (stop symbol data) determines the type of the big win game and the game state after the end of the big win game. It can be said that it determines the game state after the jackpot game ends.

(jackpot game control table)
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a jackpot game control table for determining the progress of a jackpot game when it is determined as a jackpot determination result. In the jackpot game control table, the type of special pattern (special stop pattern data), the opening time of the jackpot game, the opening designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130 at the start of the opening, and the opening/closing mode of the big winning port 13a are determined. Big winning opening opening/closing control table information for playing the game, the ending time of the jackpot game, and the ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 130 at the start of the ending are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 8, and determines the opening time, the big winning opening opening/closing control table, and the ending time based on the special symbol stop symbol data. In addition, since the number of round games in the jackpot game is determined by determining the type of the big winning opening opening/closing control table, FIG. there is

(Grand Prize Opening/Closing Control Table)
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a big winning opening opening/closing control table referred to when a big win is determined as a big win determination result. In the big winning hole opening/closing control table, the maximum number of round games in the big winning game, the maximum number of winnings to the big winning hole 13a in one round game, the maximum number of opening times of the big winning hole 13a in each round game, and The opening time of the big winning opening 13a for one opening of the round game is associated with the closing interval time for closing the big winning opening 13a after the end of the round game.

The main CPU 110a specifies the type of the big winning opening opening/closing control table based on the special figure stop symbol data. Specifically, when the special figure stop symbol data is "01" or "04", the first big winning opening opening/closing control table (TBL. No. 01) is specified, and the first big winning opening opening/closing control table is selected. to execute the first jackpot game, and when the special figure stop symbol data is "02" or "05", the second big winning opening opening/closing control table (TBL. No. 02) is specified, The second big winning game is executed with reference to the second big winning opening opening/closing control table, and when the special figure stop symbol data is "03" or "06", the third big winning opening opening/closing control table (TBL.No. 03) is specified, and the third jackpot game is executed with reference to the third jackpot opening/closing control table.

According to the first big winning opening opening/closing control table (TBL. No. 01), the opening/closing member 13b is operated to open and close the big winning opening 13a a plurality of times (K=3) per round. (The big winning opening 13a repeats opening for 3.000 seconds and closing for 1.000 seconds) A jackpot game of 10 rounds (R) is executed.
However, when the specified number (9) of game balls enter the big winning opening 13a before reaching the maximum number of opening times (K), one round game ends. Then, when 10 rounds of games are completed, the first jackpot game is completed. Since the first jackpot game has more rounds than the second and third jackpot games, it is a jackpot game with a high degree of advantage.

According to the second big winning opening opening/closing control table (TBL. No. 02), four rounds (R) are performed by operating the opening/closing member 13b to open the big winning opening 13a for up to 29.5 seconds per round. A second jackpot game is executed.
However, if the specified number (nine) of game balls enter the big winning opening 13a before the opening time elapses, one round game ends. Then, when the game of four rounds ends, the second jackpot game ends.

According to the third big winning gate opening/closing control table (TBL.No.03), the opening/closing member 13b is operated to open and close the big winning gate 13 a plurality of times (K=3) per round. (The big winning opening 13a repeats opening for 3.000 seconds and closing for 1.0000 seconds) The third jackpot game of 4 rounds (R) is executed.

In the first jackpot game and the third jackpot game, since the opening/closing mode of the big prize opening 13a is the same, prize balls are acquired before the third closing time of the big prize opening 13a in the four rounds. For example, the first image display device 16 can execute a promotion effect suggesting whether or not the number of possible round games will increase.

Specifically, in the first jackpot game, after executing the promotion success effect to make it appear that the number of round games capable of acquiring prize balls has succeeded in the final phase of the promotion effect, 5 of the 5-round big winning opening 13a is executed. The jackpot game is advanced after the 6th round when the game is opened for the first time and the prize balls can be obtained. On the other hand, in the third jackpot game, the jackpot game is finished after execution of promotion failure performance to make it look as if the increase in the number of round games capable of acquiring prize balls has failed in the final phase of the promotion performance. By doing so, the player's expectation for the promotion effect is heightened.

(Game state setting data table)
FIG. 10(1) is a diagram showing a game state setting data table for setting a game state after the jackpot game ends. The game state setting data table contains special figure stop symbol data, winning state data indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot lottery, time-saving game flag indicating the time-saving game state, and executable in the time-saving game state. Shows the number of time-saving games (J) indicating the number of times of variable display of special symbols, a high-probability game flag indicating that it is in a high-probability game state, and the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the high-probability game state. It is associated with the number of high-probability games played (X).

Here, the "state data at the time of winning" is information indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. The game state is composed of a combination of a non-time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, a low-probability game state, and a high-probability game state.

The main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10(1), and based on the special symbol stop symbol data and winning state data, the time saving game flag, the number of time saving games (J), and the high probability A game flag and the number of high probability games (X) are determined.

When the high-probability game state is set, 50000 times may be set as the high-probability game number (X), but in the high-probability game state, the winning probability in the jackpot lottery is 10/300. Therefore, since the next big winning game is substantially confirmed, the first big winning game and the second big winning game are advantageous big winning games for the player who confirms the next big winning game.
In addition, when the low-probability time-saving game state (a time-saving game state) is set, 100 times are set as the number of time-saving games (J), but there is no upper limit. The state (a time-saving game state) continues to be set.

In FIG. 10 (2), when the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the specific first special pattern (specific losing pattern) for losing predetermined by the fluctuation display of the first special pattern has stopped without winning the jackpot. It is a figure which shows the game state setting data table for setting a later game state (c time saving game state).

The game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10 (2) includes special symbol stop symbol data, symbol stop game state data indicating the game state when the specific losing symbol is stopped, and time saving game state data indicating the time saving game state. A game flag, the number of time-saving games (J) indicating the number of variable displays of special symbols executable in the time-saving game state, a high-probability game flag indicating a high-probability game state, and executable in the high-probability game state It is associated with the number of times of high-probability games (X) indicating the number of times of variable display of special symbols.

Since the stop symbol data "20" is a specific first special symbol for losing, the time saving game flag is set by shifting the game state from the non-time saving game state to the time saving game state. However, since the probability game state remains in the low probability game state and is not shifted to the high probability game state, the high probability game flag is not set.
In addition, when the low-probability time-saving game state is set, 1200 times is set as the number of time-saving games (J), but there may be no upper limit.

In addition, after the transition from the non-time-saving gaming state to the time-saving gaming state triggered by the specific first special symbol, if the specific first special symbol (specific losing symbol) stops during the time-saving gaming state, a new time-saving gaming state Switch (the upper limit number of times being counted is reset and the upper limit number of times is newly set to 1200 times).

FIG. 10 (3) is a game state (b time-saving gaming state) when the number of fluctuations of special symbols for losing reaches a predetermined number of times without winning a jackpot when in a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state It is a diagram showing a game state setting data table for changing setting to .
As shown in FIG. 10 (3), the game state setting data table includes the number of symbol fluctuations, the game state data at the time of reaching the number of fluctuations indicating the game state when the predetermined number of symbol fluctuations is reached, and the time saving game A time-saving game flag indicating that it is in a state, a time-saving game count (J) indicating the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the time-saving game state, and a high-probability game flag indicating that it is a high-probability game state, It is associated with the number of high probability games (X) indicating the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the high probability game state.

The number of symbol fluctuations indicates the number of fluctuations of special symbols of loss for shifting to the time-saving game state in which the game state is a state where the game ball is likely to enter the second start port 11a when the low-probability non-time-saving game state. It is a thing.
Specifically, the variable display of the first special symbol that is lost in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state (or the variable display of the first special symbol that is lost and the variable display of the second special symbol that is lost) is continuously 750 times. When it is executed, the game state is shifted from the non-time-saving game state to the time-saving game state (b time-saving game state). However, the probability gaming state remains in the low probability gaming state and is not shifted to the high probability gaming state.
In addition, when the low-probability time-saving gaming state (b time-saving gaming state) is set, 1200 times is set as the time-saving game number (J), but there may be no upper limit.

It should be noted that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is designed to start counting from when the low probability non-time-saving gaming state after the jackpot game is executed (that is, when the low probability gaming state is reached). . Therefore, even if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is executed 750 times after shifting to the low probability time saving game state (b time saving game state), the count number will be 1500 times, so a new time saving game state (b time saving game state ), and the two time-saving gaming states do not overlap.

In addition, after the shift to the low-probability time-saving gaming state (b time-saving gaming state) triggered by the number of special symbol fluctuations reaching 750 times, if the specific first special symbol stops during the time-saving gaming state, a new (The upper limit number of times during counting is reset and the upper limit number of times is newly set to 1200 times).
In addition, even if the specific first special symbol stops during the time saving game state (c time saving game state), it may not be switched to a new time saving game state (c time saving game state).

As shown in FIGS. 10 (2) and (3), when the specific losing pattern is stopped without winning the jackpot in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, or the special pattern of losing without winning the jackpot When the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, it is shifted from the non-time-saving game state to the time-saving game state (b time-saving game state, c time-saving game state), and the game ball wins the second start port 11a It will be in a game state that is easy to play.

(Special figure variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 11 is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving gaming state for determining the variation pattern of the special symbols in the non-time-saving gaming state.
FIG. 12 is a special figure variation pattern determination table for the time saving gaming state for determining the special symbol variation pattern in the time saving gaming state.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the special symbol variation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting port) to be displayed in variation, the big hit determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), Random number for reach determination, 1st special figure reservation number (U1) or 2nd special figure reservation number (U2), random number for special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, special figure fluctuation pattern as a judgment result, special design The fluctuation time and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command indicating the special figure fluctuation pattern are associated.
Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol variation pattern" can specify the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. ) or the second special figure reservation number (U2), based on the random number for special figure variation pattern determination, to determine the special figure variation pattern, the special figure variation pattern designation command according to the special figure variation pattern production control board 130 It is designed to send to

In addition, as will be described later, the production control board 130 determines the content (production mode) of the variable production accompanied by the variable display of the production design 16a according to the variation pattern designation command (jackpot determination result, special design determination result, etc.). Since it is designed to do, the rightmost column of the special figure pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 describes the production contents that can be executed in the variable production as a reference.

As the production contents shown in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. It means that it fluctuates at high speed and stops without reaching.

In addition, "reach" means the possibility that a part of the combinations of the big win effect patterns 16a that inform the big win will be temporarily stopped, and the other effect patterns 16a will fluctuate, and a big win game will be executed. It means a variation mode that makes the player expect that there will be For example, when a combination of "777" symbols is set as a combination of the jackpot performance symbols 16a for informing that the jackpot is won, the same performance symbols 16a are temporarily stopped at "7" in the left and right regions. In other words, it refers to a mode in which the remaining production patterns 16a are fluctuating in the central area.

Incidentally, the term "temporary stop" means that the production pattern 16a shakes slightly or deforms slightly, making it appear to the player that the production pattern 16a is stopped (completely stopped). not).

In addition, "normal reach" means a reach performance in which the same performance pattern 16a is temporarily stopped in the left and right regions and the remaining one performance pattern 16a fluctuates in the central region, and the reach with the lowest degree of expectation for a big hit. It is a performance.

In addition, "SP reach" and "special SP reach" are super reach effects with higher expectations for big hits than normal reach effects, and the development effects are executed from the normal reach effects, and then executed. For example, the two production patterns 16a are reduced and moved to the corner of the first image display device 16, and a special ready-to-win production is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 16. . In addition, in the "special SP reach", a more special effect than in the "SP reach" is executed.

"SPSP ready-to-win" and "SPSP '7' ready-to-win" are special ready-to-win productions with higher expectations for big hits than super ready-to-win, and are executed after normal ready-to-win production or super ready-to-win production. For example, the development effect is executed from the normal reach effect, and then the three effect patterns 16a are reduced and moved to the corner of the first image display device 16, and almost the entire display area of the first image display device 16 is used. It is designed to perform a special reach production than "SP reach". In addition, in "SPSP ready-to-win", the ready-to-win effect is executed by the effect pattern 16a other than "7", and in "SPSP '7' ready-to-win", the ready-to-win effect is executed by the pattern of "7".

In addition, the "full rotation reach" is a reach at which the jackpot is determined, and is executed after the normal reach effect. For example, the development performance is executed from the normal reach performance, and then the three performance patterns 16a are changed at a low speed in a state where they are all the same, and almost the entire display area of the first image display device 16 is used to "SPSP reach". Or "SPSP '7' reach" special reach effect (big hit confirmed reach effect) is performed.

In addition, "special reach" is a reach in which any of the normal reach production that is more special than "normal reach", the SP reach production that is more special than "SP reach", and the SPSP reach production that is more special than "SPSP reach" is executed. It has become.

As the first feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, when the number of first special figure reservations increases to 2 or 3 in the non-time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is shortened. While the variation becomes easier to determine, even if the second special symbol reservation number increases to 2 or 3 during the non-time-saving gaming state, the point is that the shortening variation is not determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of the special symbol when hitting the left side rather than when hitting the right side in the non-time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

As a second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, even if the number of first special figure reservations increases to 1 to 3 during the time saving game state, as a variation pattern of the first special symbol While the (super) shortened variation is not determined, when the second special figure pending number increases to 1 to 3 during the time saving game state, the (long) shortened variation is easily determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. be done. By doing so, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of the special symbols when hitting to the right than when hitting to the left in the time saving game state, and to improve the interest of the game. Become.

As the third feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12,
If the game ball wins in the first start port 10 during the non-time-saving game state and the result is a loss, two special figure fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times depending on the number of reservations (variation time 4 seconds or 8 seconds (reach If none)) is determined, but if the game ball wins in the first start port 10 during the time saving game state and the result is a loss determination, regardless of the number of reservations, the same special figure fluctuation pattern (Variation time: 8 seconds) is determined. Therefore, it is possible to play an appropriate game according to the type of game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the fourth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the variation time is different when the game ball wins in the first start port 10 during the non-time-saving game state and the determination result is a big hit. Any one of a plurality of types of special figure variation patterns (variation time: 40 seconds, 70 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) is determined, but the game ball enters the first start port 10 during the time-saving game state and hits the jackpot. In the case of the determination result, any one of the special figure variation patterns with fewer types of variation time than the time of the non-time-saving gaming state is determined. Therefore, it is possible to play an appropriate game according to the type of game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. Either of the two special pattern fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times (variation time: 8 seconds and 40 seconds) is determined, and the special pattern fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time than the special pattern fluctuation pattern (special reach) with a longer fluctuation time (Normal Fluctuation) is more likely to be determined. Therefore, it is possible to play an appropriate game according to the type of game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Advance judgment table)
FIG. 13 (1) is a non-time-saving game for pre-determining (prefetching) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 10 or the second start port 11a during the non-time-saving game state It is a pre-determined table for states.
Figure 13 (2) is for the time saving state for pre-determining (prefetching) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 10 or the second start port 11a during the time saving game state It is a preliminary determination table.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the preliminary determination table, the type of special symbol (starting port), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value , Toku-zu scheduled variation pattern as a determination result, and the look-ahead designation command indicating the toku-zu scheduled variation pattern are associated.
Therefore, it can be said that the "special figure variation pattern" can specify the special symbol type, the judgment result of the jackpot determination, the special symbol type, and the special figure variation pattern to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 13, and based on the random number value for jackpot determination, the random number value for special symbol determination, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination, the special figure scheduled variation. The pattern is determined, and a look-ahead designation command (starting mouth prize designation command) corresponding to the special figure scheduled variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

In addition, in the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 13 (2), the preliminary determination (prefetching) is executed when the game ball wins the first start port 10 in the time saving game state, but it is not executed. can be

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a table relating to normal symbols and the opening/closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a.
FIG. 14(1) is a diagram showing a hit determination table for normal symbols. FIG. 14(2) is a normal symbol stop symbol determination table corresponding to the normal symbol winning lottery result. FIG. 14(3) is a diagram showing a normal pattern variation pattern determination table. FIG. 14(4) is a diagram showing an opening mode determination table for the second starting port.

(Hit determination table for normal symbols)
As shown in FIG. 14 (1), in the hit determination table, the presence or absence of the time-saving game state, the random number for hit determination obtained when the game ball passes through the gate 12, and the determination result of the hit lottery. are mapped.
The main CPU 110a refers to the win determination table, and determines whether it is a “win” or a “lose” based on the current time-saving gaming state and the acquired random value for win determination.

According to the hit determination table, when it is in the non-time-saving game state, it is determined that one hit determination random value of "19" is hit, and when it is in the time-saving game state, 19 numbers of "0" to "18". is determined to be a hit. Therefore, the ratio of the time-saving gaming state to be determined as winning is higher than the non-time-saving gaming state.

(Normal design decision table)
As shown in FIG. 14 (2), the stop symbol determination table includes the presence or absence of a time-saving gaming state, the random number for determining the winning symbol acquired when the game ball passes through the gate 12, and the normal symbol type ( stop design data) and normal design designation command transmitted to the production control board 130 as information indicating the type of normal design are associated.
The main CPU 110a refers to the stop symbol determination table, and based on the current game state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the acquired random number for the winning symbol, stops and displays the normal symbol on the first normal symbol display 19c. And determine the normal pattern stop design data. Then, at the time of starting the variation of the normal pattern, based on the type of the determined normal pattern (normal pattern stop pattern data), a normal pattern designation command as information indicating the type of the normal pattern is determined and transmitted to the performance control board 130. .

(Normal pattern variation pattern determination table)
As shown in FIG. 14 (3), the variation pattern determination table includes the presence or absence of the time-saving gaming state, the result of the hit determination (hit lottery), and the normal pattern variation obtained when the game ball passes through the gate 12. A random value for pattern determination, a normal pattern fluctuation time, and a normal pattern fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the normal pattern fluctuation time are associated with each other.
The main CPU 110a refers to the variation pattern determination table, and determines the normal symbol variation time based on the presence or absence of the time-saving gaming state, the winning lottery result, and the normal symbol variation pattern determination random number value. Then, at the time of starting the fluctuation of the normal pattern, based on the determined fluctuation time, a normal pattern fluctuation pattern designation command as information indicating the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is determined and transmitted to the performance control board 130. - 特許庁

(Open Mode Determination Table for Second Starting Port)
As shown in FIG. 14(4), the second starting port 11a opening mode determination table includes normal symbols (stopped pattern data), the maximum number of opening times (S) of the second starting port 11a (opening/closing member 11b), and , the first opening time and closing time of the second starting port 11a (opening and closing member 11b), the interval time between the first closing time and the second opening time, and the second opening time and closing time are mapped.
The main CPU 110a refers to the opening mode determination table, and based on the stop symbol data, determines the maximum number of times the second starting port 11a (opening/closing member 11b) is opened, the first opening time and closing time, the second opening time and closing time, and the second opening time and closing time. determine the time.

In the open mode determination table, the open mode based on the normal pattern stop symbol data = 02 (normal symbol 2) is more advantageous to the player than the open mode based on the normal pattern stop symbol data = 01 (normal symbol 1). It is, and the release mode based on the normal pattern stop symbol data = 03 (normal symbol 3) is more advantageous to the player than the release mode based on the normal pattern stop symbol data = 02 (normal symbol 2). there is
Since the normal pattern stop pattern data = 03 (normal pattern 3) most advantageous to the player when winning in the time saving game state is determined, it is more advantageous for the player in the time saving game state than in the non-time saving game state. The second starting port 11a (opening/closing member 11b) is operated as follows.

Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control board)
FIG. 15 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing by the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
A reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 generates a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 ms), thereby executing the timer interrupt processing described below.

First, in step S101, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area. Next, in step S102, the main CPU 110a updates the special symbol time counter, updates the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric accessory, updates the normal symbol time counter, and updates the general electric opening time counter. Time control processing for updating various timer counters such as update processing is performed. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process of subtracting "1" from the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter, the normal symbol time counter, and the general electric open time counter.

In step S103, the main CPU 110a generates a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for judging a special symbol, a random number for judging a special pattern variation pattern, a random number for judging a hit, a random number for judging a normal symbol, and a random number for judging a normal pattern fluctuation pattern. Random number update processing of numerical value is performed. Specifically, "1" is added to each random number counter to update the random number counter. When the added result exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is reset to "0", and when the random number counter completes one cycle, the random number is updated from the initial random number value at that time.

In step S104, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random number updating process for updating the initial random number for big hit determination, the initial random number for special symbol determination, the initial random number for hit determination, and the initial random number for normal symbol determination.

In step S105, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an input to each of the first start opening detection switch 10a, second start opening detection switch 11c, gate detection switch 12a, big winning opening detection switch 13c, and general winning opening detection switch 14a. Perform input control processing to determine whether or not. Details of the input control process will be described later.

In step S106, the main CPU 110a collects special symbol determination information (random number for judging a big hit, random number for special symbol determination, reach Judgment random number, random number for fluctuation pattern judgment), fluctuation display of the first special symbol or second special symbol, opening and closing of the big winning opening 13a, setting of the game state, etc. conduct. Details of the special figure special electric control processing will be described later.

In step S107, the main CPU 110a determines the general pattern determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 12, displays the variation of the normal pattern, opens and closes the second start port 11a (auxiliary game), and the like. The general map and general electric control processing is performed.

In step S108, the main CPU 110a refers to various winning ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, and performs payout control processing for transmitting to the payout control board 120 commands for specifying the number of payouts corresponding to various winning openings. I do. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes processing for paying out prize balls from the payout device 100 .

In step S109, the main CPU 110a performs abnormality determination processing for detecting whether or not a magnetic error or radio wave error has occurred based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 58a and the radio wave detection sensor 58b. When the occurrence of a magnetic error or radio wave error is detected, a magnetic abnormality error detection command or radio wave abnormality error detection command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .
In addition, the main CPU 110a detects the door open state based on the detection signal from the open detection switch 31a, and transmits a door open error detection command to the effect control board 130 when the door open state is detected.
In addition, the main CPU 110a detects a clogging of game balls in the path through which game balls are put out from the game ball storage portion based on the detection signal from the tray full detection switch 32a. is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

Also, when it is detected that the error state has been canceled by the states of the input signal and the detection signal, the main CPU 110 a transmits an error cancellation command to the effect control board 130 . Furthermore, from the effect control board 130, to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, a signal for notifying error detection and error cancellation is transmitted again.
The main CPU 110a does not transmit an error cancellation signal depending on the type of error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1. FIG. That is, an error cancellation signal is transmitted for the full tank, the door open state, and the jammed ball, but no error cancellation signal is transmitted for the detection of illegal radio waves.

In step S110, the main CPU 110a outputs external output data (game information) from the game information output terminal plate 90, drive control data to be output to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d, and the first special symbol. 1st display 19a, 2nd special design 1st display 19b, normal design 1st display 19c, 1st special design reservation 1st display 19d, 2nd special design reservation 1st display 19e, normal design reservation 1st 1 display 19f, high probability game state display 19g, time saving game state display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed first display 19j, state confirmation display 19k, etc. process.

In step S111, the main CPU 110a determines the number of payouts during the normal medium payout, which is the number of payouts of the prize balls based on the winning of the game balls to the various winning ports 10, 11a, and 14 during the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state It counts game performance information such as the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 58e in the middle, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 58e regardless of the game state. A game ball counting process is performed for this purpose. Note that the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are not affected by changes in the set values (unrelated to the set values), so they are not counted. By doing so, it is possible to calculate performance information that eliminates the influence of the set values, and it is possible to make use of this in understanding the performance of the game machine 1 .

In step S112, the main CPU 110a calculates a normal base value ((normal medium payout number/normal medium out number)×100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs, and sets it in the storage area of the main RAM 110c. A normal base value calculation process is performed to save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area of the base storage area. The game interval is updated each time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game interval, a third area for storing the normal base value in the game interval two times before, and a normal base value in the game interval three times before A fourth area is provided for doing so, and the normal base values of the four game sections including the current one are saved in each area.

In step S113, the main CPU 110a displays the normal base values for the four game sections calculated in step S112 and saved in the base storage area on the information display 113 while switching every five seconds. Performance display data setting processing for setting display data is performed.

In step S114, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing for outputting the signal of the external output data and the drive control data created in step S110 and the signal of the performance display data created in step S113. In addition, display device output processing for outputting a signal such as the display control data created in step S110 is performed. Furthermore, command output processing is performed to output the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c to another board.

In step S115, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S101 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

(input control processing)
FIG. 16 is a flowchart for explaining input control processing by the main control board 110. FIG.
First, in step S121, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the general winning opening detection switch 14a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening 14. When the detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 14a, the main CPU 110a updates the general winning hole counter used for winning balls by adding predetermined data.

In step S122, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the big winning opening detection switch 13c has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning opening 13a. When the detection signal is input from the big winning hole detection switch 13c, the main CPU 110a updates the big winning hole prize ball counter used for the prize balls by adding predetermined data, and the main CPU 110a wins the big winning hole 13a. The counter in the big winning hole entry ball counter (C) storage area for counting the game balls played is incremented and updated.

In step S123, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first start hole detection switch 10a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 10.

In step S124, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the second start hole detection switch 11c has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second start hole 11b.
When the main CPU 110a receives the detection signal from the second start opening detection switch 11c, the main CPU 110a performs the same processing as in step S123.
However, in this second starting opening detection switch input process, "1" is added to the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area, and the extracted random number value for judging the big hit, the random number value for judging the special symbol, and the reach judgment The random number value is stored in the second special symbol storage area. In other words, the first starting opening detection switch input process and the second starting opening detection switch input process differ only in the storage areas for storing various data, and all other processes are the same.

In step S125, the main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing for determining whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 12a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 12.
In step S126, the main CPU 110a performs winning confirmation detection switch input processing. In this winning confirmation detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from a winning confirmation detection switch (not shown) has been input, and the entry counter (D) is updated by subtracting "1" (D←D -1), and determine whether the value of the incoming ball counter (D) is within a predetermined judgment value range (lower limit value < D < upper limit value), and if it is outside the judgment value range, Assuming that an abnormal winning has occurred, an error designation command for abnormal winning is set in the transmission data storage area for performance. Also, if it is within the range of the judgment value, the winning confirmation detection switch input process is terminated. As a result, the error designation command for abnormal winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error designation command for abnormal winning performs abnormal winning error notification to indicate that an abnormal winning error has occurred. notify.

(First start opening detection switch input process)
FIG. 17 is a flow chart for explaining the first starting port detection switch input processing by the main control board 110 .
First, in step S131, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first starting port detection switch 10a. If the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 10a is input (step S131; Yes), the process proceeds to step S132, and if the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 10a is not input (step S131; No), the first starting port detection switch input processing is terminated.
In step S132, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding predetermined data to and updating the starter prize ball counter used for the prize balls.

Next, in step S133, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the reserved number set in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area is less than four. If the number of reservations set in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is less than 4 (step S133; Yes), the process is moved to step S134, and the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is stored in the storage area. If the set pending number is not less than 4 (step S133; No), the first starting port detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S134, the main CPU 110a adds and stores "1" in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area.
In step S135, the main CPU 110a acquires a random number value for judging a big hit, sequentially searches for empty storage units from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area, and acquires it in an empty storage unit. A random value for judging a big hit is stored.
In step S136, the main CPU 110a obtains a random number value for special symbol determination, sequentially searches for empty storage units from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area, The obtained random number for special symbols is stored.

In step S137, the main CPU 110a acquires the game random number value (random number value for reach determination and random number value for variation pattern determination), and the first memory portion in the first special symbol memory area and the first memory portion in order from the free memory portion. , and store the acquired game random numbers (random number for reach determination and random number for variation pattern determination) in an empty storage unit.
In step S138, the main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process. Referring to the preliminary determination table (not shown) corresponding to the current game state, based on the random numbers obtained in steps S135 to S137, the first start for indicating the determination information of the first start opening in advance Determine prize information.

In step S139, the main CPU 110a sets the first starting winning prize designation command based on the first starting winning prize information determined in the first preliminary determination process of step S138 in the effect transmission data storage area.

As a result, the first start winning prize information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start winning prize designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start winning prize designation command receives the first start winning prize designation command. Analyzing the winning designation command, and before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first starting winning designation command, a predetermined advance notice performance over one or more variable displays executed before that. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a continuous notice of executing the , or a pending change notice of changing the display mode of the pending icon.

However, the first preliminary determination process is determined according to the game state at the time when the game ball enters the first start hole 10 . Therefore, if the gaming state changes before processing the first suspension reserved by the ball entry, there is a possibility that the result of the jackpot determination process, which will be described later, and the result of the first preliminary determination process are different. .

In step S140, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area, and refers to the first special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1) updated in step S134. Set the symbol memory designation command in the performance transmission data storage area.

In step S141, the main CPU 110a sets the first special symbol reserved display data for displaying the first reserved number on the first special symbol reserved first display 19d (LED lighting or blinking) in a predetermined processing area. Then, the current first starting port detection switch input processing is terminated. As a result, when the first special symbol reserved display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111. The first reserved number is displayed on the symbol reserved first display 19d.

(Processing for inputting the second start opening detection switch)
FIG. 18 is a flow chart for explaining the second starting port detection switch input processing by the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
First, in step S151, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal is input from the second starting port detection switch 11c. If the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 11c is input (step S151; Yes), the process proceeds to step S152, and if the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 11c is not input (step S151; No), the second starting port detection switch input process is terminated.
In step S152, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding predetermined data to and updating the starter prize ball counter used for the prize balls.

Next, in step S153, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to a ball entry counter (D) that indicates the number of game balls that have entered the second start hole 11a and updates it (D←D+1).
In step S154, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is being played. If the auxiliary game is in progress (step S154; Yes), the process proceeds to step S159, and if the auxiliary game is not in progress (step S154; No), the process proceeds to step S155.

In step S155, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to an illegal ball entry counter (E) for monitoring illegal ball entry into the second starting port 11a and updates it (E←E+1).
In step S156, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the illegal ball entry counter is greater than a specified number (10). If the number is greater than the specified number (step S156; Yes), the process proceeds to step S157, and if the number is smaller than the specified number (step S156; No), the process proceeds to step S160.

In step S157, the main CPU 110a assumes that an illegal ball entry has occurred and sets an illegal ball entry error designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the illegal ball entry error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that receives the illegal ball ball error designation command notifies the illegal ball ball error and generates an illegal ball ball error. inform you that you have done so.

In step S158, the main CPU 110a clears the value of the illegal ball entry counter (E) to "0".
In step S159, the main CPU 110a updates the second starting hole entry ball counter (L) by adding "1" (L←L+1).

Next, in step S160, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of reserved symbols set in the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area is less than four. When the number of reservations set in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is less than 4 (step S160; Yes), the process is moved to step S154, and the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is stored in the storage area. If the set pending number is not less than 4 (step S160; No), the second start opening detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S161, the main CPU 110a adds and stores "1" in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area.
In step S162, the main CPU 110a obtains a random number value for judging a big hit, sequentially searches for empty storage units from the first storage unit in the second special symbol storage area, and obtains it in an empty storage unit. A random value for judging a big hit is stored.
In step S163, the main CPU 110a acquires a random number value for special symbol determination, sequentially searches for empty storage units from the first storage unit in the second special symbol storage area, The obtained random number for special symbols is stored.

In step S164, the main CPU 110a acquires the game random number value (random number value for reach determination and random number value for variation pattern determination), and selects the vacant storage units in order from the first storage unit in the second special symbol storage area. , and stores the acquired game random numbers (random number for reach determination and random number for variation pattern determination) in an empty storage unit.
In step S165, the main CPU 110a performs a second preliminary determination process. Referring to the preliminary determination table (FIG. 13) corresponding to the current gaming state, based on the random numbers obtained in steps S162 to S164, a second start for indicating the determination information of the second start opening in advance. Determine prize information.

In step S166, the main CPU 110a sets a second starting winning prize designation command based on the second starting winning prize information determined in the second preliminary determination process of step S165 in the effect transmission data storage area.

As a result, the second start winning prize information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the second start winning prize designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the second start winning prize designation command is the second start winning prize designation command. Predetermined advance notice performance over one or a plurality of variable displays executed before the start of variable display of special symbols corresponding to the second start winning designation command by analyzing the winning designation command. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a continuous notice of executing the , or a pending change notice of changing the display mode of the pending icon.

However, the second preliminary determination process is determined according to the game state at the time when the game ball enters the second start hole 11a. Therefore, if the gaming state is changed before processing the second suspension reserved by the ball entry, there is a possibility that the result of the jackpot determination process described later and the result of the second preliminary determination process will differ. .

In step S167, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area, and refers to the second special symbol corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number (U2) updated in step S161. Set the symbol memory designation command in the performance transmission data storage area.

In step S168, the main CPU 110a sets the second special symbol reserved display data for displaying the second reserved number on the second special symbol reserved first display 19e (LED lighting or blinking) in a predetermined processing area. Then, the current second start port detection switch input processing is terminated. As a result, when the second special symbol reserved display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the second special The second reserved number is displayed on the first symbol display 19e.

(Gate detection switch input processing)
FIG. 19 is a flow chart for explaining gate detection switch input processing by the main control board 110 .
First, in step S171, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 12a.

When determining that the detection signal from the gate detection switch 12a has been input (step S171; Yes), the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of normal symbol reservations (G) is less than 4 in step S172.
When the detection signal from the gate detection switch 12a is not input (step S171; No), the main CPU 110a terminates the gate detection switch input process.
In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the gate 12, the variable display of normal symbols is performed, and the upper limit reserved number of rights for the variable display of normal symbols is set to "4".

When it is determined in step S172 that the number of reserved normal symbols (G) is less than 4 (step S172; Yes), in step S173, the main CPU 110a selects the normal symbols stored in the reserved number of normal symbols (G) storage area. A value obtained by adding "1" to the reserved number (G) is stored as a new normal symbol reserved number (G). When it is determined in step S172 that the number of reserved symbols (G) is not less than 4 (step S172; No), the gate detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S174, the main CPU 110a acquires a random number value for hit determination, sequentially searches for free storage units from the first storage unit in the normal symbol holding storage area, and acquires it in the free storage units. Stores a random value for hit judgment.

In step S175, the main CPU 110a obtains a random number value for symbol determination, sequentially searches for vacant storage units from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and acquires the vacant storage units. A random number value for pattern determination is stored.

In step S176, the main CPU 110a acquires a random number value for normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, sequentially searches for an empty storage unit from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and searches for an empty storage unit. Stores the random number value for determining the normal pattern fluctuation pattern acquired in .
As described above, the random number for hit determination, the random number for symbol determination, and the random number for determination of the normal pattern variation pattern are stored in the predetermined storage section of the normal symbol reservation storage area.

In step S177, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the normal symbol reserved number (G) storage area, and produces a normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the normal symbol reserved number (G) updated in step S173. Set in the transmission data storage area for

In step S178, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol reservation display data for displaying the number of normal symbol reservations on the first normal symbol reservation display 19f (lighting or blinking of the LED) in a predetermined processing area, End the gate detection switch input process. As a result, when the normal symbol reserved display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the normal symbol first display The number of reserved general charts is displayed on the device 19f.

(Special special train control processing)
FIG. 20 is a flowchart for explaining the special figure special electric control processing by the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
First, in step S181, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric processing data. Next, the branch address is referred to from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S182.

In step S183, if the special symbol special electric processing data=0 (step S183; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to the special symbol storage determination process (step S184).
If the special figure special electric processing data is not 0 in step S183 (step S183; No), the main CPU 110a determines whether special figure special electric processing data=1 in step S185.
If the special figure special electric processing data=1 in step S185 (step S185; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to special symbol variation processing (step S186).

In step S185, the main CPU 110a determines whether the special figure special electric processing data=2 in step S187 when the special figure special electric processing data is not 1 (step S185; No).
In step S187, if the special symbol special electric processing data=2 (step S187; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to special symbol stop processing (step S188).
If the special figure special electric processing data is not 2 in step S187 (step S187; No), the main CPU 110a determines whether special figure special electric processing data=3 in step S189.

If the special figure special electric processing data=3 in step S189 (step S189; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to the jackpot game process (step S190).
If the special figure special electric processing data is not 3 in step S189 (step S189; No), the main CPU 110a determines whether special figure special electric processing data=4 in step S191.
If the special figure special electric processing data=4 in step S191 (step S191; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to the jackpot game end process (step S192).
If the special figure special electric processing data is not 4 in step S191 (step S191; No), the main CPU 110a ends the special figure special electric control process.

(Special symbol memory determination process)
FIG. 21 is a flow chart for explaining the special symbol storage determination process by the main control board 110. FIG.
First, in step S201, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed. Here, during the special symbol variable display, that is, if the special symbol time counter is not "0" (step S201; Yes), the special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the special symbol time counter is "0" (step S201 ; No), the process moves to step S202.

In step S202, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area is "1" or more, and determines that the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area is not "1" or more. If so (step S202; No), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S204, and if it determines that the second special symbol pending number (U2) storage area is "1" or more (step S202; Yes), step The process moves to S203. As a result, the second special symbol storage area is preferentially processed over the first special symbol storage area.

In step S203, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the value stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area and stores the result.
In step S204, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area is "1" or more. If it is determined that the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is not "1" or more (step S204; No), the process is moved to step S215, and the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is " 1” or more (step S204; Yes), the process proceeds to step S205.
In step S205, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the value stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area and stores the result.

In step S206, the main CPU 110a shifts the data stored in the special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the special symbol reservation number (U) storage area decremented in steps S202 to S205. Specifically, the data stored in the first to fourth storage units in the first special symbol storage area or the second special symbol storage area are shifted to the previous storage unit.

Here, the data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the determination storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the data stored in the first storage section is written in the judgment storage area (0th storage section), and the data that has already been written in the judgment storage area (0th storage section) is stored in the special symbol reserved storage. It will be erased from the area.

In step S207, the main CPU 110a, based on the data (random number value for judging a big hit, random number value for special symbol judgment) written in the judgment storage area (0th storage section) of the special symbol reservation storage area in step S206, Execute the jackpot determination process.

In step S208, the main CPU 110a sets the effect symbol specifying command corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol data determined in step S207 in the effect transmission data storage area.

In step S209, the main CPU 110a performs variation pattern determination processing.
In the variation pattern determination process, first, the game RAM area of the main RAM 110c is referenced to determine a variation pattern determination table based on the current game state. Specifically, if it is a non-time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 11 is determined, and if it is a time-saving gaming state, the variation for the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. Determine the pattern determination table. After that, with reference to the random number value for big hit determination, the random number value for special symbol determination, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for variation pattern determination, the variation pattern is determined based on the determined variation pattern determination table.

In step S210, the main CPU 110a sets a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the effect transmission data storage area.
In step S211, the game state at the start of fluctuation is confirmed, and a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state is set in the effect transmission data storage area.
In step S212, the main CPU 110a starts variable display of special symbols on the special symbol first display devices 19a and 19b. That is, the special symbol variation display data is set in the processing area. As a result, when the special symbol variation display data is set in the processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, thereby the first special symbol first display. Variation display of the device 19a or the second special symbol first display device 19b is started.

First, in step S213, when the main CPU 110a starts the variable display of the special symbols as described above, the special symbol time counter is set to a variable time (counter value) based on the variation pattern determined in step S208. set in the counter. Incidentally, the special symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S102.

In step S214, the main CPU 110a sets the customer waiting state determination flag to 00H. That is, the customer waiting state determination flag is cleared. It should be noted that the customer waiting state determination flag=“00H” indicates that the special symbols are currently being displayed in a variable manner or that the jackpot game is being played. On the other hand, when the special symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner and the jackpot game is not being played (non-game state), the customer waiting state determination flag=“01H” is stored. When the customer waiting state determination flag=“01H” is stored, a customer waiting state designation command is set in step S217 to be described later, and it is transmitted to the effect control board 130 that neither the variable display of special symbols nor the jackpot game is in progress. be done.

In step S215, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "1", and terminates the special symbol storage determination process.
In the above step S204, when the main CPU 110a determines that the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is "0", that is, the first special symbol reserved number (U1) and the second special symbol reserved number (U2) If none of the above is reserved, the main CPU 110a determines in step S215 whether or not the customer waiting state determination flag is set to 01H.

If 01H is set in the customer waiting state determination flag (step S216; Yes), the special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if 01H is not set in the customer waiting state determination flag (step S216; No), the process moves to step S217.
In step S217, the main CPU 110a sets the customer waiting state determination flag to 01H so that the customer waiting state designation command is not set repeatedly in step S218, which will be described later.
In step S218, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol storage determination process.

(Jackpot determination process)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart for explaining the big win determination process by the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
First, in step S<b>221 , the main CPU 110 a determines whether or not the big hit determination process is performed based on the game ball entering the first start hole 10 . When the main CPU 110a determines that it is the first start port (step S221; Yes), it moves the process to step S222, and when it determines that it is not the first start port (step S221; No), it moves the process to step 223. .

In step S222, the main CPU 110a selects a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol. On the other hand, in step S223, the main CPU 110a selects a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol.
In step S224, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the current probability game state and the special symbol storage area, and the selected jackpot determination table, ” or “losing”.

In step S225, when the main CPU 110a determines that it is a "big hit" (step S225; Yes), it shifts the process to step S226, and when it determines that it is "losing" (step S225; No), it shifts the process to step S227.
In step S226, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for big win. On the other hand, in step S227, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for losing.

In step S228, the main CPU 110a stores the type of starting port used for the jackpot determination, the random number value for jackpot symbol determination stored in the 0th storage section of the special symbol storage area, and the selected table. Collation is performed to determine the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). The determined special symbol is used to determine the operation mode of opening and closing the big winning opening 13a in the jackpot game process to be described later, and is used to decide the game state after the jackpot game ends.
At step S229, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol stop symbol data corresponding to the special symbol determined at step S228 in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area, and ends the big hit determination process.

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 23 is a flow chart for explaining special symbol variation processing by the main control board 110 .
First, in step S241, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variable time set in step S212 has passed (whether or not the special symbol time counter is "0"), and the variable time has not passed. If it is determined that (step S241; No), the special symbol variation process of this time is terminated, and if it is determined that the variation time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), the process proceeds to step S242.

In step S242, the main CPU 110a stops the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) determined in step S228 on the first special symbol first display 19a or the second special symbol first display 19b. display. Specifically, the special symbol stop display data is set in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display device 19a or the second special symbol first display device 19b, and the player is notified of the jackpot determination result. will be

In step S243, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol determination command indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the special symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. FIG.

In step S244, after starting the stop display of the special symbols as described above, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol time counter to the symbol stop time (0.5 seconds=250 counters). The special symbol time counter is decremented by "1" every 2 ms in step S110.
In step S245, the main CPU 110a sets "2" to the special symbol special electric processing data, and ends the special symbol variation processing.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 24 is a flow chart for explaining special symbol stop processing by the main control board 110 .
First, in step S251, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the symbol stop time set in step S244 has passed (whether or not the special symbol time counter is "0"), and the symbol stop time has passed. If it is determined that the symbol stop time has not elapsed (step S251; No), the current special symbol stop process is terminated.

In step S252, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time saving game flag is "ON" in the time saving game flag storage area (that is, whether or not the current game state is the time saving game state), and determines whether the time saving game flag is set. When the time saving game flag is "ON" in the storage area (step S252; Yes), the process is moved to step S253, and when the time saving game flag is "OFF" in the time saving game flag storage area (step S252; No ), and the process proceeds to step S258.

In step S253, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the number of time-saving games (J) stored in the number of time-saving games (J) storage area to update it.
In step S254, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the new number of time-saving games (J) is "0". ), the process moves to step S255, and when it is determined that the number of time-saving games (J) is not "0" (step S254; No), the process moves to step S258.

In step S255, the main CPU 110a turns "OFF" the time saving game flag installed in the time saving game flag storage area. As a result, the time-saving game state is terminated and the game state is shifted to a non-time-saving game state.

In step S256, the main CPU 110a sets time-saving gaming state erasure data for erasing the display (lighting of the LED) of the time-saving gaming state indicator 19h (lighting of the LED) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the time saving game state erase data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in the above step S110, and the created data is output in step S114, so that the time saving game state display device The display of 19h will be erased.

In step S257, the main CPU 110a sets, in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c, right-handed erasure data for erasing the display (LED lighting) of the right-handed first indicator 19j (LED extinguishing). As a result, when the right-handed deletion data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S114, thereby displaying the right-handed first display device. The display of 19j will be erased.

In step S258, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the high-probability game flag is "ON" in the high-probability game flag storage area (that is, whether or not the current game state is the high-probability game state), When the high probability game flag is "ON" in the high probability game flag storage area (step S258; Yes), the process is moved to step S259, and the high probability game flag is "OFF" in the high probability game flag storage area. If there is (step S258; No), the process proceeds to step S263.

In step S259, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the high-probability number of games (X) stored in the high-probability number of games (X) storage area to update it.
In step S260, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the new number of high-probability games (X) is "0". ; Yes), the process moves to step S261, and when it is determined that the number of high-probability games (X) is not "0" (step S260; No), the process moves to step S263.

In step S261, the main CPU 110a turns "OFF" the high-probability game flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area. As a result, the high-probability game state ends and the game state shifts to the low-probability game state.

In step S262, the main CPU 110a sets high-probability game state erasing data for erasing the display (lighting of the LED) of the high-probability game state indicator 19g (turning off the LED) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. Thus, when the high-probability game state erasing data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S114, so that the high-probability game state The display on the display 19g is erased.

In step S263, the main CPU 110a confirms the current game state and sets a game state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

In step S264, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stopped special symbol is a jackpot symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special figure stop design data stored in the special figure stop design data storage area is a jackpot design (stop design data = 01 to 06), and it is determined that it is a jackpot design. (Step S264; Yes), the process moves to step S266, and when it is determined that the symbol is not a big hit (step S264; No), the process moves to step S277.

In step S277, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stopped special symbol is a specific losing symbol, or whether or not the variation display of the losing special symbol has reached a predetermined number of variations. Specifically, whether or not the special figure stop design data stored in the special figure stop design data storage area is a specific losing design (stop design data 20: specific first special design), or the first and It is determined whether or not the number of variations of the second special symbol has reached 750 times in succession, and if it is determined that it is not a specific losing symbol or has not reached the predetermined number of variations (step S277; No), in step S265, The main CPU 110a sets "0" to the special symbol special electric processing data, terminates the current special symbol stop processing, and when it is determined that the specific losing symbol or the predetermined number of fluctuations has been reached, moves the process to step S278.

When it is determined that the number of fluctuations of the specific losing symbol or the first and second losing special symbols reaches 750 times in succession (step S277; Yes), in step S278, the main CPU 110a performs time saving game flag setting processing. I do. Specifically, referring to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10 (2) and (3), based on the game state data at the time of symbol stop or the game state data at the time of reaching the number of fluctuations, the time saving game in the time saving game flag storage area Perform processing to set the flag.

In step S279, the main CPU 110a performs time-saving game number setting processing. By referring to the game state setting data table shown in FIGS. 10(2) and (3), a predetermined number of times (1200 times) is set in the time saving game machine number of times (J) storage area.
Subsequently, in step S280, the main CPU 110a checks the game state by referring to the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-saving game flag storage area, and sets the game state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

In step S266, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time saving game flag is "ON" in the time saving game flag storage area, and if the time saving game flag is "ON" (step S266; Yes), step S267. When the time saving game flag is "OFF" (step S266; No), the process is moved to step S268.

In step S267, the main CPU 110a sets time-saving gaming state elimination data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the time saving game state erase data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in the above step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the time saving game state display device The display of 19h is erased (the LED is turned off).

In step S268, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time saving game flag is "ON" in the high-probability game flag storage area, and if the high-probability game flag is "ON" (step S268; Yes), The process moves to step S269, and when the high probability game flag is "OFF" (step S268; No), the process moves to step S270.

In step S269, the main CPU 110a sets high-probability game state deletion data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, when the high-probability game state erasing data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the high-probability game state The display on the display 19g is erased (the LED is turned off).

In step S270, the main CPU 110a sets "3" to the special figure special electric processing data.
In step S271, the main CPU 110a resets the game state and the number of times of time saving. Specifically, the data stored in the high-probability game flag storage area, high-probability game count (X) storage area, time-saving game flag storage area, and time-saving game number (J) storage area are cleared.

In step S272, the main CPU 110a sets a big winning opening opening/closing control table. Specifically, referring to the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 8, a big winning opening opening/closing control table corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data is set.

In step S273, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time to the special game timer counter based on the jackpot game control table and the special figure stop pattern data. Incidentally, the special game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S102.

In step S274, the main CPU 110a determines the type of jackpot game (first jackpot to third jackpot) based on the big win opening/closing control table set in step S272, and opens according to the jackpot game type. The specified command is set in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the jackpot game opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

In step S275, the main CPU 110a sets round number display data for displaying the round number of the big win game on the round number display 19i (lighting of the LED) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the round number display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111 to display the round number display 19i. The number of rounds will be displayed.

In step S276, the main CPU 110a sets the right-handed display data for causing the right-handed first display 19j to display the right-handed display (lighting of the LED) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c, and performs the current special symbol stop processing. exit. As a result, when the right-handed display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111 to display the right-handed first display device. At 19j, a right-handed indication will be given.

(Jackpot game processing)
FIG. 25 is a flow chart for explaining the jackpot game processing by the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
First, in step S281, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently being opened. For example, if "0" is stored in the number-of-round-games (R) storage area, it means that the opening is currently in progress. Step S281; Yes), the process proceeds to step S282, and when it is determined that the opening is not currently in progress (step S281; No), the process proceeds to step S286.

In step S282, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a preset opening time has passed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter set in step S273 has become "0", and if the special game timer counter=0, it is determined that the opening time has passed. If the opening time has not elapsed (step S282; No), the main CPU 110a ends the current jackpot game process, and if the opening time has elapsed (step S282; Yes), the process proceeds to step S283.

In step S283, the main CPU 110a performs jackpot game start processing. Specifically, the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area is updated by adding "1" (R←R+1). Here, since no round game has been played yet, "1" is stored in the round game count (R) storage area.

In step S284, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, first, the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area is updated by adding "1" (K←K+1). Here, since the opening of the big winning opening 13a has not yet been performed, "1" is stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area. In addition, in order to open the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d is set. As a result, the opening/closing member 13b is changed from the closed state to the open state to open the big winning opening 13a. It should be noted that, with reference to the large winning opening opening/closing control table set in step S272, based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of times of opening (K), the opening time of the large winning opening 13a is determined by a special game timer counter. set to

In step S285, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 . Since this is the first round of the jackpot game, the first open round specification command is set.

In step S286, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the big winning opening 13a is currently open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d is set. When the main CPU 110a determines that the large winning opening 13a is open (step S286; Yes), the process proceeds to step S287, and when determining that the large winning opening 13a is not open (step S286; No), The process moves to step S289.

In step S287, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the "open end condition" for ending the opening of the big winning opening 13a is satisfied. This "open end condition" is that the value of the big winning entrance ball counter (C) reaches the maximum number (for example, 9) or that the maximum opening time has passed (special game timer counter = 0 ) is applicable.
If the main CPU 110a determines that the "open end condition" is satisfied (step S287; Yes), the process proceeds to step S288, and if it determines that the "open end condition" is not satisfied (step S287; No). , ends the jackpot game processing of this time.

In step S288, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening closing process (interval process). Concretely, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid de-energization stop data for converting the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a to the closed state is set. As a result, the opening/closing member 13b is changed from the open state to the closed state, and the big winning opening 13a is closed. In addition, referring to the large winning opening opening/closing control table set in the above step S272, based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of times of opening (K), the closing time of the large winning opening 13a is determined by a special game timer. set in the counter. Also, a large winning opening closing designation command indicating that the opening/closing member 13b is to be changed from the open state to the closed state is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the special winning opening closing designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

In step S289, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the big winning opening 13a is currently closed (during an interval). Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d is set. When the main CPU 110a determines that the large winning opening 13a is closed (step S289; Yes), the process proceeds to step S290, and when it determines that the large winning opening 13a is not closed (step S289; No), The process moves to step S299.

In step S290, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the big winning opening 13a has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter has become "0". When the closing time has expired (step S290; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S291, and when the closing time has not expired (step S290; No), ends the current jackpot game process.

In step S291, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the big winning hole entrance ball counter (C) has reached a specified number (9) or whether the number of opening times (K) has reached the maximum number of opening times. If the main CPU 110a determines that the current round has ended (step S291; Yes), the process proceeds to step S293, and if it determines that the current round has not ended (step S291; transfer processing.

In step S292, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. The number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area is updated by adding "1" (K←K+1). In addition, in order to open the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d is set. As a result, the opening/closing member 13b is changed from the closed state to the open state to open the big winning opening 13a. In addition, referring to the large winning opening opening/closing control table set in step S272, based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of times of opening (K), the opening time of the large winning opening 13a is determined by a special game timer counter. set to

In step S293, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the final round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area has reached the maximum number of round games of the current jackpot game. When the main CPU 110a determines that the final round has ended (step S293; Yes), it shifts the process to step S297, and when it determines that the final round has not ended (step S293; No), it shifts the process to step S294. .

In step S294, the main CPU 110a performs round data setting processing. Specifically, "0" is set in the number of open times (K) storage area and the number of balls entered into the big winning slot (C) storage area, and the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area. is added by "1" and updated (R←R+1).

At step 295, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area and updated (K←K+1). In addition, in order to open the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d is set. As a result, the opening/closing member 13b is changed from the closed state to the open state to open the big winning opening 13a. In addition, referring to the large winning opening opening/closing control table set in step S272, based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of times of opening (K), the opening time of the large winning opening 13a is determined by a special game timer counter. set to

In step S296, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

In step S297, the main CPU 110 performs ending transition processing. Specifically, "0" is set in the number of open times (K) storage area, the number of balls entered into the big prize pool (C) storage area, and the number of round games (R) storage area to clear the values in each storage area. Also, the ending time is set to the special game timer counter based on the jackpot game control table and the special figure stop symbol data.

In step S298, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

In step S299, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently ending. If the game is currently ending (step S299; Yes), the process proceeds to step S300. The jackpot game processing of this time is ended.

At step S300, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time has passed. If it is determined (step S300; No), the current jackpot game process is terminated.
In step S301, the main CPU 110a sets "4" to the special figure special electric processing data, and terminates the current jackpot game processing.

(Special game end processing)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart for explaining special game (jackpot game) end processing by the main control board 110 .
In step S321, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure stop symbol data set in the special figure stop symbol data storage area and the game information in the game state buffer.

In step S322, the main CPU 110a performs high probability game flag setting processing. Specifically, referring to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10 (1), based on the game information in the special figure stop pattern data and the game state buffer loaded in the above step S321, high probability at the end of the jackpot game A process of whether or not to set a high-probability game flag in the game flag storage area is performed. For example, if the special figure stop symbol data is one of "01", "02", "04", and "05", the high probability game flag is set (turned on) in the high probability game flag storage area.

In step S323, the main CPU 110a performs high probability game number setting processing. Specifically, referring to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10 (1), based on the special figure stop symbol data loaded in step S321 and the game information in the game state buffer, the number of high probability games (X ) causes a predetermined number of times to be set in a storage area. For example, if the stop symbol data is "02", 50000 times is set in the high probability game number (X) storage area.

In step S324, the main CPU 110a performs a time saving game flag setting process. Specifically, referring to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10 (1), based on the game information in the stop symbol data and the game state buffer loaded in the step S321, time saving game in the time saving game flag storage area Perform processing to determine whether or not to set the flag. For example, if the stop symbol data is "02", a flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area.

In step S325, the main CPU 110a performs time-saving game number setting processing. Referring to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10 (1), based on the game information in the game state buffer and the stop symbol data loaded in the step S321, a predetermined number of times in the time-saving game count (J) storage area. set. For example, if the stop symbol data is "02", 50000 times is set in the time saving game number (J) storage area.

In step S326, the main CPU 110a checks the game state by referring to the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-saving game flag storage area, and sets the game state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

In step S327, the main CPU 110a sets round number erasure data for erasing the display (lighting of the LED) of the round number display 19i (turning off the LED) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the round number deletion data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the round number display 19i The display will be erased.

In step S328, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "0", prepares to shift the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG. 21, and ends the current special game end processing.

(Public and public electric control processing)
FIG. 27 is a flow chart for explaining the normal/universal power control process by the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
First, in step S331, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the general electric power processing data, and in step S332 calculates the branch destination address from the loaded electric power processing data.

In step S333, the main CPU 110a, if the normal pattern/general electric processing data=0 (step S333; Yes), performs normal symbol variation processing in step S334, and ends the current normal/general electric control processing. If the general pattern general electric processing data = 0 (step S333; No), it is determined that the general pattern general electric processing data = 1, the auxiliary game processing is performed in step S335, and the current general pattern general electric control processing ends. .

(Normal design fluctuation processing)
FIG. 28 is a flow chart for explaining normal symbol variation processing by the main control board 110 .
First, in step S341, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner. If the normal design is being displayed in a variable display (the normal design time counter is not "0") (step S341; Yes), the process proceeds to step S354, and the normal design is not being displayed in a variable display (the normal design time counter is "0") ) (step S341; No), the process proceeds to step S342.

In step S342, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the normal symbol reserved number (G) storage area storing the normal symbol reserved number is 1 or more. When it is determined that the value of the normal design reservation number (G) storage area is 1 or more (step S342; Yes), the process is shifted to step S343, and the value of the normal design reservation number (G) storage area is not 1 or more. When determined (step S342; No), this time's normal symbol variation processing is terminated.

In step S343, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the value stored in the normal number of reserved symbols (G) storage area to update (G←G+1). In step S344, the main CPU 110a shifts the data stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the normal symbol reservation number (G) storage area subtracted in step S343. Specifically, each data stored in the first storage section to the fourth storage section in the normal symbol storage area is shifted to the previous storage section. Here, the data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the determination storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the data stored in the first storage section is written in the determination storage area (0th storage section), and the data already written in the determination storage area (0th storage section) is normally stored in the design reserve storage. It will be erased from the area. As a result, the random number for hit determination, the random number for hit design determination, and the random number for normal pattern variation pattern determination used in the previous game are erased.

In step S345, the main CPU 110a performs hit determination processing. Specifically, the current time-saving game state and the random number value for hit determination stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol reservation storage area are compared with the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 14 (1). It is determined whether or not it is a hit (a normal pattern win lottery).

In step S346, the main CPU 110a performs normal symbol determination processing. Specifically, whether or not the current state is a time-saving game state, the result of the hit determination in the above step S345, and the random number for normal pattern stop stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol reservation storage area are shown. 14 (2) is collated with the normal symbol stop symbol determination table to determine the normal symbol type (normal symbol stop symbol data) and set in the normal symbol stop symbol storage area.

In step S347, the main CPU 110a sets a normal pattern designation command corresponding to the normal pattern stop symbol data determined in step S346 in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the general pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

In step S348, the main CPU 110a performs a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination process. Specifically, whether or not the current state is a time-saving game state, the result of the hit determination in the above step S345, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol reservation storage area are shown. 14 (3) is collated with the normal symbol variation pattern determination table to determine the normal symbol variation time (variation pattern).

In step S349, the main CPU 110a sets a normal pattern variation pattern specification command corresponding to the normal pattern variation time (variation pattern) determined in step S348 in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the general pattern variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. FIG.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol fluctuation time determined in step S349 in the normal symbol time counter. Incidentally, the normal symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S102.

In step S351, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol variation display data for causing the normal symbol first display 19c to display the normal symbol variation (blinking of the LED) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the normal symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S114, whereby the normal symbol first display is performed. The variable display of the device 19c is started.

In step S352, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol storage specifying command corresponding to the number of normal symbol reservations (G) in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the normal symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

In step S353, the main CPU 110a sets the above-described normal symbol reserved display data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current normal symbol variation process. Thus, when the normal symbol reserved display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S114, so that the normal symbol reserved first The number of normal map reservations is displayed on the display 19f.

In step S354, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol time counter set in step S350 has become "0". When the main CPU 110a determines that the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (step S354; Yes), the process proceeds to step S355, and when it determines that the normal symbol variation time has not elapsed (step S354; No). , End the normal symbol variation processing of this time.

In step S355, the main CPU 110a sets normal symbol stop display data in a predetermined processing area for stopping and displaying the normal symbol determined in step S346 on the first normal symbol display 19c. As a result, when the normal symbol stop display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S114, so that the normal symbol first display The normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the device 19c, and the player is informed of the determination result of the winning lottery.

In step S356, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol determination command indicating stop display of normal symbols in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the normal symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

In step S357, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop symbol data of the normal symbol is a winning stop symbol, and if it is a winning stop symbol (step S357; Yes), the process proceeds to step S358, where the winning stop symbol data is determined. If not (step S357; No), this normal symbol variation process is terminated.

In step S358, the main CPU 110a sets "1" to the general/universal electrical processing data, and prepares to shift the processing to the auxiliary game processing shown in FIG.

In step S359, the main CPU 110a performs auxiliary game start processing. In the auxiliary game start process, the main CPU 110a first sets the opening mode determination table for the second start opening in the main RAM 110c, and sets the number of openings (S) stored in the number of openings (S) storage area to "1". Add and update (S←S+1). Here, since the opening of the second starting port 11a has not been performed even once, "1" is stored in the number of times of opening (S) storage area. Then, energization data for energizing the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 11d to open the opening/closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a is set. As a result, the opening/closing member 11b is changed from the closed state to the open state to open the second starting port 11a. In addition, referring to the second starting port opening mode determination table, based on the current number of times of opening (S), the opening time of the second starting port 11a is set to the auxiliary game timer counter, and this time normal symbol fluctuation processing exit. Incidentally, the auxiliary game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S102.

(Auxiliary game processing)
FIG. 29 is a flow chart for explaining auxiliary game processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
First, in step S361, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second starting port 11a is open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the second opening/closing solenoid 11d is set. If the main CPU 110a determines that the second starting port 11a is open (step S361; Yes), the process proceeds to step S362, and if it determines that the second starting port 11a is not open (step S361; ), and the process proceeds to step S367.

In step S362, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a condition for ending the opening of the second starting port 11a is satisfied. Specifically, the value of the second starting entrance ball counter (L) has reached the specified number (10) or the opening time in the current number of openings (S) has passed (auxiliary game timer counter = 0 ) applies. If the main CPU 110a determines that the opening end condition is satisfied (step S362; Yes), the process proceeds to step S363, and if it determines that the opening end condition is not satisfied (step S362; End the game process.

In step S363, the main CPU 110a performs a second starting opening closing process. Specifically, data for de-energizing the second starting port opening/closing solenoid for converting the opening/closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a to the closed state is set. As a result, the opening/closing member 11b is changed from the open state to the closed state to close the second starting port 11a. In addition, with reference to the second start port opening state determination table set in step S359, based on the current number of times of opening (S), the closing time of the second start port 11a is set to the auxiliary game timer counter. . After finishing this process, the current auxiliary game process is finished.

In step S364, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied. The auxiliary game end condition is that the normal electric operation number (D) becomes the preset number of openings of the second starting port 11a, or the value of the second starting port entry ball counter (L) reaches the specified number (10 (individuals). If the main CPU 110a determines that the auxiliary game end condition has been established (step S364; Yes), it moves the process to step S365, and if it determines that the auxiliary game end condition has not been established (step S365; No), this time end the auxiliary game process.

In step S365, the main CPU 110a performs auxiliary game end processing. Specifically, "0" is set in the number of openings (S) storage area of the second starting port 11a and in the second starting port entry ball counter (L) storage region to clear the values in each storage region.

In step S366, the main CPU 110a sets "0" to the normal pattern/normal electrical processing data, and prepares to shift the processing to the normal pattern variation processing shown in FIG. When this process ends, the current auxiliary game process ends.

In step S367, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the second starting port 11a has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter has become "0". When the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time of the second starting port 11a has ended (step S367; Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S368, and determines that the closing time of the second starting port 11a has not ended. (Step S367; No), the current auxiliary game process is terminated.

In step S368, the main CPU 110a performs a second starting port opening process. Specifically, the second starting port opening/closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 11d to open the opening/closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a is set. As a result, the opening/closing member 11b is changed from the closed state to the open state to open the second starting port 11a. In addition, referring to the opening mode determination table of the second starting port set in step S359, the opening time of the second starting port 11a is set to the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of times of opening (S).

(command description)
30 and 31 are diagrams showing types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG.
One command of the command transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is composed of 2 bytes. This command consists of a 1-byte "MODE" as the first data section and a 1-byte "DATA" as the second data section. "MODE" indicates the type of command, and "DATA" indicates the value of the command. This command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 using a start-stop synchronization with one serial signal.

The ``performance design designation command'' indicates the type of the special design to be stopped and displayed. In addition, since the type of special design is what ultimately determines the type of jackpot, the high probability time saving game state and the low probability time saving game state, the production design specification command also indicates the type of jackpot and the game state. I can say.

As for this performance design designation command, when various special designs are determined and the variable display of the special design is started, the performance design designation command corresponding to the determined special design is transmitted to the performance control board 130.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbols is started, an effect symbol specifying command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the performance design designation command set in the performance transmission data storage area is transmitted to the performance control board 130 .

The "first special symbol storage specification command" indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area, "MODE" is set by "E1H", and the number of reserved memories DATA information is set according to

This first special symbol storage designation command is the first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the reservation storage number when the reservation storage number stored in the first special design reservation number (U1) storage area is switched. It is sent to the substrate 130 . Specifically, when the value stored in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area increases or decreases in the above step S134 or the above step S206, the first special symbol storage corresponding to the retained storage number after the increase or decrease A specified command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the first special symbol memory specification command set in the performance transmission data storage area is transmitted to the performance control board 130 . As the first special symbol storage designation command, for example, the first special symbol storage 1 designation command indicating that the number of reservations stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is "1", the first special There is a first special symbol storage 2 specification command indicating that the number of reservations stored in the number of reserved symbols (U1) storage area is "2".

"Second special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area, "MODE" is set by "E1H", the number of reserved memories DATA information is set according to

This second special symbol storage designation command is the second special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the reservation storage number when the reservation storage number stored in the second special design reservation number (U2) storage area is switched. It is sent to the substrate 130 . Specifically, when the value stored in the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area in step S161 or step S206 increases or decreases, the second special symbol storage corresponding to the retained storage number after the increase or decrease A specified command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. After that, the second special symbol memory designation command set in the performance transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the performance control board 130 . As the second special symbol storage designation command, for example, a second special symbol storage 1 designation command indicating that the number of reservations stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is "1", a second special There is a second special symbol storage 2 designation command indicating that the number of reservations stored in the number of reserved symbols (U2) storage area is "2".
In addition, in this embodiment, the "first special symbol memory designation command" and the "second special symbol memory designation command" are collectively referred to as "special symbol memory designation command".

The "special symbol determination command" indicates that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed, "MODE" is set to "E2H", and the type of special symbol (either the first special symbol or the second special symbol ), "DATA" is set to "01H" for the first special symbol, and "DATA" is set to "02H" for the second special symbol. That is, there are a first special symbol confirmation command and a second special symbol confirmation command as special symbol confirmation commands.

This special symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display device 19a or the second special symbol first display device 19b in step S243, the special symbol confirmation command is the effect transmission data of the main RAM 110c. Set in the storage area. After that, the special symbol determination command set in the performance transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the performance control board 130 .

The "normal symbol determination command" indicates that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and "MODE" is set to "E2H" and "DATA" is set to "03H". This normal symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol first display device 19c in step S356, the normal symbol determination command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the normal symbol determination command set in the performance transmission data storage area is transmitted to the performance control board 130 .

"First special figure variation pattern specification command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the first special symbol first display 19a, "MODE" is set with "E6H", various DATA information is set according to the variation pattern.

This first special figure variation pattern specification command is the first special figure variation pattern corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern when the special symbol variation display of the first special symbol first display 19a is started. A specified command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 . Specifically, in step S210, the first special symbol variation pattern specification command corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. After that, the first special figure variation pattern specification command set in the production transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130 . As the first special figure variation pattern specification command, the first special symbol variation pattern 01 specification command corresponding to the variation pattern of loss with a variation time of 8 seconds in the non-time-saving game state, the variation time is 40 seconds in the non-time-saving game state. There is a first special symbol variation pattern 06 designation command corresponding to the variation pattern of.

"Second special symbol variation pattern specification command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the second special symbol first display 19b, "MODE" is set with "E7H", various DATA information is set according to the variation pattern.

This second special figure variation pattern specification command specifies the second special figure variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined when the special symbol variation display of the second special symbol first display 19b is started. A command is transmitted to the production control board 130 . Specifically, in step S210, a second special symbol variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern of the second special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. After that, the second special figure variation pattern specification command set in the production transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130 . As the second special symbol variation pattern specification command, the second special symbol variation pattern 41 specification command corresponding to the variation pattern of loss with a variation time of 10 seconds in the time saving game state, and the variation of the jackpot with a variation time of 40 seconds in the time saving game state There is a second special symbol variation pattern 46 designation command corresponding to the pattern.
In addition, in this embodiment, the "first special figure variation pattern specification command" and the "second special figure variation pattern specification command" are collectively referred to as "special figure variation pattern specification command".

"Start opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)" is information indicating the result of pre-determining the jackpot determination result, and when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 10, "MODE" is "E8H". "MODE" is set to "E9H" when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 11a, and the information of DATA is set according to various winning information.

This starting mouth winning designation command (prefetching designation command) is, when the game ball wins the first starting mouth 10 or the second starting mouth 11a, the starting mouth winning designation command corresponding to the acquired starting winning prize information (preliminary determination result) is sent to the effect control board 130 . Specifically, in step S139 or step S166, a starting opening prize designation command corresponding to the winning information obtained by winning the starting opening 10 or 11a is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. After that, the start opening winning designation command set in the production transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130 .

"Open maximum count specification command" indicates the maximum winning number (10) of game balls to the big winning opening 13a in one round game, "MODE" is set with "EAH", "DATA". is set to "0AH".
The maximum open count designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when one round game is started. After that, the release maximum count specification command set in the production transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130 .

The "round specification command" indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot game corresponding to the type of various jackpots, "MODE" is set to "EAH", and DATA information is set according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. there is

As for this round designation command, when one round game is started, a round designation command corresponding to the number of started rounds is transmitted to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁Specifically, when opening the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a in step S285 or step S296, a round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds to be opened is stored in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. set. After that, the round designation command set in the performance transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the performance control board 130 . As round designation commands, a first round designation command is transmitted when a first round game is performed, and an open second round designation command is transmitted when a second round game is performed.

The "large winning opening closing designation command (interval specifying command)" indicates a closing period (interval) of the large winning opening 13a between rounds, "MODE" is set by "EAH", and "DATA ” is set as “7FH”.
This big winning hole closing specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when starting the closing period (interval) of the big winning hole 13a between rounds. Specifically, in step S288, a large winning opening closing designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the large winning opening closing designation command set in the performance transmission data storage area is transmitted to the performance control board 130 .

The "opening designation command" indicates to start a jackpot game (special game state) corresponding to various jackpots (probability variable jackpot, normal jackpot), "MODE" is set to "EBH", and the jackpot is set. Information of DATA is set according to the type.

This opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when a jackpot game corresponding to various jackpots (probability variable jackpot, normal jackpot) is started. Specifically, at the start of the jackpot game processing in step S274, an opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. After that, the opening designation command set in the performance transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the performance control board 130 . As the opening designation command, for example, there is an opening designation command for the probability variable jackpot in the case of the variable probability jackpot, and an opening designation command for the normal jackpot in the case of the normal jackpot.

The "ending designation command" indicates that a jackpot game corresponding to various jackpots (probability variable jackpot, normal jackpot) has ended, "MODE" is set to "ECH", and DATA is set according to the jackpot type. information is set.

This ending designation command is transmitted to a performance control board 130 when a jackpot game corresponding to various jackpots (probability variable jackpot, normal jackpot) ends. Specifically, at the start of the jackpot game ending process in step S298, an ending specifying command corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. After that, the ending specifying command set in the effect transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the effect control board 130 . As the ending designation command, in the case of the probability variable jackpot, there is an ending designation command for the probability variable jackpot, and in the case of the normal jackpot, there is an ending designation command for the normal jackpot.

The "general pattern designation command" indicates the type of the normal design that is stopped and displayed on the normal design first display device 19c. information is set.
When various normal patterns are determined and variable display of the normal patterns is started, the general pattern designation command corresponding to the determined normal patterns is transmitted to the performance control board 130.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the variable display of normal symbols is started in step S347, a normal symbol designation command corresponding to the determined normal symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. After that, the general pattern designation command set in the performance transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the performance control board 130 .

The "normal pattern variation pattern specification command" indicates the normal symbol variation time on the normal symbol first display device 19c, "MODE" is set with "EEH", and various normal symbol variation times DATA information is set.
This normal pattern fluctuation pattern designation command is a normal pattern fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined normal pattern fluctuation time when the normal symbol first display device 19c starts to display the normal pattern fluctuation. 130. Specifically, when the variable display of normal symbols is started in step S349, a normal pattern variation pattern specification command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation time is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. be done. After that, the general pattern variation pattern specification command set in the production transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.

"Normal pattern storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the normal number of reserved patterns (G) storage area, "MODE" is set with "EFH", DATA according to the number of reserved memories information is set.
This normal symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the reserved memory number stored in the normal symbol reservation number (G) storage area is switched. . Specifically, when the value stored in the normal design reservation number (G) storage area increases or decreases in the above step S177 or the above step S345, the normal design storage designation command corresponding to the reserved storage number after the increase or decrease is the main It is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the normal symbol memory specification command set in the performance transmission data storage area is transmitted to the performance control board 130 .

"Game state specification command" indicates the game state whether it is a high probability game state and whether it is a time saving game state, "MODE" is set to "FAH", low probability game state And if it is a non-time-saving game state, "DATA" is set to "10H", and if it is a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state, "DATA" is set to "11H", and a high-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state If so, "DATA" is set to "12H", and "DATA" is set to "13H" if it is in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state.

This game state designation command is executed when the initialization process is executed, when the special symbols change, when the special symbols change, when the jackpot game starts and when the jackpot ends, when the specific losing pattern stops, and when the special losing pattern is stopped. When the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number of fluctuations, a game state designation command corresponding to the game state to be set is transmitted to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁Specifically, when the RAM clear processing (initialization processing) is performed, when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started in the step S210, in the step S263 high probability game flag, high probability game number, time saving game When there is a possibility that the flag and the number of time-saving games (J) have changed, in step S279, when setting the time-saving game flag and the number of time-saving games (J), in step S326, a high probability game flag and a high probability When the number of games, the time-saving game flag, and the number of times of time-saving games (J) are set, a game state designation command corresponding to the set game state is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. After that, the game state designation command set in the production transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130 .

When power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 according to whether or not the main RAM 110c is initialized. sent.
The "power-on designation command" indicates that power-on of the game machine 1 is accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c, and "MODE" is set with "FBH" and "DATA" is set with "00H". It is Specifically, the power-on designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the RAM clear switch 58c is turned on and the information stored in the main RAM 110c is cleared.

The "power supply restoration designation command" indicates that the turning on of power to the gaming machine 1 does not involve initialization of the main RAM 110c, and "MODE" is set to "FBH", and the game is executed when the power is cut off. If the state is a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, "DATA" is set to "01H", and if it is a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state, "DATA" is set to "02H", with a high probability. "DATA" is set to "03H" in the case of the game state and the non-time-saving game state, and "DATA" is set to "04H" in the case of the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state. Specifically, the power restoration designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the RAM clear switch 58c is not turned on when the game machine 1 is powered on.

The "customer waiting state designation command" indicates that the customer waiting state is set in which the variable display of special symbols is not performed, and "MODE" is set to "FBH" and "DATA" is set to "05H". is set.
This customer waiting state designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the customer waiting state is entered in step S217, and then immediately set in the production transmission data storage area. The customer waiting state designation command that has been entered is transmitted to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

The "set value designation command" indicates the set value set in the game machine 1. Specifically, after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is executed. After being transmitted, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

The "error designation command" indicates an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1, and "MODE" is set as "FDH", and "DATA" information is set according to the error type.

This error designation command is issued when the game ball enters the second starting port 11a, when detected by the magnetic detection switch 58a or the radio wave detection switch 58b, when detected by the winning confirmation detection switch (not shown), or when the opening/closing door 3 An error designation command corresponding to the error type is transmitted to the performance control board 130 at the time of opening, when the tray 5 is full, when a payout abnormality occurs, or the like.

Specifically, when a magnetic/electric wave abnormality is determined in the abnormality determination process of step S109, when abnormal winning is determined in the winning confirmation detection switch input process of step S126, illegal ball entry is detected in step S157. When the determination is made, when the payout control board 120 detects that the open/close door 3 is open, the tray 5 is full, and the game balls to be put out are insufficient, an error designation command corresponding to the type of error is produced in the main RAM 110c. is set in the transmission data storage area for After that, the error designation command set in the performance transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the performance control board 130 . As the error designation command, there are a magnetic abnormality error designation command corresponding to the magnetic abnormality and a full abnormality error designation command corresponding to the fullness of the tray 5 .

The "error cancellation designation command" indicates that an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1 has been eliminated, and "MODE" is set to "FEH", and information of "DATA" is set according to the type of the eliminated error. is set.
This error release designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130 when the opening/closing door 3 is closed, when the tray 5 is full, when the payout abnormality is resolved, or the like.

Specifically, when the payout control board 120 detects that the opening/closing door 3 is closed, the receptacle 5 is full, or the shortage of game balls to be paid out is detected, an error cancellation designation corresponding to the type of the canceled error is made. A command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. After that, the error designation command set in the performance transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the performance control board 130 .

Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 130a of the effect control section 130m will be described.

(Main processing of production control section)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart for explaining main processing by the effect control section 130m.
When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub 130a performs the following main processing.

First, in step S510, the sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupt processing. Next, in step S520, the sub CPU 130a performs initialization processing. In this process, the sub CPU 130a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 130b and initializes and sets flags stored in the sub RAM 130c when the power is turned on.

At this time, the sub CPU 130a controls the image display devices 16 and 18, the audio output device 9, the effect button device 6A (the button drive motor 6c, the button vibration motor 6d, the button light emission LED 6e), the effect lever device 6C (the lever vibration motor 6j, the lever Light emitting LED 6k), board driving device 17 (movable effect members 17A to 17C, stepping motor, vibration motor), board lighting device 23, frame lighting device 27, winning hole lamp NR and the like are controlled. After receiving an initialization OK signal in response to the initialization instruction signal from both the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, the process proceeds to step S530.

In step S530, the sub CPU 130a sets interrupt permission for timer interrupt.
In step S540, the sub CPU 130a performs random number update processing for effect. In this process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various random numbers stored in the sub RAM 130c. After that, the process of step S540 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit)
FIG. 33 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing by the effect control section 130m.
A reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the production control unit 130m generates a clock pulse every predetermined period (2 ms), and the timer interrupt processing program is read and the timer interruption processing of the production control unit 130m is executed. be done.

In step S601, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area.
In step S602, the sub CPU 130a updates various timer counters used in the effect control unit 130m.
In step S603, the sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 130a analyzes the commands stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c. In addition, when the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the effect control unit 130m generates command reception interrupt processing of the effect control unit 130m, and stores the received command in the reception buffer. After that, the received command is analyzed in step S603.

In step S604, the sub CPU 130a displays the special symbol second displays 20a and 20b, the normal symbol second display 20c, the special symbol reservation second displays 20d and 20e, the normal symbol reservation second display 20f, and the right-handed second display. Data creation processing of various display control data to be output to the display device 20g is performed.

In step S<b>605 , the sub CPU 130 a performs command output processing for transmitting various data set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130 c to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 . In addition, display device output processing for outputting a signal of the display control data created in step S604 is performed.
In step S606, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step S601 to the register of the sub CPU 130a.

(Command analysis processing)
34 and 35 are flow charts for explaining command analysis processing of commands received from the main control board 110 by the effect control section 130m.
First, in step S610, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not a command is stored in the receive buffer. If no command is stored in the reception buffer (step S610; No), the sub CPU 130a ends the current command analysis process. transfer processing.

In step S611, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an error specifying command. If it is determined that the command is not an error designation command (step S611; No), the process proceeds to step S613.

In step S612, the sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing for notifying that an error related to the security of the gaming machine 1 has occurred. In this error notification process, the type of error designation command is determined to determine an error notification effect corresponding to the type of error that has occurred, the determined error notification effect is set in the error notification effect storage area, and the determined error notification effect is set. to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, an error notification designation command based on the determined error notification effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step S613, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an error cancellation designation command. If it is determined that the command is not an error cancellation designation command (step S613; No), the process proceeds to step S615.

In step S614, the sub CPU 130a performs error notification cancellation processing for canceling the error notification being executed. In this error notification cancellation process, the type of the error cancellation designation command is determined, the error notification effect corresponding to the type of the resolved error is cleared from the error notification effect storage area, and the cancellation information of the resolved error notification effect is transferred to the image control unit. 140, in order to transmit to the lamp control unit 150, an error notification cancellation designation command based on the canceled error notification effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step S615, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a power-on designation command. If it is determined that the command is not a power-on designation command (step S616; No), the process proceeds to step S617.

In step S616, the sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing. In this process, the RAM clear switch 58c is turned on, the information stored in the main RAM 110c is initialized (RAM cleared), and the image control unit 140, the lamp, and the image control unit 140 transmit power-on effect information indicating that the power has been turned on. In order to transmit to the control unit 150, a power-on notification designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step S617, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a power restoration designation command. When it is determined that the command is not a power restoration designation command (step S617; No), the process proceeds to S619.

In step S618, the sub CPU 130a performs power restoration processing. In this process, the RAM clear switch 58c is not turned on, and in order to transmit the information of the power restoration effect for notifying that the power is turned on to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, the power restoration notification designation command is sub-submitted. It is set in the transmission buffer of the RAM 130c.

In step S619, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. If it is determined to be a customer waiting state designation command (step S619; Yes), step When the process is shifted to S620 and it is determined that it is not a customer waiting command (step S619; No), the process is shifted to step S621.

In step S620, the sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect processing. In this process, 30 seconds or 60 seconds after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, the image display devices 16 and 18 are caused to display a customer waiting demonstration image, a power saving image, and the like.

In step S621, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol storage designation command, and if it determines that it is a special symbol storage designation command (step S621; Yes), step When the process is moved to S622 and it is determined that it is not a special symbol storage designation command (step S621; No), the process is moved to step S623.

In step S622, the sub CPU 130a performs a special figure pending storage update process. In this process, the special figure reservation memory number is analyzed from the special symbol memory designation command, and the analyzed special figure reservation memory number is set to the special figure reservation memory number counter of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step S623, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a starting point winning designation command (prefetching designation command). ; Yes), the process is moved to step S624, and when it is determined that it is not the start opening winning designation command (step S623; No), the process is moved to step S627.

In step S624, the sub CPU 130a performs icon change notice determination processing. In this process, based on the starting winning prize information stored in the starting winning opening designation command, the display mode of the pending icon and the variable icon displayed on the image display device 16 is changed to a special mode with a higher chance of winning the jackpot than the normal mode. Any one of a plurality of types of special modes having different degrees of expectation for big wins is determined.

Specifically, the result and the variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the command are specified from the starting winning hole designation command, and the display mode of the icon is changed from the normal mode to the special mode or the special mode according to the degree of expectation of the big win. Determine a change scenario to change from to another special aspect. For example, the hold icon is displayed in white in the normal (default) display mode, in blue in the special display mode 1, in green in the special display mode 2, in red in the special display mode 3, and in special display mode 4 with a special character. is set to The degree of expectation for a big hit is higher in the order of normal display mode (white) < special display mode 1 (blue) < special display mode 2 (green) < special display mode 3 (red) < special display mode 4 (special character icon) It is designed to be Then, an icon display designation command for displaying an icon corresponding to the determined change scenario on the first image display device 16 is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step S625, the sub CPU 130a performs continuous announcement effect determination processing. In this process, based on the start winning information (preliminary determination result, etc.) of the start winning opening designation command, it is determined whether or not to execute the notice effect over the variable display (variable effect) of one or more special symbols. At the same time, when executing, one or a plurality of advance notice effects are determined from a plurality of kinds of advance notice effects.

"Continuous notice effect" means a predetermined effect that suggests the degree of expectation of execution of a jackpot game over one or more variable effects (including variable effects to be read ahead) (for example, effect by effect button, by movable effect member It is a kind of pre-reading notice effect that executes the effect etc.).

In step S626, the sub CPU 130a performs lamp change effect determination processing. In this process, based on the starting winning information (preliminary determination result etc.) of the starting winning opening designation command, the lamp change production by the winning opening lamp NR is executed over the variable display (variation production) of one or more special symbols. In addition to determining whether or not to execute, the type of change in the lighting mode of the prize winning entrance lamp (light emission color, lighting/blinking) is determined.
“Lamp change effect” is a look-ahead that suggests the degree of expectation for the execution of a jackpot game by changing the light emission mode of the winning entrance lamp NR (white → blue, blue → red, etc.) over one or more variable effects. It is a kind of foreshadowing.
According to the lamp change effect, the lamp change effect is executed by changing the light emission mode (light emission color, lighting/blinking) of the prize winning opening lamp NR corresponding to the change of the pending icon. Therefore, the synergistic effect with the icon change effect can enhance the effect of the effect, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In step S627, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command, and if it is determined to be a special figure variation pattern designation command (step S627; Yes) , The process is moved to step S628, and when it is determined that it is not a special figure variation pattern designation command (step S627; No), the process is moved to step S630.

In step S628, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 or 44, and performs a variable effect pattern determination process for determining one variable effect pattern from a plurality of types of variable effect patterns.

In step S629, the sub CPU 130a performs a big hit notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a big win notice effect based on the variation effect pattern to be executed.
"Jackpot announcement effect" means that there is a possibility that a jackpot game will be executed during a variable effect, or a predetermined effect that suggests that a jackpot game will be executed. is.

In step S630, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a production design designation command. When it is determined that the command is not the effect design designation command (step S630; No), the process is moved to step S632.

In step S631, the sub CPU 130a performs effect symbol determination processing for determining the type of the effect symbol 16a to be stopped and displayed on the image display device 16 based on the special symbol information of the received effect symbol designation command. In the performance symbol determination process, the special symbol information of the performance symbol designation command is analyzed, the presence or absence of the big win, and the performance symbol data constituting the combination of the performance symbols 16a are determined according to the type of the big win, and the determined performance symbol data is determined. Set in the production pattern storage area.

In step S632, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special design confirmation command. When it is determined that the process is not a special symbol confirmation command (step S632; No), the process is moved to step S634.

In step S633, the sub CPU 130a performs effect symbol variation stop processing. In the effect symbol variation stop process, data based on the effect symbol data determined in step S631 and stop instruction data for stop-displaying the effect symbol 16a are transmitted to the sub-RAM 130c in order to stop and display the effect symbol variation. set in the buffer.

In step 634, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal design memory designation command, and when it is determined that it is a normal design memory designation command (step S634; Yes), step When the process is shifted to S635 and it is determined that it is not a normal symbol storage designation command (step S634; No), the process is shifted to step S636.

In step S635, the sub CPU 130a analyzes the number of normal pattern reserved storages from the normal pattern storage specifying command, and normal design reserved display data for displaying the analyzed normal pattern reserved stored number on the second display 20c of normal pattern reservation. is set in a predetermined processing area.

As shown in FIG. 35, in step S636, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the normal pattern fluctuation pattern designation command, and determines that it is the normal pattern fluctuation pattern designation command. If (step S636; Yes), the process is moved to step S637, and if it is determined that it is not a general pattern variation pattern specification command (step S636; No), the process is moved to step S638.
In step S637, the sub CPU 130a performs a normal pattern fluctuation production pattern determination process for determining one normal pattern fluctuation production pattern from a plurality of types of general pattern fluctuation production patterns based on the received general pattern fluctuation pattern specification command. .

In step S638, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal design determination command, and when it determines that it is a normal design determination command (step S638; Yes), the process proceeds to step S639. When it is determined that the process is not the normal design confirmation command (step S638; No), the process is moved to step S640.
In step S639, the sub CPU 130a performs normal symbol variation stop processing. In the normal pattern fluctuation stop processing, in order to stop and display the normal pattern effect pattern, the sub RAM 130c transmits the effect pattern data corresponding to the received normal pattern confirmation command and the stop instruction data for stopping and displaying the normal pattern effect pattern. set in the buffer.

In step S640, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a game state designation command. If it is determined that the command is not the gaming state designation command (step S640; No), the process proceeds to step S643.
In step S641, the sub CPU 130a sets the game state based on the received game state designation command in the game state storage area in the sub RAM 130c.

In step S642, the sub CPU 130 performs an effect mode setting process for setting any one of a plurality of effect modes A to G relating to the execution of the variable effect.
The effect mode is to notify the currently set game state in a predetermined notification mode.
Specifically, with reference to the production mode setting table shown in FIGS. 36 (1) and (2), when the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, it is notified that the current game state is a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state Set any of the normal modes A to C, and when in a high probability time-saving gaming state, set a probability variable mode D or E that informs that the current game state is a high probability time-saving gaming state, and set a low probability time-saving game state. In the game state, a time saving mode F or G is set to inform that the current game state is a low probability time saving game state.

In setting the effect mode corresponding to the current game state, for example, the effect image for notifying the current game information is displayed on the image display device 16 and/or the image display device 16 is held to be displayed. By making the notification mode of the icon image, the variable icon image, the background image, the character image and the effect pattern image different from the notification mode in other production modes, the current game state (low probability non-time-saving game state, low probability time-saving game state, high probability time saving game state) is notified.

For example, in the normal mode A, a normal background image with the image of a mountain, a production pattern image in a display mode composed of a number (identification part) and a character image (decorative part) are displayed, and the normal mode A While the BGM is output, in the probability variation mode D, the probability variation background image that imaged the sea, the production pattern image of the display mode composed only of numbers (identification part) is displayed, and the probability variation mode D BGM for is output. In addition, in time-saving mode F, a background image for time-saving with an image of the sky and an effect pattern image in a display mode consisting only of numbers (identification part) are displayed, and BGM for time-saving mode F is output. .
In addition, while the right-handed promotion image (“Right-handed →” image) is displayed in the variable probability modes D, E and the time-saving modes F, G, the right-handed promotion image is displayed in the normal modes A to C. not.

In addition, when the game ball wins in the first start port 10a in the variable probability modes D and E (time saving modes F and G), the effect symbol image and the background image are displayed, but the pending icon image and the variable icon No image is displayed. In other words, when the game ball wins in the first start port 10 during normal mode A to C than when the game ball wins in the first start port 10 in the variable probability / time saving mode D ~ G or when the game ball wins in the variable probability / time saving mode When a game ball wins in the second starting hole 11a during D to G, the pending image and the variable icon image are more likely to be displayed.
In addition, when the game is performed aiming at winning the first start port 10 during the probability variable / time saving mode D to G (left-handed game), the right-handed promotion image is continuously displayed, and "right-handed Please" is displayed, and a voice saying "Please hit to the right" is output to notify that the current production mode is the probability variable/time saving mode.

For example, as a predetermined switching condition for switching from normal mode A to normal mode B, for example, a predetermined number of times of guaranteed stay has passed, or a mode shift after a predetermined number of times of guaranteed stay has passed. For example, winning a lottery. Specifically, when the normal mode A is set, on the condition that the number of games played in the normal mode A reaches 20 times, the next game (21 times from the start of the game in the normal mode A) rotation) to normal mode B. Alternatively, when the normal mode A is set, after the number of games played in the normal mode A reaches 20 times, a predetermined A mode transition lottery with a probability of winning (for example, 1/5) is executed every time one game is started, and on the condition that the mode transition lottery is won, normal mode A is changed from normal mode A to normal mode in the game that wins the mode transition lottery. You may make it switch to B. In addition, it is the same also about probability variable mode and time saving mode.

As shown in FIG. 36 (2), the time saving modes F and G are set according to three game state setting opportunities.
Specifically, when a time-saving game state is set after the end of the jackpot game, or when the jackpot game is not executed when the low-probability non-time-saving game state reaches a predetermined number of times (750 times) and the b time-saving gaming state is set, or when the jackpot game is not executed when the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is set, the specific first special symbol of the loss is stopped and displayed. When the c time-saving game state is set, the time-saving modes F and G are set. That is, the time saving modes F and G are set even if any of the time saving game state a, the time saving game state b, and the time saving game state c is set.

As shown in FIG. 36 (2), when the a time-saving game state is set, the time-saving mode entry effect is executed during the jackpot game (during the ending game) immediately before the time-saving mode is set, and the "right-handed" is executed. Sound is output. Further, a card return prompting display for prompting the player to return the prepaid card to warn the player against forgetting to take out the prepaid card and a addiction caution display for drawing the player's attention to the addiction.

b When the time-saving game state is set, the time-saving mode entry effect is executed when the time-saving mode is set, and the sound of "right hitting" is output. During the variable display of the special symbols of the predetermined number of times (750th time) which is immediately before the setting of the time saving mode, the effect of entering the time saving mode is not executed, and the sound of "right hitting" is not output.

c When the time-saving game state is set, the time-saving mode entry effect is executed when the time-saving mode is set, and the sound of "right-handed" is output. During the variable display in which the lost specific first special symbol is stop-displayed just before the time-saving mode is set, the performance for entering the time-saving mode is not executed and the sound of "right-handed" is not output.

In addition, when the time-saving gaming state is set, the time-saving modes F and G are set, and when the b time-saving gaming state is set, or when the c time-saving gaming state is set, the time-saving mode F, A time-saving mode of a notification mode different from the notification mode of G (for example, effect pattern image, background image) may be set.

In step S643, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the opening specifying command. If it is determined that the command is not an opening designation command (step S643; No), the process proceeds to step S645.

In step S644, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot effect pattern determination process for determining a jackpot start effect pattern. In the jackpot performance pattern determination process, a jackpot start performance pattern is determined based on an opening designation command, the determined jackpot start performance pattern is set in a performance pattern storage area, and information on the determined jackpot performance pattern is sent to an image control unit 140. , the corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c so as to be transmitted to the lamp control unit 150. FIG.

In step S645, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the round designation command. If it is determined that the command is not a round designation command (step S645; No), the process proceeds to step S647.

In step S646, the sub CPU 130a performs in-round effect pattern determination processing for determining a jackpot effect pattern. In the mid-round effect pattern determination process, a mid-round effect pattern is determined for each round to be started based on a round designation command having information about how many times the round game is to be started. Then, the determined in-round effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c in order to transmit the information of the effect pattern to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. .

In step S647, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending specifying command. If it is determined that the command is not an ending designation command (step S647; No), the current command analysis process is terminated.

In step S648, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot end effect pattern determination process for determining a jackpot end effect pattern. In the jackpot end performance pattern determination processing, a jackpot end performance pattern is determined based on an ending designation command, the determined jackpot end performance pattern is set in a performance pattern storage area, and information on the determined jackpot end performance pattern is sent to an image control unit. 140 and the lamp controller 150, the corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.

(Continuous notice effect determination process)
FIG. 37 is a flow chart for explaining continuous announcement effect determination processing by the effect control section 130m.
The sub CPU 130a executes the continuous announcement effect determination process when the start winning opening designation command (prefetch designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is stored in the reception buffer.

In step S651, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received start winning opening designation command (prefetching designation command), and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot game, and the content of the effect (special figure scheduled variation pattern).
In step S652, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is currently executable, and if it is determined that the continuous notice effect is executable (step S652; Yes), the process proceeds to step S653. , and when it is determined that it is not the period during which the continuous announcement effect can be executed (step S652; No), the process is moved to step S665.

Examples of the continuous advance notice effects include a character object action notice effect, an effect notice effect, a vibration notice effect, a look-ahead zone effect, and a combination effect of a plurality of these advance notice effects.
The "role object movement notice effect" is a timing immediately after the start of each variable effect in one or a plurality of variable effects, or a timing after a predetermined time has passed since the start, and any of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is set to a predetermined value. This is a predetermined performance intermittently suggesting the degree of expectation for execution of the big win game by executing the role product performance to be operated in the operation mode.

"Effect notice effect" is a predetermined color (blue, green, red etc.) is a predetermined effect that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation for execution of a big hit game by executing an effect effect effect of displaying an effect image (effect effect image).

"Vibration notice effect (vibration notice at start of fluctuation)" executes vibration effects with the effect button 6a/movable effect members 17A to 17C in a predetermined effect mode at the timing immediately after the start of each variable effect in one or more variable effects. This is an effect intermittently suggesting the degree of expectation for execution of the jackpot game.
The effect mode of the button vibration notice effect by the effect button 6a includes button vibration time (long vibration, short vibration), button vibration intensity (strong vibration, weak vibration), button light emission (white, red, rainbow light emission), It is composed of a combination of any of a plurality of button vibration patterns (repeating small vibrations, only one vibration, etc.).

The production mode of the character object vibration notice production by the movable production members 17A to 17C is the vibration time of the movable production member (long vibration, short vibration), the vibration intensity of the movable production member (strong vibration, weak vibration), and the movable production member. light emission (white, red, rainbow light emission), and the vibration pattern of the movable production member (repeated vibration in small steps, only one vibration, etc.).
It should be noted that the effect button 6a and the movable effect members 17A to 17C may be used to perform a vibration advance notice effect. For example, the production button 6a strongly vibrates in a short time, and the movable production member 17A strongly vibrates in a short time.

The ``predictive zone effect'' is a effect that continuously suggests the degree of expectation for execution of a big win game by executing a mid-zone effect of displaying a zone image from a predetermined timing in one or a plurality of variable effects.
The ``executable period of continuous notice effect'' is that there is no precedent reservation to execute the continuous notice effect, that the jackpot game is not being executed, and the starting entrance winning designation command based on the winning of the first starting entrance 10 (pre-reading specified command) is received, it is a low probability non-time-saving gaming state or a low-probability time-saving gaming state, and when a starting opening winning designation command based on the winning of the second starting opening 11a (prefetching designated command) is received Is a high-probability time-saving gaming state or a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state.
As a continuous advance notice effect other than the above continuous notice effect, a light guide plate may be arranged on the front side of the image display device 16, and a light guide plate effect may be executed in which the light guide plate emits blue or red light at the start of fluctuation. good. The expectation of a big hit is higher when the light guide plate emits red light than when it emits blue light.

In step S653, the sub CPU 130a selects a continuous announcement effect type determination table (FIGS. 38 and 39) corresponding to the current effect mode.
In step S654, the sub CPU 130a refers to the continuous announcement effect type determination table to determine the continuous announcement effect type (whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, the type of the continuous announcement effect to be executed).

In step S655, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous announcement type is for executing the continuous announcement effect, and if it is determined to execute the continuous announcement effect (step S655; Yes), the process proceeds to step S656, and the continuous announcement effect is executed. If it is determined not to execute the notice effect (step S655; No), the process proceeds to step S665.
In step S656, the sub CPU 130a selects a continuous announcement scenario determination table corresponding to the current effect mode, and shifts the process to step S657.

In step S657, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous announcement effect for executing the accessory action announcement effect has been determined, and when it is determined to execute the accessory action announcement effect (step S657; Yes), step S658 , and when it is determined that the performance for notifying the action of the accessory is not to be executed (step S657; No), the process is moved to step S659.
In step S658, the sub CPU 130a refers to the continuous announcement scenario determination table to determine the announcement scenario of the accessory action announcement effect, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S659, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a continuous advance notice effect for executing the effect notice effect has been determined, and when it is determined that the effect notice effect is to be executed (step S659; Yes), the process proceeds to step S660. If it is determined not to execute the effect announcement presentation (step S659; No), the process proceeds to step S661.
In step S660, the sub CPU 130a refers to the continuous announcement scenario determination table to determine the announcement scenario of the effect announcement effect and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S661, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous advance notice effect for executing the vibration notice effect has been determined, and when it is determined to execute the vibration notice effect (step S661; Yes), the process proceeds to step S662. , When it is determined not to execute the vibration announcement effect (step S661; No), the process proceeds to step S662.
In step S662, the sub CPU 130a determines which of the vibration effect by the effect button 6a and the vibration effect by the movable effect members 17A to 17C is to be executed, and determines which vibration effect is to be executed by referring to the continuous advance notice scenario determination table. A notice scenario is determined and set in the pre-reading information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.
Incidentally, the vibration effect by the effect button 6a may be executed at a higher rate than the vibration effect by the movable effect members 17A to 17C, or the vibration effect by the movable effect members 17A to 17C may be higher. , the execution ratio may be higher than that of the vibration effect by the effect button 6a.

In step S663, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous advance notice effect for executing the look-ahead zone effect has been determined, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead zone effect (step S663; Yes), the process proceeds to step S664. , when it is determined not to execute the look-ahead zone effect (step S663; No), the current continuous announcement effect determination process is terminated.

In step S665, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-notice scenario of the continuous advance notice effect (notice scenario indicating that the continuous notice effect is not executed) when executing the advance notice effect based on the start winning opening designation command (prefetching designation command). Then, it is set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current continuous announcement effect determination processing is terminated.

The advance notice effect executed based on the non-prediction scenario set in step S665 includes a prize-winning button vibration notice effect, a prize-winning lever vibration notice effect, and a lever actuation notice effect.
"At the time of winning button/lever vibration notice effect" is a vibration effect (effect This is an advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the execution of the jackpot game by executing the vibrating effect without displaying the effective period of the button 6a/effect lever 6h and the operation promoting image. It should be noted that the likelihood of a big hit is higher in the prize-winning lever vibration notice effect than in the prize-winning button vibration notice effect.

In the case of the prize-winning button vibration notice performance, the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the performance button 6a strongly vibrates for only 3 seconds, and the performance button 6a flashes in red. In addition, the sound output device 9 outputs a winning effect sound. In normal modes A to C, the button vibration notice effect at the time of winning is more likely when SP/SPSP reach is scheduled to be executed (prefetch result) than when normal reach effect is scheduled to be executed (prefetch result). is easily executed (execution rate is high). In other words, when the button vibration forewarning effect at the time of winning is executed, it is suggested that the expectation for the big win is high.

In the case of the prize-winning lever vibration notice performance, the lever vibration motor 6j for vibrating the performance lever 6h strongly vibrates only for 2 seconds, and the performance lever 6h flashes blue. In addition, the sound output device 9 outputs a winning effect sound. In normal modes A to C, the prize-winning effect lever vibration notice effect is more likely to occur when the SP/SPSP reach is scheduled to be executed (prefetch result) than when the normal reach effect is scheduled to be executed (prefetch result). is set so that it is easier to execute (higher execution ratio). In other words, when the prize-winning lever vibration forewarning effect is executed, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for the big win is high.

In addition, based on the pre-determination information (information on the special figure scheduled variation pattern) determined in the pre-determination table of FIG. Among them, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 10, it is set to be more difficult to execute than when a game ball wins in the second starting port 11a.
In addition, when the game ball wins the first start port 10 during the variable probability / time saving mode D~G, it is executed more than when the game ball wins the first start port 10 during the normal mode A~C. It is set to be difficult.

(Continuous notice production type decision table)
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a continuous announcement effect type determination table that is referred to for determining the continuous announcement effect type in normal modes A to C (low-probability short-time gaming state (normal game state)).
FIG. 39 is a continuous notice effect that is referred to determine the type of continuous notice effect in variable probability modes D, E and time saving modes F, G (high probability time saving game state, low probability time saving game state (specific game state)) It is a figure which shows a classification determination table.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the continuous notice effect type determination table includes a start winning mouth designation command (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern), a selection rate (%) of each continuous notice effect type, and a continuous notice effect to be selected. A type is associated.

Continuous notice effect types include "non-execution" that does not execute continuous notice effects, "character action notice effect" that executes one of multiple types of continuous notice effects, "effect notice effect", and "vibration notice effect". Effect", "Look-ahead Zone Effect", and 2 types of continuous announcement effects are executed, "Effect Notice Effect & Vibration Notice Effect", and "Character Movement Notice Effect & Look-Ahead Zone Effect" are provided. .

For example, in the normal mode, when the first start winning opening designation command (special figure scheduled variation pattern) is lost and the SP reach effect is executed, "non-execution" is determined at 84%, 5 % decides the "effect notice effect", 4% decides the "character action notice effect", 4% decides the "vibration notice effect", 2% decides the "look-ahead zone effect", and 1 % determines the "effect notice effect & button vibration notice effect". In other words, in the normal mode, when the winning of the game ball to the first start port 10 and the SP reach effect are executed, the continuous notice by one kind of notice effect is preferable to the continuous notice effect by a plurality of kinds of notice effects. Directing is easier to execute.

For example, when the probability variation / time saving mode, when the first start winning mouth designation command (special figure scheduled variation pattern) is to execute the normal variation effect of losing, 99% "non-execution" is determined, 1 % determines the "effect notice production".
In other words, when the probability variable / time saving mode, when the normal fluctuation effect of losing due to the winning of the game ball to the first start port 10 is executed, it is regulated, that is, the continuous notice effect is not executed. including the low rate of

In addition, when the probability variable / time saving mode, if the first starting mouth winning designation command (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) is to be executed with a special reach, the "non-execution" is determined at 98%. , 1% decides the "character object motion notice effect", and 1% decides the "vibration notice effect". In other words, in the probability variable / time saving mode, when the winning variable production of the game ball to the first start port 10 is executed, it is regulated, that is, it includes not executing the continuous notice production. including low execution rates.

In addition, when the probability variation/time reduction mode, when the first start winning opening designation command (special figure scheduled variation pattern) is to execute the variation performance of the jackpot, "non-execution" is determined at 85%. In other words, in the probability variable/time saving mode, even when the variation performance of the big hit is executed by winning the game ball to the first start port 10, the execution of the continuous notice performance is regulated, that is, the continuous notice performance is not executed. It also includes the low rate of execution.

It should be noted that, in addition to the above-described continuous announcement effect, a background change announcement effect in which the background image changes or a story progress effect (for example, a countdown effect) may be executed.
The “background change notice effect” is a notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation for execution of the special game by changing the background image in the order of the morning background stage, the daytime background stage, the evening background stage, and the night background stage.
The degree of expectation for the jackpot of the background change notice is "morning background"<"daytime background"<"evening background"<"night background".

(Consecutive notice production scenario decision table)
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a continuous announcement scenario determination table for normal modes A to C (low-probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)).
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a continuous notice scenario determination table for probability variable modes D and E (high probability time saving gaming state (specific game state)) and time saving modes F and G (low probability time saving gaming state (specific game state)) be.

In the continuous notice scenario decision table, the number of reserved special symbols, the start winning mouth designation command (prefetching designation command) (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each notice scenario, and the notice scenario to be selected are associated. For reference, the advance variations in each scenario (before 4 variations, before 3 variations, before 2 variations, and before 1 variation) and the effects of continuous advance notice effects in the variations are described.

"Advance variation" means a variation display (variation performance) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received start winning opening designation command. .
"The variation" indicates a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received start winning opening designation command.

The "weak notice" has a different presentation mode depending on the type of continuous notice presentation.
In the case of the performance of the performance foretelling the movement of the role object, the first movable production member 17A emits blue light, and the blade part housed in the scabbard part performs a weak movement with a small movement width to the left, and a weak movement sound effect is produced. output. In addition, the performance lever 6h may be moved up and down as a performance for notifying the action of the role product. In this case, the production lever 6h performs a weak action with a small vertical movement width.
In the case of the effect notice effect, a blue effect image is displayed around the effect pattern 16a, and a blue effect sound is output.
In the case of the button vibration advance notice performance, the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the performance button 6a weakly vibrates for one second, and the performance button 6a flashes white.
In the case of the role object vibration notice effect, the role object vibration motor for vibrating the first movable effect member 17A weakly vibrates for only one second, and the first movable effect member 17A blinks white.
In the case of the look-ahead zone effect, a blue zone image is displayed and a zone effect sound is output.

The "strong notice" has a different effect mode depending on the type of continuous notice effect. In addition, the "strong notice" has a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the "weak notice".
In the case of the performance of the performance of the character action, the third movable production member 17C emits red light, and the blade section housed in the scabbard section performs a strong action with a large movement width and moves up and down, and a strong action sound effect is produced. output. In addition, the performance lever 6h may be moved up and down as a performance for notifying the action of the role product. In this case, the effect lever 6h performs a strong action with a large vertical movement width.
In the case of the effect notice effect, a red effect image is displayed around the effect pattern 16a, and a red effect sound different from the blue effect sound is output.
In the case of the button vibration advance notice performance, the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the performance button 6a strongly vibrates for only 3 seconds, and the performance button 6a blinks in red.
In the case of the role object vibration notice effect, the role object vibration motor for vibrating the first movable effect member 17A strongly vibrates for only 3 seconds, and the first movable effect member 17A flashes red.
In the case of the look-ahead zone effect, a red heat zone image is displayed and a heat zone sound effect different from the zone sound effect is output.

The continuous notice scenario includes a scenario in which a weak notice and a strong notice are not executed during the prior , a scenario (for example, scenario 22) in which a weak or strong notice is executed is set.

In addition, when the probability variable / time saving mode D, E, even if the game ball wins in the first start port 10, even if the game ball wins in the second start port 11a, the probability variable / time saving mode of FIG. However, a continuous scenario determination table for the first start port 10 and a continuous scenario determination table for the second start port 11a may be provided.
In the continuous scenario determination table for the first start port 10, a ratio of selecting a scenario with a smaller number of executions of the continuous notice effects in the case of a loss and in the case of a big win is higher than in the continuous scenario determination table for the second start port 11a. set high.
In addition, in the continuous announcement scenario determination table for the first start port 10, there are scenarios in which the number of times of execution of the continuous announcement effect is smaller in the case of losing and in the case of a big win than in the continuous announcement scenario determination table for the continuous announcement scenario for the normal mode. The ratio of selection is set high.

As a first feature of the various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. However, the expectation of the jackpot is high. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

As the second feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. is easily executed (execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of differentiating the execution ratio of the continuous notice effect between the normal modes A to C and the probability variable / time saving modes D to G, for example, the normal mode B is more continuous notice effect than the normal mode A Such as making it easier to execute, the execution ratio of the continuous notice effect may be different between the normal modes A to C, and for example, the probability change mode E is more likely than the probability change mode D. Continuous notice effect is executed. For example, the execution ratio of the continuous announcement effect may be changed between the variable probability/time saving modes D to G. By doing so, the degree of expectation for the big win of the continuous advance notice effect changes between the same effect modes, so it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a third feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. In modes D to G, continuous announcement effects (here, effect announcement effects, character object action announcement effects) are more likely to be executed when the normal ready-to-win effect is scheduled to be executed (prefetch result). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variable production from becoming monotonous in the probability variable / short time modes D to G, which tend to have more (ultra) shortened variations than the normal modes A to C, and to improve the interest of the game. Become.

As a fourth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. In the time saving mode D ~ G, when the SP reach production is scheduled to be executed (prefetch result), continuous notice production (here, effect notice production, character movement notice production, look-ahead zone production) is more likely to be executed. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variation performance from becoming monotonous in the probability variation/shortening time mode, in which (super) shortening variation tends to increase more than in the normal modes A to C, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. When the SPSP ready-to-win performance is scheduled to be executed (read-ahead result) in modes D to G, the continuous announcement performance (here, effect announcement presentation, role object movement announcement presentation, and look-ahead zone presentation) is more likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variation presentation from becoming monotonous in the probability variation/shortening time modes D to G, in which super-shortening variation tends to increase more than in the normal modes A to C, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. When the all-rotation ready-to-win performance is scheduled to be executed (read-ahead result) in the time-saving modes D to G, the continuous announcement performance (here, the character action announcement presentation, the look-ahead zone presentation) is more likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous in the probability variable/shortening time mode, in which the super-shortening fluctuation tends to increase more than in the normal modes A to C, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the seventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. effective period (display of operation promotion image)) is likely to be executed (high execution rate = different jackpot expectations). Therefore, in the normal modes A to C, where the length of stay tends to be longer than in the variable probability/time saving modes D to G, it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the button vibration notice effect, and to improve the interest of the game. Become. In addition, in the probability variable/time-saving modes D to G in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shorter than in the normal modes A to C, the button vibration advance notice performance can be made to have rarity, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the button vibration notice effect may be executed more easily (at a higher execution rate) in the variable probability/time saving modes D to G than in the normal modes A to C. In addition, if it is a low-probability short-time gaming state, the normal mode A is easier to execute the look-ahead continuous effect than the normal mode B or C, so that the button vibration notice effect is performed between the normal modes A to C. The execution ratio may be different, and if it is a high probability time saving game state or a low probability time saving game state, the probability change mode D is more likely than the probability change / time saving mode E ~ G. The button vibration notice effect is executed. By making it easy, the execution ratio of the button vibration notice effect may be changed between the variable probability/time saving modes D to G. In this way, since it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for a big win when the button vibration notice effect is executed between the effect modes, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As the eighth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41, the character object vibration notice effect is executed in the normal modes A to C rather than in the variable probability/time saving modes D to G. easy. Therefore, it is possible for the player to expect that a big win game may be executed in the normal modes A to C, in which the staying period tends to be longer than in the variable probability/time saving modes D to G, and the interest in the game is improved. becomes possible.

It should be noted that the probability variable/time saving mode D~G may be easier to execute the role product vibration announcement effect (execution ratio is higher) than the normal mode A~C. In addition, if it is a low-probability short-time gaming state, the normal mode A is easier to execute the look-ahead continuous effect than the normal mode B or C, so that the character vibration notice is performed between the normal modes A to C. The execution ratio of the production may be different, and if it is a high-probability time-saving game state or a low-probability time-saving game state, the probability change mode D is better than the probability change / time reduction mode E ~ G. By making it easier to execute, the execution ratio of the role product vibration notice effect may be changed between the variable probability/time saving modes D to G. By doing so, it is possible to make the degree of expectation for a big win different between the performance modes when the role object vibration forewarning performance is executed, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a ninth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. 38 to 41, specific reach effects (normal reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects) are scheduled to be executed in normal modes A to C. (Look-ahead result), specific reach production (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production) is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in probability variable / time-saving mode D ~ G (specific game state) In the case, it is difficult to execute the button vibration forewarning effect (role object vibration forewarning effect) (the execution ratio is low). Therefore, in variable/time-saving modes D to G, where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in normal modes A to C, the button vibration notice effect (role object vibration notice effect) can be given a rarity, improving the interest of the game. It is possible to

As the tenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. easy (high execution rate). Therefore, in the probability variable/short time modes D to G in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shorter than in the normal modes A to C, it is possible to give rarity to the performance of the performance of the action of the character, and to improve the interest of the game. .

As the eleventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41, the probability variable / If the continuous notice effect that ends with one fluctuation effect in time saving mode D to G is executed, the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect ) is difficult to execute (percentage of execution is low). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the twelfth feature of various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. If the continuous notice effect that ends with two fluctuation effects in normal modes A to C is executed, the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect ) is easy to execute. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. Modes D ~ G (specific game state) than when the continuous notice effect of only one variation effect is executed, in the normal mode A ~ C when the continuous notice effect of only one variation effect is executed The ready-to-win effect (normal ready-to-win effect, SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect) is more likely to be executed in the variable effect that is the notice target of the continuous notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a 14th feature of various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. In the case where the continuous notice effect of only one variable effect is executed in the variable probability mode D ~ G (specific game state) than the case where the continuous notice effect of only one variable effect is executed in the mode A ~ C In this case, the normal fluctuation effect without the ready-to-win effect is more likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the fifteenth feature of various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. 38 to 41, the normal mode In the case where the continuous notice effect over three times of variable effects is executed in A to C, the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is executed in the variable effect that is the subject of the notice of the continuous notice effect. easy. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 16th feature of various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. In the case where the continuous advance notice performance over three times of fluctuation performance is executed in D to G, it is easier to execute the normal fluctuation performance without the ready-to-win performance in the fluctuation performance to be the notice target of the continuous advance notice performance. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 17th feature of various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. In the case where the continuous notice effect over 3 times of fluctuation effects is executed in D to G, the reach effect with high expectations for the big hit in the change effect that is the target of the notice of the continuous notice effect (for example, the SP reach effect, the SPSP reach effect ) is easy to execute. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 18th feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. Although it is possible to execute the object action foretelling performance, the degree of expectation for a big hit when the role object action foretelling performance is executed is different between the normal modes A to C and the probability variable/time-saving modes D to G. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the nineteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. The ratio (100%) of operating any one of the movable production members 17A to 17C is higher than the ratio (0%) of operating all the movable members 17A to 17C used in production. . Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that a jackpot is won just because the performance for notifying the action of the accessory is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a twentieth feature of various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. The proportion (0%) of the production button 6a in the normal state is higher than the proportion (0%) in which it is in the protruded state. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the effect button 6a projecting (projecting only in the decided effect described later), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Incidentally, in the strong notice of the button vibration notice effect, the effect button 6a may be vibrated in a protruded state instead of being vibrated in the normal state. Even in this case, when the button vibration notice effect is executed in the normal modes A to C and the probability variable / time saving modes D to G, the effect button 6a is in the normal state rather than the ratio of the effect button 6a to the protruding state. It is better to make the ratio of .

As the 21st feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. high-speed fluctuation period), a weak notice of the performance notice of the performance (weak operation of the first movable production member 17A + blue light emission) and a weak notice of the effect notice production (display of a blue effect image around the production pattern 16a) is executed, the weak notice of the button vibration notice effect executed without an effective period (display of the operation promotion image) (weak vibration of the effect button 6a for 1 second) is executed. , the expectation of the jackpot increases. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player by using the operation means that the player can operate, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 22nd feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. high-speed fluctuation period), a strong notice of the character object action notice production (strong action of the second movable production member 17B + red light emission) and a strong notice of the effect notice production (display of a red effect image around the production pattern 16a) The degree of expectation for the big win is higher when the strong notice of the button vibration notice effect (strong vibration of the effect button 6a for 3 seconds) is executed than when is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player by using the operation means that the player can operate, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 23rd feature of various tables related to the continuous notice production shown in FIG. 39 (1), based on the production mode setting table shown in FIG. Even if the probability variable / time saving mode is set according to the state, even if the time saving mode is set corresponding to the b time saving game state, even if the time saving mode is set corresponding to the c time saving game state, continuous notice production have the same execution ratio. Therefore, regardless of the setting trigger condition of the variable probability/time saving mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without changing the game property.

As the 24th feature of various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. Also, when the game ball wins in the second start port 11, the continuous notice effect is more likely to be executed. Also, as shown in FIGS. Continuous announcement performance is more likely to be executed when a game ball wins in a first start port 10 during normal modes A to C than in a case where a game ball wins in one start port 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, an appropriate game effect can be executed according to the type of effect mode, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39 (1), when the game ball wins in the second starting port 11a during the probability variable / time saving mode D ~ G button vibration notice effect (character object vibration notice effect) can be executed However, as shown in FIG. 39 (2), even if the game ball wins the first start port 10 during the variable probability / time saving mode D to G, the button vibration notice effect (character object vibration notice effect) is difficult to execute ( not executed in case of failure). In other words, when the game ball wins in the second start port 11a than when the game ball wins in the first start port 10a in the probability variable / time saving mode D to G, the button vibration notice effect (accessory Vibration warning effect) is likely to be executed.

Also, during the normal modes A to C, it switches to the time saving modes F and G corresponding to the time saving game state b or c. When the game ball wins in the second starting port 10 during the time saving mode, the continuous notice performance is executed more than when the game ball wins in the first starting port 10a in the probability variable/time saving mode D~G. easy to be

Also, during the normal modes A to C, it switches to the time saving modes F and G corresponding to the time saving game state b or c. When the game ball wins the second start port 10 during the time saving mode, the button vibration notice effect ( role object vibration forewarning performance) is likely to be executed. Therefore, an appropriate game effect can be executed according to the type of effect mode, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Incidentally, as the continuous advance notice effect, in addition to the above-described continuous notice effect, any one or all of the winning entrance lamp NR, the board lighting device 23, and the frame lighting device 27 may be used to execute a lamp change effect. good. In addition, when the lamp change effect is executed by the winning hole lamp and the board lighting device 23 (or the frame lighting device 27), the jackpot expectation is higher than the case where the lamp change effect is executed by the winning hole lamp. be high.

Concretely, the lamp change effect includes the first notification that is notified at the timing when the game ball enters the starting port 10, and the second notification that is notified at the symbol variation start timing different from the first notification.

The first notification can be performed in the first mode (the winning entrance lamp blinks or emits blue light) and the second mode (the winning entrance lamp emits red light), and the second notification is performed in the first mode and the second mode. It is possible to execute a third mode (the winning hole lamp and the lighting device for the board emit light, or the winning hole lamp and the lighting device for the frame emit light).
Alternatively, the first notification includes the first mode (the winning hole lamp flashes or emits blue light), the second mode (the winning hole lamp emits red light), and the third mode (the winning hole lamp and board lighting device or the winning hole The lamp and the frame lighting device emit light), and the second notification can be executed in the same first mode and second mode as the first notification, but in the same third mode as the first notification. does not change.

Also, as a continuous notice effect, when "1st notification of lamp light emission effect & button vibration notice effect" and "2nd notice of lamp light emission effect & button vibration notice effect" are provided (multiple types of notice effects is executed), when the SP reach or SPSP reach is executed in the variable effect of the notice target, rather than the “first notification of the lamp light emission effect & button vibration notice effect”, the “second notification of the lamp light effect & "Button vibration notice effect" may be easier to execute, or "Lamp light effect first notice & button vibration notice effect" than "Lamp light effect second notice & button vibration notice effect" may be made easier to execute.

In addition to the continuous notice effect described above, as the continuous notice effect, different loss effect patterns 16a of the same color (for example, "2 (dog) 4 (chicken) 6" displayed in red in one or a plurality of fluctuation effects) (Tiger)” is stopped and displayed to intermittently suggest the degree of expectation for the execution of the jackpot game. The degree of expectation for the big hit of the chance eye is "yellow"<"green"<"red".

Further, based on FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, the chance notice effect and the button vibration notice effect may be executed. In this case, when the losing performance pattern 16a is stop-displayed in the losing fluctuation performance, and the losing performance pattern 16a (normal losing, ready-to-win losing) not suggesting the degree of expectation of the big win is stopped-displayed, the button vibration notice performance is not executed. When the same-color losing performance symbol 16a suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit is stopped and displayed, it can be said that the button vibration forewarning effect can be executed.

When the chance notice effect and the button vibration notice effect are executed, and when the yellow or green losing effect pattern 16a is stopped and displayed, the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a is weakened for one second. Along with the vibration, the production button 6a flashes white. On the other hand, when the red losing production pattern 16a is stopped and displayed, the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the production button 6a strongly vibrates for only 3 seconds, and the production button 6a blinks in red.

(Variation effect pattern determination process)
FIG. 42 is a flow chart for explaining the variation production pattern determination processing by the production control unit 130m.
The sub CPU 130a executes a variation performance pattern determination process when the special figure variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is stored in the reception buffer. In this variation production pattern determination process, various production devices such as the image display devices 16 and 18 (the production button device 6A, the selection button device 6B, the production lever device 6C, the board driving device) are displayed during the variable display of the special symbols. 17 (movable production members 17A to 17C), lighting device for board 23, lighting device for frame 27), and a variable production pattern indicating how to control the production operation of winning opening lamp NR is determined.

First, in step S801, the sub CPU 130a acquires the effect random number value updated in step S540.
Next, in step S802, the sub CPU 130a sets the variable effect pattern determination table of FIG. 43 or 44 with reference to the current game state and effect mode.

In step S803, the sub CPU 130a selects one variable effect pattern from among a plurality of variable effect patterns based on the variable effect pattern determination table set in step S802 and the random value for effect acquired in step S801. to decide.
Next, in step S804, the sub CPU 130a sets a variable effect pattern designation command in the transmission data storage area in order to transmit the variable effect pattern determined in step S803 to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. When the variable effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 or the lamp control unit 150, the effect button device 6A, the selection button device 6B, the effect lever device 6C, the voice output device 9, The image display devices 16 and 18, the board driving device 17 (movable effect members 17A to 17C), the board lighting device 23, the frame lighting device 27, and the winning hole lamp NR are controlled.

In step S805, the sub CPU 130a sets the effect execution time (variable effect time) of the variable effect pattern determined in step S803 to the variable effect timer counter of the sub RAM 130c. Incidentally, the variable performance timer counter is subtracted by 1 every 4 ms in step S602. The sub CPU 130a can specify the remaining effect execution time (variable effect time) of the variable effect by the variable effect timer counter, in other words, the time elapsed since the variable effect was started.
In step S806, the sub CPU 130a sets the variable effect data corresponding to the variable effect pattern in the variable effect data storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S807, the sub CPU 130a specifies special symbol variation display data for causing the first special symbol second display device 20a or the second special symbol second display device 20b to perform special symbol variation display (blinking of the LED). set to the processing area of . As a result, when the special symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S604, and the created data is output in step S605. The variable display of the second display 20a or the second special symbol second display 20b is started.

In step S808, the sub CPU 130a sets a special symbol variable display designation command for variably displaying the special symbol TZ in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Incidentally, the special symbol variation display designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control section 140 in the data output process of step S606. Then, the variable display of the special symbol TZ in the special symbol variable display area is performed by the image control unit 140 .

(Variation production pattern decision table)
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a normal mode variable effect pattern determination table referred to for determining a variable effect pattern in normal modes A to C. FIG.
FIG. 44 (1) is for the probability variation / time reduction mode (for the second special symbol) variation performance that is referenced to determine the variation performance pattern corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol in the probability variation / time reduction mode D ~ G It is a figure which shows a pattern determination table.
FIG. 44 (2) is for the probability variation / time reduction mode (for the first special symbol) variation performance referred to for determining the variation performance pattern corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in the probability variation / time reduction mode D ~ G It is a figure which shows a pattern determination table.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the variable performance pattern determination table is associated with a special figure variation pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of each variable performance pattern, and the type of the selected variable performance pattern. . As a reference, the production configuration (production mode) in each variable production pattern is described.

The "fluctuation effect pattern" means that the image display devices 16, 18, the audio output device 9, the effect button device 6A, the selection button device 6B, the effect lever device during the variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol indicators 19a, 19b. 6C, a variable production effect performed using various production devices such as the board driving device 17 (movable production members 17A to 17C), the board lighting device 23, the frame lighting device 27, and the winning opening lamp NR.

"Normal fluctuation" in the column of effect configuration indicates that normal fluctuation display (production time: 8 seconds) in which the ready-to-win state does not occur is performed by the effect pattern 16a.
"Long fluctuation" means that the production time is longer than the normal fluctuation production (production time: 8 seconds) (production time: 10 seconds), and the long fluctuation display without reach state that does not generate the reach state is performed. .

“Shortened variation” means that the rendering time is shorter than the normal variable rendering (rendering time: 8 seconds) (rendering time: 4 seconds), and the shortened variation display without the reach state is performed. .
“Super-shortened fluctuation” means that the production time is shorter than the reduced-variation production (production time: 4 seconds) (production time: 3 seconds), and the super-shortened fluctuation display without reach that does not generate the reach state is performed. ing.

"Pseudo" means that a pseudo continuous advance notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit is performed by temporarily stopping and re-changing the effect pattern 16a (pseudo continuous effect) once or more during one fluctuation effect. showing.
"Pseudo-flashing" means that, as a result of executing the fanning production of whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice will be executed, a pseudo-flashing fluctuation production that results in the fact that the pseudo-continuous notice will not be executed (pseudo-failure) is executed. It is shown that.
"Pseudo 1" indicates that the first temporary stop and re-variation (pseudo continuous effect) of the effect symbol 16a are performed as a pseudo continuous notice.
"Pseudo 2" indicates that the effect pattern 16a is temporarily stopped and changed again (pseudo continuous effect) for the second time as a pseudo continuous notice.
"Pseudo 3" indicates that the effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped and changed again (pseudo continuous effect) for the third time as a pseudo continuous notice.

The "ready-to-win provocation" is to incite whether or not to temporarily stop with the production pattern 16a that constitutes the ready-to-win, and if this production succeeds, the ready-to-win is established, and if this production fails, the ready-to-win is not established. It is shown that.
"Normal reach" indicates that the normal reach effect described above is performed.
"Normal '7'ready-to-win" indicates that the above normal ready-to-win effect is performed in the ready-to-win state by the effect pattern 16a of "7".

"SP reach" indicates that the above-described SP reach effect is performed. A special effect image or the like is displayed as the SP reach effect. For example, a battle effect in which a friend character and an enemy character fight or a mission effect in which a commanded mission is carried out is performed.
"Special SP reach" indicates that the above-described special SP reach effect is performed.

"SPSP ready-to-win" indicates that the above-described SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed. A special effect image or the like is displayed as the SP reach production, for example, a battle production or mission production different from the SP reach production, or a battle production developed from the SP reach production battle or a mission production developed from the SP reach production mission. is done.
"Full-rotation reach" indicates that the above-described full-rotation reach effect is performed.
"Special reach A" indicates that a special reach performance is performed rather than the normal reach performance.
“Special ready-to-reach B” indicates that a special ready-to-reach performance is performed rather than the special ready-to-reach performance.
"Special reach C, D" indicates that a special SPSP reach effect is performed rather than the SPSP reach effect.
"Special ready-to-win E" indicates that a special ready-to-win effect is performed rather than the normal ready-to-win effect or the SP ready-to-win effect, and the determined effect is not executed.

“SP development” indicates that a development effect suggesting that an SP ready-to-win effect is executed is performed.
"SPSP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that the SPSP ready-to-win effect will be executed.
“Full-rotation development” indicates that a development effect suggesting that a full-rotation reach is performed is performed.
"Decision" means that a decision effect that suggests whether or not a jackpot game will be executed is executed according to the operation of the effect button 6a or the operation of the effect lever 6h during the valid period or the elapse of the valid period. showing.

"Re-lottery" refers to whether or not the effect pattern 16a temporarily stopped in the big win display mode according to the big win determination result becomes a big win display mode that is advantageous to the player (from the even number patterns that usually give a big win to the odd number patterns that give a certain variable jackpot). (whether or not the symbols are matched or not, and whether or not the odd-numbered symbols other than 7 are matched to execute the most advantageous jackpot game), and then promotion success performance in which an advantageous jackpot display mode is performed. This shows that a re-lottery effect is performed in which any promotion failure effect that does not result in an advantageous big win display mode is executed.
"Resurrection" means that even if the ready-to-win production is executed and becomes a failure production, a revival production in which either a revival failure production or a revival success production that suggests whether or not the revival jackpot will be achieved will be executed. showing.

In the normal mode A to C variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43, in the case of special symbol 00 (losing), variable effect pattern 03 (normal reach effect), and variable effect patterns 05 and 06 (SP reach effect), even numbers 70% of the ready-to-win production is performed with the production pattern 16a of "7", 30% of the ready-to-win production is performed with the odd-numbered production pattern 16a other than "7", and the ratio of the ready-to-win production is performed with the production pattern 16a of "7". is 0%.

In the case of special pattern 00 (losing) and variable production patterns 05 to 10 (SP reach production or SPSP reach production), the ratio of reaching production with even production pattern 16a is 55%, odd numbers other than "7" The ratio of the ready-to-win performance with the performance pattern 16a is 43%, and the ratio of the ready-to-win performance with the performance pattern 16a of "7" is 2%.

In the case of the special symbol 01 (probability variable jackpot) and the variable performance patterns 13 and 14 (SP reach performance), the ratio of the reach performance to be performed with the even number performance symbols 16a is 60%, and the odd number performance symbols 16a other than "7". 40% of the reach effects are performed.

In the case of the special symbol 01 (probability variable jackpot) and the variable production patterns 17 to 21 (SPSP reach production), the ratio of the reach production to be performed with the even number production pattern 16a is 6%, and the odd number production pattern 16a other than "7". 90% of the ready-to-win performance is performed with , and 4% of the ready-to-win performance is performed with the effect pattern 16a of "7".

In the case of the special pattern 02 (probability variable jackpot) and the variable production patterns 17 to 21 (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production), the ratio of the reach production to be performed with the even number production pattern 16a is 60%, "7". The ratio of the ready-to-win effect to be performed with the odd-numbered effect pattern 16a other than the above is 40%, and the ratio of the ready-to-win effect to be performed with the effect pattern 16a of "7" is 0%.

In the case of special symbol 03 (ordinary jackpot) and variation patterns 17 to 21 (normal ready-to-win effect, SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect), the ratio of ready-to-win effect with even-numbered effect pattern 16a is 100%.

In the case of a special pattern 04 (probable variable jackpot), a special pattern 05 (probable variable jackpot), a special pattern 06 (normal jackpot) and a variable production pattern 30 (special SP ready-to-win production), a ready-to-win production is performed with an even number of production patterns 16a. The percentage is 100%.

In the variable performance pattern determination table for variable/time saving modes D to G shown in FIG. , SPSP ready-to-win performance), the ratio of ready-to-win performance with even-numbered performance patterns 16a is 60%, and the ratio of ready-to-win performance with odd-numbered performance patterns 16a other than "7" is 40%.

In the case of the special pattern 04 (probability variable jackpot) and the variable production patterns 43 and 44 (SP reach production), the proportion of the reach production performed with the even number production pattern 16a is 60%, and the odd number production patterns 16a other than "7". 40% of the reach effects are performed.

In the case of the special pattern 04 (probability variable jackpot) and the variable production patterns 45 and 46 (SP reach production), the ratio of the reach production to be performed with the even number production pattern 16a is 20%, and the odd number production pattern 16a other than "7". 30% of the ready-to-win performance is performed with , and 50% of the ready-to-win performance is performed with the effect pattern 16a of "7".

In the case of the special pattern 04 (probability variable jackpot) and the variable production patterns 47 to 51 (SPSP reach production), the ratio of the reach production to be performed with the even number production pattern 16a is 3%, and the odd number production pattern 16a other than "7". 2% of the ready-to-win production is performed with , and 95% of the ready-to-win production is performed with the effect pattern 16a of "7".

In the case of the special pattern 04 (probability variable jackpot) and the variable production patterns 52 and 53 (full rotation reach production), the ratio of the reach production to be performed with the even number production pattern 16a is 20%, and the odd number production patterns other than "7". The ratio of ready-to-win production performed in 16a is 30%, and the ratio of ready-to-win production to be performed in the production pattern 16a of "7" is 50%.

In the case of the special symbol 05 (normal jackpot) and variable production patterns 54 to 59 (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production), the ratio of the ready-to-win production with the even production pattern 16a is 100%. .

In addition, although the ready-to-win performance is always executed in the variable performance pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, a variable performance pattern may be provided in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed even if the pseudo-continuous performance is executed.

The first feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 (1) is that reach production (normal reach production, SP The ratio of the ready-to-win production with the even-numbered production pattern 16a (the production pattern 16a that is usually a big hit) is higher than the ratio of the ready-to-win production and the SPSP ready-to-win production. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when the odd-numbered performance symbol 16a other than "7" results in a big win, thereby improving the interest in the game.

As a second feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 (1), the ratio of the ready-to-win effect to the even-numbered effect pattern 16a (the effect pattern 16a that normally becomes a big hit) is "7". The ratio of reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) is lower in the performance pattern 16a (the most advantageous probability variable jackpot performance pattern 16a). Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when the performance pattern 16a of "7" results in a big win, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a third feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 (1), reach production (normal reach production, SP Reach production (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production) is performed with the production pattern 16a of "7" (the production pattern 16a that becomes the most advantageous probability variable jackpot) than the ratio of the reach production, SPSP reach production) is performed. less Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when the performance pattern 16a of "7" results in a big win, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 (1), the ready-to-win effect is executed with the even-numbered effect pattern 16a or the odd-numbered effect pattern 16a other than "7". When the ready-to-win effect is executed with the effect pattern 16a of "7", the expectation for the big win is higher. Therefore, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player as to which type of effect pattern the ready-to-win effect is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the fifth feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 (1), the probability variation / time reduction mode D ~ G is the most advantageous probability variation than the normal mode A ~ C In the case of a big hit, the ready-to-win effect (SPSP ready-to-win effect) is likely to be executed with the effect pattern 16a of "7". Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the variable probability/time saving modes D to G, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a sixth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 (1), in the normal modes A to C, even if the ready-to-win effect is executed with the effect pattern 16a of "7", the jackpot is not determined. However, in the probability variable/time saving modes D to G, when the ready-to-win effect is executed with the effect pattern 16a of "7", the big hit is determined. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the variable probability/time saving modes D to G, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the seventh feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 (1), when the probability variable / time saving mode D ~ G is better than when the normal mode A ~ C, SPSP reach performance A variation performance pattern for a big win, in which a failure performance is performed and then a resurrection success performance is performed, is likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the big hit variation effect in the variable probability/shorter working hours mode from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As the eighth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 44 (2), the game ball wins in the first start port 10 during the probability variable / time saving mode D ~ G, and in the case of a loss determination result, loss variation As the effect, the normal variation effect is executed at a higher rate than the special reach-loss variation effect (see FIG. 13(2)). Therefore, the game ball enters the first start port 10 during the normal modes A to C than when the game ball wins in the first start port 10 during the probability variable / time reduction mode D to G and the loss variation effect is executed. The ready-to-win effect is more likely to be executed when winning and the losing variation effect is executed.
In addition, the type of variable performance pattern in which the game ball wins in the first start port 10 during the probability variable / time saving mode D to G and the loss variation performance is executed is the first start port 10 in the normal mode A to C. There are fewer types of variable performance patterns executed in the losing variable performance when the game ball wins or wins in the second starting port 11a during the probability variable/time saving modes D to G. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to execute a game suitable for the current game state, thereby improving the interest in the game.

As the ninth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 44 (2), when the game ball wins the first start port 10 during the probability variable / time saving mode D ~ G and the big hit variable effect is executed , the special ready-to-win effect (special ready-to-reach B) of the same effect mode is likely to be executed (execution ratio is high).
In addition, the type of reach effect that is executed in the jackpot variation effect by winning the game ball in the first start port 10 during the variable probability / time saving mode D ~ G is the game at the first start port 10 during the normal mode A ~ C There are fewer types of ready-to-win performances that are executed in the big hit variable performance by winning the ball or entering the second starting port 11a during the probability variable/time saving modes D to G. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to execute a game suitable for the current game state, thereby improving the interest in the game.

As a tenth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 44 (2), when the game ball wins the first start port 10 during the probability variable / time saving mode D ~ G and the jackpot variable effect is executed , The ready-to-win performance accompanied by the determined performance is less likely to be executed than when the game ball enters the second starting port 11a during the probability variable/time-saving modes D to G and the big hit variable performance is executed.

As the eleventh feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 44 (2), when the game ball wins the first start port 10 during the probability variable / time saving mode D to G and the big hit variable effect is executed, After the start of the variation, the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed without the ready-to-win fanning and the ready-to-win performance being executed. It is possible to

As the twelfth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 44 (1) and (2), even if the game ball wins the first start port 10 during the variable probability / time saving mode D ~ G, the probability variable / time saving Even if a game ball wins in the second starting port 11a during modes D to G, the ready-to-win effect is executed, but it is more than when a game ball wins in the first starting port 10 in the probability variable/time saving modes D to G. Also, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 11a during the probability variable/time saving modes D to G, the reach-inflaming performance is more likely to be executed, so it is possible to execute the performance according to the current game state. becomes.

(Jackpot announcement production decision processing)
FIG. 45 is a flow chart for explaining the jackpot announcement effect determination processing by the effect control unit 130m.
The sub CPU 130a executes the jackpot announcement effect determination process based on the variable effect pattern determined in the variable effect pattern determination process.

In step S810, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variation effect pattern executed in the current variation effect.
In step S811, the sub CPU 130a determines the notice effect pattern of the pre-reach notice effect that makes the player expect that the jackpot game will be executed in the effect period (high-speed fluctuation period) before the reach in the current variable effect. A pre-reach announcement determination table is selected to determine whether or not to execute the announcement effect and the type of announcement pattern to be executed.

In step S812, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice effect is to execute a dialog notice effect. The process moves to S813, and if the dialog announcement effect is not to be executed (step S812; No), the process moves to step S815.

"Dialogs notice effect" means that an effective period is generated during a variable effect (high-speed fluctuation period), an operation promotion image is displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 6a, and the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period. In accordance with the lapse of the effective period, the image display device 16 displays a dialogue image suggesting the degree of expectation for the execution of the big winning game, and the voice output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the dialogue image, thereby performing a big win notice effect. It is one kind.

In step S813, the sub CPU 130a selects a dialogue announcement pattern determination table (see FIG. 47) for determining a dialogue announcement pattern of a dialogue announcement effect and determines a dialogue announcement pattern.
In step S814, the sub CPU 130a sets a speech announcement effect command corresponding to the speech announcement pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, a dialog announcement effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a dialog announcement effect corresponding to the dialog announcement pattern is executed during the variation effect.

In step S815, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice effect is to execute the step-up notice effect, and if the step-up notice effect is to be executed (step S815; Yes). , the process moves to step S816, and if the step-up notice effect is not to be executed (step S815; No), the process moves to step S818.

"Step-up advance notice effect" refers to the first step (first stage) to fifth step (final stage) without generating an effective period during the variable effect (high-speed fluctuation period) and without displaying an operation promotion image. ) is a kind of jackpot announcement performance executed by a step performance suggesting the degree of expectation of execution of the jackpot game by progressing in a predetermined order until it reaches any step of a plurality of steps (stages) up to ).

In step S816, the sub CPU 130a selects the step-up notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 48) for determining the step-up notice pattern of the step-up notice effect and determines the step-up notice pattern.
In step S817, the sub CPU 130a sets a step-up notice effect command corresponding to the step-up notice pattern in the transmission buffer. Thereby, the step-up notice effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the step-up notice effect corresponding to the step-up notice pattern is executed during the fluctuation effect.

In step S818, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a pseudo-continuous effect, and if it is a variable effect pattern for executing a pseudo-continuous effect (step S818; Yes). , the process moves to step S819, and if it is not a variable effect pattern for executing a pseudo-continuous effect (step S818; No), the process moves to step S821.

In step S819, the sub CPU 130a selects a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 49) for determining the pseudo-continuous effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous effect and determines the pseudo-continuous effect pattern.
In step S820, the sub CPU 130a sets a pseudo-continuous effect command corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the pseudo-continuous effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pseudo-continuous effect corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is executed during the variable effect.

In step S821, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the variable performance pattern of this time is a variable performance pattern for executing a ready-to-win performance (normal reach performance, SP ready-to-reach performance, SPSP ready-to-reach performance, full rotation ready-to-reach performance). (step S821; Yes), the process proceeds to step S822, and if it is not a variable effect pattern for executing a ready-to-win effect (step S821; No), this big hit notice effect determination process is terminated. .

In step S822, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern for executing the development performance (SP development performance, SPSP development performance, full rotation performance), and determines whether or not the current variation performance pattern is a variation performance pattern for executing the development performance. If it is an effect pattern (step S822; Yes), the process moves to step S823, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes an extended effect (step S822; No), the process moves to step S825.

In step S823, the sub CPU 130a selects the development effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 50) for determining the development effect pattern and determines the development effect pattern.
In step S824, the sub CPU 130a sets a development effect command corresponding to the development effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the development effect is executed during the variable effect.

In step S825, the sub CPU 130a selects a cut-in effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 51) for determining a cut-in effect pattern indicating whether or not to execute a cut-in effect and the mode of effect.
"Cut-in effect" means that an effective period is generated during the variable effect (during the pre-reach effect or during the reach effect) and an operation promoting image is displayed, and when the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period or the effective period elapses In response, the image display device 16 displays a cut-in image suggesting the degree of expectation for the execution of the big win game, and the voice output device 9 outputs a cut-in effect sound corresponding to the cut-in image to perform a big win notice effect. It is one kind.

In step S826, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is a cut-in effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect, and if it is a cut-in effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect (step S826; If the pattern is not a cut-in effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect (step S826; No), the process is moved to step S828.

In step S827, the sub CPU 130a sets a cut-in effect command corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, a cut-in effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the cut-in effect is executed during the variable effect.

In step S828, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that executes a fixed effect, and if it determines that it is a variable effect pattern that executes a fixed effect (step S828; Yes ), when it is determined that it is not a variable effect pattern for executing a determined effect (step S828; No), the process is moved to step S831.

In step S829, the sub CPU 130a selects a determined effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 52) for determining the determined effect pattern and determines the determined effect pattern.
In step S830, the sub CPU 130a sets a final effect command corresponding to the final effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the determined effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the determined effect is executed during the variable effect.

In step S831, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a re-lottery effect, and if it is a variable effect pattern for executing a re-lottery effect (step S831; Yes). , the process moves to step S832, and if it is not a variable effect pattern for executing a re-lottery effect (step S831; No), the process moves to step S834.

In step S832, the sub CPU 130a selects the re-lottery effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56) for determining the re-lottery effect pattern of the re-lottery effect and determines the re-lottery effect pattern.
In step S833, the sub CPU 130a sets a re-lottery effect command corresponding to the re-lottery effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, a re-lottery effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the re-lottery effect is executed during the variation effect.

In step S834, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a big hit variable effect pattern for executing a fixed effect. Yes), the process is moved to step S835, and if it is not a big hit variation effect pattern for executing a fixed effect (step S834; No), the process is moved to step S837.

"Fixed production" means that before the three production patterns 16a are fixed and displayed in a combination display mode indicating the judgment result of the big hit (that is, before the judgment pattern of the special pattern is confirmed and displayed as a big hit pattern), This is a kind of jackpot notification performance for definitely notifying that a jackpot game is to be executed.

In step S835, the sub CPU 130a selects a confirmed effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 58) for determining the effect pattern of the confirmed effect and determines the confirmed effect pattern.
In step S836, the sub CPU 130a sets a confirmed effect command corresponding to the confirmed effect pattern in the transmission buffer. Thereby, the fixed effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the fixed effect is executed during the variable effect.

In step S837, the sub CPU 130a selects a resurrection effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 59) for determining resurrection effect patterns and determines development effect patterns.
In step S838, when the effect pattern for executing the resurrection effect is determined, the sub CPU 130a sets a resurrection effect command corresponding to the determined resurrection effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the resurrection effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the resurrection effect is executed during the variable effect.

Various productions determined by the jackpot announcement production decision process (pre-reach production (dialogue announcement production, step-up announcement production, pseudo continuous production), after-reach production (development production, cut-in production, decision production, re-lottery production, final production , revival effect)), a vibration effect may be executed by the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h.
The mode of vibration production is button/lever vibration time (long vibration, short vibration), button/lever vibration intensity (strong vibration, weak vibration), button light emission/lever light emission (white, red, rainbow light). , button/lever vibration pattern (repeated vibration in small steps, only one vibration, etc.), vibration operation of movable production members 17A to 17C (weak vibration operation with small vibration width, strong vibration operation with large vibration width) or a combination of several.

(Preliminary decision table before reach)
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a pre-reach announcement determination table referred to when determining the announcement pattern of the pre-reach announcement effect.
As shown in FIG. 46, the pre-reach announcement determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each announcement pattern, and the selected announcement pattern.

Three types of advance notice patterns of the advance notice effect before reach are set: "no notice", "word notice effect", and "step-up notice effect" in which the advance notice effect before reach is not executed. Expectations for the jackpot are: No notice <Dialogue notice effect <Step-up notice effect.

The first feature of the advance notice decision table before reach shown in FIG. 46 is that the advance notice effect before reach is more likely to be executed in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss of the big hit determination result, and the fluctuation effect with a low degree of expectation for the big win. The before-reach announcement performance is more likely to be executed when a variable performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win is determined than when the pattern is determined. It is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the execution of the jackpot game, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the second feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 46, when the big hit determination result is a loss, the probability change / short time mode D ~ G is more than the normal mode A ~ C, the pre-reach notice effect is executed. hard to be It becomes difficult to execute a useless pre-reach pre-notice performance in the variable probability/time-saving mode in which the symbol variation time is likely to be shortened, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a third feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIG. Modes D to G are more difficult to execute the pre-reach announcement effect. It becomes difficult to execute a useless pre-reach pre-notice performance in the variable probability/time-saving mode in which the symbol variation time is likely to be shortened, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fourth feature of the before-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 46, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the step-up notice effect is executed than when the dialogue notice effect is executed. It is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest of the game.
It should be noted that the degree of expectation for a big win may be higher in the case where the speech announcement effect is executed than in the case where the step-up announcement effect is executed.

As a fifth feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 46, the first When the game ball wins the starting hole 10, it is easier to execute the pre-reach announcement effect.
In addition, in the probability variable / time saving mode D ~ G, than when the game ball wins in the first start port 10, when the game ball wins in the second start port 11a, the pre-reach notice effect is executed. easy. Therefore, it is possible to execute an appropriate game effect according to the current effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, when the game ball enters the first start port 10 during the probability variable / time saving mode D to G and the jackpot variation effect is executed, the execution ratio of the pre-reach notice effect is determined according to the type of reach effect to be executed. different. The advance notice performance before reaching the target is easier to execute when the special reach B is executed than the special reach A, and the advance notice performance before reaching the reach is easier to execute when the special reach C and D are executed than the special reach B.例文帳に追加

As the sixth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. The execution ratio of the pre-reach announcement effect in the time saving mode set corresponding to the time saving mode or c time saving game state is the same. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the big winning game may be executed in any time saving mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Dialogue notice pattern decision table)
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a dialog announcement pattern determination table referred to when determining a dialog announcement pattern of a dialog announcement effect.

As shown in FIG. 47, the big hit determination result, the type of the variation effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each speech notice pattern, and the speech notice pattern to be selected are associated with the speech notice pattern determination table. For reference, the effect structure of each notice pattern is described.

"Valid period: single hit/3 seconds" in the column of effect configuration indicates that the effective period of the dialogue advance notice effect ends when the effect button 6a is operated once or three seconds elapse.

"Operation prompting effect" in the effective period column indicates that the effect prompts the user to operate the effect button 6a during the effective period of the speech advance notice effect. Specifically, it consists of an opaque effect button image that imitates the effect button 6a and a gauge image that indicates the remaining period of the operation valid period (3 seconds) in which a single hit operation of the effect button 6a is valid by the length of the gauge. An operation prompting image is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the column of the operation promotion effect means that a button image that imitates the effect button 6a that is in a normal state that does not protrude and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image. This indicates that the effect button 6a emits white light.
The "button state" indicates the state of the effect button 6a during the valid period, and the "normal" button state indicates the normal state in which the effect button 6a does not protrude.

"Normal dialogue (text color: black)" in the dialog image/sound column and the text color column is a normal dialog that does not suggest the possibility of a jackpot game being executed. This indicates that the dialogue will be output as voice.
“Chance dialogue (text color: black)” indicates that the chance dialogue that has the possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in black characters and that the chance dialogue is output by voice.

"Reach lines (text color: black)" indicates that the lines for which the ready-to-win effect is to be executed are displayed in black characters and that the lines for reach are output by voice.
“Reach lines (text color: red)” indicates that the lines for which the ready-to-win effect is to be executed are displayed in red characters and that the lines for reach are output by voice.

“Hot lines (character color: red)” indicates that hot lines that are highly likely to execute a jackpot game are displayed in red characters, and that ready-to-win lines are output by voice.
“Extremely hot lines (text color: gold)” indicates that intensely hot lines that have a very high possibility of executing a jackpot game are displayed in gold letters, and that the intensely hot lines are output by voice. ing.

"Possible words (text color: rainbow)" indicates that the positive words confirming the execution of the jackpot game are displayed in rainbow colored characters, and that the positive words are output by voice.
The expected degree of jackpot in each dialogue production mode is “normal dialogue (black)” < “chance dialogue (black) < “reach dialogue (black)” < “reach dialogue (red)” < “heat dialogue (red)” < “ Fierce lines (gold)"<"Accurate lines (rainbow)".

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a vibrates 1 from the time the effect button 6a is operated at the start of the display of the dialogue or from the end of the valid period. It shows that a weak vibration production that vibrates weakly over a period of seconds is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor 6d strongly vibrates for 1 second from when the effect button 6a is operated at the start of display of the dialogue or from the end of the effective period. Which indicates that.
The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration effect is “weak vibration” < “strong vibration”.

A first feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that when a speech with a high degree of expectation for a big hit (heat speech or higher) is displayed, it is possible to execute a vibration presentation in which the presentation button 6a is vibrated. there is Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a second feature of the dialog forewarning pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47, a speech foretelling effect of intensely hot speech with a higher expectation for a big win than the hot speech is executed than when the speech foretelling performance of the hot speech is executed. Vibration effect of the effect button 6a is more likely to be executed in the case of Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

When the speech foretelling performance of hot words is executed, the degree of expectation for big win is higher when the vibration performance of the performance button 6a is executed than when the vibration performance of the performance button 6a is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed when the dialogue forewarning effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that the vibration presentation of the presentation button 6a, which is executed when a speech with a high degree of expectation for a big win (more than a hot speech) is displayed, is relatively short. ing. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of mistaking that the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47, the vibration intensity of the vibration effect executed when a speech with a high degree of expectation for a big win (more than a hot speech) is displayed is set to 2 according to the degree of expectation for a big win. There are types. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fifth feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. Since the vibration period of the vibration performance when operated and the vibration period of the vibration performance when the performance button 6a is not operated during the effective period are the same vibration period (1 second), a big win is expected depending on the vibration intensity. It is possible to suggest the degree and improve the interest of the game.

As the sixth feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the game ball enters the second start port 11a during the variable / time saving mode D ~ G, and the game ball enters the first start port 10 during the normal mode A ~ C is less likely to be executed than in the case of winning and judging the jackpot.

Although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effect executed in the speech advance notice effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed, and the strong vibration effect is longer than the vibration time of the weak vibration effect. may be lengthened.

In addition, the expected degree of jackpot when the vibration production of the production button 6a is executed at the time of the dialogue announcement production is the same in the normal modes A to C and the variable / time saving modes D to G, but in the normal modes A to C It may be possible to make the expectation of the jackpot higher than the variable probability / short time mode D to G, or the expectation of the big hit is higher in the variable probability / short time mode D ~ G than the normal mode A ~ C. good too. By doing so, it is possible to vary the game performance depending on the type of the performance mode, and it is easy for the player to increase the player's expectation of winning in the probability variable/time-saving modes D to G, which are advantageous to the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. It is possible to

Further, the effective period is terminated by the operation of the effect button 6a or the expiration of the effective period, and the speech announcement effect is executed. You may make it not perform an advance notice production. When the dialogue announcement effect is not executed, the vibration effect is not executed either.

In addition, the effective period is generated (with the operation promotion image displayed) to execute the dialogue notice effect, but the dialogue notice effect is executed without generating the effective period (operation promotion image is not displayed) You may make it When executing the dialogue announcement effect without generating the effective period (without displaying the operation prompting image), only one second of weak vibration effect or only one second of strong vibration effect may be performed.

(Step-up notice pattern decision table)
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a step-up notice pattern determination table referred to when determining a step-up notice pattern for a step-up notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 48, the step-up notice pattern determination table corresponds to the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each step-up notice pattern, and the step-up notice pattern to be selected. attached. For reference, the effect structure of each notice pattern is described.

"SU1→SU2" in the effect mode column indicates that the first step effect and the second step effect are executed in order.
"SU1→SU2→SU3" indicates that the first step effect, the second step effect, and the third step effect are executed in order.
"SU1→SU2→SU3→SU4" indicates that the first step effect, the second step effect, the third step effect, and the fourth step effect are executed in order.
"SU1→SU2→SU3→SU4→SU5" indicates that the first step effect, second step effect, third step effect, fourth step effect, and fifth step effect are executed in order.
"SU1->SU2->SU3->SU5" indicates that the fifth step effect is executed after the first step effect, the second step effect and the third step effect are executed in this order.
In each step performance mode, the performance time of the step performance before the last step performance is 1 second, and the performance time of the last step performance is 3 seconds.

"Yes" in the column of effect sound indicates that a step-up effect sound is output.
1st step sound effects in the 1st step production, 2nd step sound effects in the 2nd step production, 3rd step sound effects in the 3rd step production, 4th step sound effects in the 4th step production, and 1st step sound effects in the 5th step production A 5-step sound effect is output. These first to fifth step sound effects are different sound effects.

"Weak vibration (1 second) at "SU5"" in the column of button vibration means that the button vibration motor 6d weakly vibrates the effect button 6a for 1 second from the start of the fifth step effect. It indicates that

The jackpot expectation of each step-up production mode is “SU1 → SU2” < “SU1 → SU2 → SU3” < “SU1 < SU2 < SU3 < SU4” < “SU1 < SU2 < SU3 < SU4 < SU5” < “SU1 < SU2<SU3<SU5”.

A first feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. (No promotion image is displayed) Vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 48 is that the vibration effect executed when a step effect (fifth step effect) with a high expectation of a big win is performed has a relatively short duration. . Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of mistaking that the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. ) has only one predetermined type (weak vibration (1 second)). Therefore, in the step-up notice performance in which the player cannot grasp the type of vibration performance without operating the performance button 6a, it is possible to suppress the complication of the performance mode and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

As a fourth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 48, in the case of a big hit, the probability variation mode D ~ G is higher than the normal mode A ~ C, the step-up notice performance with a low jackpot expectation is difficult to implement. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 48, when the variable probability / short time mode D to G becomes a big hit than the normal mode A to C, the weak vibration production is easily executed. . Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the sixth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. No display of operation promotion image) The degree of expectation for a big hit when the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed is high. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

A seventh feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. A production sound (sound effect) is output. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect of the vibration performance due to the output of the performance sound, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that normal modes A to C are better than probability variable / time saving modes D to G, without generating an effective period in the step-up notice effect (no display of operation promotion image) Vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed. The degree of expectation for a big hit in the case of winning may be increased.

The eighth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. It is possible to execute a step-up announcement effect accompanied by the effect. The step-up notice effect with this vibration effect is when the game ball wins in the second start port 11a during the variable probability / time saving mode D ~ G and the judgment result of the big hit, or the first start port during the normal mode A ~ C It is harder to execute than in the case of a jackpot judgment result when a game ball wins at 10

(Pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a pseudo-continuous effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 49, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table corresponds to the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of the variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each pseudo-continuous effect pattern, and the pseudo-continuous effect pattern to be selected. attached. For reference, the effect configuration of each pseudo-continuous effect pattern is described.

"Valid period: single hit/3 seconds" indicates that the effective period of the simulated continuous effect ends when the effect button 6a is operated once with a single hit or 3 seconds elapse.
The "operation promoting effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 6a during the valid period. Specifically, an opaque effect button image that imitates the effect button 6a, and a gauge image that indicates the remaining period of the operation valid period (3 seconds) in which one single hit operation of the effect button 6a is effective by the length of the gauge. is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the column of the operation promotion effect means that a button image that imitates the effect button 6a that is in a normal state that does not protrude and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image. This indicates that the effect button 6a emits white light.
"Protruding button white" means that a button image imitating the effect button 6a that is in a protruding state and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image, and the effect button 6a emits white light. indicates that
The degree of expectation for a big win for each operation prompting image is "normal button white"<"protruding button white".

The "button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 6a during the effective period, and the "normal" button state indicates the normal state in which the effect button 6a does not protrude. , "Protrusion" indicates that the production button 6a is in a protruding state.
The degree of jackpot expectation for each button state is "normal"<"protruding".

"Pseudo-failure" in the column of the performance mode means that the pseudo-failure in which the pseudo-symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuous performance as the central performance-symbol 16a does not temporarily stop and the normal performance symbol 16a is temporarily stopped. is shown.
"Pseudo-success" indicates that the pseudo-continuous success is achieved by temporarily stopping the pseudo-symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect as the central effect symbol 16a.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration means that the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the production button 6a is operated for 1 second from the end of the effective period or when the production button 6a is operated when the pseudo symbol is stopped. It shows that a weak vibration effect is executed in which weak vibration is performed over a period of time.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that when the button vibration motor 6d is operated when the effect button 6a is stopped or when the effective period ends, a strong vibration effect is executed for 1 second. It is shown that.
The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration effect is “weak vibration” < “strong vibration”.

“With role product action” in the column of role product action in pseudo-success indicates that any one of the movable production members 17A to 17C performs a role product action production in which it operates and emits light in a predetermined manner.
The "role object action effect" means that after any of the movable effect members 17A to 17C starts moving from the standby position to the effect position, any of the movable effect members 17A to 17C that has moved to the effect position is in the standby position. It is a production until the return to is completed.
Specifically, the first movable effect member 17A emits blue or red light, and after performing a weak movement with a small movement width in which the blade part housed in the sheath moves leftward from the standby position, it returns to the standby position. .

"With sound effects" in the column of sound effects for pseudo-failure indicates that a failure sound effect is output.
"With sound effect" in the column of effect sound for pseudo-success indicates that the effect sound for pseudo-success is output.

The first feature of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that when the pseudo-continuous success effect is performed in a variable effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, the effective period of the effect button 6a is generated ( With display of operation prompting image) Vibration effect for vibrating the effect button 6a is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The second feature of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that the variation effect pattern has a high degree of expectation for a big win, and the vibration effect that is executed when the pseudo-continuous success effect is performed has a relatively short time. ing. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are two types depending on Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fourth feature of the pseudo-continuous production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49, the same production device (button vibration motor, movable production member) is used in normal modes A to C and probability variable / time saving modes D to G Pseudo-continuous performance (pseudo-continuous success performance) can be executed, but the degree of expectation for a big hit is high when the pseudo-continuous performance (pseudo-continuous success performance) using the same performance device is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the game performance depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation in the variable probability / time saving modes D to G, which are advantageous for the player, and to improve the interest of the game. Become.

As a fifth feature of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. There is a case where a continuous effect (pseudo continuous success effect) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the pseudo-continuous performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Incidentally, there is a case where the effect button 6a during the valid period when the simulated continuous success effect is performed in the variable effect pattern (variable effect pattern in which the all-rotation ready-to-win effect is executed) with a high degree of expectation for the big hit is in a projecting state. may be prevented from protruding.

Further, although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong start effect as the vibration effects executed in the pseudo continuous success effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be used.
In addition, the effective period is generated (with the display of the operation promotion image) and the pseudo continuous success effect and the pseudo continuous failure effect are executed, but the effective period is not generated (no operation promotion image is displayed) A pseudo consecutive success effect or a pseudo consecutive failure effect may be executed. As for the vibration effect to be executed in the simulated continuous success effect, only weak vibration effect for 3 seconds or only strong vibration effect for 3 seconds may be performed, or only weak vibration effect for 1 second or only strong vibration effect for 1 second may be performed. good too.

In addition, pseudo-continuous production (pseudo-continuous success production) using the same production device (button vibration motor, movable production member) is performed in normal modes A to C rather than variable / time saving modes D to G. You may make it the big-hit expectation degree of a case become high.
Also, the degree of expectation for a big win may be higher in the normal mode B or C than in the normal mode A when the pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) using the same effect device is executed. .
In addition, the variable probability mode D or E is designed to have a higher expectation for a big hit when a pseudo continuous performance (pseudo continuous success performance) using the same performance device is executed than the time saving mode F or G. good too.

Also, in the pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect), the character action effect using the first movable effect member 17A is executed. , the execution ratio of the performance of the role object action using the second movable effect member 17B may be increased, or the first movable effect member 17A may be used more than the role object action effect using the second movable effect member 17B. You may make it the execution ratio of the role object action production|presentation used become high.
Note that the role object action effect using the second movable effect member 17B is an action in which the second movable effect member 17B emits red light and moves downward from the standby position to the front side of the central area of the display screen of the first image display device 16. It is a production that returns to the standby position after performing a strong action with a large width.

In addition, even if the game ball wins in the first start port 10 during the probability variable / time saving mode D to G, even if the special ready-to-win performance is executed due to the determination result of losing or the determination result of the big hit, the pseudo-continuous performance is not executed. .
In other words, when the game ball wins in the first start port 10 in the normal mode A to C than in the case where the game ball wins in the first start port 10 in the variable probability / time saving mode D ~ G, pseudo It is easy to perform a continuous performance.

(Development effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 50 shows a development effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a development effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 50, the development performance pattern determination table includes performance modes, jackpot determination results, types of variable performance patterns, types of development performances for which development performance patterns are determined, and selection rates (%) of each development performance pattern. ), and the selected development effect pattern is associated with it. For reference, the production configuration of each development production pattern is described.

The “valid suggestive effect” is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images simulating the effect button 6a are moved and displayed on the first image display device 16, and the plurality of semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position. be.
"None" in the effective suggestive production column indicates that the effective suggestive production is not executed, and "Yes (gase)" means that the effective suggestive production is executed, but the effective period does not occur after that. "Yes" indicates that the effective suggestive effect is executed and the effective period occurs after that.

"Valid period: long press/4 seconds" indicates that the development effect progresses step by step by long pressing of the effect button 6a and that the effective period of the development effect ends when 4 seconds elapse.
The "operation promoting effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 6a during the valid period. Specifically, the opaque effect button image displayed at a specific position without executing the effective suggestive effect or as a result of executing the effective suggestive effect, and the operation effective period during which one single-press operation of the effect button 6a is valid. An operation prompting image composed of a gauge image indicating the remaining period of (4 seconds) by the length of the gauge and a character image of "long press" is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the column of the operation promoting effect means that a button image imitating the effect button 6a which is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image. This indicates that the button 6a emits white light.
"Normal button red" means that a button image simulating the production button 6a that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque production button image, and the production button 6a emits red light. It is shown that.

"Button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 6a during the effective period, "normal" indicates that the effect button 6a is in a normal state in which the effect button 6a does not protrude, and "protruding ” indicates that the effect button 6a is in a projecting state.

"SP notification" in the column of the development mode indicates that the SP development effect suggesting the development to the SP ready-to-win effect is executed as a result of the development effect.
"SPSP notification" indicates that an SPSP development effect suggesting development to an SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed as a result of the development effect.
"Full spin notification" indicates that a full spin development production suggesting development to a full spin ready-to-win production is executed as a result of the development production.

The "SP development pattern" in the column of the image of the content of the development effect indicates that the SP development pattern suggesting the development to the SP ready-to-win effect is derived and displayed.
"SPSP development pattern" indicates deriving and displaying an SPSP development pattern that suggests development to SPSP ready-to-win production.
"Full rotation development pattern" indicates derivation display of a full rotation development pattern suggesting development to full rotation ready-to-win production.

"Development sound effect A" in the effect sound column of the development effect content indicates that the development effect sound A is output when the SP development pattern is derived and displayed.
"Development sound effect B" indicates that the development sound effect B is output when the SPSP development pattern is derived and displayed.
"Development sound effect C" indicates that the development sound effect C is output when the full rotation development pattern is derived and displayed.
The development sound effect A, the development sound effect B, and the development sound effect C are different sound effects.

The "weak action" in the column of character action means that the first movable production member 17A emits blue light when various patterns are derived and displayed (at the end of the effective period), and the blade part is stored in the sheath from the standby position. It shows that the robot returns to the standby position after performing a weak motion with a small motion width moving to the left.
"Strong action" means that the second movable effect member 17B emits red light at the time of derivation display of various symbols (at the end of the valid period), and from the standby position to the front side of the central area of the display screen of the first image display device 16. It indicates that a strong action effect is executed in which a strong action with a wide action width of downward movement is performed.
The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each character action effect is "weak action"<"strong action".

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration means that the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the production button 6a is weak for 1 second from the time of derivation display of various development symbols (end of the valid period). It shows that a vibrating weak vibration effect is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor 6d strongly vibrates for 1 second from the time when various advanced symbols are derived and displayed (at the end of the effective period), and a strong vibration effect is executed. there is
The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration effect is “weak vibration” < “strong vibration”.

As a first feature of the development production pattern determination table shown in FIG. A vibrating effect is executed in which the effective period of the button 6a is generated and the effect button 6a is vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that the full-rotation development effect, in which the expectation of a big win is higher than the SPSP development effect, is executed rather than the SPSP development effect. , the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is likely to be executed.
Further, when the SPSP development performance is executed, the degree of expectation for big win is higher when the vibration performance is executed than when the vibration performance of the performance button 6a is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 6a will be executed when the SPSP development effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that it is a variable effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win, and is executed when a development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) with a high degree of expectation for a big win is performed. The vibration effect that is displayed is a relatively short time. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of mistaking that the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The fourth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is the vibration of the vibration effect that is executed when the variation effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is performed and the development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed. There are two types of intensity depending on the degree of expectation of a big hit. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fifth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50, the same effect device (button vibration motor 6d, first movable effect member 17A or 2nd movable production member 17B) using the development production (SPSP development production, etc.) can be executed, but rather than normal modes A ~ C, the probability variable / short time mode D ~ G is the production device (button vibration motor 6d, the degree of expectation for a big hit is high when the development effect using the movable effect members 17A to 17C) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the game performance depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation in the variable probability / time saving modes D to G, which are advantageous for the player, and to improve the interest of the game. Become.
Although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effects executed in the development effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed.

In addition, normal modes A to C are more advanced than variable / time saving modes D to G using the same production device (button vibration motor 6d, first movable production member 17A or second movable production member 17B) The degree of expectation for a big win may be increased when (SPSP development effect, etc.) is executed.
In addition, in normal mode B or C, development effects using the same effect device (button vibration motor 6d, first movable effect member 17A or second movable effect member 17B) were executed more than in normal mode A. You may make it the big-hit expectation degree of a case become high.
In addition, the probability variation mode D or E may be higher than the time saving mode F or G when the development performance using the same performance device is executed.

As a fifth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Even if the game ball enters the second start hole 11a during the period to G and the determination result is a loss, the development effect accompanied by the button vibration effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that there is a possibility that the jackpot game will be executed until the result of the judgment of loss is reported, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
On the other hand, even if a special reach is executed in the case of the determination result of loss by winning the game ball in the first start port 10a during the probability variable / time saving mode D to G (see FIG. 44 (2)), development No performance is performed.
In addition, when the game ball enters the first starting port 10a during the variable probability/time saving modes D to G and the special reach is executed in the case of the determination result of losing, the development effect may be executed. In this case, a development effect without vibration effect is executed.

As the sixth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Sometimes, it is possible to execute a development production accompanied by a vibration production. The development effect accompanied by this vibration effect is when the game ball wins in the second start port 11a during the variable probability/time saving mode D~G and the judgment result of the big hit is reached, or in the first start port 10 during the normal mode A~C. It is more difficult to execute than when the game ball wins and the determination result is a big hit.

(Cut-in effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 51 shows a cut-in effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a cut-in effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the cut-in notice effect pattern determination table, the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of variable effect pattern (reach type), the selection rate (%) of each cut-in effect pattern, the selected cut An in-effect pattern is associated. For reference, the production configuration of each cut-in production pattern is described.

The “valid suggestive effect” is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. Specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 6a are moved and displayed on the first image display device 16, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.

"Valid period: single hit/4 seconds" means that the effective period of the cut-in notification effect ends when the effect button 6a is single-hit, or 4 seconds elapse without the effect button 6a being operated. This indicates that the
The “operation prompting effect” in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the operator to operate the operating means during the valid period. Specifically, the opaque effect button image displayed at a specific position without executing the effective suggestive effect or as a result of executing the effective suggestive effect, and the operation effective period during which one single-press operation of the effect button 6a is valid. An operation prompting image composed of a gauge image indicating the remaining period of (4 seconds) by the length of the gauge and a character image of "press" is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the column of the operation promoting effect means that a button image imitating the effect button 6a which is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image. This indicates that the button 6a emits white light.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image simulating the effect button 6a that is in a projecting state and emits red light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and that the effect button 6a emits red light. showing.
"Protruding button rainbow" means that a button image that imitates the effect button 6a that is in a projecting state and emits rainbow light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and that the effect button 6a emits rainbow light. showing.

"Button state" indicates the state of the effect button 6a during the effective period.
"Normal" in the button state column indicates a normal state in which the effect button 6a does not protrude.
"Protrusion" indicates a protruding state in which the production button 6a protrudes.

“Blue cut-in” in the image column of the cut-in rendering mode indicates that a cut-in image with a blue frame is displayed on the first image display device 16 .
“Green cut-in” indicates that a green frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 16 .
“Red cut-in” indicates that a red frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 16 .
The degree of expectation for a big hit of each cut-in image is "blue cut-in"<"green cut-in"<"red cut-in".

"Sound effect A" in the column of effect sound indicates that the cut-in sound effect A is output when the blue cut-in is displayed.
"Sound effect B" indicates that the cut-in sound effect B is output when the green cut-in is displayed.
"Sound effect C" indicates that the cut-in sound effect C is output when the red cut-in is displayed.
The cut-in sound effect A, the cut-in sound effect B, and the cut-in sound effect C are different sound effects.

"Weak vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column is when the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a starts displaying the cut-in image (when the effect button 6a is operated or when the effective period ends) It shows that a weak vibration presentation is executed for 3 seconds from .
"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" means that the button vibration motor 6d strongly vibrates for 3 seconds from when the cut-in image starts to be displayed (when the effect button 6a is operated or when the effective period ends). indicates that it will be executed.
The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration production is “weak vibration production” < “strong vibration production”.

A first feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that when a cut-in image with a high expectation of a big win is displayed (cut-in effect is executed), the effective period of the effect button 6a is generated. (With display of operation prompting image) Vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a cut-in image with a high expectation of a big win is displayed (cut-in effect is executed) is relatively long. It's becoming Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are two types depending on the degree. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effect executed in the cut-in effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed.
In addition, the effective period is generated (with the operation prompt image displayed) and the cut-in effect is executed, but the effective period is not generated (the operation prompt image is not displayed) and the cut-in effect is executed. You may do so. When the cut-in effect is executed without generating the valid period, only 3 seconds of weak vibration effect or only 3 seconds of strong vibration effect may be performed, or only 1 second of weak vibration effect or 1 second of strong vibration effect may be performed. may be used only.

As a fourth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Even if the game ball enters the second start hole 11a during D to G and the determination result is a loss, the cut-in effect accompanied by the button vibration effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that there is a possibility that the jackpot game will be executed until the result of the judgment of loss is reported, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
On the other hand, when the game ball wins in the first start port 10a during the variable probability / time saving mode D~G and the determination result is a loss, the special reach E is executed, during the normal mode A~C When the game ball enters the first start port 10a and the result is a loss determination, the reach performance is executed, or during the probability variable/time saving mode D to G, the game ball enters the second start port 11a and the loss is determined. The cut-in effect accompanied by button vibration is less likely to be executed than when the ready-to-win effect is executed in the case of the result.

As a fifth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. From the case where the game ball enters the second starting port 11a during D to G and the determination result is a big hit, or when the game ball enters the first start port 10 during the normal modes A to C and the determination result is a big hit. Also, it is difficult to execute the cut-in effect accompanied by the vibration effect.

As the sixth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. During D to G, a game ball enters a second starting port 11a and a performance button 6a during the effective period suggests that the effective period may occur more than in the case of a jackpot judgment result. It is difficult to execute the operation prompting effect for prompting the operation of .

(decision production pattern decision table)
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a determined effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a determined effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 52, the determined effect pattern determination table includes the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of variable effect pattern (reach type), the effect mode of each ready-to-win effect, and the selection rate (%) of the effect mode of each ready-to-win effect. ), and a determined effect pattern corresponding to the selected effect mode is associated. For reference, the production configuration of each determined production pattern is described.

"Battle A to C" in the column of the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect are effects in which a friendly character and an enemy character battle (the enemy characters appearing in battles A to C are different). At the end of the battle, the last attack (kick attack/punch attack/lariat) for the ally character to defeat the enemy character accompanying one single-hit operation of the production button 6a or one tilting operation of the production lever 6h during the valid period. Attack) is carried out, and if the enemy character falls, the battle is won, and if the enemy character does not fall, the battle is defeated.

"Mission A" is an effect in which large rocks are destroyed step by step as the effect button 6a is hit repeatedly. If the rock can be completely destroyed during the valid period, the mission will be successful, and if the rock cannot be completely destroyed during the valid period, the mission will be failed.

"Mission B" means that the level value of the level meter (speed meter) of the running motorcycle increases step by step (for example, 0→1→2...10 (MAX) 10 level values). If the level value of the level meter reaches MAX during the validity period, the mission succeeds, and if the level value of the level meter does not reach MAX during the validity period, the mission fails.

"Effective suggestive effect" in the effect configuration column is an introductory effect that suggests that the effective period may occur. Specifically, a translucent effect button image simulating the effect button 6a and a translucent effect lever image simulating the effect lever 6h are moved and displayed on the first image display device 16, and the translucent effect button is directed toward a specific position. It is an effect that gathers images and translucent effect lever images.

In the case of a judgment result of a big hit, a vibration performance (for example, a strong vibration for 2 seconds) may be performed by strongly vibrating the performance button 6a when the effective suggestion performance is performed. Also, even if the execution ratio of the vibrating effect in the effective suggestive effect is higher when the jackpot symbols with odd-numbered symbols are stopped and displayed than when the jackpot symbols with even-numbered symbols are stopped and displayed. good. When the vibration performance is executed during the effective suggestion performance, it is notified that the big win expectation is high.

The "effective period" in the column of the effect configuration means that the effective period of the determined effect ends with the operation of the effect button 6a (single hit operation/continuous hit operation/long press operation) or the operation of the effect lever 6h (tilt operation ) or when five seconds elapse without the effect button 6a/effect lever 6h being operated.

The "type of operation means" in the column of effective period indicates the type of operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) whose operation is valid during the effective period. The operation becomes effective, and if it is the "production lever", it indicates that the operation of the production lever 6h becomes effective.

The "operation prompting effect" is a effect that prompts the user to operate the operation means (the effect button 6a and the effect lever 6h) during the effective period. Specifically, the operation of the opaque effect button image or the opaque effect lever image displayed at a specific position and the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is effective as a result of executing the effective suggestive effect or without executing the effective suggestive effect. An operation prompting image composed of a gauge image indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period (5 seconds) by the length of the gauge and a character image of "press, repeat, press and hold, or close" is displayed.
It should be noted that the operation promotion effect ends with the operation of the operating means (the effect button 6a, the effect lever 6h) during the valid period, or when the valid period (5 seconds) elapses without the operating means being operated. .

"Normal button white" in the column of the operation promoting effect means that a button image that imitates the effect button 6a that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits white light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and the effect button 6a is displayed. indicates that white light is emitted.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image simulating the effect button 6a that is in a projecting state and emits red light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and that the effect button 6a emits red light. showing.
"Protruding button rainbow" means that a button image that imitates the effect button 6a that is in a projecting state and emits rainbow light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and that the effect button 6a emits rainbow light. showing.

"Normal lever" indicates that a lever image imitating the production lever 6h of a predetermined size is displayed as the opaque production lever image.
“Large lever rainbow” indicates that a lever image simulating the effect lever 6h larger than a predetermined size is displayed as the opaque effect lever image.
The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each operation promotion effect is "normal button white"<"protruding button red"<"normal lever"<"protruding button rainbow"="large lever rainbow".

"State of operation means" indicates the state of the operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) during the effective period, and "normal" is a normal state in which the effect button 6a does not protrude. , If it is the production lever 6h, it is a normal state that does not protrude, and "protrusion" indicates that it is in a protruding state if it is the production button 6a, and if it is the production lever 6h, it is in a protruding state. indicates that there is
The jackpot expectation degree of the state of the operating means is "normal"<"protruding".

The "operation mode" indicates the type of operation mode of the operation means (the production button 6a, the production lever 6h) during the effective period.
"Single hit" in the operation mode column indicates that the effect button 6a is pressed once from the position in the normal state or the protruded state to the pressed position, and "Consecutive hits" means that the effect button 6a is pressed from the position in the normal state. "Long press" indicates that the effect button 6a is continuously pressed to the pressed position, and "tilting" means that the effect lever 6h is moved to the normal state. It shows tilting in the front-rear direction from the position.

The “decision failure effect” in the column of the determination effect mode indicates that an effect suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is executed.
"Determined success effect" indicates that an effect suggesting that a jackpot game is executed is executed.
"Failure image" in the result image column indicates that a dark image is displayed on the screen of the first image display device 16, and "success image" indicates that a success effect image is displayed on the screen of the first image display device 16. is displayed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the column of button/lever vibration is determined by the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the production button 6a, and after strong vibration for 4 seconds from the start of the successful production, 1 A strong vibration performance (determined success vibration performance) that strongly vibrates over 5 seconds with an interval of seconds is executed, and a lever vibration motor 6j for vibrating the performance lever 6c determines 4 from the start of the success performance. It shows that a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is executed in which the strong vibration is performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second after the strong vibration is performed for 5 seconds.

"Rainbow luminescence (11 seconds)" in the column of button/lever luminescence is determined by the button luminescence LED 6e for illuminating the production button 6a for 11 seconds from the start of the successful production (from the strong vibration of the production button 6a). rainbow light emission over a long period), and the lever light emission LED 6k for lighting the production lever 6h is determined for 11 seconds from the start of the successful production (longer period than the production lever 6h strongly vibrates) It shows that it emits rainbow light.

"None" in the column of role product action indicates that the movable effect members 17A to 17C do not operate.
"Yes" in the column of role product action is a role product action effect (determined action effect) in which the movable effect members 17A to 17C operate and emit light in a predetermined manner. The execution period of the performance of the performance of the action (decision motion performance) is 10 seconds from the start of the determination success performance.
The "role object action effect (determined action effect)" means that the movable effect members 17A to 17C start moving from the standby position to the effect position all at once, and then the movable effect members 17A to 17C at the effect position move to the standby position. It is a production until the return of is completed.
In addition, the performance of the action of the movable production members 17A to 17C is performed from the start of movement of the movable production members 17A to 17C from the standby position to the production position until the start of the return of the movable production members 17A to 17C from the production position to the standby position. may be

More specifically, an effect action in which the blade portion of the first movable effect member 17A moves to the left, and an effect action in which the second movable effect member 17B moves downward from the standby position to the front side of the center of the screen of the image display device 16. , and the effect action in which the blade portion of the third movable effect member 17C moves upward is performed all at once (determination action), and after each movable effect member 17A to 17C emits rainbow light, each movable effect member 17A to 17C Return to standby position. The role product action effect in which the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C perform the effect action all at once is executed when the deciding effect among the plurality of kinds of jackpot notification effects is performed.

On the other hand, in the pseudo-continuous production and development production, the performance action (weak action) by the first movable production member 17A or the production action (strong action) by the second movable production member 17B is performed. That is, in the pseudo-continuous production and development production, a role product action production different from the role product action production in which the first to third movable production members 17A to 17C perform the production action all at once is executed.

“None” in the column of sound effects indicates that the sound output device 9 does not output sound effects (sound effects).
"Success sound effect" indicates that the sound output device 9 outputs a success sound effect as a dramatic sound. As for the success effect sound, a success effect sound A is output in the case of a decision success performance with the performance button 6a as an operation target, and a success sound effect different from the success effect sound A is output in the case of a decision success performance with the performance lever 6h as the operation target. A sound effect B is output.
Note that the success effect sound may be the same for the determined success performance with the performance button 6a as the operation target and the determination success performance with the performance lever 6h as the operation target, or success when the performance button 6a is in the normal state. Even if the sound effect, the success sound effect when the production button 6a is in the projecting state, the success sound effect when the production lever 6h is in the normal state, and the success sound effect when the production lever 6h is in the projecting state are different. good.

"Non-luminous" in the column of lamp light emission indicates that the board lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 do not emit light, and "Rainbow light emission" means that the board lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 do not emit light. It indicates that it emits light.

In this way, the determined success effect includes an image display effect using a success effect image, a role object action effect using the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C, a button vibration effect using the effect button 6a, and a button that emits rainbow light from the effect button 6a. It consists of a series of effects such as a light emission effect, a lamp light effect in which the lamps of the board lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 emit rainbow light, and a sound effect in which a success sound effect is output from the sound output device 9. The effect is executed regardless of the presence or absence of the operation of the operation means during the fixed effective period.
On the other hand, in the determination failure effect, the character action effect, the vibration effect, the button light effect, the lamp light effect and the sound effect are not executed.

In addition, since the effect button device 6A and the effect lever device 6C are provided in the storage plate (receiving plate) 5, when the button vibration motor 6d that vibrates the effect button 6a is driven, the vibration acts as a transmission member. It is transmitted to the production lever 6h through the plate 5. On the other hand, when the lever vibration motor 6j for vibrating the effect lever 6h is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 6a through the storage plate 5.例文帳に追加

In other words, when the player is operating one of the operating means with the operating hand, if a vibration effect is executed to vibrate the other operating means, the vibration is transmitted to the player's operating means via the other means. It is designed to be transmitted.

In addition, since the effect button device 6A, the effect lever device 6C and the firing handle 7 are provided in the storage dish 5 attached to the opening and closing door 3 having the window 3a, the button vibration motor 6d that vibrates the effect button 6a is driven. Then, the vibration is transmitted to the firing handle 7 through the opening/closing door 3 and the storage dish 5 that serve as transmission members. Further, when the lever vibration motor 6j for vibrating the effect lever 6h is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 6a through the storage plate 5. - 特許庁A vibrating motor may be provided in the firing handle 7 to vibrate the firing handle 7 itself.

The effect button device 6A may be provided with a decoration unit connected to the inside of the button body of the effect button 6a so as to be relatively operable, and a driving mechanism for operating the button body and the decoration unit individually or in conjunction with each other. good. In this case, the button body is assembled so as to move up and down relative to the decoration unit. In addition, the decoration unit is provided with a plurality of LEDs (light emitting units). Further, a cover portion is provided so as to surround the outer surfaces of the button main body portion and the decoration unit and move up and down.
For example, when a spherical decoration unit is provided, an opaque effect button image simulating the effect button 6a in which the decoration unit emits red light is displayed in the operation promoting effect, and a single hit operation of the effect button 6a results in a success effect. From the start of the execution, the decoration unit that emits red light by driving the drive mechanism rotates for 4 seconds, and then rotates again for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second. Button 6a) strongly vibrates (4 seconds→5 seconds).
Incidentally, the decoration unit may be used instead of the production lever 6h.

As a first feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52, when a determination success effect is executed, a vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a big winning game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a second feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52, the effective period occurs over the longest period as the effective period generated during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to operate the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h, thereby improving the interest of the game.

As a third feature of the decided effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52, the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h vibrates over the longest period as the strong vibration effect that occurs during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of the winning performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the decided effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52, the period of rainbow emission of the effect button 6a is longer than the vibration period of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h (10 seconds including the pause period) ( 11 seconds). Therefore, even after the vibration of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h ends, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fifth feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52, the determination success effect is the same regardless of whether the state of the effect button 6a (effect lever 6h) during the determination effective period is the normal state or the protruded state. (strong vibration (4 seconds→5 seconds)). Therefore, even if the state of the performance button 6a during the determined effective period is normal state or protruding state, it is possible to effectively inform that the big winning game is to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game. becomes possible.

As a sixth feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52, even when the determination success effect is executed due to the operation of the effect button 6a, even when the determination success effect is executed due to the operation of the effect lever 6h , the vibration effect mode of the vibration effect in the determined success effect is the same (strong vibration (4 seconds→5 seconds)). Therefore, regardless of the type of operation means, it is possible to effectively notify that a jackpot game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a seventh feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52, the vibration effect mode of the vibration effect in the determination success effect is the same (strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)) regardless of the type of reach effect. . In other words, even when the jackpot performance pattern 16a with even-numbered patterns is stopped and displayed, even when the jackpot performance pattern 16a with odd-numbered patterns is stopped and displayed, the vibration performance mode of the vibration performance in the determined success performance. are the same (strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)). Therefore, regardless of the type of the jackpot effect pattern 16a, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the eighth feature of the decision effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52, when the decision success effect accompanying the operation of the operation means is executed, the operation mode of the operation means Push operation, tilting operation of the effect lever 6h) and the vibration effect mode of the vibration effect in the determined success effect are the same (strong vibration (4 seconds→5 seconds)) regardless of the type of operation means. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a big winning game is to be executed regardless of the operation mode of the operation means and the type of the operation means in the determined effective period, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As a ninth feature of the decided effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52, the jackpot pattern with "7" pattern is stopped and displayed rather than the jackpot pattern with even number pattern or "7" pattern is stopped and displayed. In this case, it is easier to execute the decided success effect involving the operation of the effect lever 6h. Therefore, rarity can be imparted to the decision success effect accompanying the operation of the effect lever 6h, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the decided production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52, the normal mode A ~ C and the probability variable / time saving mode D ~ G, the ratio of execution of the successful production determined by the production lever 6h is the same, but the normal mode Rather than A to C, the probability variation / time reduction mode D ~ G may have a higher ratio of execution of the successful performance determined with the operation of the production lever 6h, or the probability variation / time reduction mode D ~ G Also, in the normal modes A to C, the ratio of execution of the determined success effect involving the operation of the effect lever 6h may be higher.

Incidentally, at least two or more operation means may be used as the above-mentioned determination success vibration effect. Specifically, the effect button 6a and the effect lever 6h, the effect button 6a and the firing handle 7, or the effect button 6a, the effect lever 6h and the firing handle 7 are used to perform a successful vibration effect (long-term strong vibration). . As a result, it is possible to execute a decision success vibration effect that can give a strong impact.

For example, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot, a success vibration effect determined by the effect button 6a, the effect lever 6h and the launch handle 7 is executed.
In the case of the 4R probability variable jackpot, a decision success vibration performance is executed by the performance button 6a and the performance lever 6h.
In the case of a 4R normal jackpot, a decision success vibration presentation is executed by the presentation button 6a and the shooting handle 7. - 特許庁

As the tenth feature of the decided effect determination table shown in FIG. Accompanied decision production (effect success image, decision success vibration production, decision motion by movable production members 17A to 17C) is executed.
If the game ball wins in the first start port 10a during the variable probability / time saving mode D ~ G and is a judgment result of a big hit, the execution ratio of the reach effect (special reach D) with a decided effect is low ( (See FIG. 44 (2)), when the game ball wins in the first start port 10a during the variable probability / time saving mode D to G and the result is a big hit, the first start port 10a in the normal mode A to C A game ball wins a prize and a big hit judgment result or a game ball wins in the second start port 11 during the probability variable / time saving mode D to G and a big hit judgment result, the decision performance accompanying the operation of the operation means is more important. difficult to implement.
In addition, when the game ball enters the first starting port 10a during the probability variable / time saving mode D ~ G and is a judgment result of a big hit, it is possible to execute a decided performance without operating the operation means.

As the eleventh feature of the decided effect determination table shown in FIG. Since the execution ratio of the production (special reach D) is low (see FIG. 44 (2)), the game ball wins the first start port 10 during the variable probability / time saving mode D ~ G and the judgment result of the jackpot In the case, the game ball enters the second start port 11a during the probability variable / time saving mode D to G, and the effective suggesting effect and effective suggesting that the effective period may occur than in the case of the judgment result of the jackpot. It is difficult to execute the operation promotion effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 6a during the period.

(Information table for decision success production)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a determined success effect information table referred to when executing a determined success effect.
Decided success production (image production, role movement production, vibration production, button lighting production, lamp lighting production and sound production) is the production content of the reach production involving the operation of the operation means during the fixed effective period during the SPSP reach production ( Based on the battle/mission), when it starts at the start of operation of the operation means (production button 6a, production lever 6h), when it starts after the operation of the operation means (production button 6a, production lever 6h) is started, There is

When battle A or battle B is executed as the SPSP ready-to-win production, a fixed effective period (5 seconds) is started during execution of battle A or battle B (at the end), and one single hit operation of the production button 6a. An operation prompting image (an opaque effect button image, a gauge image, and a character image of "press") is displayed.
Then, when a single hit operation of the performance button 6a is started during the determination valid period, the determination success performance is started. On the other hand, if the performance button 6a is not single-hit during the determined effective period, the determined success performance is started at the end of the determined effective period.

When Battle C is executed as the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the effective period (5 seconds) determined during the execution of Battle C is started, and an operation prompting image (opaque effect lever image) prompting a single tilting operation of the effect lever 6h is displayed. , gauge image, and character image of “Close”) are displayed.
Then, when one tilting operation of the performance lever 6h is started during the determination effective period, the determination success performance is started. On the other hand, when the tilting operation of the production lever 6h is not performed during the fixed effective period, the fixed success production is started at the end of the fixed effective period.

When mission A (big rock destruction mission) is executed as an SPSP reach effect, an effective period (5 seconds) determined during the execution of mission A is started, and an operation promotion image (opaque A production button image, a gauge image, and a character image of "Consecutive hits") are displayed.
Then, after the continuous hitting operation of the performance button 6a is started during the determination effective period, the determination success performance is started when the large rock is completely destroyed. On the other hand, when the production button 6a is not repeatedly hit during the fixed effective period, the fixed success production is started at the end of the fixed effective period.

When mission B (successful mission to reach level meter MAX) is executed as SPSP ready-to-reach production, a fixed valid period (5 seconds) is started while mission B is being executed, and an operation prompting a long-pressing operation of the production button 6a is performed. A promotion image (an opaque effect button image, a gauge image, and a “long press” character image) is displayed.
Then, when the level value of the level meter reaches MAX after the long pressing operation of the performance button 6a is started during the determination effective period, the determination success performance is started. On the other hand, when the long pressing operation of the performance button 6a is not performed during the fixed valid period, the fixed success performance is started at the end of the fixed valid period.

In this way, the determined success effect is executed regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated during the effective period.
In addition, the start timing of the determined success performance in the case of the battle performance based on the single-hit operation of the performance button 6a or the performance lever 6h, and the decision success performance in the case of the battle performance based on the continuous hitting operation or the long-pressing operation of the performance button 6a. is different from the start timing of

Therefore, in the case of the strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect), in the case of the battle effect based on one single-hit operation of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h, one single-hit operation of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is performed. When it is started (due to the start of operation of the operating means), a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is started. On the other hand, when the performance button 6a or the performance lever 6h is not single-hit, a strong vibration performance (decision success vibration performance) is started at the end of the determined effective period.

In addition, in the case of a mission effect based on a repeated hitting operation or a long-pressing operation of the effect button 6a, after the repeated hitting operation or long-pressing operation of the effect button 6a is started (not due to the start of operation of the operation means) When the mission is successful A strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is started. On the other hand, when the production button 6a is not repeatedly hit or long-pressed, a strong vibration production (decision success vibration production) is started at the end of the fixed effective period.

Further, in the case of mission A based on the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 6a, after the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 6a is started and immediately before the large rock is completely destroyed, a one-second strong vibration effect is performed.
In addition, in the case of mission B based on the long-pressing operation of the effect button 6a, when the level value of the level meter reaches the level value immediately before reaching the MAX after the long-pressing operation of the effect button 6a is started, a strong vibration effect is performed for 1 second. is executed.

In the case of mission B based on the long-pressing operation of the effect button 6a, the level value of the level meter reaches a predetermined specific value (2, 4, 6, 8) after the long-pressing operation of the effect button 6a is started. A vibration effect (weak vibration) may be performed every time, or the effect mode of the vibration effect (vibration period, vibration intensity, etc.) may be varied. For example, when the level value of the level meter is the first specific value (“2”), the vibration mode of the vibration effect (“bull” at the vibration time of 0.2 seconds) and the second specific value (“4”) The vibration mode of the vibration presentation ("blurring" with a vibration time of 0.3 seconds) may be varied.

In addition, when the battle effect based on the continuous hitting operation or long-pressing operation of the effect button 6a is executed, after the continuous hitting operation or long-pressing operation of the effect button 6a is started, the determined success effect (determined success vibration effect) at the time of winning the battle. is started.
That is, even with the same ready-to-win effect (battle effect), the start timing of the determined success effect (determined success vibration effect) differs depending on the operation mode of the effect button 6a.

(Execution start timing and end timing of decision success effect)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the execution start timing and end timing of the determined success effect (success image, determined success vibration effect, determined accessory effect) associated with the presence or absence of operation of the operating means.
FIG. 54(1) is a diagram showing the execution start timing and end timing of the decision success effect (decision success vibration effect) when no button operation is performed during the valid period. Figure 54 (2-1) and (2-2) show the start timing and end of execution of the decision success effect (success image, decision success vibration effect, decision character effect) when the button is operated during the valid period. It is a figure which shows a timing.

Comparing FIGS. 54(1), (2-1) and (2-2), the determined success effect is executed whether or not the operating means is operated during the validity period.
Also, the execution start timing of the determined success effect differs depending on the operation timing of the effect button 6a during the valid period (timing depending on the presence or absence of operation) (timing of T1 or T2).
The end timing of the decided success effect is the same regardless of the operation timing of the effect button 6a during the effective period (timing of T7).
Therefore, the display start timing of the success effect image, the vibration start timing of the strong vibration effect, and the operation start timing of the character action effect differ depending on whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing, and the display of the success effect image is different. The period, the execution period of the strong vibration production (determined success vibration production), and the execution period of the character action production are different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (2-1), when the production button 6a is operated during the effective period (timing of T2), it is faster than when the production button 6a is not operated during the effective period ( Timing T3), the display start timing of the success effect image is earlier, so the display period of the success effect image becomes longer.
That is, when the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period, the success effect image starts to be displayed at the start of the operation, and continues to be displayed until the success effect is completed.

Also, when the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period (timing of T2), the vibration start timing of the strong vibration effect is earlier than when the effect button 6a is not operated during the effective period (timing of T3). Therefore, the execution period of the strong vibration effect becomes longer (the execution period of the strong vibration effect becomes variable). Specifically, when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period, the strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds) by the vibration motor 6d is started at the start of the operation, and the strong vibration (4 seconds) is started until the success effect is completed. seconds → 5 seconds) is repeated.
In other words, when the execution period of the vibration performance is variable, the vibration performance is executed until the same timing (the timing when the determined success performance ends) regardless of whether or not the performance button 6a is operated during the valid period and the operation timing.

Also, when the production button 6a is operated during the effective period (timing of T2), the operation start timing of the performance of the character action production is higher than when the production button 6a is not operated during the effective period (timing of T3). Since it is faster, the performance period of the performance of the role product action becomes longer (the performance period of the performance of the role product action becomes variable). Specifically, when the production button 6a is operated during the valid period, the deciding motion of the movable production members 17A to 17C is started at the start of the operation, and the timing (timing of T6) before the completion of the successful decision production is completed. ), the movable production members 17A to 17C remain in the production position, and then the movable production members 17A to 17C return to the standby position.
In other words, when the execution period of the performance of the performance of the performance of the role product is variable, the performance of the performance of the performance of the performance of the performance continues until the same timing (timing at which the success performance ends) regardless of whether or not the performance button 6a is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. executed.

As shown in FIG. 54(2-2), regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period and the operation timing, the execution period of the strong vibration effect and the execution period of the character action effect are unchanged. good too. Specifically, when the production button 6a is operated during the valid period, the execution period of the strong vibration production and the character action production ends at the timing (timing T5) before the timing at which the determined success production ends. , only the successful effect image will continue to be displayed.
In other words, when the execution period of the strong vibration effect and the execution period of the character object action effect are unchanged, the strong vibration effect and the character object action effect end depending on whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. different timing.

In the case of the cut-in effect described above, the execution period remains unchanged regardless of the operation timing of the effect button 6a during the effective period (similar to FIG. 54 (2-2)). Therefore, since the execution period of the vibration performance is also unchanged, the start timing and the end timing of the vibration performance correspond to the operation timing of the performance button 6a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the players from having excessive expectations.

(Vibration production information table for matching patterns)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a symbol-matching vibration effect information table referred to when the symbol-matched big win effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the big win variation effect.
"Jackpot pattern matching" means that the jackpot display mode ("222" even number pattern, "777" odd-numbered symbols, etc.) to form and stop display.
It should be noted that the big win display mode may be formed by the production pattern 16a of the highly decorative display mode (7 and the pig character) composed of numbers and characters, and may be stopped and displayed.

In the big hit variation performance, the big hit variation performance pattern in which the big hit patterns are aligned by executing the determined performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 6a/performance lever 6h during the ready-to-win performance, and the operation of the performance button 6a/performance lever 6h during the ready-to-win performance. There is a big hit fluctuation performance pattern in which a determined performance without accompanying is executed and the big winning patterns are aligned.

The big hit fluctuation production pattern in which the decision production without the operation of the production button 6a / production lever 6h is executed during the ready-to-win production and the big hit pattern is complete is the fluctuation production pattern of the SP reach big hit (variation production pattern 14: Fig. 43).
Specifically, the effective period decided at the end of the SP ready-to-play effect does not occur (no display of the operation promotion image), the image display effect by the effect image, the character action effect by the third movable effect member 17C, the effect button 6a Vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds → 5 seconds), button light emission effect in which the effect button 6a emits rainbow light, lamp light emission effect in which the lamps of the board lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 emit rainbow light, from the audio output device 9 After a series of success performances such as a sound performance of outputting a success effect sound is executed, the performance pattern 16a is temporarily stopped and displayed with the D symbols aligned.

In the performance of the character action by the third movable effect member 17C, the blade part of the third movable effect member 17C emitting rainbow light is pulled out of the sheath and tilted to the front side of the display screen of the first image display device 16. A decision operation for returning to the standby position is performed later. The action mode of this winning action is different from the winning action executed in the winning effect accompanying the operation of the operating means. It should be noted that the operation mode may be the same as that of the winning action executed in the winning effect involving the operation of the operating means.

As shown in FIG. 55 (1), during the ready-to-win production, the determined success production is executed, and the production pattern 16a is temporarily stopped in any display mode of the even number pattern matching ("222") and the odd number pattern matching ("777"). Even when it is displayed (first timing), the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the production button 6a strongly vibrates for 4 seconds without generating an effective period (without displaying the operation prompting image). A strong vibration effect is executed.

When the production pattern 16a is temporarily stopped and displayed in any of the display modes of the even number pattern matching ("222") and the odd number pattern matching ("777") without executing the determined success effect during the ready-to-win effect (first timing) Even so, a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a strongly vibrates for 4 seconds without generating an effective period (without displaying an operation prompting image).

In this way, even if the final effect is executed and the jackpot effect pattern 16a is temporarily stopped and displayed in any of the display mode of even numbered patterns ("222") and odd numbered patterns ("777"), the valid period (without displaying the operation prompting image), the vibration effect is executed in the same vibration mode (strong vibration, vibration period of 4 seconds).
In addition, even if the jackpot production pattern 16a is temporarily stopped and displayed in any of the display modes of even numbered patterns ("222") and odd numbered patterns ("777") without execution of the determined production, the effective period is Vibration performance is executed in the same vibration mode (strong vibration, vibration period of 4 seconds) without generating (without displaying the operation prompting image).
In other words, the vibration performance executed when the jackpot pattern is aligned is the jackpot performance in any display mode of the even number pattern matching (“222”) or the odd number pattern matching (“777”) regardless of whether or not the decision performance is executed. Even when the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the vibration mode is the same (strong vibration, vibration period of 4 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 55(2), when the effect pattern 16a with the big hit pattern at the second timing after the first timing is temporarily stopped and displayed, the vibration period of the vibration effect differs depending on the type of pattern. there is
Even if the effect pattern 16a is temporarily stopped in any of the display mode of the even number pattern matching (for example, "222") and the odd number pattern pattern matching other than 7 (for example, "333"), the valid period is generated. A strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a strongly vibrates for 1 second (without displaying the operation promoting image).
On the other hand, when the production pattern 16a is temporarily stopped and displayed in the display mode of "7" pattern alignment, button vibration for vibrating the production button 6a without generating the effective period (without displaying the operation promotion image). A strong vibration effect is executed in which the motor 6d strongly vibrates for four seconds.

(Re-lottery effect pattern decision table)
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a re-lottery effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 56, the re-lottery effect pattern determination table includes the type of effect mode, whether there is a promotion (whether it is planned to be promoted), the selection rate (%) of each re-lottery effect pattern, and the re-lottery effect to be selected. A pattern is associated. As a reference, the effect configuration of each re-lottery effect pattern is described.

"Valid period: single hit / 3 seconds" indicates that the effective period in the re-lottery effect ends with one operation of the effect button 6a or ends when 3 seconds elapse without the effect button 6a being operated. ing.
In the re-lottery effect, the effective suggesting effect is not executed, but the effective suggesting effect may be executed. Further, when the promotion success effect is executed in the re-lottery effect, the vibration effect may be executed during the effective suggestion effect. A player's sense of expectation can be heightened even before execution of promotion success presentation.

The "operation prompting effect" is a effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 6a during the effective period. Specifically, the remaining period of the operation effective period (3 seconds) in which the opaque effect button image displayed at a specific position without executing the effective suggestion effect and the single hit operation of the effect button 6a becomes effective is gauged. An operation prompting image composed of a gauge image indicated by the length of and a character image of "Press" is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the column of the operation promoting effect means that a button image that imitates the effect button 6a that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits white light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and the effect button 6a is displayed. indicates that white light is emitted.
"Normal button red" means that a button image imitating the production button 6a that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits red light is displayed as an opaque production button image, and that the production button 6a emits red light. showing.
"Normal button rainbow" means that a button image simulating the effect button 6a that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits rainbow light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and that the effect button 6a emits rainbow light. showing.
The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each promotion effect is “normal button white” < “normal button red” < “normal button rainbow”.

"Button state" indicates the state of the effect button 6a during the effective period. "Normal" in the button state column indicates a normal state in which the effect button 6a does not protrude.

"Promotion failure effect" in the column of re-lottery effect mode refers to a non-promoted pattern that does not become an advantageous effect pattern for the player as a result of the re-lottery effect (for example, even number pattern → even number pattern, odd number pattern other than "7" → odd-numbered symbols other than "7") are derived and displayed (temporary stop display).
"Promotion success effect" means that the promotion pattern (for example, even number pattern → odd number pattern, odd number pattern other than "7" → "7" pattern) that becomes a production pattern that is advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery effect is derived and displayed. (temporary stop display).

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the production button 6a strongly vibrates for 3 seconds from the time the promotion symbol is derived and displayed (at the end of the valid period). It shows that the strong vibration effect to be performed is executed.

"Rainbow luminescence (4 seconds)" in the button luminescence column means that the button luminescence LED 6e for illuminating the production button 6a is displayed for 4 seconds (at the end of the valid period) from the time the promotion symbol is derived (at the end of the valid period) (the production button 6a is strong). It shows rainbow emission over a longer period of time than when vibrating.

"Non-promoted sound effect" in the column of sound effects indicates that a non-promoted sound effect is output when a non-promoted symbol is derived and displayed.
"Promoting sound effect" indicates that a promotional sound effect is emitted when the promotion symbol is derived and displayed.

A first feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56 is that when the promotion success effect is executed, a vibrating effect is executed in which the effect period is generated and the effect button 6a is vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the fact that the symbol has been promoted to a jackpot pattern that is advantageous to the player, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a second feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56, the rainbow light emission of the effect button 6a is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained even after the strong-vibration presentation ends, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the valid period is generated (with the display of the operation promotion image) and the re-lottery effect is executed, but the re-lottery effect is performed without generating the valid period (without the display of the operation prompt image). may be executed.

(The number of times the button vibration is executed after the decision success effect is started)
FIG. 57 shows that in the big hit fluctuation effect in which the re-lottery effect is executed, the decision success effect is started until the big hit effect pattern is fixed and stopped (determined success effect, pattern matching effect, re-lottery effect, pattern matching effect, It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of execution of button vibration of design confirmation stop).

As shown in FIG. 57, after the start of the determined success effect, there are cases where the jackpot effect pattern 16a with even-numbered patterns is fixed and stopped, and the case where the jackpot effect pattern 16a with odd-numbered patterns is fixed and stopped. , the number of times the button vibration runs is different.

Specifically, when the even-numbered pattern ("2" pattern) is not promoted to the odd-numbered pattern in the re-lottery production and the jackpot production pattern 16a with the even-numbered pattern is confirmed and stopped, after the success production is started. The number of times the button vibration is executed until the pattern determination is stopped is three times.
In the re-lottery performance, when the odd numbered symbols (“3” symbols) other than the “7” symbols are not promoted to the “7” symbols, and the jackpot performance symbol 16a with the odd numbered symbols other than the “7” symbols is confirmed and stopped. , the number of executions of the button vibration from the start of the decision success performance to the stop of the design determination is 3 times.

On the other hand, in the re-lottery production, the even numbered pattern ("2" pattern) is promoted to the odd numbered pattern ("7" pattern), and when the jackpot production pattern 16a with the odd numbered patterns is fixed and stopped, the success production is started. The number of times the button vibration is executed from when the game is played to when the symbol determination is stopped is 4 times.
In the re-lottery performance, when the odd-numbered symbols (“3” symbols) other than the “7” symbols are promoted to the “7” symbols and the jackpot performance symbols 16a with the matching “7” symbols are confirmed and stopped, the success performance is determined. The number of executions of the button vibration is four from the start to the stop of design determination.

In this way, the case where the re-lottery performance derives and displays the promoted symbols that become the big winning symbols that are advantageous to the player rather than the case that the non-promoted symbols that do not become the big winning symbols that are advantageous to the player are derived and displayed in the re-lottery performance. The number of executions of the button vibration and the number of executions of the character performance from the start of the determination success performance to the stop of the design determination are larger. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the execution of a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player, increase the player's joy of winning the jackpot, and improve the amusement of the game.

Even when the non-promoting symbols which do not become the big winning patterns advantageous to the player are temporarily stopped and displayed after the determined successful performance, and even when the big winning symbols advantageous to the player are temporarily stopped and displayed, the determined success vibration performance of the determined success performance. are the same (vibration period of 4 seconds to 5 seconds for strong vibration).

When the performance symbols with matching symbols are temporarily stopped after the decided success performance, even if the big winning symbols that are not advantageous to the player are temporarily suspended, the big winning symbols that are advantageous to the player are temporarily stopped. Even when it is stopped, the vibration mode of the button vibration is the same (vibration period of 4 seconds with strong vibration).

(Fixed production pattern decision table)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a confirmed effect pattern determination table referred to when deciding the effect pattern of the confirmed effect.

As shown in FIG. 58, the determined effect pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, the type of variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each determined effect pattern, and the determined effect pattern to be selected. For reference, the effect configuration of each fixed effect pattern is described.

"-" in the execution timing column indicates the timing at which the fixed effect is not executed, and "O" indicates the timing at which the fixed effect is executed.
"Confirmation sound" in the column of effect sound indicates that a confirmation sound is output to notify that a jackpot game will be executed.
The "handle rainbow light emission" in the column of light emission means that the handle LED for lighting the firing handle 7 emits a rainbow light from the time when the confirmation sound is output until the fluctuation stops (over four seconds or more until the production pattern 16a stops displaying). It indicates that it emits light.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the column of button vibration means that the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a strongly vibrates for 3 seconds from the output of the confirmation sound. It is shown that.

A first feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that when the fixed effect is executed, the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a is executed without generating the effective period. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a big winning game is to be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that the rainbow emission of the firing handle 7 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained even after the strong-vibration presentation ends, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Resurrection effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a resurrection effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a resurrection effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 59, the resurrection effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the ready-to-win type, the selection rate (%) of each resurrection effect pattern, and the resurrection effect pattern to be selected. For reference, the effect configuration of each resurrection effect pattern is described.

In "SP ready-to-win" in the variable effect pattern column, when the big win judgment result is a big win and the revival effect pattern not executing the revival effect is selected, it is suggested that the battle win/mission success is achieved in the SP ready-to-win effect. A winning/success suggesting performance is performed, and the performance symbols 16a with all D symbols (only numbers) are temporarily stopped and displayed.
On the other hand, when the jackpot determination result is a loss or a jackpot and a revival production pattern for executing a revival production is selected, a defeat/success suggestion production suggesting battle defeat/mission failure is carried out in the SP ready-to-win production. Then, the effect symbol 16a indicating the reach loss is temporarily stopped and displayed.

The "effective period" in the effect configuration column means that the effective period of the resurrection effect ends with the operation of the effect button 6a (single hit operation/continuous hit operation) or with the operation of the effect lever 6h (tilting operation). This indicates that the game will end or will end when 4 seconds elapse without the production button 6a/production lever 6h being operated.

The "type of operation means" in the column of effective period indicates the type of operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) whose operation is valid during the effective period. The operation becomes effective, and if it is the "production lever", it indicates that the operation of the production lever 6h becomes effective.

The "operation prompting effect" is a effect that prompts the user to operate the operation means (the effect button 6a and the effect lever 6h) during the effective period. Specifically, an opaque effect button image or an opaque effect lever image, a gauge image showing the remaining period of the operation effective period (4 seconds) in which the operation of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is valid, by the length of the gauge, An operation prompting image composed of a character image of "press, repeat or pull" is displayed.
It should be noted that the operation promotion effect ends with the operation of the operating means (the effect button 6a, the effect lever 6h) during the valid period, or when the valid period (4 seconds) elapses without the operating means being operated. .

"Normal button white" in the column of the operation promoting effect means that a button image that imitates the effect button 6a that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits white light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and the effect button 6a is displayed. indicates that white light is emitted.
"Normal lever" indicates that a lever image imitating the production lever 6h of a predetermined size is displayed as the opaque production lever image.

"State of operation means" indicates the state of the operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) during the valid period, and "normal" is a normal state in which the effect button 6a does not protrude. .

The "operation mode" indicates the type of operation mode of the operation means (the production button 6a, the production lever 6h) during the effective period.
"Single hit" in the operation mode column indicates that the effect button 6a is pressed once from the position in the normal state or the protruded state to the pressed position, and "Consecutive hits" means that the effect button 6a is pressed from the position in the normal state. Depressing operation to the depressing position is continuously performed a plurality of times, and "tilting" refers to tilting the production lever 6h in the front-rear direction from the normal position.

"Recovery failure effect" in the column of resurrection effect mode indicates that an effect suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is executed.
“Resurrection success effect” indicates that an effect suggesting that a jackpot game is executed is executed.
"Failure image" in the result image column indicates that a dark image is displayed on the screen of the first image display device 16, and "success image" indicates that a success effect image is displayed on the screen of the first image display device 16. is displayed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds)" in the column of button/lever vibration is a strong vibration effect (resurrection A strong vibration effect (successful recovery vibration effect) is executed in which the lever vibration motor 6j for vibrating the effect lever 6h strongly vibrates for four seconds from the start of the successful recovery effect. Which indicates that.

"Rainbow light emission" in the column of button/lever light emission is determined by the button light emission LED 6e for lighting the production button 6a for 6 seconds from the start of the successful production (longer period than the strong vibration of the production button 6a). Rainbow light is emitted for 6 seconds (longer period than the strong vibration of the production button 6a) from the start of the success production, which is determined by the lever light emission LED 6k for lighting the production lever 6h. It is shown that.

"None" in the column of role product action indicates that the movable effect members 17A to 17C do not operate.
"Yes" in the column of role product action indicates that the third movable production member 17C performs a role product action production in which it operates and emits light in a predetermined manner.
Specifically, the third movable effect member 17C at the standby position emits rainbow light, the blade is pulled out of the sheath, and tilts to the front side of the display screen of the first image display device 16. After performing the effect operation, it moves to the standby position. A role object action production is performed by a strong action with a large movement width to return.

“None” in the column of sound effects indicates that the sound output device 9 does not output sound effects (sound effects).
"Success sound effect" indicates that the sound output device 9 outputs a success sound effect as a dramatic sound. As for the success effect sound, success sound effect A is output in the case of the resurrection success production with the production button 6a as the operation object, and success effect sound A is output in the case of the resurrection success production with the production lever 6h as the operation object. A success sound effect B with a different sound is output.
Incidentally, the success effect sound may be the same for the resurrection success effect with the effect button 6a as the operation target and the resurrection success effect with the effect lever 6h as the operation target.

"Non-luminous" in the column of lamp light emission indicates that the board lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 do not emit light, and "Rainbow light emission" means that the board lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 do not emit light. It indicates that it emits light.

A first feature of the resurrection effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that, when a resurrection effect is executed, a vibration effect (successful resurrection vibration effect) is generated to generate an effective period and vibrate the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h. ) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the recovery jackpot will be achieved, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the resurrection effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is performed over a longer period than the vibrating period of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h. Therefore, even after the vibration of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h ends, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

A third feature of the resurrection effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that even when the resurrection success effect is executed in accordance with the operation of the effect button 6a, even when the resurrection success effect is executed in accordance with the operation of the effect lever 6h. , the vibration mode of the vibration effect in the resurrection success effect is the same (strong vibration (4 seconds)). Therefore, regardless of the type of operation means, it is possible to effectively notify that the recovery jackpot game will be performed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A fourth feature of the revival effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 6h tilting operation), the vibration mode of the vibration effect in the recovery success effect is the same (strong vibration (4 seconds)). Therefore, regardless of the operating mode of the operating means during the validity period, it is possible to effectively notify that the recovery jackpot will be achieved, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fifth feature of the resurrection effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59, the resurrection effect is more likely to be executed in the variable probability/time saving modes D to G than in the normal modes A to C. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the big hit variation effect in the variable probability mode from becoming monotonous, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature of the resurrection effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59, when the big hit determination result is a big hit, the probability variable / time reduction mode D to G is more likely to be revived than the normal mode A to C. A jackpot pattern of "7" patterns, which is the most advantageous jackpot game for players, is likely to be stopped and displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to raise expectations in the variable probability/shorter working hours modes D to G, which are advantageous for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.
It should be noted that the resurrection effect can be executed even in the case of SPSP ready-to-play (for example, SPSP ready-to-play in which the determined effect is not executed), and the resurrection effect pattern is determined with reference to the resurrection effect pattern determination table shown in FIG.

(Production example when continuous notice production and step-up notice production are executed)
60 and 61, an example of an effect when the button vibration notice effect (continuous notice effect) and the step-up notice effect are executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 60(1), in the first image display device 16, the production pattern 16a of "2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 (tiger)" and the special pattern TZ of "216" indicating the failure are displayed for a predetermined time. It is in the state of fixed stop display. In addition, a pending number "3" is displayed in the first pending number display area 16e, and three pending icons "⊚ (white)" are displayed in the first pending icon display area 16b. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, the lighting device 23 for the board is lighting up the lamp.

The symbol fixing period in which the effect symbol 16a is fixed and stopped is set to the same time (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of the type of variation effect pattern to be executed or the big hit determination result.
The variable display of the special symbols TZ is continuously performed in a fixed display mode during the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbols to the stop display.
In addition, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is positioned at a position ( For example, it is displayed near the lower left end of the display screen of the first image display device 16). It should be noted that, as a more preferable aspect, it is preferable that the image is always displayed in a visible state without being blocked by the effect operation of the first movable effect members 17A to 17C.

The display of the reserved numbers in the first reserved number display area 16e and the second reserved number display area 16f is maintained in a visible state even if the production operation of the movable production members 17A to 17C is performed, as with the special symbol TZ. The image is displayed at a position considered to be easy to read (for example, the edge of the display screen of the first image display device 16). It should be noted that, as a more preferable aspect, it is preferable that the display is always visible without being blocked by the performance action of the performance accessory.

As shown in FIG. 60(2), when the design determination period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, at least a part of the three performance symbols 16a performs a predetermined operation, and the special symbols (performance symbols 16a) are variably displayed. is performed.

As the fluctuation start suggesting production HS, for example, the face of "dog, cat, tiger" in the decoration part of the three production patterns 16a of "2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 (tiger)" displayed as fixed stop is enlarged. At the same time, a variation start operation is performed in which the eyes of "dog, cat, tiger" change, and the variable display of the special design (performance design 16a) is started in a display mode different from the display mode of the fixed and stopped performance design 16a. It is suggested that

Since the player's attention to the performance pattern 16a can be attracted by performing the variation start suggesting performance HS, the player can be made to surely recognize that the next pattern variation display will start after the pattern determination is stopped. It becomes possible.

Along with the start of the variable start suggestion effect HS, the first pending number display area 16e changes from "3" to "2", and the three pending icons shift toward the variable icon display area 16d. Further, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started along with the start of the variable start suggestion effect HS.

In addition, along with the start of the fluctuation start suggestion production HS, the first production of the button vibration notice production over three fluctuation productions is started. Specifically, the effect button 6a weakly vibrates for one second, and a weak advance notice is given in which the effect button 6a flashes white.

After that, immediately after the shift of the holding icon is completed, when the holding icon (holding icon "◎" on the left end in the figure), which is the target of the notice of the button vibration notice effect, changes to a blue icon, the fluctuation start suggesting effect HS ends, and As shown in 60(3), the scrolling display (high-speed fluctuation) of the normal size production pattern 16a is started. Also, the winning entrance lamp NR emits the same blue light as the blue icon, and the lamp changing effect is started.

As shown in FIG. 60(4), when the variable time has passed, the three production patterns 16a are temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination display mode "2 (dog) 4 (chicken) 5 (koala)" indicating normal failure. Along with the fixed stop display, the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed in combination with "245".

As shown in FIG. 60(5), when the symbol fixing period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the next variation effect is started, and the variation start suggesting effect HS is performed.
Along with the start of the variable start suggestion effect HS, the first pending number display area 16e changes from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons shift toward the variable icon display area 16d. Further, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started along with the start of the variable start suggestion effect HS.

Further, along with the start of the fluctuation start suggestion effect HS, the second effect of the button vibration notice effect is started. Specifically, the effect button 6a is weakly vibrated for one second, and a weak advance notice is given in which the effect button 6a blinks white.

After that, immediately after the shift of the holding icon is completed, when the holding icon (holding icon "◎" on the left end in the figure), which is the target of the notice of the button vibration notice effect, changes to a red icon, the fluctuation start suggesting effect HS ends, and As shown in 60(6), the scrolling display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect pattern 16a in the normal size is started. Also, the winning entrance lamp NR emits the same red light as the red icon, and a lamp change effect is performed.

As shown in FIG. 60(7), when the fluctuation time has passed, the three production patterns 16a are temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination display mode "3 (rabbit) 1 (cat) 2 (dog)" indicating a normal failure. Along with the fixed stop display, the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed in combination with "312".

As shown in FIG. 60(8), when the symbol fixing period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the change effect for the notice target is started, and the change start suggesting effect HS is performed. Along with the start of the variable start suggestion effect HS, the first pending number display area 16e changes from "1" to "0", and one pending icon shifts toward the variable icon display area 16d side. Further, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started along with the start of the variable start suggestion effect HS.

Further, along with the start of the fluctuation start suggestion effect HS, the third effect of the button vibration notice effect is started. Specifically, a strong advance notice is given by strongly vibrating the production button 6a for 3 seconds and blinking the production button 6a in red.

After that, when the shift of the pending icon is completed, as shown in FIG. 60(9), the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect pattern 16a in the normal size is started, but the strong notice of the button vibration effect continues. becomes. After that, the strong vibration and red flashing of the production button 6a are stopped, and the third production of the button vibration notice production is completed.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the third effect of the button vibration notice effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 61(10), the first step effect (SU1) of the step-up notice effect is started. Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a first step image showing how the bus arrives, and outputs a first step sound effect.

When the first step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 61 (11), the second step effect is started and the second step effect (SU2) is started. Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a second step image showing a female character getting off from an arriving bus and the bus running away, and outputs a second step effect sound.

When the second step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 61 (12), the third step effect is started and the third step effect (SU3) is started. Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a third step image showing a male character appearing and a female character approaching the male character that has appeared, and outputs a third step effect sound. be.

When the third step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 61(13), the fourth step effect is started (SU4). Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a fourth step image showing a female character and a male character approaching each other, and outputs a fourth step sound effect.

When the fourth step effect ends, as shown in FIG. 61 (14), the fifth step progresses to start the fifth step effect (SU5). Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a fifth step image showing two characters talking with each other while smiling, and outputs a fifth step sound effect.
Also, while the effect button 6a is turned off, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 6a is weakly vibrated for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration effect is not accompanied by the operation promotion effect, no effect sound is output when the operation promotion image is displayed or the effect sound is output when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period. The lighting effect of the lamp by the lighting device 23 for the board is continuously performed.

When one second has passed since the start of the weak vibration effect, as shown in FIG. 61 (15), the weak vibration of the effect button 6a stops, the weak vibration effect ends, and two seconds after the end of the weak vibration effect, The fifth step effect ends. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (16), SP ready-to-win effect is executed after normal ready-to-win effect is executed according to the variable effect pattern, or SP ready-to-win effect is executed after normal ready-to-win effect is executed. become.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, after the number of reservations displayed in the number of reservations display area 16e decreases with the start of the fluctuation production (after the start of the fluctuation start suggestion production) The button vibration notice effect is started before the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect pattern 16a is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variable performance has started, and to make it easier for the player to notice that the button vibration notice performance is being executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 60, when the button vibration notice effect is executed, the effect button 6a is flashed in white although the operation promotion effect is not accompanied. Therefore, even when the performance button 6a is not operated, the player can easily notice that the button vibration forewarning performance is being executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 61, the vibration production is not executed during the first to fourth step productions of the step-up notice production, and the vibration production is executed during the fifth step production with the highest degree of expectation for the big win. It's like Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 61, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production executed during the 5th step production is longer than the execution period (3 seconds) of the 5th step production of the step-up notice production. is shorter. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the step performance, prevent the inconvenience of making a player misunderstand that the big win is fixed due to the long vibration performance, and improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 61, the vibration effect executed during the fifth step effect does not accompany the operation promotion effect. Effect sound (operation effect sound, operation effect sound of movable effect member, etc.) when operating 6a is not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of confusing the player at the time of the vibration effect not accompanied by the operation promoting effect, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, even during the vibration production of the production button 6a, the lamp lighting production by the board illumination device 23 is continued. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the presentation effect by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the lamp light emission presentation by the vibration presentation accompanied by the operation promotion presentation, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the effect button 6a is not illuminated in the vibration effect executed during the fifth step effect in the step-up notice effect, but the effect button 6a is kept in a predetermined state (for example, yellow) over the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light by blinking, etc.). By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of production when button vibration notice production and dialogue notice production are executed)
60 and 62, an example of the effect when the button vibration forewarning effect (continuous foretelling effect) and the dialog forecasting effect are executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 60(9) described above, the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the production pattern 16a in the normal size is started, but the strong notice of the button vibration production continues. After that, the strong vibration and red flashing of the production button 6a are stopped, and the third production of the button vibration notice production is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62(17), when a predetermined time has elapsed after the third effect of the button vibration notice effect is completed, as shown in FIG. second) is generated, and the dialog announcement effect is started. Specifically, an operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a that emits white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining period of the effective period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is displayed. Along with the output, the production button 6a emits white light.

After that, when the performance button 6a is single-hit or the effective period passes without being operated, the hot line "I hope you'll be happy" is displayed in a red character image SF as shown in FIG. 62(19). At the same time, a sound (dramatic sound) corresponding to the hot lines is output. In addition, while the effect button 6a is turned off, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 6a is weakly vibrated for one second, but the lamp emission effect by the board illumination device 23 continues.

When one second elapses after the start of the weak vibration performance, the weak vibration performance ends, and two seconds after the end of the weak vibration performance, the speech announcement performance ends. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (20), after the variable display of the performance pattern 16a is continuously performed, a pseudo continuous performance is executed according to the variable performance pattern, a normal performance is executed, or a normal reach is performed. The SP ready-to-win effect is executed after the effect is executed, or the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed after the normal ready-to-win effect is executed.

Thus, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 62, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the dialog preview effect is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the dialogue preview effect. there is Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the speech announcement production. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 62, since the vibration production executed during the speech announcement production does not accompany the effective period of the production button 6a (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image is displayed. The display effect sound and the effect sound when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period are not output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the speech announcement production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 62, the execution period of the vibration effect executed during the speech announcement effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on whether or not the effect button 6a is operated and the operation timing, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 62, even during the vibration production of the production button 6a accompanied by the operation promotion production, the lamp lighting production by the board illumination device 23 is continued. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the presentation effect by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the lamp light emission presentation by the vibration presentation accompanied by the operation promotion presentation, and to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the effect button 6a is not illuminated in the vibration effect executed during the dialog preview effect, but the effect button 6a is kept in a predetermined manner (for example, blinking white, blinking yellow, etc.) throughout the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light.

In addition, regarding the vibration effect executed during the dialog preview effect, the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing at which the effective period passes when the effect button 6a is not operated) 0.5 seconds after) (execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

It should be noted that if the effect button 6a is not operated during the effective period, the dialogue announcement effect may not be executed. In addition, when the dialogue foretelling effect is not executed, the vibration effect may not be executed, or may be executed.

(Example of effect when pseudo-continuous effect is executed)
Using FIG. 63, an example of an effect when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 63(1), in the first image display device 16, the effect symbol 16a of "4 (chicken)" is temporarily stopped in the left area, and the effect symbol 16a of "5 (koala)" is temporarily stopped in the right area. It is temporarily stopped, and the variable display of the production pattern 16a continues in the central area. As shown in FIG. 63(2), the pseudo-continuous effect is started without generating the effective period of the effect button 6a (without displaying the operation prompting image). Specifically, in the central area, a pseudo-influence effect is executed to incite whether or not the pseudo symbol (NEXT symbol) suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is temporarily stopped.

After that, when the fanning effect ends, as shown in FIG. 63(3), the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the central area as a pseudo continuous success effect, and a success effect sound is output.
As shown in FIG. 63(4), the production pattern 16a changes again (pseudo 2). After that, when a predetermined period of time elapses, as shown in FIG. 63(5), in the first image display device 16, the effect symbol 16a of "4 (chicken)" is temporarily stopped in the left area, and "5 (chicken)" is displayed in the right area. Koala)" is temporarily stopped, and the variable display of the production pattern 16a continues in the central area.

As shown in FIG. 63(6), a pseudo-influence effect is executed to incite whether or not the pseudo symbols suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect are temporarily stopped in the central region. At this time, the effective period of the effect button 6a occurs, and an operation prompting image GS (an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a emitting white light and a gauge image) is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image GS is displayed. is output. Also, the production button 6a emits white light.

Thereafter, when the performance button 6a is single-hit or the effective period elapses without being operated, as shown in FIG. A sound effect is output. Also, the production button 6a is turned off, and a weak vibration production is started in which the production button 6a is weakly vibrated for one second.

When one second has passed since the start of the weak vibration effect, as shown in FIG. 63(8), the weak vibration of the effect button 6a stops and the weak vibration effect ends. Then, the character object announcement effect is executed in which the blade portion housed in the sheath portion of the first movable effect member 17A that emits red light moves to the left, and the effect pattern 16a changes again (pseudo 3 ).

When the effect operation time (1 second) of the first movable effect member 17A elapses, the pseudo continuous success effect ends, and as shown in FIG. The pattern 16a is temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win state, and the normal ready-to-win production is started. Thereafter, SP ready-to-win performance is executed after normal ready-to-win performance is executed according to the variable performance pattern, or SPSP ready-to-win performance is to be executed after normal ready-to-win performance is executed.

According to the production example shown in FIG. 63, the vibration production can be executed when the pseudo-continuous production accompanied by the operation promotion production is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 63, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production executed during the pseudo consecutive success production is shorter than the execution period (2 seconds) of the pseudo consecutive success production. there is Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the pseudo consecutive success production. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 63, the vibration effect executed during the pseudo-continuous effect is accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation prompting image). A sound effect and a sound effect when the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period (operation effect sound, success effect sound, etc.) are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the pseudo-continuous performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 63, the execution period of the vibration effect executed in the pseudo-continuous effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on whether or not the effect button 6a is operated and the operation timing, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 63, even during the vibration production involving the effective period of the production button 6a, the lamp lighting production by the board illumination device 23 is continued. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the performance effect by not performing processing such as temporary stop of the performance light emission by the vibration performance accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 6a, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Although the effect button 6a does not emit light in the vibration effect executed during the simulated continuous effect, the effect button 6a is kept in a predetermined manner (for example, flashing white or flashing yellow) throughout the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light.

Also, regarding the vibration effect executed during the simulated continuous effect, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing at which the effective period passes when the effect button 6a is not operated). 0.5 seconds after) (execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In addition, during the pseudo-continuous performance, the effective period of the performance button 6a is generated and the vibration performance of the performance button 6a is executed. An effect may be executed, or the effective period of the effect button 6a may be generated, but the vibration effect may not be executed.

(Production example when development production is executed and develops into SP reach production)
With reference to FIG. 64, a description will be given of an effect example in which the development effect is executed and develops into the SP ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIG. 64(1), the normal ready-to-win effect is executed with the effect symbol 16a of "4 (chicken)" temporarily stopped in the left and right areas. After that, as shown in FIG. 64(2), the SP development effect is started. In the SP development production, there are "SPSP development" that suggests development to SPSP reach production, "SP development" that suggests development to SP reach production, and "Kasu" that suggests that production does not develop (is lost). ” is rotated in a predetermined direction, and after a stimulating effect is performed to incite which of “SPSP development”, “SP development”, and “cass” will be selected, “SPSP development”, A development destination roulette performance in which either "SP development" or "cass" is determined is performed.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the roulette effect, as shown in FIG. 64(3), "SP development" is determined and it is informed that the game will develop into SP ready-to-win. After that, as shown in FIG. 64(4), a transition effect is performed in which the screen is whited out. As shown in FIG. 64(5), the left and right performance symbols 16a rotate and move to the display area near the left and right upper ends of the screen, and the performance symbols 16a of only "4" are reduced. As shown in 6), the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

(Example of production when development production is executed and develops into SPSP reach production)
As shown in FIG. 65(1), the effect symbol 16a of "4 (chicken)" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 65(2), the SPSP development effect is started. In SPSP development production, "SPSP development" that suggests development to SPSP reach production, "SP development" that suggests development to SP reach production, and "Full rotation" that suggests development to full rotation reach production A roulette wheel marked with rotates in a predetermined direction, and after an effect is performed to incite which of "SPSP development", "SP development", and "full spin" will be selected, "SPSP development", " A roulette performance is performed in which either "SP development" or "full rotation" is determined.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the roulette effect, as shown in FIG. 65(3), an effective suggestion effect YS is started to suggest that the operation of the effect button 6a may be effective. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images simulating the effect button 6a are moved and displayed, and an effect is performed in which the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. An opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a that emits red light, a gauge image, and a "long press" character image) are displayed at the position, and a display effect sound of the operation prompting image SG is output. Also, the production button 6a emits red light.

After that, if the effect button 6a is kept pressed for a long time, an effect is performed in which the speed of the roulette is slowed down step by step. As shown in 5), "SPSP development" is determined and it is notified that it will develop into SPSP reach, and the blade part housed in the sheath part of the first movable production member 17A that emits blue light is turned to the left. A moving performance action is performed. Further, in a state where the effect button 6a is turned off, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 6a is weakly vibrated for one second. In addition, the lamp lighting effect by the board illumination device 23 continues.

As shown in FIG. 65(6), the weak vibration of the effect button 6a is stopped, the weak vibration effect is completed, and a transition effect is performed in which the screen is whited out. As shown in FIG. 65(7), the left and right performance symbols 16a rotate and move to the display area near the left and right upper ends of the screen, and the performance symbols 16a of only "4" are displayed in a reduced size. As shown in (8), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started. Incidentally, with the start of the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the pending icon and the corresponding icon are hidden.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, it is suggested whether or not the production will develop into a production with a high degree of expectation for a big win (expectation for a big win) depending on the type of development determined in the roulette production as the development production. are doing. Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the types developed by the roulette presentation, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the effective suggestive production may be executed in the development production, so that the player's expectation for the development of the ready-to-win production with a high degree of expectation for a big win is heightened. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production executed during the development production is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the development production. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the development production. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the vibration production executed during the development production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 6a (display of the operation promotion image). display effect sound and effect sound (operation effect sound, etc.) when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, the production effect of the development production can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the development production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. there is Therefore, it is possible to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 6a, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, even during the vibration production accompanying the effective period of the production button 6a, the lamp lighting production by the board illumination device 23 is continued. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the performance effect by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the light emission performance by the vibration performance accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 6a, and to improve the interest of the game.

Although the effect button 6a is not illuminated in the vibration effect executed during the development effect, the effect button 6a emits light in a predetermined manner (for example, blinking white or blinking yellow) throughout the execution period of the vibration effect. You can let it run.

In addition, regarding the vibration effect executed during the development effect, the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, from the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 6a is not operated) 0.5 seconds later) (execution period of vibration effect is variable).

Also, during the development performance, the effective period of the performance button 6a is generated and the vibration performance of the performance button 6a is executed, but the vibration performance is executed without generating the effective period of the performance button 6a during the development performance. Alternatively, the effective period of the effect button 6a may be generated, but the vibration effect may not be executed.

(Production example in which cut-in production is executed during SP reach production)
With reference to FIG. 66, a description will be given of an effect example in which a cut-in effect is executed during the SP ready-to-win effect and a big win is achieved.

As shown in FIG. 66(1), the effect patterns 16a of "4" in the left and right areas are displayed in reduced size at the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen, and the battle effect is executed as the SP reach effect, and the ally character is the enemy character. I will unleash an attack technique to defeat the.

At the end of the battle, as shown in FIG. 66(2), an effective suggestion effect YS is started to suggest that the operation of the effect button 6a may be effective for the cut-in effect. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images simulating the effect button 6a are moved and displayed, and an effect is performed in which the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position in the center of the screen. Further, when the timing comes before the predetermined time when the validity period is set, the button change effect is started. Specifically, when the button drive motor 6c operates, the effect button 6a begins to change to a projecting state (specific state).

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 66(3), the effective period of the effect button 6a (single hit 4 seconds) occurs, and a projecting state in which red light is emitted at the specific position. An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a, a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period, and a character image of "press" is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is displayed. is output, the effect button 6a in the projecting state emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 6a is single-hit or the valid period passes without being operated, a cut-in effect is executed as shown in FIG. 66(4). Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a red-framed cut-in image KF (“It's a great chance!”), and outputs a cut-in effect sound C corresponding to the red cut-in. Also, the production button 6a is turned off, and a weak vibration production is started in which the production button 6a is weakly vibrated for 3 seconds. The lamp lighting effect by the board illumination device 23 continues.

After that, when one second has passed since the output of the cut-in effect sound C ended, the cut-in effect and the weak vibration effect are finished, and as shown in FIG. Unleash the last attack technique to corner the enemy character.

As shown in FIG. 66(6), when three "4" production patterns 16a are aligned (symbols are aligned) and the temporary stop is made, the production button 6a is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds (strong vibration effect ( When the big hit determination vibration effect) is started, the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light. However, since the execution of this strong vibration presentation does not accompany the effective period of the presentation button 6a, the display effect sound when displaying the operation prompting image and the presentation sound (sound effect) when operating the presentation button 6a are not output.

When 4 seconds have passed since the start of the strong vibration effect, as shown in FIG. 66(7), the blade of the third movable effect member 17C emitting rainbow light is pulled out of the sheath and moves to the front side of the screen of the first image display device 16. A series of success effects (involving the operation of the operation means) in which the effect action of tilting, the success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and the strong vibration effect (successful vibration effect) by the effect button 6a is executed for 5 seconds. A non-determined success effect) is executed.

When the return of the third movable effect member 17C to the standby position is completed, as shown in FIG. 66(8), a victory confirmation effect (display of a victory image) indicating that the ally character has won the enemy character is performed. Also, the strong vibration effect by the effect button 6a continues.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 67(9), the performance symbol 16a of "444" is temporarily stopped. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second without the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promoting image), and the board lighting device 23 and the effect The button 6a emits rainbow light.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 67 (10), a stop suggestion effect TS is executed to suggest that the display mode of the effect symbol 16a temporarily stopped and displayed is fixed and stopped. be. Specifically, a scene change effect by an eye-catching display that captures the player's line of sight in such a manner as to temporarily change the scene to a display state (for example, a character image) different from the stop display state of the effect pattern 16a. is executed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67(11), the effect symbol 16a of "444" is fixed and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combined display mode of "444". After the pattern fixing stop period (0.5 seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. 67 (12), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the lamp lighting effect by the board illumination device 23 are started. In addition, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening effect, the characters "BONUS" indicating that the 4R jackpot game is to be executed are displayed, and the characters "BONUS" are highlighted by displaying a back light flash behind the characters. After that, when the opening effect ends, the first round game is started.

As described above, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 66, the effective suggestion effect may be executed in the cut-in effect, suggesting to the player that the expectation of the big win is high before the effective period occurs. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 66, the execution period (3 seconds) of the cut-in production and the execution period (3 seconds) of the vibration production executed during the cut-in production are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the cut-in production. In addition, the vibrating presentation can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 66, since the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect is accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation prompting image), the display when displaying the operation prompting image A sound effect or a sound effect (an operation effect sound, a cut-in sound effect, etc.) when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period is output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the cut-in production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 66, even during the vibration effect accompanying the effective period of the effect button 6a (the display of the operation prompting image SG), the lamp emission effect by the board illumination device 23 continues. ing. Therefore, the production effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the lamp light emission production by the vibration production accompanying the effective period of the production button 6a (display of the operation promotion image), and the interest of the game can be improved. becomes possible.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 66, when the temporary stop is made in the state where three production patterns 16a in the display mode of only number patterns are aligned (D pattern alignment), the vibration production during the cut-in production is reduced. Also, the strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is executed over a long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the fact that the jackpot has been won, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 67, a strong vibration production (big hit confirmation vibration production) is executed when the jackpot production pattern 16a with matching symbols is temporarily stopped. Therefore, it is possible to make the player reconfirm that the jackpot has been won, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the strong vibration production (big hit confirmation vibration production, big hit confirmation Vibration effect, opening vibration effect) does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 6a (the display of the operation promotion image). It is designed not to output the production sound (operation sound effect, other sound effect) at the time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused during the vibration effect without the effective period of the effect button 6a (the display of the operation promoting image), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. .

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, when the big win is achieved as a result of the execution of the SP ready-to-win production, the vibration production is executed during the temporary stop of the production pattern 16a to be the big win, Vibration production is not executed during the fixed stop. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game without making the player misunderstand that the fluctuation performance is still continuing due to the vibration performance.

Although the effect button 6a is not illuminated in the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect, the effect button 6a is kept in a predetermined manner (for example, flashing white, flashing yellow, etc.) throughout the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light.

Also, during the effective period of the cut-in effect, the lighting device 23 for the board continues the effect of emitting the lamp. The lamp lighting effect of the board lighting device 23 may be temporarily stopped until the time elapses, and then the lamp lighting effect of the board lighting device 23 may be resumed. In this way, the operation prompting image displayed on the first image display device 16 can be made conspicuous, and the player can be made to recognize that the scene is tense, thus making it possible to enhance the interest in the game. .

In addition, regarding the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing at which the effective period passes when the effect button 6a is not operated) 2 seconds later) (execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In the production example shown in FIG. 66, the cut-in production is performed at the end of the SP reach production, but it is performed in the middle (first period) or end (second period) of the SP reach production, and the SP It seems that the production button 6a is more likely to protrude (protrusion rate increases) when the cut-in effect is performed at the end of the SP reach effect than when the cut-in effect is performed in the middle of the ready-to-win effect. can be

Incidentally, if the effect button 6a is not operated during the valid period, the cut-in effect may not be executed. When the cut-in effect is not executed, the vibration effect may not be executed or may be executed.

(Production example 1 when the decision production is executed during the SPSP reach production)
With reference to FIG. 68, a description will be given of an example of an effect in which a winning effect is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win battle effect and a big win is achieved.

As shown in FIG. 68(1), the effect patterns 16a of "4" in the left and right areas are displayed in reduced size at the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen, and a battle effect is executed as an SPSP ready-to-win effect. I will unleash an attack technique to defeat the.

In the middle stage of the battle, as shown in FIG. 68(2), a chance-up effect is performed to suggest that there is a high possibility that the game will develop into an effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win (winning effect). Specifically, a character image of "CHANCE UP" is displayed in red on the first image display device 16, and a backlight flashes from behind the character image. Further, a strong vibration effect is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 6a is flashed white.

When the chance-up effect ends, as shown in FIG. 68(3), a character image of "co-op" is displayed indicating that the number of allied characters has become two. At the end of the battle, as shown in FIG. 68(4), a line image of "Let's go!" When the game is about to start, as shown in FIG. 68(5), an effective suggesting effect YS is started to suggest that the operation of the effect button 6a may be effective for a final effect.

Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images simulating the effect button 6a are moved and displayed, and an effect is performed in which the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position in the center of the screen. Further, when the timing comes before the predetermined time when the validity period is set, the button change effect is started. Specifically, when the button drive motor 6c operates, the effect button 6a begins to change to a projecting state (specific state).

Then, when the translucent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 68(6), the effective period of the effect button 6a (single hit 5 seconds) occurs, and a projecting state in which red light is emitted at the specific position. An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a, a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period, and a character image of "press" is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is displayed. is output, the effect button 6a in the projecting state emits red light.

After that, when the performance button 6a is single-hit or the valid period passes without being operated, as shown in FIG. 68(7), a determined success performance is executed. Specifically, in a state in which the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C emit rainbow light, the blade portion of the first movable effect member 17A moves to the left, and the second movable effect member 17B waits. A performance motion of moving downward from the position to the front side of the center of the screen of the first image display device 16 and a performance motion of moving the blade portion of the third movable performance member 17C upward are performed all at once (decision motion). A success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and a success effect sound is output.

Further, a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds and then strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second. Also, the board illumination device 23 and the production button 6a emit rainbow light.

After that, when the first to third movable production members 17A to 17C return to the standby position and the determined success production and strong vibration production are completed, as shown in FIG. image display) is performed. Also, a strong vibration effect is executed by the effect button 6a. Also, the board illumination device 23 and the production button 6a emit rainbow light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(9), it is temporarily stopped in a state where three "4" production patterns 16a are aligned (symbols are aligned), and a strong vibration production ( When the big hit determination vibration effect) is started, the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light. However, since the execution of this strong vibration presentation does not accompany the effective period of the presentation button 6a, the display effect sound when displaying the operation prompting image and the presentation sound (sound effect) when operating the presentation button 6a are not output.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71(4), the effect pattern 16a is switched to the normal size "444" and temporarily stopped. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second without the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promoting image), and the board lighting device 23 and the effect The button 6a emits rainbow light.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 71(5), a stop suggestion effect TS is executed to suggest that the display mode of the effect symbol 16a temporarily stopped and displayed will be fixed and stopped. be.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71(6), the production symbol 16a of "444" is fixed and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combined display mode of "444". After the pattern fixing stop period (0.5 seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. 71(7), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the lamp lighting effect by the board illumination device 23 are started. In addition, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening effect, the characters "BONUS" indicating that the 4R jackpot game is to be executed are displayed, and the characters "BONUS" are highlighted by displaying a back light flash behind the characters. After that, when the opening effect ends, the first round game is started. Incidentally, when the characters "BONUS" are displayed, the effect button 6a may simply emit rainbow light without performing the vibration effect by the effect button 6a.

(Production example 2 when the decision production is executed during the SPSP reach production)
With reference to FIG. 69, an example of an effect in which a winning effect is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win mission effect and a jackpot is achieved will be described.

As shown in FIG. 69(1), the effect pattern 16a of "4" in the left area and the right area is reduced and displayed in the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen, and the mission effect is executed as the SPSP ready-to-win effect. and get the level MAX!!” message is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 69(2), the effective period of the effect button 6a (long press for 5 seconds) occurs, an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a that emits white light, and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period. Then, an operation prompting image SG composed of a character image of "long press" is displayed, a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the effect button 6a emits white light.
In addition, a level meter is displayed for notifying the level values (Lv.1 to Lv.10) in 10-level scale display from level 1 to level 10 (MAX) with level 0 as the initial value.

A long-pressing operation of the effect button 6a is started, and accompanying the long-pressing operation, an increase display is performed in which the level value of the level meter gradually increases toward level 10 (MAX). Further, when the performance button 6a is pressed for a long time, a meter effect sound is output according to the change in the level value of the level meter. It should be noted that if the long-pressing operation is not performed, the level value of the level meter is not increased.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the long press operation of the effect button 6a, the level value reaches level 5 as shown in FIG. 69(3). The production button 6a continues to emit white light. After that, the level value of the level meter gradually increases toward level 10 (MAX) in association with the long-pressing operation. As shown in FIG. 69(4), when the level value reaches level 9, a strong vibration effect is executed in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second while the effect button 6a is being pressed for a long time.

When the level value reaches level 10 (MAX) as shown in FIG. 69(5) after the strong vibration effect is completed, a determined success effect is executed as shown in FIG. 69(6). Specifically, in a state in which the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C emit rainbow light, the blade portion of the first movable effect member 17A moves to the left, and the second movable effect member 17B waits. A performance motion of moving downward from the position to the front side of the center of the screen of the first image display device 16 and a performance motion of moving the blade portion of the third movable performance member 17C upward are performed all at once (decision motion). A success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and a success effect sound is output.

Further, a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds and then strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second. Also, the board illumination device 23 and the production button 6a emit rainbow light.

After that, when the first to third movable production members 17A to 17C return to the standby position and the success production and the strong vibration production are completed, as shown in FIG. character image display) is performed. Also, a strong vibration effect is executed by the effect button 6a. Also, the board illumination device 23 and the production button 6a emit rainbow light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(8), the center "4" production pattern 16a is temporarily stopped in a state in which it is highlighted in front of the left and right "4" production patterns 16a (patterns are aligned), and the production is performed. A strong vibration effect (big hit determination vibration effect) is started in which the button 6a is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds, and the board illumination device 23 and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 6a, the display effect sound when displaying the operation prompting image SG and the effect sound (sound effect) when the effect button 6a is operated are output. not.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 71(4), the pattern 16a is switched to the normal size "444" and temporarily stopped. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second without the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promoting image), and the board lighting device 23 and the effect The button 6a emits rainbow light.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 71(5), a stop suggestion effect TS is executed to suggest that the display mode of the effect symbol 16a temporarily stopped and displayed will be fixed and stopped. be.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71(6), the production symbol 16a of "444" is fixed and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combined display mode of "444". After the pattern fixing stop period (0.5 seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. 71(7), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the lamp lighting effect by the board illumination device 23 are started. In addition, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening effect, the characters "BONUS" indicating that the 4R jackpot game is to be executed are displayed, and the characters "BONUS" are highlighted by displaying a back light flash behind the characters. After that, when the opening effect ends, the first round game is started.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, there is a case where the effective suggestive production is executed in the determined production, and in addition to the occurrence of the effective period, the expectation of the big win is high. can be suggested to the player, making it possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the operation period (10 seconds) of the movable production members 17A to 17C in the determined success production and the execution period (10 seconds) of the vibration production executed in the determined success production is the same as Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the determined success production. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game is a big win by means of the vibration effect, thereby making it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the vibration production (decision success vibration production) executed during the decision production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 6a (display of the operation promotion image). A display sound effect when displaying the promotion image and a sound effect when the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period (operation effect sound, success effect sound, operation effect sound of the movable effect member, etc.) are output. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the decided success production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Incidentally, the example of the effect shown in FIG. 69 is a determined success effect that is executed when the effect button 6a is single-hit during the effective period, but is executed when the effect lever 6h is tilted during the effective period. 69 is the same as the example shown in FIG.

It should be noted that the lighting device 23 for the board continues the effect of lighting the lamp during the effective period of the determined effect, but the effect button 6a is operated immediately before or after the effective period occurs, or the effective period elapses. The lamp lighting effect of the board lighting device 23 may be temporarily stopped until the board lighting device 23 is played, and then the lamp lighting effect of the board lighting device 23 may be resumed. In this way, the operation prompting image displayed on the first image display device 16 can be made conspicuous, and the player can be made to recognize that the scene is tense, thus making it possible to enhance the interest in the game. .

In addition, the movable production members 17A to 17C, the board lighting device 23, and the production button 6a were designed to emit rainbow light at the time of the determined success production. The lighting device 23 for the board may be turned off, or the lighting device 23 for the board may be turned off while the movable production members 17A to 17C emit rainbow light.

In addition, when executing the determined success effect, the rainbow light emission of the movable effect members 17A to 17C, the board lighting device 23 and the effect button 6a is started at the same time, but the rainbow light emission of the effect button 6a is started first. After the start, the rainbow emission of the movable production members 17A to 17C and the board lighting device 23 may be started, or the rainbow emission of the movable production members 17A to 17C may be started first, and then the production button 6a and the board The lighting device 23 may start to emit rainbow light.

Further, when the SPSP ready-to-win production is executed, the stop suggesting effect or the production pattern 16a is temporarily stopped in a display mode including characters, and then the production pattern 16a is fixed and stopped. In the case of losing as a result, the stop suggesting effect or effect pattern 16a is temporarily stopped in a display mode including the character, and then the effect pattern 16a is fixed and stopped, and in the case of a big hit, the stop suggesting effect or effect is performed. The design 16a may not be temporarily stopped in the display mode including characters, but the performance design 16a may be fixed and stopped in the display mode of only the number patterns.

(Example of a successful promotion in the re-lottery production)
With reference to FIG. 70, an effect example in the case where the re-lottery effect is executed and the promotion is successful will be described.

When the strong vibration effect shown in FIG. 68(9) or FIG. 69(8) is completed, as shown in FIG. 69(1), a temporary Although it is stopped and the strong vibration effect is terminated, the board lighting device 23 and the effect button 6a continue to emit rainbow light. When one second elapses from there, the lamp lighting effect by the board lighting device 23 is resumed, and the effect button 6a is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70(2), a re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, three production patterns 6a of "4" are synchronously fluctuated (for example, all kinds of numbers of production patterns 16a are rotated once ("1" → "2" ... " 9”→“1”) is synchronously fluctuated for a predetermined time that can always be seen).

In addition, it is composed of an opaque effect button image that imitates the effect button 6a that emits red light at a specific position in the center of the screen, and a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the effective period. is displayed, the display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the production button 6a emits red light.

After that, when the performance button 6a is single-hit or the effective period elapses, promotion success performance suggesting promotion to the probability variable jackpot is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(3), the third movable effect member 17C emits a rainbow light, the blade portion is extracted from the sheath portion, and the effect action is performed to tilt to the front side of the screen of the first image display device 16. done. A success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and a promotion sound effect is output. Also, a strong vibration effect (successful promotion vibration effect) by the effect button 6a is executed for 3 seconds. Also, the board illumination device 23 and the production button 6a emit rainbow light.

When the first to third movable production members 17A to 17C return to the standby position, as shown in FIG. 70(4), the production pattern 16a of "777" switched from the production pattern 16a of "444" protrudes from the screen. is temporarily stopped in the enlarged size display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70(5), the production pattern 16a of "777" returns to the normal size display mode and is temporarily stopped. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second without the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promoting image), and the board lighting device 23 and the effect The button 6a emits rainbow light.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 70(6), a stop suggestion effect TS is executed to suggest that the display mode of the effect symbol 16a temporarily stopped and displayed will be fixed and stopped. be.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(7), the effect symbol 16a of "777" is fixed and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combined display mode of "777". After the pattern determination stop period (0.5 seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. 70(8), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the lamp lighting effect by the lighting device 23 for the board are started. In addition, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening effect, a character image of "SUPER BONUS" is displayed to indicate that a 10R jackpot game is to be executed, and a back light flash is displayed behind the character to highlight the character image of "SUPER BONUS". be done. After that, when the opening effect ends, the first round game is started.

When the promotion success effect is executed, the rainbow light emission of the third movable effect member 17C, the board lighting device 23 and the effect button 6a is started at the same time, but the rainbow light emission of the effect button 6a is started first. After that, the rainbow light emission of the third movable effect member 17C and the board lighting device 23 may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the third movable effect member 17C is started first, and then the effect button 6a and the board light are started. A rainbow emission of the device 23 may be initiated.

Although the vibration performance is executed at the time of the determined success performance or the promotion success performance, the vibration performance may be executed at the time of the determination success performance, and not executed at the promotion success performance.
Alternatively, the vibration performance may be executed during the promotion success performance, while the vibration performance may not be executed during the determined success performance.
Alternatively, the vibration effect may not be executed during the determined success effect and the promotion success effect.

To effectively improve performance effects of each of the determination success performance and the promotion success performance because the operation mode of the performance of the performance of the performance of the success of the determination is different from the operation mode of the performance of the performance of the performance of the performance of the success of the promotion. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of production in case promotion fails in re-lottery production)
With reference to FIG. 71, an example of an effect when the re-lottery effect is executed and promotion fails will be described.

When the strong vibration effect shown in FIG. 68(9) or FIG. 69(8) is completed, as shown in FIG. Although the game is temporarily stopped and the strong vibration effect ends, the board illumination device 23 and the effect button 6a continue to emit rainbow light. When one second elapses from that point, the lighting device 23 for the board restarts the effect of lighting the lamp, and the effect button 6a is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71(2), a re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, three production patterns 6a of "4" are synchronously fluctuated (for example, all kinds of numbers of production patterns 16a are rotated once ("1" → "2" ... " 9”→“1”) is synchronously fluctuated for a predetermined time that can always be seen).

In addition, it consists of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a that emits white light at a specific position in the center of the screen, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period. The operation prompting image SG is displayed, and the display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output. Also, the production button 6a emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 6a is single-hit or the effective period passes without being operated, promotion failure performance is performed to suggest that the game will not be promoted to the probability variable jackpot. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 71(3), a temporary stop is displayed in a display mode in which the effect pattern 16a of "444" protrudes from the screen, and a non-promoting effect sound is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71(4), the production pattern 16a of "444" returns to the normal size display mode and is temporarily stopped. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second without the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promoting image), and the board lighting device 23 and the effect The button 6a emits rainbow light.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 71(5), a stop suggestion effect TS is executed which suggests that the display mode of the effect symbol 16a temporarily stopped and displayed will be fixed and stopped. be done.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71(6), the production symbol 16a of "444" is fixed and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combined display mode of "444". After the pattern fixing stop period (0.5 seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. 71(7), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the lamp lighting effect by the board illumination device 23 are started. In addition, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening performance, a character image of "BONUS" is displayed to indicate that a 4R jackpot game is to be executed, and a backlight flash is displayed behind the character image to highlight the character image of "BONUS." be. After that, when the opening effect ends, the first round game is started.

(Example of production when resurrection production is executed)
Using FIG. 72, an example of an effect when the resurrection effect is executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 72(1), the effect patterns 16a of "4" in the left and right areas are reduced and displayed in the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen, and a battle effect is executed as an SPSP ready-to-win effect. I will unleash an attack technique to defeat the.

At the end of the battle, as shown in FIG. 72(2), the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, and a defeat confirmation effect indicating battle defeat is performed. At this time, the production pattern 16a of "454" indicating the reach loss is temporarily stopped in a reduced size display mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 72(3), the effect pattern 16a is changed to the normal size of "7 (pig) 7 (pig) 7 (pig)" including the decorative portion (character) and temporarily stopped. After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 72(4), a resurrection effect is performed. Specifically, a moving image showing a friendly character trying to stand up after being knocked down by an enemy character and a message image of "Stand up!" 4 seconds) occurs, and an opaque effect button image simulating a red light emitting effect button 6a, a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period, and an operation prompting image SG composed of a character image of "Continuous hit" are displayed. Then, the display effect sound of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the production button 6a emits red light.

After that, when the performance button 6a is operated repeatedly or the valid period passes without being operated, a resurrection success performance suggesting execution of a jackpot game (resurrection jackpot) is performed. Specifically, when the ally character stands up and revives, as shown in FIG. 72(5), the blade portion of the third movable effect member 17C emitting rainbow light is pulled out of the sheath portion and the screen of the first image display device 16 is displayed. A performance operation of tilting to the front side of is performed. A success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and a success effect sound A is output. Also, a strong vibration effect (resurrection success vibration effect) by the effect button 6a is executed for four seconds. Also, the board illumination device 23 and the production button 6a emit rainbow light.

Then, the strong vibration effect ends, but after the board lighting device 23 and the effect button 6a continue to emit rainbow light, the recovery success effect ends. After that, as shown in FIG. 72(6), the display mode of the production pattern 16a of "777" is temporarily stopped. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second without the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promoting image), and the board lighting device 23 and the effect The button 6a emits rainbow light.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 72(7), a stop suggestion effect TS is executed to suggest that the display mode of the effect symbol 16a temporarily stopped and displayed will be fixed and stopped. be.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72(8), the effect symbol 16a of "777" is fixed and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combined display mode of "777". After the pattern determination stop period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 72(9), the opening effect of the big win game and the lamp light emission effect by the board illumination device 23 are started. In addition, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening performance, a character image of "SUPER BONUS" is displayed to indicate that a 10R jackpot game is to be executed, and a back light flash is displayed behind the character to highlight the character image of "SUPER BONUS". be done. After that, when the opening effect ends, the first round game is started.
Incidentally, when the character image of "SUPER BONUS" is displayed, the effect button 6a may simply emit rainbow light without performing the vibration effect by the effect button 6a.
Alternatively, the vibration effect by the effect button 6a may be performed only when the character image of "SUPER BONUS" is displayed, and the vibration effect by the effect button 6a may not be performed when the character image of "BONUS" is displayed. .

(Variable mission production)
During the jackpot game (round game), there is a case where a probability variable mission effect is executed as to whether or not a high probability time saving game state is entered. For example, in the 4R round game in the 10R jackpot game, the effective period of the production button 6a (five-second consecutive hits) occurs, and a probability variable mission production (for example, a mission production to challenge panel destruction by button repeated blows) is started.

During the valid period, an operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits white light. When the performance button 6a is operated and the panel is destroyed, or when the valid period elapses without the performance button 6a being operated, the mission success performance is executed. In the mission success rendering, the third movable rendering member 17C emits rainbow light, the blade is pulled out of the sheath, and the first image display device 16 tilts to the front side of the screen. A success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and a success effect sound is output. Also, a strong vibration effect (successful promotion vibration effect) by the effect button 6a is executed for 5 seconds. Also, the board illumination device 23 and the production button 6a emit rainbow light.
In this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that the high-probability time-saving gaming state will occur after the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.
In addition, when the player can select any of the probability variable mode D and the probability variable mode E corresponding to the high-probability time-saving gaming state by operating the production button 6a and the cross key 6f, the production button 6a is operated. However, the vibration effect by the effect button 6a is not executed.

According to the production example shown in FIG. 72, the vibration production (recovery success vibration production) executed during the restoration success production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 6a (display of the operation promotion image). A display effect sound at the time of display and a production sound (operation effect sound, success effect sound, operation effect sound of the movable production member, etc.) when the production button 6a is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, it is possible to execute a dramatic and impactful resurrection success effect that turns the player's disappointment about the loss into joy, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

According to the production example shown in FIG. 72, the execution period of the vibration production executed at the time of the resurrection success production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 6a is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 6a, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the resurrection success effect, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 6a is not operated) 4 seconds later) (execution period of vibration effect may be variable).

(Production example 1 when the setting is changed from normal mode to time saving mode)
With reference to FIG. 73, description will be given of an effect example in which the setting is changed to the time saving mode triggered by the stop display of the specific losing symbol in the normal mode with the loss variation effect.

As shown in FIG. 73(1), after the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the production pattern 16a is started, as shown in FIG. 73(2), "1 (cat) 2 (dog) 3 ( When the production pattern 16a (specific lost pattern) of "rabbit" is fixed and stopped, the vibration production by the production button 6a is executed. Specifically, the production button 6a is strongly vibrated for 3 seconds, and the production button 6a is flashed red. In addition, the time-saving mode input effect sound is output, and the board illumination device 23 and the frame illumination device 27 emit red light.

Then, as shown in FIG. 73(3), a character image of "chance mode entry" indicating confirmation of the time saving mode is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits white light. As a result, the player reliably recognizes that the game has transitioned to the time-saving mode (low-probability time-saving game state). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 73(4), a right-handed image "Right-handed →" (not shown) instructing to shoot a game ball toward the right side area 4a2 of the game area 4a, and a right-handed image is an image with an enlarged display size, and a right-handed image "Right-handed!" is displayed to prompt the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side area 4a2 of the game area 4a, and the effect button 6a emits white light. do.
In the chance mode (time-saving mode), the same effect images (background image, effect pattern image, etc.) as in the normal time-saving mode (low-probability time-saving game state after the jackpot game) are displayed. A special effect image (special background image, special effect pattern image, etc.) corresponding to the chance mode may be displayed.

According to the production example shown in FIG. 73, the player's attention can be attracted to the production pattern 16a by executing the vibration production when the specific losing pattern is stopped by the loss variation production in the normal mode. can.
Incidentally, instead of the vibration effect by the effect button 6a, the movable effect members 17A to 17C may be used to perform the role object effect. In this case, in a state in which the first movable effect member 17A and the second movable effect member 17B emit red light, the blade portion of the first movable effect member 17A moves to the left, and the second movable effect member 17B moves to the standby position. to the front side of the center of the screen of the first image display device 16 may be performed all at once.
Alternatively, the movable effect members 17A to 17C may vibrate. In this case, the first movable effect member 17A and the second movable effect member 17B strongly vibrate at the standby position for 3 seconds.
In addition, as the specific losing pattern, instead of the predetermined losing effect pattern 16a of "1 (dog) 2 (cat) 3 (rabbit)", "time saving" that informs that the normal mode will shift to the time saving mode It may be a time-saving pattern in which the characters are displayed, a graphic pattern (eg, "★★★"), a display mode in which the effect pattern 16a and the graphic pattern are combined (eg, "1★2"), and the like.

(Production example 2 when the setting is changed from normal mode to time saving mode)
With reference to FIG. 74, a description will be given of an effect example in which the settings are changed to the time saving mode when the loss variation effect reaches a predetermined number of times in the normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 74(1), after the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the production pattern 16a is started, as shown in FIG. 74(2), "2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 ( Tiger)" is fixed and stopped, and three times remain until the time saving mode is entered.

As shown in FIG. 74 (3), when the scrolling display of the performance pattern 16a is started, a time saving mode entering effect is executed to tell that there are three remaining times until entering the time saving mode. Specifically, a countdown image "3" is displayed to notify that there are three times remaining until entering the time saving mode, a count sound effect is output, and the production button 6a emits white light. Also, the board illumination device 23 and the frame illumination device 27 emit white light.
After that, as shown in FIG. 74(4), the production pattern 16a of "2 (dog) 4 (chicken) 5 (koala)" indicating the failure is fixed and stopped, and there are two times left until the time saving mode is entered. .

As shown in FIG. 74 (5), when the scroll display of the production pattern 16a is started, a countdown image "2" is displayed to inform that there are two remaining times before entering the time saving mode, and the count effect is displayed. A sound is output, and the production button 6a emits white light. Also, the board illumination device 23 and the frame illumination device 27 emit white light.
After that, as shown in FIG. 74(6), the production pattern 16a of "3 (rabbit), 1 (cat), 2 (dog)" indicating the failure is fixed and stopped, and there is only one remaining time until the time saving mode is entered. .

As shown in FIG. 74 (7), when the scroll display of the production pattern 16a is started, a countdown image "1" is displayed to notify that there is only one remaining time until entering the time saving mode, and the count effect is displayed. A sound is output, and the production button 6a emits white light. Also, the board illumination device 23 and the frame illumination device 27 emit white light.
After that, as shown in FIG. 74(8), the production pattern 16a of "5 (koala), 6 (tiger), and 8 (fox)" indicating the failure is fixed and stopped, and the remaining 0 times until entering the time saving mode, that is, , Entering the short-time mode.

As shown in FIG. 74 (9), when the scroll display of the production pattern 16a is opened, a countdown image "0" indicating that the number of fluctuations until entering the time saving mode has been reached is displayed, and the count effect is displayed. A sound is output, and the production button 6a emits white light. Also, the board illumination device 23 and the frame illumination device 27 emit white light.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 74 (10), an effect at the time of entry into the time saving mode is performed. In the effect when the time saving mode is turned on, the effect operation in which the blade portion of the first movable effect member 17A moves to the left while the first movable effect member 17A and the second movable effect member 17B emit red light, and the second movable effect member. 17B moves down from the standby position to the front side of the center of the screen of the first image display device 16, and the effect operation is performed all at once. In addition, an effect image is displayed, a time saving mode entry effect sound is output, and a vibration effect is executed in which the effect button 6a is weakly vibrated for one second.
In addition, as an effect when entering the time saving mode, a scene change image that can be opened after the entire screen is closed by the shutter may be displayed in addition to the effect operation by the movable effect member.

Then, as shown in FIG. 74(11), a character image of "chance mode entry" indicating confirmation of the time saving mode is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits white light. As a result, the player reliably recognizes that the game has transitioned to the time-saving mode (low-probability time-saving game state). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 74(12), a right-handed image "Right-handed →" (not shown) instructing to shoot a game ball toward the right side area 4a2 of the game area 4a, and a right-handed image is an image with an enlarged display size, and a right-handed image "Right-handed!" is displayed to prompt the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side area 4a2 of the game area 4a, and the effect button 6a emits white light. do.

According to the production example shown in FIG. 74, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of entering the time saving mode by the time saving rush mode effect, and to attract the player's attention to the production pattern 16a.
In addition, since it is possible to heighten the player's delight at entering the time-saving mode by the accessory presentation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Incidentally, instead of the vibration effect by the movable effect members 17A to 17C, the vibration effect by the effect button 6a may be performed. The production button 6a is strongly vibrated for 3 seconds and flashes in red, or the production button 6a is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds to light up in red.
In addition, a light guide plate may be arranged on the front side of the image display device 16, and the light guide plate may emit light instead of the board lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 in the time saving mode rush effect. The light guide plate may emit light together with the lighting device 23 for the board and the lighting device 27 for the frame.

(Production example of the big hit fluctuation production based on the first start opening prize in the variable probability mode)
Using FIGS. 75 and 76, a description will be given of an effect example in the case where the big hit variation effect is executed based on the first start opening winning prize in the variable probability mode.

For example, after the 4R probability variable jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 75 (1), the characters of "cutting RUSH rush" that informs that it enters into the probability variable mode corresponding to the high probability time-saving gaming state are highlighted. , A right-handed image "right-handed →" (not shown) that instructs to shoot a game ball toward the right area 4a2 of the game area 4a, and a time-saving remaining number image (not shown) that indicates the number of remaining time-savings are displayed. . In addition, the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed in the combined display mode of "555".

After entering the variable probability mode, the game balls continuously enter the second starting port 11a, and the winning sound "Piron♪" is continuously output. Furthermore, three second pending icons "◎" are displayed in the second pending icon display area 16c, the pending number "3" is displayed in the second pending number display area 16f, and the first pending number display area 16e Although not shown, the variable display of the effect symbol 16a is started after the combination display mode "555" indicating the big hit is displayed, and the special symbol TZ is changed. Display is also started.

As shown in FIG. 75(2), with the start of the variation of the production pattern 16a, the second suspended icon "◎" displayed in the second suspended icon display area 16c shifts to the variable icon display area 16d. , the icon "⊚" is displayed in the variable icon display area 16d, and the pending number in the second pending number display area 16f is subtracted from "3" to "2". Further, the time saving remaining number image is updated (subtraction display) (not shown).
In the variable probability mode, the variation start operation that is performed at the start of the symbol variation display in the normal mode is not performed, or the variation start operation may be performed at the start of the symbol variation display.

After the high-speed fluctuation display of the three performance symbols 16a is performed for a short period of time (2.0 seconds), the three performance symbols 16a are displayed in a combination display mode "6 (frame) 3 (frame) 2 (frame)" indicating normal failure. are temporarily stopped at the same time, and a stop suggesting effect is executed in which a flame effect is momentarily displayed on the three number patterns (not shown), as shown in FIG. ) 2 (frame)" is fixed and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combination display mode of "632", which is the same as the number symbol of the effect symbol 16a. The pattern fixing period in which the production pattern 16a is fixed and stopped is set to the same time (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of the type of variation production pattern to be executed or the judgment result of the big hit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (4), when the reserved number of the second reserved number display area 16f is "0", when the game ball wins the first start opening 10, the effect pattern 16a based on the winning and Variation of the special symbol TZ is started. The variable display is executed in a mode notification mode (variable probability mode background image, BGM for variable probability mode) that informs that it is the variable probability mode. That is, variable display is executed in a common mode notification mode regardless of whether the prize is won in either the first start opening 10 or the second start opening 11a in the variable probability mode.
On the other hand, even if the game ball wins the first start port 10, the first reserved icon (including the first reserved icon display area 16b) and the variable icon (including the variable icon display area 16d) are not displayed (that is, , the icon change effect by the first pending icon and the variable icon is not executed, and the effect sound in the icon change effect is not output). Also, the winning sound for notifying that the game ball has won the first start port 10 is not output. Also, at this time, a right-handed image (“Right-handed →”) is displayed. Also, at this time, a right-handed promotion image ("Please hit right") is displayed to prompt the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side area 4a2 of the game area 4a. Please” is output.
75 and 76, the first reserved icon display area 16b and the second reserved icon display area 16c are not displayed, but the first reserved icon display area 16b is not displayed while the second reserved icon display area 16c is displayed. Alternatively, both the first pending icon display area 16b and the second pending icon display area 16c may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 75(5), every time a game ball wins the first start hole 10, a right-handed promotion image is displayed and a voice saying "please hit right" is output. On the other hand, the first pending icon (including the first pending icon display area 16b) and the variable icon (including the variable icon display area 16d) are not displayed. Also, when two prizes are won in the first starting port 10, no winning sound is output. Also, at this time, the pending number "2" is displayed in the first pending number display area 16e.

In addition, as described above, if the game ball wins the first start port 10 during the variable probability mode, the winning sound is not output, but if the game ball wins the first start port 10 during the normal mode A winning sound is output. That is, the winning sound is more likely to be output when the game ball enters the first starting port 10 during the normal mode than when the game ball enters the first starting port 10 during the variable probability mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75(5), when the left and right keys of the cross key 6f are operated during the execution of the variable effect including the variable display of the effect pattern 16a, the volume adjustment screen SH is displayed, and the During execution of the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 10, the volume of the BGM used for the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 11a can be selected. On this volume adjustment screen SH, a volume gauge (volume value level meter) indicating a plurality of volume levels and a cross key icon for changing the volume are displayed. When the left and right keys are operated, the volume gauge is displayed in a state indicating the volume one level higher or lower than the current volume, and a volume change confirmation sound corresponding to the changed volume is output from the audio output device 9. output.

Also, during the execution of the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 10 in the variable probability mode, the effect element ( mode, BGM, amount of light, customization, etc.) can also be selected.
It should be noted that during the execution of the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 11a in the probability variable mode, the production element (mode, BGM) used for the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 10 , volume, light intensity, customization, etc.) can be selected.
At the start of fluctuation of the production pattern 16a, or at the time of stoppage of fluctuation, selection of production elements (especially sound volume and light amount) is restricted.

After that, the three production patterns 16a are temporarily stopped in the order of the left pattern → right pattern → middle pattern, and the combination display mode "5 (frame) 4 (frame) 1 (frame)" indicating normal failure is temporarily stopped and displayed. 75 (6), after execution of a stop suggesting effect in which a flame effect is momentarily displayed on the three number patterns (not shown), as shown in FIG. is fixed and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combination display mode of "541" which is the same as the number symbol of the effect symbol 16a.

As shown in FIG. 75 (7), the reservation number of the first reservation number display area 16e is subtracted from "2" to "1", and the variable display based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 10 is started. A jackpot suggestion performance is executed to suggest that a jackpot game is actually executed. In this jackpot suggesting effect, a moving image NM that is opened after the entire screen is closed with a fusuma is displayed, and a weak vibration effect is executed in which the light-off state effect button 6a is weakly vibrated for one second.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75(8), during the variable display of the production pattern 16a, the ready-to-win fan effect and the ready-to-win effect are not executed, and after a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. The pattern 16a is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination display mode "4 (frame) 4 (frame) 4 (frame)" indicating a big win. Further, a strong vibration effect is executed in which the effect button 6a emitting the rainbow light is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds, and the lighting device 23 for the board emits the rainbow light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76(10), after a stop suggesting effect is executed in which a flame effect is momentarily displayed in three number patterns, as shown in FIG. 76(11), "4 (frame) 4 ( Frame) 4 (frame)" is fixed and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is fixed and stopped in the combination display mode of "444", which is the same as the number pattern of the production pattern 16a.

After the symbol fixing period has elapsed, an opening effect is executed as shown in FIG. 76 (12). In the opening effect, the characters "BONUS" indicating that the 4R jackpot game is to be executed are displayed, the voice of "Bonus" is output, and the lighting and flashing operation of the light emitter of the lamp is repeatedly performed. Also, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is performed in which the effect button 6a emitting rainbow light is strongly vibrated for one second.

Next, an effect during the jackpot (during-round effect) corresponding to the round game of the 4R jackpot game shown in FIG. 76 (13) is executed.
The opening effect, the mid-round effect and the ending effect (not shown) shown in FIG. This is a presentation mode common to the opening presentation, mid-round presentation and ending presentation corresponding to the 4R jackpot game.

It should be noted that the time saving remaining number image (not shown) shows the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 11a even when the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 10 is being executed. It continues to be displayed even during execution, and is updated (subtracted) and displayed each time any variable effect is executed. In addition, the right-handed image is displayed both during execution of the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 10 and during execution of the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 11a. continue to be

In addition, when the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 10 is executed in the probability variable mode, the first special symbol first indicator 19a and the first special symbol second indicator 20a blink. be done. In addition, the first special symbol reservation first display 19d and the first special symbol reservation second display 20d are lit or blinked corresponding to the display of the reservation number in the first reservation number display area 16e.
In addition, when the game ball wins in the second start port 11a during the execution of the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 10 in the variable probability mode, the second Variation effect based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port 11a is not executed, or the first and second special symbol variable display on the first special symbol first display device 19a and the second special symbol first display device 19b is performed in parallel, the variation effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 11a is not executed, or the variation effect being executed and the winning of the game ball to the second start port 11a Based on the variation production is performed in parallel.

Incidentally, even when the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 10 is executed in the time saving mode, the variable performance based on the winning of the game ball to the first start 10 in the variable probability mode is similar to That is, even if the game ball wins the first start port 10, the winning sound is not output, the first pending icon (including the first pending icon display area 16b) and the variable icon (including the variable icon display area 16d) is not displayed, during the execution of the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 10 in the time saving mode, the production element (mode , BGM, volume, amount of light, customization, etc.) can be selected.

(Example of effect when the operation means is operated while waiting for a customer)
Using FIG. 77, an example of an effect of the operating means (the effect button 6a, the cross key 6f) during the customer waiting state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 77 (1), when the transition to the customer waiting state in which the variable effect and the jackpot effect are not executed, the effect button 6a and the effect button 6a and A valid period during customer waiting is started in which the operation of the cross key 6f is valid. Since the effective period during customer waiting is maintained until the variable performance is started, it can be generated over a period longer than various effective periods generated during the variable performance.

As shown in FIG. 77(2), the first image display device 16 displays a top screen including the stop-displayed effect pattern 16a, the effect button icon, and the cross key icon. When the effect button 6a is operated, the menu top screen MT including the menu screen, the effect button icon, and the cross key (selection button) icon is displayed as shown in FIG. 77(3) without vibrating the effect button 6a. be done.

On the menu screen, for example, menu items such as "pachilog", "first pachinko course", "volume/light intensity adjustment", "return", a selection key (cross key) icon, and an enter button (effect button) icon are set. ing.

The player can select any of the desired selection items using the cross key 6f. For example, on the menu screen, one of a plurality of selection items is highlighted (blinking display, display that changes the color of the selection item, etc.). The highlighted selection item becomes the selection target. The player switches the highlighted selection item using the cross key 6f, and determines the highlighted selection item by operating the effect button 6a. This means that the desired selection item is determined. When the selection item is determined, the screen corresponding to the determined selection item is switched from the menu screen and newly displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 6a to decide "pachilog", the pachilog top menu is displayed without vibrating the effect button 6a. “Pachilog” is, simply put, a game in which game history information is stored in a gaming machine.
When the player operates the performance button 6a and decides "first pachinko course", the guidance movie for beginners is reproduced without vibrating the performance button 6a.
When the player operates the effect button 6a to determine "volume/light amount adjustment", the sound volume/light amount adjustment screen is displayed without vibrating the effect button 6a.

When the left and right buttons of the cross key 6f are operated, a volume adjustment screen is displayed. On this screen, a volume gauge (volume value level meter) showing a plurality of volume levels, an explanation of "change volume with left and right buttons", and a volume control screen are displayed. A cross key icon for changing operations is displayed. When the left and right buttons of the cross key 6f are operated, the volume gauge is displayed in a state indicating the volume one level higher or lower than the current volume without vibrating the cross key 6f or the effect button 6a, and voice output is also performed. A volume change confirmation sound is output from the device 9 in a voice corresponding to the changed volume.

When the up and down buttons of the cross key 6f are operated, a light intensity adjustment screen is displayed. On this screen, a light intensity gauge (light intensity value level meter) showing a plurality of light intensity levels, an explanation of "change light intensity with up and down buttons", and a light intensity adjustment screen are displayed. A cross key icon for changing operations is displayed. When the up and down buttons of the cross key 6f are operated, the light intensity gauge is displayed in a state indicating the light intensity one step higher or lower than the current light intensity without vibrating the cross key 6f or the production button 6a, and a voice is output. A light quantity change confirmation sound corresponding to the changed light quantity is output from the device 9 .

When the player operates the effect button 6a to decide "Return", the menu screen is erased without vibrating the effect button 6a. On the other hand, if the effect button 6a is not operated while the menu screen is displayed, a demonstration effect image including the effect button icon is displayed after a predetermined time (for example, 45 seconds) has elapsed since the menu screen was displayed, as shown in FIG. 77(4). is displayed.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 77, the production button 6a related to various advance notice effects (dialogue notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) that occurs during the variable effect. Even if the effect button 6a or the cross key 6f is operated during the customer waiting valid period that can occur over a period longer than the valid period, a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 6a (by vibrating the effect button 6a) (including the indirect vibration of the cross key 6f that is transmitted) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised when the production button 6a or the cross key 6f is operated during the customer waiting state, and to avoid the inconvenience of making the player feel uncomfortable. becomes.

In addition, regarding the effective period of the cross key 6f related to the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment that occurs during the fluctuation production (variation display of special symbols) and the jackpot production (jackpot game), various advance notice productions (speech) that occur during the fluctuation production It can occur over a period longer than the effective period of the advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.), but during the effective period of the cross key 6f related to volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment , even if the cross key 6f is operated, the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a (including the indirect vibration of the cross key 6f transmitted by vibrating the effect button 6a) is not executed. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised when the production button 6a or the cross key 6f is operated during the customer waiting state, and to avoid the inconvenience of making the player feel uncomfortable. becomes.

In addition, as for the effective period of waiting for customers, the effective suggesting effect suggesting that the effective period may occur before the effective period occurs is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming defensive even though the information beneficial to the player (the effect to expect the execution of the jackpot game) is not executed, and the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of giving

In addition, regarding the effective period of the cross key 6f related to the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment that occurs during the variable performance (variable display of special symbols) and the jackpot performance (jackpot game), the effective suggestive performance is executed before the valid period occurs. It is designed not to be Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming defensive even though the information beneficial to the player (the effect to expect the execution of the jackpot game) is not executed, and the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of giving

In addition, compared to the case where the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period during customer waiting, which can occur over a period longer than the effective period of the effect button 6a that occurs during the variable effect (display period of the operation prompting image), During the effective period of the effect button 6a (the display period of the operation promotion image) related to various advance effects (dialogue advance effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) that occur during the variable effect, the effect button 6a is operated, the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a is more likely to be executed. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the effective period of the effect button 6a related to various advance notice effects that occur during the variable effect is the relatively short first effective period (effective period accompanied by the display of the operation promotion image related to the dialogue advance notice effect, etc.) and the relatively short effective period. Although there is a long second effective period (effective period accompanied by the display of an operation prompting image related to the determined effect, etc.), the customer who can occur over a period longer than the effective period of the effect button 6a that occurs during the variable effect. The vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a is more likely to be executed when the effect button 6a is operated during the second effective period than when the effect button 6a is operated during the waiting valid period. . Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that when the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period of waiting for customers, the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a at a predetermined rate may be executed. At a rate lower than when the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period of the effect button 6a related to various advance notice effects (dialogue notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) Vibration production should be executed.

(Summary of various vibration effects executed in specific effects)
FIG. 78 shows, in the specific effect, various vibration effects that are executed as a pre-reach effect after the start of fluctuation and before the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the ready-to-win effect from the time the ready-to-win effect is executed until the symbol is displayed to be fixed and stopped. It is a figure which shows the various vibration production|presentations performed as production/after-reach production|presentation.
The specific effect is a variable effect of a losing/big win variable effect pattern with reach in the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS.
In the specific production, the vibration production with operation executed during the production after reach (second production) rather than the type of vibration production with operation (dialogue notice production) executed during the production before reach (first production) Since there are many types (development production, cut-in notice production, decision success vibration production, re-lottery promotion vibration production, resurrection success vibration production, etc.), vibration production with operation is more effective during reach than before production / The execution ratio is higher in the post-reach production.

Further, in the specific effect, the ratio of execution of the operation-free vibration effect with matching jackpot patterns is higher in the after-reach effect than in the pre-reach effect.
In addition, in the specific effect (specific effect of the notice target), the vibration notice effect at the start of fluctuation (the effect button 6a, the movable effect members 17A to 17C) is more effective in the pre-reach effect than in the post-reach effect. Higher execution rate.

As a first feature related to the vibration effect, the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second or strong vibration 1 second) is executed in the dialog announcement effect with the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promoting image). , The step-up notice effect that does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) is the degree of expectation of the jackpot (the ratio of the execution of the big hit confirmation vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds) accompanying the pattern matching). Determined by success production, the rate of execution of success vibration production (strong vibration 4 seconds → 5 seconds) etc.) is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promoting image) is longer than the case where the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is executed in the step-up notice effect without the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promoting image). In the case where the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second or strong vibration 1 second) is executed in the serif notice effect with display), the expectation of the jackpot (vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds) accompanying the pattern alignment is executed You may make it the ratio etc. which a vibration production|presentation (strong vibration 4 seconds -> 5 seconds) is performed by a ratio and a determined production|presentation become high.

As a second feature related to the vibration effect, the vibration effect that is executed as a big hit notice effect has a relatively short vibration period. , Vibration production (1 second) during development production, etc.) and 2nd vibration production with a longer vibration period (production period) than the first vibration production (during cut-in production, successful success production, fixed production, etc.) There is a vibration effect longer than a second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)), and after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the second effect period (normal reach effect) and the third effect period (SP /SPSP ready-to-reach effect), the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed (performed at a higher rate) during the first effect period than during the second effect period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation without mistaking him for a big win, and to improve the interest in the game.

It should be noted that the look-ahead vibration effect (button vibration notice effect) is also the first vibration effect with a relatively short vibration time. After the production period (pre-reach production), there is a second production period (normal reach production) and a third production period (SP/SP SP reach production). The first vibration effect is easily executed (performed at a high rate).

As a third feature related to the vibration effect, in the variable effect in which there is a third effect period (SP/SPSP reach effect) after the second effect period (normal reach effect) after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), 1st vibration effects (vibration effects (1 second) such as dialogue announcement effects, step-up announcement effects, simulated continuous effects, development effects, etc.) are executed during the 1st effect period than during the 3rd effect period. (high rate of execution). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation without mistaking him for a big win, and to improve the interest in the game.

As a fourth feature related to the vibration effect, the vibration effect that is executed as a big hit notice effect includes the first vibration effect with a short vibration period (at the time of the dialogue notice effect, the step-up notice effect, the pseudo-continuous effect, and the development effect). Vibration effect such as time (1 second)) and second vibration effect with a longer vibration period than the first vibration effect (during cut-in effect, successful decision effect, confirmation effect, etc. Vibration effect longer than 1 second ( 3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)), and after the first production period (pre-reach production), there is a second production period (normal reach production) and a third production period (SP/SPSP reach production). In the variable production, the second vibration production is more likely to be executed (performed at a higher rate) during the second production period than during the first production period. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature related to the vibration effect, in the variable effect in which there is a third effect period (SP/SPSP reach effect) after the second effect period (normal reach effect) after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), Compared to the first production period, the third production period is longer than the second vibration production (during cut-in production, successful decision production, fixed production, etc.). seconds → 5 seconds)) is likely to be executed (the execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature of the vibration effect, during the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the ratio of executing the first vibration effect (1 second) with the effect button 6a in the normal state protrudes the effect button 6a. Higher than the rate of executing the first vibration effect (1 second) as the state. Therefore, the expectation of the player is not excessively aroused during the first presentation period, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As a seventh feature related to the vibration effect, during the third effect period (SP/SPSP reach effect), the ratio of executing the second vibration effect (3 seconds or more) with the effect button 6a in the projecting state is higher than the effect button. It is higher than the ratio of executing the second vibration effect with 6a as the normal state. Therefore, in the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the expectation of the player is not excessively aroused, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As an eighth feature related to the vibration effect, the vibration effect that is executed as a big hit notice effect includes the first vibration effect with a short vibration period (at the time of the dialogue notice effect, the step-up notice effect, the pseudo-continuous effect, the development effect). Vibration effect such as time (1 second)) and 2nd vibration effect with a longer vibration period (production period) than the 1st vibration effect (during cut-in effect, decision success effect, re-lottery promotion success effect, resurrection success There are vibration effects longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds), such as during production and final production, and continuous production of a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice) (pseudo continuous production ) is executed and the ready-to-win production is executed, the second vibration production (3 seconds) is better when the first vibration production (1 second) is executed than when the first vibration production is not executed. above) is likely to be executed (the ratio of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of whether or not the first vibration effect will be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a ninth feature related to the vibration production, the vibration production executed as a big hit announcement production has a second vibration production (during the cut-in production, a determined success production) with a longer vibration period (production period) than the first vibration production There are vibration effects longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)) such as during re-lottery promotion success effects, resurrection success effects, and confirmation effects (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)). In the variable production, the reach production by the second type production pattern (even number pattern) is easier to execute than the reach production by the first type production pattern (odd number pattern other than the "7" pattern) (the execution rate is high ), it is difficult to execute the reach production by the third type production pattern (“7” pattern) than the reach production by the second type production pattern (even number pattern) (the ratio of execution is low), the second type The second vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the ready-to-win effect is executed by the third type of effect pattern ("7" pattern) than when the ready-to-win effect is executed by the effect pattern (even number pattern) ( frequently executed). Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the type of effect symbol for executing the ready-to-win effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a tenth feature related to the vibration production, in the jackpot fluctuation production in which the ready-to-win production is executed, the vibration production (pre-reading vibration production (button vibration notice production) without the effective period (display of the operation promotion image) during the production before the reach )), step-up notice effect, confirmed effect), the number of times of execution of vibration effect (development effect, pattern matching, confirmed effect) without effective period (display of operation promotion image) during the effect after reach more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the sense of expectation during the post-reach performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As an eleventh feature related to the vibration effect, a specific reach effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is executed rather than a jackpot variation effect in which a predetermined reach effect (normal reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is executed. The number of executions of the vibration performance (development performance, pattern matching, fixed performance) without an effective period (display of the operation promotion image) during the performance after the ready-to-win is likely to increase. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the big win variation presentation from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a twelfth feature related to the vibration production, in the losing variation production in which the ready-to-win production is executed, the vibration production (development production, pattern matching, fixed production) without an effective period (display of operation promotion image) during the production after reach ), the number of times of execution of vibration effects (pre-reading vibration effects (button vibration notice effects), step-up notice effects, confirmation effects) without an effective period (display of operation promotion image) during the reach pre-production. tends to increase. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by a vibration effect that does not involve an effective period (display of an operation prompting image), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a thirteenth feature related to the vibration production, the notice after the reach, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the notice production before the reach, than the case where the notice production before the reach (line notice production, step-up notice production) is executed in the variable production The vibration effect of the effect button 6a (activation of the button vibration motor 6d) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high) when the effect (cut-in effect, development effect) is executed.
Also, when the pre-reach pre-announcement performance is executed, the degree of expectation for big win is higher when the vibration performance of the performance button 6a is executed than when the vibration performance of the performance button 6a is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player as to whether or not the vibration performance of the performance button 6a will be executed when the pre-reach announcement performance is executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As a 14th feature related to the vibration effect, the probability variation / time saving mode D ~ G is more effective than the normal mode A ~ C, and the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) in the notice effect after reaching. The degree of expectation for a big win increases when the vibration performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that normal modes A to C are more likely than variable / time-saving modes D to G, the jackpot when the vibration production with the effective period of the production button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) is executed in the advance notice production after reach Expectations may be raised. Even in this case, the playability can be varied depending on the type of the performance mode, and the expectation of the player can be easily heightened in the variable probability/time-saving modes D to G, which are advantageous for the player, and the interest in the game can be improved. It is possible to

A fifteenth feature related to the vibration effect is that in the first effect period (before reach) in the variable effect, the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed more than the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is not executed. However, when the expectation of a big hit is high and in the big hit variation performance, the performance button 6a is performed in the post-reach performance (period after the determined success performance) regardless of whether or not the vibration performance of the performance button 6a is executed during the pre-reach performance. Vibration production (vibration production when the pattern is aligned) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the big win by means of the vibration effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

A sixteenth feature related to the vibration effect is the vibration effect (at the time of the dialogue announcement effect, during the pseudo-continuous effect, during the development effect, One of the vibration effects such as cut-in effects) is executed in one of a plurality of types of vibration modes (weak vibration, strong vibration) with different expectations for big wins, but the effect that is executed during the variable effect Vibration effects (one of the vibration effects such as step-up notice effect, pattern alignment, etc.) not accompanied by the effective period of the button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) are executed in one predetermined vibration mode. be. Therefore, in the case where it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration mode without an effective period (display of the operation prompting image), it is possible to suppress the complication of the presentation mode of the vibration presentation and improve the interest of the game. becomes possible.

As a seventeenth feature related to the vibration production, in the production period before reach in the big hit variation production, the vibration production (vibration production at the time of the dialog announcement production) with the effective period of the production button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) is executed. and a case where a vibration effect (vibration effect at the time of step-up notice effect) is executed without the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image), and then (after-reach effect period). (At the time of decision success performance, at the time of re-lottery promotion success performance, at the time of resurrection success performance, vibration performance of 3 seconds or more at the time of pattern alignment) is executed. Vibration performance (vibration performance at the time of step-up notice performance) without accompanying is more likely to be executed (performed at a higher rate) during normal modes A to C than during probability variable/time saving modes D to G. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect related to the vibration rendering that is not accompanied by the effective period of the rendering button 6a (display of the operation prompting image), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As an eighteenth feature related to the vibration effect, when the jackpot variable effect is executed, the big hit notice is given depending on the type of the jackpot effect pattern 16a (even number pattern, odd number pattern other than "7", "7" pattern). It is possible to vary the execution mode of the vibration production in the production (execution or not, execution timing, etc.). The vibration mode is the same regardless of the type of the jackpot performance pattern 16a. Therefore, it is possible to uniformly congratulate the player on winning a big win while heightening the expectation for the big win by the vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a 19th feature related to the vibration production, after executing the vibration production (decision success vibration production, etc.) with the effective period (display of the operation promotion image) in the jackpot fluctuation production, the effective period (display of the operation promotion image) is performed. It is possible to execute a vibration performance without accompanying (symbol alignment, etc.), and for a vibration performance (decision success vibration performance, etc.) accompanied by an effective period (display of an operation prompting image), the timing of starting vibration is variable depending on the operation timing of the production button 6a. On the other hand, the timing to start the vibration is predetermined for the vibration effect (symbol matching, etc.) that does not accompany the valid period (display of the operation prompting image). Therefore, depending on whether or not the valid period (display of the operation prompting image) is accompanied, the vibration effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a twentieth feature related to vibration production, specific production (pseudo continuous production, , etc.) can be executed, but the degree of expectation for a big hit when a specific effect is executed is different between the normal modes A to C and the probability variable/time saving modes D to G. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

The 21st feature related to the vibration production is the stage production (step-up notice production, pseudo Continuous production, etc.) can be executed, but the staged production (step-up notice production, pseudo-continuous production, etc.) is the same in normal mode A to C and variable / time saving mode D to G 3rd step effect, 4th step effect, 5th step effect, or pseudo-continuous effect, 1 time or 2 times). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a 22nd feature related to vibration production, it is possible to execute any of a plurality of operation promotion productions with different expectations for big hits in normal modes A to C and probability variable / time saving modes D to G, and production button 6a It is possible to execute operation effects (any of development effects, cut-in effects, and decision effects) according to the operation of, and in normal modes A to C and variable / time-saving modes D to G, when the operation effects are executed The degree of expectation for big win is higher when the effective suggesting performance is executed and the operation promoting performance is executed than when the operation promoting performance is executed without executing the effective suggesting performance. Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for whether or not the effective suggestive effect is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.
Incidentally, when the vibration performance is executed during the effective suggestion performance, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the vibration performance is not executed during the effective suggestion performance.

A 23rd feature of the vibration effect is that the vibration effect with a relatively short period of time (for example, 1 second), which is executed in conjunction with the big win notice effect, is effective during the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image ) and may be executed without an effective period (display of an operation promotion image), but the vibration period that is executed with the jackpot announcement effect is relatively long ( 3 seconds or longer) is executed with an effective period (display of an operation prompting image). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect for the operation of the performance button 6a, and to improve the interest of the game.

A twenty-fourth feature of the vibration effect is that, in the final effect, a battle effect involving a single hit operation of the effect button 6a or a tilting operation of the effect lever 6h is executed, and a continuous hitting operation of the effect button 6a or the effect button 6a. In the case where a mission effect involving a long-pressing operation is executed, the start timing of execution of the decision success effect after operating the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h (the display start timing of the success effect image, the decision success vibration effect) The vibration start timing, the movable start timing of the deciding motion, and the light emission start timing of the lamp light emission (rainbow)) are different. Therefore, it is possible to execute a decision success effect (decision success vibration effect) at an appropriate timing according to the effect mode of the decision effect accompanying the operation of the operation means, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a twenty-fifth feature relating to the vibration performance, the decision success vibration performance of the same vibration performance mode is executed in the decision success performance accompanied by the single pressing operation of the performance button 6a and the decision success performance accompanied by the tilting operation of the performance lever 6h. However, the success effect sound (success sound effect A) output in the decision success effect accompanying the single-press operation of the effect button 6a and the success sound effect (success effect sound) output in the decision success effect accompanying the tilting operation of the effect lever 6h B) is different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the success effect sound from becoming monotonous in the determined success presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.
In addition, after execution of the winning success effect with a single hit operation of the effect button 6a and the success success effect of winning with the tilting operation of the effect lever 6h, the vibration effect in the same vibration effect mode (vibration effect when the symbols are aligned) is executed. be. Therefore, it is possible to uniformly congratulate a big win regardless of the performance content of the determined performance, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a twenty-sixth feature related to the vibration effect, the decision success vibration effect involving the tilting operation of the effect lever 6h is performed more quickly than the even-number pattern matching or the jackpot pattern of the "7" pattern matching is stopped and displayed. It is easier to execute when the jackpot pattern of is stopped and displayed. Therefore, rarity can be imparted to the decision-success vibration presentation accompanying the operation of the presentation lever 6h, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
It should be noted that if the performance other than the determined success performance is changed during the variable performance, the pending icon or the variable icon changes to a display mode (red, rainbow) with high expectations for a big hit, the performance button 6a or the performance lever 6h is set to 1. You may vibrate weakly or strongly per second.

As a twenty-seventh feature related to the vibration effect, when the jackpot variable effect is executed, even if the jackpot effect pattern 16a of even pattern pattern (“222”) is stopped and displayed, odd pattern pattern (“777”) is displayed. Even when the jackpot performance pattern 16a is stopped and displayed, the vibration performance mode (strong vibration for a long time) of the winning vibration performance executed when the success effect image is displayed along with the execution of the winning success performance is the same. It has become. Therefore, while raising the expectation for the big win by the vibration effect, it is possible to uniformly celebrate the big win regardless of the type of the jackpot effect pattern that is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Also, in the probability variable/time saving modes D to G, when the game ball enters the first start port 10 and the big hit variation effect is executed, and when the game ball enters the second start port 11a and the big hit change effect is executed. Even if the jackpot production pattern 16a with even numbered patterns ("222") is stopped and displayed, and even if the jackpot production pattern 16a with odd numbered patterns ("777") is stopped and displayed, the decision is successful. The vibration effect mode (strong vibration for a long time) of the vibration effect is the same.

In addition, when the game ball wins in the first start port 10 in the normal modes A to C and the jackpot variation effect is executed, and in the probability variable / time reduction mode D to G, the game ball wins in the first start port 10 Even when the jackpot performance pattern 16a with even numbered patterns ("222") is stop-displayed, the jackpot performance pattern 16a with odd numbered patterns ("777") is still displayed. Even in this case, the vibration effect mode (strong vibration for a long time) of the determined success vibration effect is the same.

As a 28th feature related to vibration production, when cut-in production or development production is executed during reach production in normal mode A to C and variable / time saving mode D to G, red light is emitted in operation promotion production An operation prompting image including an opaque effect button image simulating the effect button 6a that is being pressed is displayed, and the degree of expectation for a big win is different when the vibration effect is executed. Therefore, even if the operation promoting effect and the vibration effect of the same effect mode are executed, the playability can be varied according to the type of the effect mode, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As the 29th feature related to the vibration effect, when the game ball wins in the first start port 10 in the normal mode A to C, and in the probability variable / time saving mode D to G, the game is played in the second start port 11a When the ball wins and when the game ball wins in the first start port 10 in the probability variable/short time mode D to G, when the cut-in performance or the development performance is executed during the ready-to-win performance, the operation is performed. An operation promoting image of a button image simulating a performance button 6a emitting red light in the promotion performance is displayed, and the degree of expectation for a big hit is different when the vibration performance is executed.

As a thirtieth feature related to the vibration effect, when a light emission effect that causes the effect button 6a to emit white or red light in the operation promotion effect is executed (pseudo continuous effect, development effect), vibration effect (short-time weak vibration or short strong vibration of time), and a vibration effect (strong vibration for a long time) when a light emission effect that causes the effect button 6a to emit rainbow light in the operation promotion effect is executed (determined success effect), the vibration effect mode (vibration intensity or vibration period) are different. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the operation promoting effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a 31st feature related to the vibration effect, the rate at which the button vibration notice effect is executed is higher in the normal modes A to C than in the variable probability/time saving modes D to G. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the player's expectation in the normal mode, which is more disadvantageous to the player than in the probability variable/time-saving mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a thirty-second feature related to the vibration effect, the operation promoting effect prompting the player to operate the operating means includes a first operation promoting effect in which an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a emitting white light is displayed; There are a second operation promoting effect in which an opaque effect button image imitating the red emitting effect button 6a is displayed, and a third operation promoting effect for adjusting the volume and brightness, and information beneficial to the player (the variable effect The vibration effect can be executed when the first operation promotion effect and the second operation promotion effect suggesting the expectation of a big hit, etc.) are executed, but the third operation promotion effect not suggesting useful information to the player. Vibration performance is not executed when executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration effect from being executed until the time when useful information is not suggested to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a 33rd feature related to the vibration effect, when the determined effect is executed, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effective suggestive effect (no vibration effect) was executed (when the operation means is operated or the effective period has elapsed without being operated) A first vibration performance (determined success vibration performance) is executed after), and a vibration performance is executed at the time of effective suggestion performance, and a vibration performance (effective suggestion performance) is executed after a predetermined period has passed since the effective suggestion performance is executed. There is a second vibration performance for executing a time vibration performance and a determined success vibration performance), and the degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the second vibration performance is executed than when the first vibration performance is executed. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player from the time of the effective suggestion effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirty-fourth feature related to the vibration effect, the lamp change effect is executed by the winning hole lamp NR and the board lighting device 23 (the frame lighting device 27) rather than the case where the lamp changing effect is executed by the winning hole lamp NR. When it is done, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher, and vibration effects (successful decision vibration effects, vibration effects when symbols are aligned, etc.) are easier to execute. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine having a V winning opening for continuing the high-probability time-saving gaming state during a jackpot game, when a game ball enters the V winning opening during a jackpot game, the effect button 6a vibrates. , may emit rainbow colors.

Modifications will be described below.
(1) In the continuous notice effect type determination table for the probability variable / time saving mode shown in FIG. Although the execution ratio is the same, the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice performance in the variable probability modes D, E and the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice performance in the time reduction modes F, G may be made different.

Specifically, the table shown in FIG. 39 is used as the continuous announcement effect type determination table for the time saving mode, and the table shown in FIG. 79 is used as the continuous announcement effect type determination table for the variable probability mode.
As a feature of the continuous announcement effect type determination table for the variable probability mode shown in FIG.
Further, in the variable probability modes D and E, the continuous announcement effect is more likely to be executed than in the normal modes A to C.
Also, in the variable probability modes D and E, the vibration notice effect (button vibration notice effect, character vibration notice effect) is more likely to be executed than in the time saving modes F and G, while in the normal modes A to C It is more difficult to execute the vibration forewarning effect.

(2) In the continuous notice effect type determination table for the probability variable / time saving mode shown in FIG. Even if the mode was set, even if the time saving mode was set corresponding to the c time saving game state, the execution ratio of the continuous notice effect was the same, but for each time saving mode according to the type of the time saving game state to be set You may make the execution ratio of a continuation notice production different.
Specifically, a continuous notice effect type determination table is separately provided for the time saving mode set corresponding to the b time saving game state and for the time saving mode set corresponding to the c time saving game state, and the time saving game state is set. The execution ratio of the continuous announcement effect is set lower than the correspondingly set time saving mode.

(Technical features of the present invention corresponding to the above embodiments)
A conventional gaming machine determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on the establishment of a starting condition, and executes a game effect according to the result of the determination. is common. In such a game machine, there is known one that executes an effect using a predetermined effect device (effect button, movable effect member, etc.) (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2019-033816). However, the gaming machine as described in the above patent document has a problem that the interest in the game is low.

◆ A first configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows.
This gaming machine can execute a special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (game ball wins to the first start port) or the establishment of the second start condition (game ball wins to the second start port). game machine, the game state can be controlled between a first game state (normal) and a second game state (probability variable, time reduction) more advantageous to the player than the first game state (normal), and the starting The possibility of the special game being executed based on the establishment of the condition is provided with a production control means that can produce a plurality of types of notification effects (reach-loss fluctuation pattern, reach-hit fluctuation pattern), wherein the production control means A plurality of types of predetermined effects that make you expect that the notification effect (variation pattern per reach) that can execute the special game will be executed (the inciting effect, button vibration, role act (operation / light emission), effect change effect, Background change, pattern effect at the start of fluctuation, story progress effect, step-up, dialogue notice, mode change, light guide plate light, roulette effect, decision effect, pattern matching effect, pattern expansion effect after pattern matching, look-ahead effect, etc.) The predetermined effects include a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect. Object action (largely character action), 1st effect change production (1st position effect change production), 1st background change (change to background 1), 1st story progress production (story progress production with this change)) , even in the notification effect (variation display of the jackpot) that becomes the special game when the first starting condition is established in the second gaming state (probability variable, time saving), the first in the first gaming state (normal) Although it is possible to execute the notification effect (variation display of the big win) that becomes the special game when the starting condition is established, the second predetermined effect (second button vibration (forecasting vibration), second accessory operation ( small operation), second effect change effect (effect change effect at second position), second background change (change to background 2), pre-reading stimulus effect, second story progress effect (countdown effect)) are the first game In the state (normal), the first start condition is satisfied and the notification effect (variation display of the big win) that becomes the special game can be executed before and/or during execution, but the second game state It is characterized by regulating the execution before execution and/or during execution when the notification effect (variation display of the jackpot) that becomes the special game when the first start condition is established in (probability variation, time reduction) is established. do.

◆ A second configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows.
This gaming machine can execute a special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (game ball wins to the first start port) or the establishment of the second start condition (game ball wins to the second start port). game machine, the game state can be controlled between a first game state (normal) and a second game state (probability variable, time reduction) more advantageous to the player than the first game state (normal), and the starting The possibility of the special game being executed based on the establishment of the condition is provided with a production control means that can produce a plurality of types of notification effects (reach-loss fluctuation pattern, reach-hit fluctuation pattern), wherein the production control means A plurality of types of predetermined effects that make you expect that the notification effect (variation pattern per reach) that can execute the special game will be executed (the inciting effect, button vibration, role act (operation / light emission), effect change effect, Background change, pattern effect at the start of fluctuation, story progress effect, step-up, dialogue notice, mode change, light guide plate light, roulette effect, decision effect, pattern matching effect, pattern expansion effect after pattern matching, look-ahead effect, etc.) The predetermined effects include a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect. Object action (largely character action), 1st effect change production (1st position effect change production), 1st background change (change to background 1), 1st story progress production (story progress production with this change)) , even in the notification effect (variation display of the jackpot) that becomes the special game when the first starting condition is established in the second gaming state (probability variable, time saving), the first in the first gaming state (normal) Although it is possible to execute the notification effect (variation display of the big win) that becomes the special game when the starting condition is established, the second predetermined effect (second button vibration (forecasting vibration), second accessory operation ( small operation), second effect change effect (second position effect change effect), second background change (change to background 2), pre-reading stimulus effect, second story progress effect (countdown effect)) are the second game It can be executed before and/or during the execution of the notification effect (variation display of the jackpot) that becomes the special game when the second start condition is established in the state (probability variable / time reduction), but the second Execution is regulated before and/or during the execution of the notification effect (variation display of the jackpot) that becomes the special game when the first start condition is established in the game state (probability variable, time reduction). do.

◆ A third configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows.
This gaming machine can execute a special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (game ball wins to the first start port) or the establishment of the second start condition (game ball wins to the second start port). In the gaming machine, the game state is a first game state (normal), a second game state (variable probability, short time) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (normal) after execution of the special game, and the It is possible to control from the first game state (normal) to the third game state (play time) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (normal) without executing the special game, and the start condition The probability that the special game will be executed based on the establishment of is provided with a production control means that can produce a plurality of types of notification production (reach loss fluctuation pattern, reach hit fluctuation pattern). A plurality of types of predetermined effects that make you expect that the notification effect (fluctuation pattern per reach) that can execute a special game will be executed (the inciting effect, button vibration, accessory operation (operation / light emission), effect change effect, background change, pattern effect at start of fluctuation, story progress effect, step-up, dialogue notice, mode change, light guide plate light, roulette effect, decision effect, pattern matching effect, pattern expansion effect after pattern matching, look-ahead effect, etc.) can be executed. and when the first starting condition is satisfied in the second gaming state (probability variable, short working hours) and the notification effect is executed, and the second starting condition is satisfied in the third gaming state (play time) It is characterized in that the rate at which the predetermined effect is executed differs between the case where the notification effect is executed and the case where the notification effect is executed.

◆ A fourth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows.
This gaming machine can execute a special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (game ball wins to the first start port) or the establishment of the second start condition (game ball wins to the second start port). game machine, the game state can be controlled between a first game state (normal) and a second game state (probability variable, time reduction) more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the start condition is established. A notification effect (reach-loss variation pattern, reach-hit variation pattern) for informing whether or not to execute the special game by executing the second effect (pre-reach effect) after the first effect (pre-reach effect) based on , a vibration effect that vibrates a predetermined effect means (buttons, levers, movable accessories, etc.), and a effect control means that can execute the first start condition when the second game state (variable probability, short time) Based on the establishment of the first starting condition when the first game state (normal) than when the notification effect (variation pattern per reach) for notifying the execution of the special game is executed based on the establishment of The vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the first effect (during the effect before reach) when the notification effect (variation pattern for reach) that notifies the execution of the special game is executed. do.

◆ A fifth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows.
This gaming machine can execute a special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (game ball wins to the first start port) or the establishment of the second start condition (game ball wins to the second start port). game machine, the game state can be controlled between a first game state (normal) and a second game state (probability variable, time reduction) more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the start condition is established. A notification effect (reach-loss variation pattern, reach-hit variation pattern) for informing whether or not to execute the special game by executing the second effect (pre-reach effect) after the first effect (pre-reach effect) based on , a vibration effect that vibrates a predetermined effect means (button, lever, movable accessory, etc.), and a effect control means that can execute the second game state (variable probability, short time), the first start The execution of the special game is notified based on the establishment of the second start condition rather than the case where the notification effect (variation pattern per reach) is executed to notify the execution of the special game based on the establishment of the condition. It is characterized in that the vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the first effect (during the pre-reach effect) when the notification effect (variation pattern for reaching reach) is executed.

◆ A sixth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a gaming machine as follows.
This gaming machine can execute a special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (game ball wins to the first start port) or the establishment of the second start condition (game ball wins to the second start port). In the gaming machine, the game state is a first game state (normal), a second game state (variable probability, short time) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (normal) after execution of the special game, and the Controllable from a first game state (normal) to a third game state (play time) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (normal) without executing the special game, and the start Based on the establishment of the conditions, the second effect (post-ready effect) is executed after the first effect (pre-reach effect) to notify whether the special game is to be executed. pattern) and a vibration effect that vibrates a predetermined effect means (buttons, levers, movable accessories, etc.), and when the second game state (variable probability, short time), the second The second start condition at the time of the third game state (play time) than when the notification effect (variation pattern per reach) for notifying the execution of the special game is executed based on the establishment of one start condition The vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the first effect (during the effect before reach) when the notification effect (variation pattern for reach per hit) for notifying the execution of the special game is executed based on the establishment of It is characterized by

◆ A seventh configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows.
This gaming machine can execute a special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (game ball wins to the first start port) or the establishment of the second start condition (game ball wins to the second start port). game machine, the game state can be controlled between a first game state (normal) and a second game state (probability variable, time reduction) more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the start condition is established. A notification effect (reach-loss variation pattern, reach-hit variation pattern) for informing whether or not to execute the special game by executing the second effect (the latter half of the variation) after the first effect (the first half of the variation), and a predetermined and an effect control means for vibrating the effect means (buttons, levers, movable accessories, etc.), and when the second game state (variable probability, short time), the first start condition is established. than when the notification effect (losing variation pattern) for notifying that the special game is not executed is executed based on the The vibration performance is more likely to be executed during the first performance (in the first half of the variation) when the notification performance (ready-to-miss variation pattern) for reporting that the special game is not to be executed is executed.

◆ The eighth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as the following game machine.
This gaming machine can execute a special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (game ball wins to the first start port) or the establishment of the second start condition (game ball wins to the second start port). game machine, the game state can be controlled between a first game state (normal) and a second game state (probability variable, time reduction) more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the start condition is established. A notification effect (reach-loss variation pattern, reach-hit variation pattern) for informing whether or not to execute the special game by executing the second effect (the latter half of the variation) after the first effect (the first half of the variation), and a predetermined and a vibration effect that vibrates the effect means (buttons, levers, movable accessories, etc.), and when the second game state (variable probability, short time), the first start condition is The notification that notifies that the special game is not executed because the second start condition is satisfied than when the notification effect (losing variation pattern) that notifies that the special game is not executed is executed. The vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the first effect (during the first half of the change) when the effect (loss variation pattern) is executed.

◆ A ninth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a gaming machine as follows.
This gaming machine can execute a special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (game ball wins to the first start port) or the establishment of the second start condition (game ball wins to the second start port). game machine, the game state can be controlled between a first game state (normal) and a second game state (probability variable, time reduction) more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the start condition is established. A notification effect (reach-loss variation pattern, reach-hit variation pattern) for informing whether or not to execute the special game by executing the second effect (the latter half of the variation) after the first effect (the first half of the variation), and a predetermined and an effect control means for vibrating the effect means (buttons, levers, movable accessories, etc.), and when the second game state (variable probability, short time), the first start condition is established. Based on the establishment of the first start condition in the first game state (normal) than when the notification effect (losing variation pattern) for notifying that the special game is not executed is executed based on The vibration performance is more likely to be executed during the second performance (during the second half of the variation) when the notification performance (losing variation pattern) for notifying that the special game is not executed is executed. .

◆ A tenth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows.
This gaming machine can execute a special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (game ball wins to the first start port) or the establishment of the second start condition (game ball wins to the second start port). game machine, the game state can be controlled between a first game state (normal) and a second game state (probability variable, time reduction) more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the start condition is established. A notification effect (reach-loss variation pattern, reach-hit variation pattern) for informing whether or not to execute the special game by executing the second effect (the latter half of the variation) after the first effect (the first half of the variation), and a predetermined and a vibration effect that vibrates the effect means (button, lever, movable accessory, etc.), and when the second game state (variable probability, short time), the first start condition It is notified that the special game is not executed based on the establishment of the second start condition rather than when the notification effect (losing variation pattern) for notifying that the special game is not executed based on the establishment is executed. The vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the second effect (during the latter half of the variation) when the notification effect (loss variation pattern) is executed.

◆An eleventh configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows.
This gaming machine can execute a special game based on the establishment of the first start condition (game ball wins to the first start port) or the establishment of the second start condition (game ball wins to the second start port). A game machine capable of controlling a game state between a first game state (normal) and a second game state (variable probability, short time) more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and can be operated by the player. operation means (buttons, levers), a notification effect (reach-loss variation pattern, reach-win variation pattern) for informing whether or not the special game is to be executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the operation means for the player and an effect control means capable of executing an operation promotion effect (display of an operation promotion image) to prompt the operation of and a vibration effect to vibrate the operation means, and when the second game state (variable probability, short time) is, than when the notification effect (variation pattern per reach) is executed to notify the execution of the special game based on the establishment of the second start condition, the first start condition is established and the special game is performed. It is characterized in that the operation prompting effect is less likely to be executed and the vibration effect is less likely to be executed when the notification effect (reach-hit variation pattern) for notifying the execution is executed.

◆ A twelfth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows.
This gaming machine executes a special game based on establishment of a first start condition (game ball wins to the first start port) or establishment of a second start condition (game ball wins to a second start port). Determination means for determining whether or not, prior determination means for determining whether or not to perform the special game before the determination is performed, the game state as the first game state (normal), and the After execution of the special game, a second game state (probability variation) more advantageous to the player than the first game state (normal), and the first game without executing the special game from the first game state (normal) A game state control means for controlling a third game state (play time) more advantageous to the player than the state (normal), and a game effect can be executed according to the result of the determination and the result of the preliminary determination. Effect control means, and a specific effect (read-ahead effect) that can be executed based on the preliminary determination when the third game state (play time), and the previous when the second game state (variable probability) It is characterized in that the ratio of execution of a predetermined specific effect (button/role product vibration look-ahead effect, role product actuation look-ahead effect) that can be executed based on article pre-determination is different.

◆ A thirteenth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is realized as the following game machine.
This gaming machine executes a special game based on establishment of a first start condition (game ball wins to the first start port) or establishment of a second start condition (game ball wins to a second start port). Determination means for determining whether or not, prior determination means for determining whether or not to perform the special game before the determination is performed, the game state as the first game state (normal), and the After execution of the special game, a second game state (probability variation) more advantageous to the player than the first game state (normal), and the first game without executing the special game from the first game state (normal) A game state control means for controlling a third game state (play time) more advantageous to the player than the state (normal), and a game effect can be executed according to the result of the determination and the result of the preliminary determination. Effect control means, and a specific effect (read-ahead effect) that can be executed based on the preliminary determination when the third game state (play time), and the previous when the second game state (variable probability) It is characterized in that the execution rate of a predetermined specific effect (button/accessory vibration look-ahead effect, role-thing act look-ahead effect) that can be executed based on article pre-determination is the same.

Next, as described above, in the game machine, the game progresses by the control processing in the various control boards, and the game effect is executed according to the progress of the game. will be explained.
In the following, for the convenience of explanation, each constituent member is given a new reference numeral. That is, in the constituent members described above and the constituent members explained with reference to FIGS. may be

(Structure of the back of the game board)
First, the configuration of the back side of the game board will be described.
80 is a rear view showing a state in which each unit is assembled to the base frame, and FIG. 81 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, etc., a base frame (liquid crystal base frame) 130 having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction is assembled to the rear surface of the game board 4. An image display unit (image display device 31 and image display cover 165) 160 is assembled on the back side (rear side) so as to close the opening. A lamp relay board 166 is assembled to the back surface (rear surface) of the image display cover (liquid crystal cover) 165, and a main control board is accommodated in the lower part of the back surface of the image display cover 165 below the lamp relay board 166. A case (board case) 200 is attached.
The base frame (liquid crystal base) 130 is a substantially rectangular annular body having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction, and its annular front surface 131 is attached and fixed to the back surface of the game board 10 . There is a space for arranging various circuit boards and parts on the back of the base frame.
An effect control board 130 is arranged on the back side of an image display unit (liquid crystal unit) 160 fixed to the back of the base frame 130 . The image display unit 160 is slidable from the side (horizontal direction) of the base frame body, the vertical direction, or the oblique direction in the gap (storage space) for storing the image display unit provided in front of the performance control board. It is configured so that it can be attached to
Various circuit boards arranged on the back surface of the base frame are covered with a lid member 170 (FIGS. 80 and 81).

As shown in FIG. 80, at least the RWM clear switch 680 and the setting key switch 660 provided on the main control board 50) are exposed on the back side of the board case 200. As shown in FIG.
Also, the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 provided on the main control board 50 can be visually recognized through the transparent board case 200 .
The staff of the amusement arcade or the like opens the door of the amusement machine, operates the RWM clear switch 680 and the setting key switch 660 while viewing the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 on the back of the amusement machine, and clears the RWM. You can perform operations such as changing settings and checking game performance.

The RWM clear switch 680 on the main control board 50 is not directly exposed, and an operation member 685 that can be operated by the staff of the game parlor or the like can be accessed from an opening provided in the board case 200 at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 680. Protruding.
When the staff or the like presses the operating member 685 , the RWM clear switch 680 is pressed by the pressed operating member 685 . This causes the RWM clear switch 680 to be operated.

The setting key switch 660 is provided with a key hole for inserting a key in the end face of a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 50 .
An end face of the setting key switch 660 having a keyhole is exposed through an opening provided in the board case 200 .
Amusement arcade staff or the like can operate the setting key switch 660 by inserting a key into the keyhole.

(main board protection case)
Next, the configuration of the main board protection case 200 according to this embodiment will be described.
In addition, in this embodiment, the main board protection case 200, the payout board protection case 400, and the performance board protection case 700 are common to the game board 4 side with respect to the board case in the forward direction, and the side opposite to the game board 4. The direction is explained as the back side.
Therefore, the left-right direction in the drawing is the left-right direction when each board case is viewed from the side opposite to the game board 4 .

82A and 82B are diagrams illustrating a main board protection case according to an example of the present embodiment, in which (a) is a perspective view, (b) is a side view, and (c) is a front view. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of a main board protection case including a pedestal. FIG. 84 is a side view showing a mode of attaching the main board protection case to the pedestal.
FIG. 85 is a view for explaining the state in which the main board protection case of FIG. 82 is removed from the base, (a) being a perspective view, (b) a side view, and (c) a front view. 86 is a rear perspective view of the main board protective case of FIG. 85. FIG.
A main circuit board protection case (hereinafter simply referred to as a main circuit board case) 200 of the present embodiment accommodates a main control circuit board 50 on which electronic components such as a ROM are mounted. 82 to 84).

The main circuit board case 200 is composed of two transparent resin case pieces (a lower case piece 210 and an upper case piece 220) that house the main control circuit board (printed circuit board) 50 with the ROM mounted therebetween. ), a cutting member (hereinafter referred to as a cutting member) 230 for cutting an unsealable seal sandwiched and held between the edges of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, and an unsealable seal 250, which will be described later, are adhered. and a cap 240 detachably attached to the sealing base portion 310 of the main substrate case 200 .
The main control board 50 of this embodiment employs a single-sided mounting method in which electronic components are arranged only on one side.
By mounting important electronic parts (particularly ROM) only on one side and facing the mounting side to the side visible from the outside (rear side), it is possible to easily detect fraudulent acts such as replacement of electronic parts.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 constitute a substrate case main body (sealing body 300).
Although the two case pieces forming the main board case 200 are described as a lower case piece and an upper case piece, the positional relationship between the case pieces is different from the vertical direction shown in the drawing.
For the sake of convenience, the back side case piece is referred to as the lower case piece, and the front side case piece is referred to as the upper case piece as viewed from the examiner's viewpoint. The lower case piece is the front case piece.
A protective cover 229 is arranged below the upper case piece 220 to cover the connecting portion between the internal connector provided on the internal main control board 50 and the external connector.
In this embodiment, the lower case piece 210 is fixed to the upper case piece 220 with the main control board 50 interposed therebetween by a crimping member.

A crimping fastening portion 290 using a crimping member is arranged at an appropriate position along the edge of the main substrate case 200, and a crimping member (locking member ), the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are locked in the closed state. By removing (breaking) the caulking member driven (locked) into the fastening hole 291, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 can be opened, closed, and removed.
In the crimping fastening portion 290 of the main board case 200 of this embodiment, two crimping fastening holes are provided (crimping fastening holes 291A and 291B).
Each caulking fastening hole is configured by connecting a lower case side fastening hole 292 provided in the lower case piece 210 and an upper case side fastening hole 293 provided in the upper case piece 220 .

As will be described later, in a state in which the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are engaged with each other using the hooking groove and the hooking piece, a crimping member is driven into one of the crimping fastening holes 291, whereby the lower case is It becomes impossible to slide the piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 to release the engagement between them.
Therefore, it is impossible to access the main control board 50 housed inside the main board case.
Only one caulking fastening hole is used for fastening the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 once. After removing (breaking) the crimping member and releasing the fastening (after opening the main board case 200), when fastening is performed again, the fastening is performed by driving the crimping member into the other remaining crimping fastening hole. conduct. That is, the main board case of this embodiment can be opened up to twice.
In the main board case 200 of the present embodiment (for example, FIG. 85), for example, a crimping member is driven into the crimping fastening hole 291B on the lower side in the drawing.

The pedestal 280 is connecting means for attaching the main board case 200 to the game machine side holding portion (in this embodiment, the lamp relay board 166) provided on the back side of the game machine main body.
Since the main board case 200 housing the main control board is assembled with the lower case piece 210 attached to the back of the game board such as a game machine via the pedestal 280, the upper case can be opened from the back side of the game board. Through the piece 220, the electronic components mounted on the internal control board surface can be viewed.
Further, by rotating the main circuit board case 200 upward about the shaft portion 281 located on the upper part of the pedestal 280, the inside of the main circuit board case can be confirmed from the bottom surface of the transparent lower case piece 210. FIG.

A main board case assembly 200A in which the main board case 200 is attached to the pedestal 280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 82 to 84, the main board case assembly 200A includes a pedestal 280, the main board case 200, and a protective cover 229. As shown in FIGS. The pedestal 280 is a component used to attach the main board case 200 to the rear side of the game board 10 (see FIG. 82).
As shown in FIG. 83, the pedestal 280 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape with two sides extending in the horizontal direction longer than the two sides extending in the vertical direction. , and a plate shape is provided in the center of the upper side in the left-right direction. The axial direction of the shaft portion 281 coincides with the left-right direction.
The main board case 200 is provided with a pair of hook portions 249 that are engaged with the respective shaft portions 281 . A pair of hook portions 249 are provided on the lower side of an upper case piece 220, which will be described later. The hook portion 249 is formed in a U shape that protrudes toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 84, when attaching the main circuit board case 200 to the pedestal 280, the main circuit board case 200 is arranged so that the hook portion 249 protrudes toward the back side. Then, the hook portions 249 are brought into a state in which they can be engaged with the shaft portions 281 , so that the main circuit board case 200 is brought closer to the pedestal 280 to engage the hook portions 249 with the shaft portions 281 .
Then, when the hook portion 249 is engaged with the shaft portion 281, the main board case 200 is rotated around the shaft portion 281 counterclockwise in left side view (in the direction of the arrow of symbol C in FIG. 84), and the main board is rotated. The case 200 is overlaid on the pedestal 280 . As shown in FIG. 82 , at this time, the plate-shaped hook 282 provided on the upper side of the base 280 is hooked on the recess 3 a provided on the upper side of the main board case 200 . Therefore, the main board case 200 is fixed to the pedestal 280 by the engagement between the hook portion 249 and the shaft portion 281 and the engagement between the plate-like hook 282 and the main board case 200 .

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, protective cover 229 is then attached to main board case 200 . Protective cover 229 covers the lower portion of main board case 200 including hook portion 249 . In this manner, the main board case assembly 200A is assembled and attached to the rear side of the game board 10. As shown in FIG.
The main control board 50 and the main board case 200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 85, the main control board 50 for controlling the game is accommodated in the main board case 200. As shown in FIG. An integrated main ROM 502 is mounted on the main control board 50 . A plurality of electronic components 595 different from the integrated main ROM 502 are mounted on the main control board 50 . The plurality of electronic components 595 includes various electronic components such as ICs, resistors, connectors, capacitors, and coils. Also, as shown in FIG. 85(b), a plurality of connectors 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, and 776 are mounted on the main control board 50. FIG. Note that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are shown in FIG. 85(b), and may be omitted in other drawings.

The integrated main ROM 502 stores memory contents used for game control. The integrated main ROM 502 also stores memory contents that affect game results.
The integrated main ROM 502 is a one-chip microcomputer that integrates the main CPU 50a, main ROM 50b, and main RAM 50c.
A plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from left to right on the lower portion of the main control board 50 . A plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged inside six openings 779 provided in the lower part of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200 .

A plurality of connectors 774 and 775 out of the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are called detection signal connectors 774 and 775 . The detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are connected to the first starting hole detection switch 10a, the second starting hole detection switch 11c, the big winning hole detection switch 13c, the general winning hole detection switch 14a, (Fig. 3) is input. In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 include a first start hole detection switch 13a, a second start hole detection switch 14a, a large winning hole detection switch 13c, and a general winning hole detection switch 13a for detecting that a game ball has won a prize. Assume that all signals of the switch 14a (see FIG. 3) are input. The detection signal connectors 774,775 are a different color than the other connectors 771,772,773,776. In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774, 775 are fluorescent, and the other connectors 771, 772, 773, 776 are different from fluorescent.

The integrated main ROM 502 has a plate-like main body 580 extending vertically and horizontally and a plurality of first signal pins 582 . A first signal pin 582 is a signal pin that transfers signals between the integrated main ROM 502 and the main control board 50 . The first signal pin 582 is arranged so as to be visible through the main board case 200 . Specifically, the first signal pin 582 extends above and below the body portion 580 of the integrated main ROM 502 and is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . Therefore, the first signal pin 582 is visible from the front through the main board case 200 .
A signal pin provided for each of the plurality of electronic components 595 is called a second signal pin 583 (see FIG. 83). The second signal pins 583 transmit signals between each of the electronic components 595 and the main control board 50 . A signal is not limited to a digital signal, and includes an analog signal. They are arranged so as to be visible through the main board case 200 . Specifically, the second signal pin 583 extends upward, downward, leftward, rightward, or forward from each electronic component and is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . Therefore, the second signal pin 583 is visible through the main board case 200 .
As shown in FIG. 83, the main board case 200 is a box-shaped case that accommodates the main control board 50 and the integrated main ROM 502 in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner.

A detailed configuration of the main board case 200 and a table attached to the main board case and the included main control board will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 94. FIG.
The performance display monitor 600, the setting display monitor 650, the setting key switch 660, and the RWM clear switch 680 described with reference to FIG. 80 will be described with reference to FIG. 115 and subsequent figures, and will not be described here.
The main board case 200 encloses the main control board 50 so that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 (see FIG. 85(b)) mounted on the main control board 50 can be visually recognized. The main circuit board case 200 is made of a material having optical transparency, such as transparent plastic.
As described above, the lower case piece 210 is combined with the upper case piece 220 to form the enclosing part 581 for enclosing the main control board 50 . The upper case piece 220 is provided on the rear side, which is the integrated main ROM 502 side, in the main board case 200 . The lower case piece 210 is provided on the front side opposite to the integrated main ROM 502 side in the main board case 200 . Note that FIG. 85(b) shows only the integrated main ROM 502 among the electrical components provided on the main control board 50 contained in the transparent main board case 200, and other electrical components are shown. are omitted (the same applies to FIG. 87(a), etc.).

As shown in FIG. 86, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 respectively include control board housing portions 211 and 221 for housing the main control board 50 (see FIG. 83) and a sealing base portion 310 (see FIG. 83) to be described later. 87). The control board housing portions 211 and 221 are provided with substantially rectangular plate portions 211a and 221a, respectively, and protrude from the peripheral edge portions of the plate portions 211a and 221a. It is formed in a shape having flange portions 211b and 221b surrounding the surface.
Further, as shown in FIG. 83, the left portion of the plate portion 211a of the lower case piece 210 is provided with a cylindrical portion 565 extending rearward on the main control board 50 side. A hole portion 566 extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the cylindrical portion 565 . A thread is formed inside the hole 566 . A hole portion 567 is provided at a position facing the cylindrical portion 565 in the main control board 50 .

The main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case piece 210 . More specifically, behind the cylindrical portion 565 of the lower case piece 210, the hole portion 567 of the main control board 50 is arranged. The shaft portion of the screw 769 (see FIG. 85) is inserted from the rear side of the main control board 50 into the hole portion 566 of the cylindrical portion 565 via the hole portion 567 . The thread formed in the hole 567 of the cylindrical portion 565 is combined with the thread formed in the shaft portion of the screw 769 (see FIG. 85(b)). As a result, the main control board 50 is sandwiched between the head of the screw 769 and the rear surface of the cylindrical portion 565 so that the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case piece 210 . That is, the main control board 50 is screwed to the lower case piece 210 side.

As shown in FIG. 86, of the flange portion 211b of the control board housing portion 211, a portion (hereinafter referred to as "male portion") projecting from the plate portion 211a along two long sides of the plate portion 211a is are formed with three L-shaped hooking pieces 211c.
On the other hand, of the flange portion 221b of the control board housing portion 221, the portion projecting from the plate portion 221a along two long sides of the plate portion 221a (hereinafter referred to as the “female portion”) has a double wall shape. An insertion groove portion 221c into which the male portion of the control board housing portion 211 can be inserted is provided between the walls forming the double wall. A hooking piece 221d is formed in each insertion groove 221c.

When the lower case piece 210 to which the main control board 50 is screwed with screws 769 and the upper case piece 220 are combined, the male portion of the flange portion 211b is inserted into the female portion of the flange portion 221b. Then, the control board housing portions 211 and 221 are slid relative to each other in the direction of the arrow α in FIG. 86 along the left-right direction. Then, the hooking piece 211c provided on the male part engages with the hooking piece 221d, so that the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined so as not to come off unless they move in the direction opposite to the arrow α. be
When combined in this manner, the control board housings 211 and 221 form a box-shaped inner envelope 581 that is internally shielded from the outside. The main control board 50 (see FIG. 83) is housed in the encapsulating portion 581 . Therefore, the possibility that the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the like are illegally replaced can be suppressed.

The main control board 50 is attached inside the control board housing portion 221 before the control board housing portions 211 and 221 are combined. At this time, an IC or the like mounted on the main control board 50 is attached so as to face the plate portion 221 a of the control board housing portion 221 . Since the plate portion 221a is also made of transparent plastic, even if the main control board 50 is housed in the main board case 200, the electronic components such as the integrated main ROM 502 mounted on the main control board 50 will remain intact. This is so that it can be checked from the outside through the plate portion 221a whether or not it has been illegally replaced. As shown in FIG. 80, in this embodiment, when the main board case assembly 200A including the main board case 200 is attached to the game board 4, the inside of the main board case 200 is passed through the upper case piece 220 from the back side of the game machine 1. The electronic components mounted on the main control board 50 can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 86, sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided at the right end portions of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, respectively. As shown in FIG. 87, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are provided with a first screw-stopping piece 91 and a second screw-stopping piece 92 above the sealing portions 212 and 222, respectively.
When the control board storage sections 211 and 221 are slid and combined, the sealing base section 310 is formed by the sealing sections 212 and 222 at the longitudinal ends of the sealing body 300 that combines them.
As shown in FIG. 85, when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing body 300 by covering the sealing base portion 310, a first screwing piece 91 and a second screwing piece 91 are attached to the ends of the sealing body 300 in the longitudinal direction. In addition to the piece 92, a third screwing piece 93 provided on the cap 240 overlaps to form a screwing portion 90 for screwing.

As shown in FIG. 86 , the sealing portions 212 and 222 protrude rightward from the right end portions of the control board housing portions 211 and 221 . The sealing portions 212 and 222 are formed to have the same height in the horizontal direction and the same width in the vertical direction.
Long groove portions 212a and 222a are formed in the respective sealing portions 212 and 222 along the horizontal direction. Two parallel grooves 222a are formed in the left-right direction in the sealing portion 222 at a predetermined interval, and one groove 212a is formed in the sealing portion 212 in the left-right direction.
As shown in FIG. 87, when the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined as described above, the sealing portions 212 and 222 are attached to the right portions of the combined control board housing portions 211 and 221. A base portion 310 is formed.
In the sealing base portion 310, the sealing portions 212 and 222 are arranged parallel to each other at a constant interval, and an inserting/removing space 310a (see FIG. 87) is formed between the surfaces of the sealing portions 212 and 222 facing each other. be.

As shown in FIG. 86, the unsealing prohibition seal 250 is used as means for sealing the main circuit board case 200, and proves that it is a genuine product issued by an organization or the like having authentication qualifications. .
The unsealable seal 250 is made of an easy-to-cut material such as paper with an adhesive surface on one side, and has a plurality of cuts. As will be described later, for example, a hologram, a QR code (registered trademark), and the like are printed on the unsealable seal 250 . The unsealing prohibition seal 250 is also printed with the words "unsealing prohibited".
The cutting member 230 is formed in a shape having a base portion 230 a , a pair of knob portions 61 and a cutting portion 64 . A base portion 230a serving as the base of the cutting member 230 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. A cut portion 64 is formed on one of the two long sides of the base portion 230a. The cutting portion 64 is a portion where the tip of the base portion 230a is formed into a blade shape. The gripping portions 61 are provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the base portion 230a, and are formed in a shape that is bent as a whole. A left end portion of the knob portion 61 is referred to as a free end portion 61a.

The cap 240 is formed in a size that can be put on the sealing base portion 310 to cover the entire sealing base portion 310 and is detachably attached to the sealing base portion 310 .
The cap 240 includes a bowl-shaped cap body 241 that covers the sealing base portion 310 and a third screw-fastening piece 93 formed at one longitudinal end of the cap body 241 . A protrusion 82 is formed on the inner surface of the cap main body 241 at a position where the free end portion 61a of the knob portion 61 of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/removal space 310a is caught when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing base portion 310. is provided. A groove portion 86 is formed on the inner side surface of the cap main body 241 .
The cutting member 230 is inserted into the insertion/removal space 310a (see FIG. 87) of the sealing base portion 310. As shown in FIG. After that, the unsealing prohibition seal 250 is attached. Furthermore, when the cap 240 is put on the sealing base portion 310, the groove portion 86 fits into a portion of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/removal space 310a. Also, the projection 82 engages with the free end 61a of the knob 61 of the cutting member 230. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 85, when the cap 240 is put on the sealing base portion 310 as described above, the third screw-stopping piece 93 is connected to the first screw-stopping piece 91 of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220. The second screw-stopping piece 92 is overlapped with the combination to form a screw-stopping portion 90 for screwing. When the crimping member 94 is driven into the screwing portion 90, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220 and the cap 240 are fixed to each other.
When unsealing the main substrate case 200 , the crimping member 94 is removed and the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion 310 . The same applies when the main board case 200 is unsealed.
Cutting member 230 and cap 240 are integrated. Therefore, when the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion 310, the cutting member 230 is also removed from the sealing base portion 310 at the same time. Then, the unsealable seal 250 is irreparably damaged by the cutting portion 64 or the like.

The identification display 520 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, identification marks 520 are attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240. FIG.
The identification display 520 is a display containing information about the gaming machine 1 . In the following description, the identification display 520 provided on the main control board 50 is referred to as identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the integrated main ROM 502 is referred to as identification display 522. FIG. The identification mark 520 provided on the upper case piece 220 is called identification mark 523 , and the identification mark 520 provided on the lower case piece 210 is called identification mark 524 .
The identification mark 520 provided on the cap 240 is called an identification mark 525 .

As shown in FIG. 83, the identification display 521 is displayed on the upper part of the back surface of the main control board 50 by silk printing. The identification display 521 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. Identification 522 is affixed to integrated main ROM 502 by engraving. The identification display 522 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information.
Identification marks 523, 524, and 525 attached to the main board case 200 are information identification portions for displaying specific information. The identification mark 524 is formed on the upper right portion of the front surface of the lower case piece 210 by imprinting with a mold for manufacturing the lower case piece 210 (see FIG. 87).
The identification mark 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 240 by imprinting with the mold for manufacturing the cap 240 . A display mode of the identification display 523 will be described later.

Identifications 521 - 525 are related to each other and include at least the same identification 529 . In this embodiment, as an example, the identification display 521 is a character string "ABCD01", and the identification display 522 is a character string "ABCD02". The identification display 523 is a character string of "ABCD03", and the identification display 524 is a character string of "ABCD04". The identification display 525 is a character string of "ABCD05". The same identification 529 among the identifications 521 to 525 is "ABCD". The identification display 529 is, for example, a display corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, and the like. In this embodiment, as an example, in "ABCD", "AB" represents the manufacturer name and "CD" represents the model name.
In the identification displays 521 to 525, the maker name itself is displayed such as "AA Company" in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 in FIG. may Also, instead of displaying the model name as "CD" included in "ABCD", the model name itself may be displayed like "CR Aiu" in identification displays 1595 and 1596 in FIG. In addition, the identification indications 521 to 525 may indicate the model, such as the identification indications 1595 and 1596 in FIG. In this case, the same identification display among the identification displays 521 to 525 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA company".

In the following description, the surface of the upper case piece 220 that forms the inside of the main board case 200 is referred to as an inner surface 532 . A surface of the upper case piece 220 that forms the outside of the main board case 200 is called an outer surface 531 . As shown in FIGS. 82(c), 85(c), and 87, the outer surface 531 is provided with a position display portion 541. As shown in FIGS. The position display portion 541 is a portion that displays the position to which the identification display 523 is provided. The position display portion 541 is provided in a portion different from the portion overlapping the integrated main ROM 502 in the main substrate case 200 . More specifically, the position display portion 541 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the rear side, and is provided at the lower right portion of the upper case piece 220 . The integrated main ROM 502 is provided on the left side of the position display section 541 when viewed from the rear side. The position display portion 541 is a concave portion recessed toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 85(b), a seal portion 542 made of a light transmissive material is attached to the position display portion 541. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the seal portion 542 is assumed to be transparent as an example.
A printed portion 797 is printed on the seal body (base portion) of the seal portion 542 .
For all seals attached to all circuit board cases to be described later, printing (printing) is performed on the adhesive seal body (base part), or writable on the seal body (base part). They are common in that an underlayer is formed.
In this embodiment, as an example, the printing unit 797 is the identification display 523 .
Since the identification display 523 is printed on the seal portion 542 , the identification display 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 . The seal portion 542 is arranged across at least a portion of the plurality of electronic components 595 in the main board case 200 . In other words, the seal portion 542 is arranged so as to overlap the plurality of electronic components 595 in the main substrate case 200 when viewed from the rear. Note that FIG. 85(b) shows a part of the plurality of electronic components 595, and actually other electronic components (see FIG. 83) are also present. The identification display 523 of the upper case piece 220 is displayed at such an angle that the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. In this embodiment, the identification mark 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 does not hinder the visibility of the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 . Incidentally, as in the case of the seal portion 1561 (see FIG. 94) in the modified example to be described later, when the main circuit board case 200 is at a predetermined angle, the identification display 523 may overlap the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502. . In this embodiment, the identification mark 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 does not hinder the visibility of the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 .

As described above, the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is formed. In this embodiment, a main board case 200 that encloses the main control board 50 is provided. As shown in FIGS. 82, 83, 85, and 87, the main circuit board case 200 is provided with a position display portion 541, which is a portion for displaying the position where the identification mark 523 is provided. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark 523 attached to the main circuit board case 200 as compared with the case where the position display portion 541 is not provided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.
In addition, when manufacturing the game machine 1, the manufacturer can easily grasp the position where the identification display 520 is provided, compared to the case where the position display section 541 is not provided. Therefore, for example, when the seal portion 542 is used and the identification mark 523 is provided by the manufacturer, the possibility that the identification mark 523 is provided at different positions among the plurality of game machines 1 can be reduced. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark 523 attached to the main circuit board case 200 as compared with the case where the position display portion 541 is not provided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Further, the position display portion 541 is formed on the outer surface 531 of the main board case 200 and is a concave portion for positioning the identification display 520 . Since the position display portion 541 which is a concave portion is provided, the position of the position display portion 541 can be easily determined by the inspector compared to the case where the position display portion 541 is displayed on the plane of the main circuit board case 200 by printing or the like. , easy to grasp.
Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark 523 attached to the main circuit board case 200 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.
In addition, the manufacturer can position the identification mark 520 along the concave position mark portion 541 . Therefore, when the manufacturer mass-produces the game machines 1, the identification display 520 can be attached to the same position among the plurality of game machines 1. FIG. Since the identification display 520 is attached to the same position among the plurality of game machines 1, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Further, the position display portion 541 is provided at a portion different from the portion overlapping the integrated main ROM 502 in the main board case 200 . In this case, the possibility that the identification display 523 attached to the position display unit 541 and the integrated main ROM 502 overlap can be reduced. Therefore, the inspector can confirm both the identification display 523 and the integrated main ROM 502 at the same time. Therefore, for example, it is possible to easily discover that the integrated main ROM 502 has been replaced by fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Further, the identification display 523 that is the information identification portion attached to the main board case 200 and the identification display 522 that is the information identification portion attached to the integrated main ROM 502 include at least the same identification display 529 . In addition, the identification display 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 is displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. Further, in this embodiment, the identification mark 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 does not hinder the visibility of the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 . The identification mark 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 is displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. By checking the main circuit board case 200, it is possible to easily confirm that no fraudulent act has been carried out. Also, even if the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM by fraudulent act, it is possible to determine whether the integrated main ROM 502 and the identification mark 529 attached to the main substrate case 200 are the same. , the inspector can easily confirm that a fraudulent act has been carried out. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, an identification display 523 that is an information identification portion attached to the main board case 200, an identification display 522 that is an information identification portion attached to the integrated main ROM 502, and an information identification portion displayed on the main control board 50 A certain identification 521 includes at least the same identification 529 (in this embodiment, the character string "ABCD"). Therefore, the inspector can check the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the main board case 200 to which the same identification mark 529 is attached, and can easily confirm that no fraudulent act has been carried out. Moreover, even if at least one of the main control board 50 and the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced with another main control board 50 and the integrated main ROM 502 by fraud, the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the main board case 200 are By judging whether or not the identification marks 529 attached to the . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

The main board case 200 encloses the main control board 50 so that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 can be visually recognized. Since the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are visible, it is possible to easily determine whether or not a device other than the main control board 50 is connected to the connectors 771 to 776 fraudulently. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, since the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are fluorescent, they are easier for the inspector to visually recognize than when they are not fluorescent. Therefore, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device other than the main control board 50 is connected to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 fraudulently. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

A plurality of detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are provided. Therefore, it is easier for the inspector to check the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 than when there is only one detection signal connector. Therefore, for example, it is possible to easily determine whether or not a device other than the main control board 50 is connected to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 fraudulently. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
A first signal pin 582 included in the integrated main ROM 502 is arranged so as to be visible through the main board case 200 . Since the first signal pin 582 is visible, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device other than the main control board 50 is connected to the first signal pin 582 fraudulently. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Also, the second signal pins 583 included in the plurality of electronic components 595 are arranged so as to be visible through the main board case 200 . Since the second signal pin 583 is visible, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the main control board 50 is connected to the second signal pin 583 fraudulently. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

The main control board 50 is screwed to the lower case piece 210 side with screws 769 (see FIG. 85(b)). Therefore, compared with the case where the main control board 50 is not fixed with screws, it is difficult to illegally replace the main control board 50 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.
Also, the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210 are slid and combined with each other. For this reason, even if a person who tries to commit fraud simply tries to separate the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210 in order to separate the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210 cannot be separated. Lower case piece 210 is difficult to separate. Therefore, it is difficult to illegally replace the main control board 50 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications are possible. In each modified example below, the same reference numerals are used to denote the configurations corresponding to the configurations of the above-described embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Although the position display portion 541 is a concave portion, it is not limited to this. For example, as will be described later, the position display portion 541 may be a convex portion.

88 to 90 are diagrams showing modifications of the position display section provided on the main board case.
FIG. 88 shows an arrow-direction cross-section at the position of line AA shown in FIG. 85 in the upper case piece 220 of the board case according to the modification of the main board case 200 . As shown in FIG. 88, the position display portion 541 is a protrusion formed on the outer surface 531 of the upper case piece 220 and protrudes rearward. An identification mark 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 by a seal portion 542 .
Further, although the position display portion 541 is provided on the outer surface 531 of the upper case piece 220, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position display portion 541 may be provided on the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220 .

FIG. 89 shows a cross section of the upper case piece 220 of the board case according to the modification of the main board case 200 taken along line AA shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 89, the position display portion 541 is a concave portion formed in the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220 and concaved rearward. An identification mark 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 by a seal portion 542 . Note that the identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542 . Therefore, an inspector can check the identification display 523 from the rear side of the main circuit board case 200 through the transparent upper case piece 220 .

FIG. 90 shows an arrow-direction cross section at the position of line AA shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 90, the position display portion 541 is a convex portion formed on the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220 and protrudes forward. An identification mark 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 by a seal portion 542 . Note that the identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542 . Therefore, the inspector can confirm the identification display 523 from the rear side of the board case through the transparent upper case piece 220 .
As described above, the position display portion 541 is formed on the inner surface 532 or the outer surface 531 of the main circuit board case 200 and is a projection or recess for positioning the identification display 520 . Since the position display part 541 which is a convex part and a concave part is provided, for example, compared to the case where the position display part 541 is displayed on the plane of the main circuit board case 200 by printing or the like, the inspector can easily see the position of the identification display 520. is easy to grasp. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark 520 attached to the main substrate case 200 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the manufacturer can position the identification mark 520 along the position mark portion 541, which is a projection or a recess. Therefore, when the manufacturer mass-produces the game machines 1 , the identification display 520 can be attached to the same position among the plurality of game machines 1 . Since the identification marks 520 are attached at the same positions among the plurality of game machines 1, the inspector can easily confirm the identification marks 520. FIG. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.
Also, the plurality of members enclosing the main control board 50 may not include some of the upper case piece 220 , the lower case piece 210 and the cap 240 . Moreover, the plurality of members may further include members different from the upper case piece 220 , the lower case piece 210 and the cap 240 .

Further, although the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the plurality of members are provided with the identification marks 520, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least two of the main control board 50 and the plurality of members may be provided with associated identification marks 520 . For example, the identification mark 525 may not be attached to the cap 240 included in the plurality of members. Further, the lower case piece 210 included in the plurality of members may not have the identification mark 524 attached. Further, the identification mark 523 may not be attached to the upper case piece 220 included in the plurality of members. The inspector can check the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the main control board 50 and the plurality of members, and can easily check whether or not fraud has been committed. For example, even if the main control board 50 is replaced with another control board due to fraudulent activity, whether the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the main control board 50 and the plurality of members are related. By judging whether or not, the inspector can easily confirm that a fraudulent act has been carried out. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the identification mark 520 may be attached to at least two of the main control board 50 , the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210 . In this case, the inspector checks the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the main control board 50, the upper case piece 220, and the lower case piece 210 to easily determine whether or not fraudulent activity has occurred. can be confirmed. For example, even if the main control board 50 is replaced with another control board due to fraud, the identification attached to at least two of the main control board 50, the upper case piece 220, and the lower case piece 210 is By determining whether display 520 is relevant, the inspector can easily confirm that fraud has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the identification mark 520 may be attached to at least the upper case piece 220 and the integrated main ROM 502 . In this case, the inspector can check at least the upper case piece 220 and the identification display 520 attached to the integrated main ROM 502, and can easily check whether or not fraud has been committed. For example, even if the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM by fraudulent activity, it is possible to inspect by determining whether or not at least the upper case piece 220 and the identification mark 520 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 are related. A person can easily confirm that fraud has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.
Also, the identification marks 520 may be related to each other. For example, the identification indications 520 may all be the same identification indication (for example, all "ABCD01" etc.). Also, the identification indications 520 may be different indications, and the same identification indications 529 may not be included. The content of the identification display 520 is not limited as long as it can be confirmed by the inspector. Also, the identification display 520 may not be a character string. For example, identifying indicia 520 may be various markings. Also, the manner in which the identification mark 520 is attached is not limited. For example, not only the identification mark 521 but all of the identification marks 521 to 525 may be printed and added to the seal portion. Also, the seal portion may not be transparent. Also, all of the identification marks 523 to 525 may be stamped by a mold for manufacturing the main board case 200 .

In the present embodiment, the position display portion 541, which is a sticking position mark indicating the sticking position of the seal portion 542, can take the following forms.
That is, the position display portion 541 is a mark that surrounds the entire circumference of the seal portion 542 on the same surface or the back surface of the upper case surface to which the seal portion 542 is attached, and This is the mark on the L-shaped side.
The position display portion 541 is a linear convex portion provided so as to surround the seal portion 542 .
The position display portion 541 is a linear concave portion provided so as to surround the seal portion 542 on the same plane as the seal portion 542 .
The position display portion 541 is a linear convex portion provided so as to surround the seal portion 542 on the back surface of the seal portion 542 .

The position display portion 541 is a linear concave portion provided so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 542 on the back surface of the seal portion 542 .
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear projection provided so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portion 542 on the same plane as the seal portion 542 .
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear concave portion provided so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portion 542 on the same surface as the seal portion 542 .
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear projection and recess provided so as to surround a predetermined corner on the back surface of the seal portion 542 .
The position display portion 541 is a position mark provided to surround the seal portion 542 and is neither a protrusion nor a recess.

Also, the identification mark 520 may be formed inside the material of the main board case 200 .
91 and 92 are diagrams showing a modification in which an identification mark is formed on the main board case.
The modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG.
In the main circuit board case shown in FIG. 91, the portion where the identification display 523 is displayed is called an identification display portion 1390. As shown in FIG. Also, a portion outside the identification display portion 1390 is referred to as an outer portion 1391 . As shown in FIG. 92 , the identification display portion 1390 protrudes rearward from the outer portion 1391 . Therefore, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 is greater than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391 .
The identification display 523 is formed inside a member forming the identification display portion 1390 (the material of the upper case piece 220 in this embodiment). The identification display 523 is divided into a plurality of (four in this embodiment) layers 1381 , 1382 , 1383 , and 1384 in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) in the identification display portion 1390 .
Character 1371 of “A” of identification display 523 is formed in hierarchy 1381 . The letter “B” 1372 is formed in hierarchy 1382 . The letter “C” 1373 is formed in hierarchy 1383 . The letter “D” 1374 is formed in hierarchy 1384 . A “0” character 1375 is formed in hierarchy 1382 . Character 1376 of “3” is formed in hierarchy 1383 .

The method of forming the identification display 523 inside the member forming the identification display portion 1390 is not limited. Identification 523 may be formed, for example, by 3D laser engraving. 3D laser engraving is a technique of condensing a laser and forming fine cracks of, for example, 100 microns at intervals of, for example, 0.08 mm to 0.016 mm inside the material of the main substrate case 200 . By forming a plurality of cracks, an identification mark 523 is formed inside the main substrate case 200 .
In this embodiment, the identification display 523 is formed inside the member forming the identification display portion 1390 . Therefore, the identification mark 523 is less likely to be removed than, for example, when the identification mark 523 is entirely formed on the outer surface 531 or the inner surface 532 of the main circuit board case 200 . Therefore, the occurrence of fraud can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced. Also, if the identification mark 523 is removed by fraud, the main circuit board case shown in FIGS. 91 and 92 is damaged. Therefore, the inspector can easily discover fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

The identification display 523 is divided into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction in the identification display portion 1390 . Therefore, the identification display 523 is less likely to be removed than when the identification display 523 is formed on only one layer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.
91 and 92, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 is greater than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391. As shown in FIG. In this case, when an unauthorized person attempts to remove the identification mark 520, the main circuit board case 200 needs to be cut deeper than when L1 is equal to or less than L2. For this reason, the main board case shown in FIGS. 91 and 92 is likely to be damaged. Therefore, the inspector can easily discover fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.
It should be noted that the identification display 523 may not be divided into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction in the identification display portion 1390 . For example, the identification mark 523 may be formed only on one layer. Further, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 may be less than or equal to the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391 . In addition, although the identification display 523 has been described, the identification displays 524, 525, etc., and the identification display 520 provided on the main substrate case in FIGS. 91 and 92 are similarly formed inside the main substrate case in FIGS. may be

Also, various seals may be attached to the main board case 200 in addition to the seal portion 542 and the like. In addition, the contents displayed on the printed portion (for example, the printed portion 797) provided on various stickers such as the sticker portion 542 are not limited.

FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a modification of the main board case.
The performance display monitor 600, the setting display monitor 650, the setting key switch 660, and the RWM clear switch 680 will be described with reference to FIG. 115 and subsequent figures, and will not be described here.
For example, in addition to the seal portion 542, a seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to the main substrate case according to the modification shown in FIG. In FIG. 93, members having the same configuration as in the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The seal portion 1560 is attached to the upper part of the upper case piece 220 of the main circuit board case 200 at the central portion in the left-right direction. The seal portion 1561 is attached to the upper left portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200 . The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a light-transmissive material, and are transparent as an example in this embodiment. Each of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is arranged across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 83). In FIG. 93, illustration of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 83) positioned in front of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is omitted.

A printed portion 1571 is printed on the seal portion 1560 . The printing section 1571 has a plurality of areas 1575 . The printing portion 1571 is colored, and has a white background as an example in this embodiment. Plurality of areas 1575 includes code portion 1572 , information display portion 1573 , and entry area 1570 . The seal portion 1560 is provided so that the print portion 1571 , the code portion 1572 , the information display portion 1573 , and the entry area 1570 do not overlap the integrated main ROM 502 .
Cord portion 1572 is provided at the upper left portion of seal portion 1560 . Code portion 1572 includes predetermined information. The code portion 1572 is a portion where information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), a bar code, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) region. there is In this embodiment, as an example, the code section 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code portion 1572 is associated with, for example, information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as “other device”). For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code portion 1572, is read by a camera provided in a mobile information terminal or the like. The information portable terminal uses the URL to access the other device via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the information portable terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 50 (for example, the name of the store where the game machine 1 was delivered), and whether or not the game machine 1 has been disposed of. etc. is included. This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 and information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded.

The information display portion 1573 contains various information. The information display portion 1573 may include information similar to the identification display 529, for example. In this embodiment, as an example, in the information display section 1573, a character string “EF001” is printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. The character string is, for example, the management number of the main control board 50 . With this management number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from the information associated with the management number held by the manufacturer. Note that the character string of the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model number, and the like. Also, the rectangular region of the information display portion 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code portion 1572 are connected in the horizontal direction.

As an example, the entry areas 1570 are provided in three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, for a total of six. The entry area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) background. Above the entry area 1570 on the upper left is printed in black as "Opener". Above the entry area 1570 on the upper right, "Date of opening" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed to the left of the upper left writing area 1570 . A circle 2 is printed to the left of the entry area 1570 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed to the left of the lower left writing area 1570 .
For example, when the inspector opens the main board case 200, the inspector writes the name of the inspector in the entry area 1570 on the left side, and the date of opening the main board case 200 in the entry area 1570 on the right side. . It should be noted that the inspector may enter in the entry area 1570 the date and the like when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was tampered with.

The seal portion 1560 has a viewing portion 1574 for viewing the electronic component 595 . Peeping portions 1574 are provided between a plurality of regions 1575 . The viewing portion 1574 has optical transparency. In this embodiment, viewing portion 1574 is formed by an unprinted portion of seal portion 1560 and is transparent. In this embodiment, a viewing portion 1574 extending in the horizontal direction is provided between the writing areas 1570 of three lines in the vertical direction. Between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged in the left and right direction and the upper two entry areas 1570, a viewing portion 1574 extending in the left and right direction is provided. A viewing portion 1574 extending in the vertical direction is provided between the writing areas 1570 in two columns in the horizontal direction.

Also, the seal portion 1561 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed. In the present embodiment, the portion on which these pieces of information are printed is also called a printing portion 1563 . Specific information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is referred to as identification display 1595 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".

A seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502 . The seal portion 1562 is pasted on the left side of the identification display 523 “ABCD02” of the integrated main ROM 502 . Seal portion 1562 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the seal portion 1562 is printed with the model name “CR AIU GH101” and the manufacturer name “AA Company” as predetermined information. Specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as identification display 1596 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".

Moreover, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1562 are displayed including at least the same identification marks 1595 and 1596 . In the present embodiment, the species name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" in the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are all the same, but it is sufficient that some of them are the same.
A QR code (registered trademark) indicating information specified by the identification display 1596 may be displayed on the seal portion 1562 .
Although the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are attached to the main board case 200 and the integrated main ROM 502, they may be attached to other members. For example, the identification indications 1595 and 1596 may be included and displayed on the main control board 50 .

As described above, in the present embodiment, the seal portions 542, 1560, 1561 are arranged across at least part of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 83). By confirming the positional relationship with the component 595, the inspector can determine whether or not the main control board 50 has been tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Also, since an area 1575 is provided, the inspector fills in the name of the inspector and the date when the main substrate case 200 was opened in the area 1575 (more specifically, the entry area 1570). be able to. In addition, the inspector can enter in the area 1575 the date when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was tampered with. Also, since the peeping portion 1574 is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than when only the region 1575 is provided. Therefore, it becomes easier for the inspector to check the characters or the like written in the area 1575 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

Moreover, since the viewing portion 1574 is provided, the inspector can check the electronic component 595 through the viewing portion 1574 . Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 595 has been tampered with, as compared with the case where the viewing portion 1574 is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Also, the code portion 1572 is provided at a position not overlapping the integrated main ROM 502 . Therefore, the inspector can easily check the integrated main ROM 502 . Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Also, the code portion 1572 is associated with information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 . This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 using the code portion 1572 . Therefore, the inspector can check the delivery destination information and easily determine whether or not there has been fraudulent installation of the main control board 50 of a different delivery destination. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

A seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal portion 1562. FIG. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm that the integrated main ROM 502 has been illegally replaced by checking the seal portion 1562 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
In addition, since at least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed on the seal portion 1561, the inspector can easily grasp at least one of the model name and manufacturer name. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name, and can easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Note that the shape of the integrated main ROM 502 is not limited. As shown in FIG. 85, the integrated main ROM 502 in the above embodiment has a plate-like body portion 580 extending vertically and horizontally. However, the body portion 580 may extend in the front, rear, left, and right directions. In this case, the first signal pin may extend forward and be electrically connected to the main control board 50 . Further, when the body portion 580 extends in the front, back, left, and right directions, the predetermined information displayed on the seal portion 1591 may be displayed on the top surface or the bottom surface of the body portion 580 .
Various information displayed on the seal portions 542, 1560, and 1561 may be displayed at an angle such that the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized.
For example, FIG. 94 is a view of the seal portion 1561 and the integrated main ROM 502 viewed obliquely from above. In FIG. 94, illustration of members other than the seal portion 1561 and the integrated main ROM 502 is omitted. In this case, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 overlaps the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 . That is, FIG. 94 is a view of the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 viewed from an angle that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 . However, as shown in FIG. 93, when viewed from the rear side, the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. That is, FIG. 93 is a view of the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 viewed from an angle where the integrated main ROM 502 mounting location can be visually recognized. In this way, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is displayed at such an angle that the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. Although the seal portion 1561 has been described as an example, the various information displayed on the other seal portions 542 and 1560 (for example, the information of the identification display 523) has an angle at which the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. should be displayed in

(Board structure of main control board)
The configuration (layout) of the main control board housed in the main board case of the present embodiment is not limited to that described above.
95A and 95B are diagrams for explaining another configuration of the main control board according to the present embodiment, and FIG. (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board.
96A and 96B are diagrams showing the configuration of the printed circuit board used for the main control board, FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a solder surface (rear surface) of a printed circuit board; FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 96(a) and 96(b), the main control board 50 uses a printed wiring board 701 having wiring patterns formed on both sides of the printed board.
In the printed wiring board 701, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, a single-sided mounting method is adopted in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component surface 701a of the printed wiring board 701. FIG.
Furthermore, on the printed wiring board 701, various electronic components such as an insertion mounting type (through hole mounting type) resistor R, a capacitor C, a transistor Tr, an IC, and a connector CN are mounted in through holes (component insertion holes) formed in the board. The insertion mounting method is adopted.
For this reason, as shown in FIG. 96, a printed wiring board 701 is provided with through holes (component insertion holes) 702 for inserting leads of various electronic components. In this case, connection electrodes (connection lands) 703 are provided around the through holes 702 on the solder surface 701b side of the printed wiring board 701 .

The connection electrodes 703 are electrodes for connecting, for example, by soldering the leads of electronic components inserted into the through holes 702 from the component surface 701a side of the printed wiring board 701. When the leads of the electronic components are connected by soldering, the electronic components are connected. The component and the wiring pattern on the board are electrically connected, and the electronic component is mechanically held.
That is, the main control board 50 is composed of a printed wiring board 701 having through holes 702 into which the leads of the insertion mount type electronic component can be inserted.

97A and 97B are diagrams showing the main board case of the present embodiment in which the main control board shown in FIGS. 95 and 96 is housed, (a) showing a perspective view of the assembly, shows a front view of the. Also, FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the main board case including the pedestal.
A seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to the main substrate case shown in FIGS.
82 to 94, identification marks 520 are attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240. FIG.
The identification display 520 is a display containing information about the gaming machine 1 . The identification display 520 provided on the control board 50 is called an identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the integrated main ROM 502 is called an identification display 522. FIG. The identification mark 520 provided on the upper case piece 220 is called identification mark 523 , and the identification mark 520 provided on the lower case piece 210 is called identification mark 524 . The identification mark 520 provided on the cap 240 is called an identification mark 525 .

The identification display 521 is displayed on the upper part of the back surface of the main control board 50 by silk printing. The identification display 521 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. Identification 522 is affixed to integrated main ROM 502 by engraving. The identification display 522 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information.
Identification marks 523, 524, and 525 attached to the main board case 200 are information identification portions for displaying specific information.
The position display portion 541 is, for example, a recess formed in the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220 and is recessed rearward. An identification mark 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 by a seal portion 542 . Note that the identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542 .
The identification mark 524 is formed on the upper right portion of the front surface of the lower case piece 210 by imprinting with a mold for manufacturing the lower case piece 210 (see FIG. 87).
The identification mark 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 240 by imprinting with the mold for manufacturing the cap 240 .
In FIGS. 97 and 98, members having the same configuration as those of the above-described embodiment (particularly, FIGS. 82 to 94) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The seal portion 1560 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided on the lower left side in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main circuit board case 200 . The seal portion 1561 is attached to the position display portion 561 provided on the upper right portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200 .
Both of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a light-transmissive material, and in this embodiment, as an example, they are transparent. Each of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is arranged across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 83). In FIG. 97, illustration of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 83) positioned in front of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is omitted.
In this example, a watermark for anti-counterfeiting is provided on the seal portion main body (base portion) 1560A of the seal portion 1560 .
A "watermark" is, for example, a display that looks different depending on the viewing angle, and can be applied to various types, such as using a hologram, or something that looks different depending on the physical shape. . In general, a seal with a watermark has a lower translucency of the base portion, which is the main body of the seal, compared to a seal without a watermark, resulting in lower visibility through the seal.

A printed portion 1571 is printed on the seal portion 1560 . The printing section 1571 has a plurality of areas 1575 . The printing portion 1571 is colored, and has a white background as an example in this embodiment. Plurality of areas 1575 includes code portion 1572 , information display portion 1573 , and entry area 1570 . Seal portion 1560 is provided so that print portion 1571 , code portion 1572 , information display portion 1573 , and entry area 1570 do not overlap integrated main ROM 502 .

That is, the seal portion 1560 (opener display seal) is provided with an entry area 1570 for entering the person who opened the main circuit board case 200 and the date of opening.
Seal portion 1560 is made of a transparent material. For example, a total of six entry areas 1570 are formed in a black frame with a headline such as "main board control number", with three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the seal portion 1560 is a seal for main board management.
A writing area 1570 is a white background formed on a transparent material and on which writing can be performed with a pen or the like.
Headings such as "opener" and "opening date" are printed in black above the entry area 1570, and circled numbers indicating the number of the entry area are printed on the left side of each entry area.
The transparent material is exposed except for each printing and entry area 1570 (white background), and the electronic components on the main control board 50 can be confirmed through the transparent material.
The seal portion 1560 is affixed at a position where the seal portion 1562 affixed to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 is visible from all angles through a transparent material.
The seal portion 1560 is provided so that the three columns of writing areas 1570 do not overlap the integrated main ROM 502 from all angles.
The entry areas 1570 provided in the seal portion 1560 are arranged in three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, for a total of six, and three sets of "opener" and "opening date" can be entered.

On the other hand, as described above, the main board case 200 has two crimped portions (crimped fastening holes 291, ie, closed portions) (crimped fastening holes 291A and 291B).
That is, the number of crimped portions (closed portions) provided on the main circuit board case 200 is equal to or less than the number of columns provided on the seal portion 1560 affixed to the main circuit board case 200 for opening by and date of opening. . By providing more entry fields than the actual number of openings, it is possible to deal with typos and other errors, and it is possible to respond flexibly compared to the case where the number of crimped parts and the entry fields are the same. is.
In the main control board 50 shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the ROM 502 has a plate-like main body 580 and a plurality of first signal pins 582, as described above.
However, the integrated main ROM 502 shown in FIGS. 97 and 98 is erected so that its main surface is orthogonal to the board surface of the main control board 50 .
A seal portion 1562, which will be described later, is attached to the main surface orthogonal to the substrate surface.

The contents displayed on the seal portion 1560 will be described in detail below.
Cord portion 1572 is provided at the upper left portion of seal portion 1560 . Code portion 1572 includes predetermined information. The code part 1572 is a part where information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), a bar code, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. there is In this embodiment, as an example, the code section 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code portion 1572 is associated with, for example, information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as “other device”). For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code portion 1572, is read by a camera provided in a mobile information terminal or the like. The information portable terminal uses the URL to access the other device via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the information portable terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 50 (for example, the name of the store where the game machine 1 was delivered) and whether the game machine 1 has been discarded. It contains information such as This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 and information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded.

The information display portion 1573 contains various information. The information display portion 1573 may include information similar to the identification display 529, for example. In this embodiment, as an example, in the information display section 1573, a character string “EF001” is printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. The character string is, for example, the management number of the main control board 50 . Based on the management number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from the information associated with the management number held by the manufacturer. Note that the character string of the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model number, and the like. Also, the rectangular region of the information display portion 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code portion 1572 are connected in the horizontal direction.

As an example, the entry areas 1570 are provided in three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, for a total of six. The entry area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) background. Above the entry area 1570 on the upper left is printed in black as "Opener". Above the entry area 1570 on the upper right, "date of opening" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed to the left of the upper left writing area 1570 . A circle 2 is printed to the left of the entry area 1570 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed to the left of the lower left writing area 1570 .
For example, when the inspector opens the main board case 200, the inspector writes the name of the inspector in the entry area 1570 on the left side, and the date of opening the main board case 200 in the entry area 1570 on the right side. . It should be noted that the inspector may enter in the entry area 1570 the date, etc., when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was tampered with.

The seal portion 1560 has a viewing portion 1574 for viewing the electronic components 595 on the main control board 50 . Peeping portions 1574 are provided between a plurality of regions 1575 . The viewing portion 1574 has optical transparency. In this embodiment, viewing portion 1574 is formed by an unprinted portion of seal portion 1560 and is transparent. In this embodiment, a viewing portion 1574 extending in the horizontal direction is provided between the writing areas 1570 of three lines in the vertical direction. Between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged horizontally and the two entry areas 1570 on the upper side, a viewing portion 1574 extending in the horizontal direction is provided. A viewing portion 1574 extending in the vertical direction is provided between the entry areas 1570 in two columns in the horizontal direction.

Also, the seal portion 1561 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, as specific information, at least one of model name, manufacturer name, rated voltage and total capacity is printed. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed. In the present embodiment, the portion on which these pieces of information are printed is also called a printing portion 1563 . Specific information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is referred to as identification display 1595 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" including the model, the manufacturer name "AA company", the rated voltage and the total capacity (AC24V±5%, 250VA).
In addition, in the part where the model name is displayed, a background is formed with a conspicuous color such as red or yellow against a transparent material, and the model name is displayed in white letters on the background.

A seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502 . The seal portion 1562 is pasted on the left side of the identification display 523 “ABCD02” of the integrated main ROM 502 . Seal portion 1562 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the seal portion 1562 is printed with the model name “CR AIU GH101” and the manufacturer name “AA Company” as predetermined information. Specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as identification display 1596 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".
A QR code (registered trademark) indicating information specified by the identification display 1596 may be displayed on the seal portion 1562 .
Moreover, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1562 are displayed including at least the same identification marks 1595 and 1596 . In the present embodiment, the species name "CR AIU", the model "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA Company" in the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are all the same, but it is sufficient that some of them are the same.
Although the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are attached to the main board case 200 and the integrated main ROM 502, they may be attached to other members. For example, the identification indications 1595 and 1596 may be included and displayed on the main control board 50 .

As described above, in this embodiment, the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are arranged across at least a portion of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 83). By confirming the positional relationship, the inspector can determine whether or not the main control board 50 has been tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
In addition, since a region 1575 is provided in the seal portion 1560, the inspector can enter the name of the inspector and the date when the main circuit board case 200 was opened in the region 1575 (more specifically, the entry region 1570). can be filled in. In addition, the inspector can enter in the area 1575 the date when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was tampered with. Also, since the peep portion 1574 is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than the case where only the region 1575 is provided. Therefore, it becomes easier for the inspector to check the characters or the like written in the area 1575 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Moreover, since the seal portion 1560 is provided with the viewing portion 1574 , the inspector can check the electronic component 595 through the viewing portion 1574 . Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 595 has been tampered with, compared to the case where the peep portion 1574 is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.
Also, the code portion 1572 is provided at a position not overlapping the integrated main ROM 502 . Therefore, the inspector can easily check the integrated main ROM 502 . Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the code portion 1572 is associated with information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 . This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 using the code portion 1572 . Therefore, the inspector can confirm the information on the delivery destination and easily judge whether or not the main control board 50 of a different delivery destination has been tampered with. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
A seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal portion 1562. FIG. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm that the integrated main ROM 502 is illegally replaced by checking the seal portion 1562 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
In addition, since at least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed on the seal portion 1561, the inspector can easily grasp at least one of the model name and manufacturer name. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name, and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

Note that the shape of the integrated main ROM 502 is not limited. As shown in FIG. 85, the integrated main ROM 502 in the above embodiment has a plate-like body portion 580 extending vertically and horizontally. However, the body portion 580 may extend in the front, rear, left, and right directions. In this case, the first signal pin may extend forward and be electrically connected to the main control board 50 . Further, when the body portion 580 extends in the front, back, left, and right directions, the predetermined information displayed on the seal portion 1591 may be displayed on the top surface or the bottom surface of the body portion 580 .
Also, various information displayed on the seal portions 1560 and 1561 may be displayed at an angle that allows the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 to be visually recognized.
The main board case 200, especially the upper case piece 220, does not have a vent.
The main board case 200 has date marks formed on the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 .
The date mark is a mark for lot management added during manufacturing (molding) of the case, which is a plastic molded product.
As a feature of the present embodiment, a component having a height such that the ROM identification seal (ROM seal/seal portion 1562) cannot be visually recognized should not be provided in the vicinity of the main ROM.

Figures 99(a) to (d) are schematic diagrams showing the procedure for assembling the cutting member, the unsealing seal, and the cap to the sealing base, centering on the projecting piece of the upper case piece, and Figure 99(e) 100 is an exploded perspective view showing the state immediately before the cutting member, the unsealing seal, and the cap are assembled to the sealing base portion 310, and FIG. 102 is a perspective view showing a state in which a cap is attached to the unsealable seal; FIG. 103 shows a state in which the unsealable seal is broken by removing the cap; It is a perspective view, and FIGS. 104(a) and (b) are a surface view and a partially enlarged view of an example of an unsealable seal.
The cutting member 230 shown in FIGS. 99 to 103 has a partially different construction from that shown in FIG. The same applies.

(Seal that prohibits opening)
As means for sealing the main circuit board case 200 having the structure described above, an unsealing prohibition seal 250 shown in FIG. 104(a) is used. The unsealable seal 250 is made of a paper material that can be cut and broken relatively easily, and has security (anti-counterfeiting) printing on the surface and an adhesive layer on the back. there is
Strip-like portions 251 arranged along the upper and lower sides of the surface are identification regions (fine pattern regions) 251 for authenticity identification (anti-counterfeiting) composed of fine components including random microcharacters. is. As means for security other than the identification area 251, a hologram 252, a QR code (registered trademark) 253, and the like are provided.
Random micro-characters are a technique for inserting extremely minute characters into lines or parts of designs. Since microcharacters cannot be duplicated by copiers with low resolution, they are one of the means of confirming the authenticity of reproductions.

FIG. 104(b) is a 10-fold enlarged view of a portion of the identification area (fine pattern area) provided on the unsealing prohibition sticker 250, and "unsealing prohibited" is shown in the pattern consisting of fine circles or dots. Hidden characters such as "security" are described.
By adhering the unsealing prohibition seal 250 across the two case pieces forming the main substrate case, the identification area 251 is always broken when the case is illegally opened. Even if the fraudulent person replaces the ROM and then closes the case body and the cover body again and reconnects the broken parts of the unsealing prohibition seal 250 to restore the appearance to the original state, the identification area (other parts) will not be preserved. By determining with a magnifying glass, it becomes possible to reliably confirm the presence of the fractured portion and the repaired portion.

Fine characters such as random microcharacters cannot be distinguished (read, recognized, or identified) with the naked eye. For example, when individual characters, etc., are very small (1/10 to 1/5 mm), they are difficult to distinguish and read with the naked eye. It is possible to enlarge to a size of about 1 mm that can be distinguished and read by a person who has done it.
The identification area 251 of the unsealing prohibition seal 250 of the present invention is not limited to random microcharacters, and at least a part thereof is difficult to distinguish (read, recognize, and identify) with the naked eye of an observer who has normal vision. It is sufficient if it includes minute (fine) letters, figures, symbols, and/or patterns. By enlarging these minute characters, the observer can distinguish, read, and judge authenticity.
In addition, the phrase "difficult to distinguish with the naked eye" broadly includes the case where the distinction is not impossible with the naked eye but is difficult, and the case where the distinction with the naked eye is impossible.
Needless to say, the method of arranging the identification area 251 on the unsealable seal, its shape, etc. can be changed in various ways.

(main part structure of the main board case)
Next, the main structure of the main circuit board case will be described, focusing on the portion where the unsealing prohibition seal is adhered.
That is, when the main circuit board case 200 is in the closed state as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, it is arranged so as to straddle the edges of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 (sealing base portion 310=unsealable seal adhesion portion). By adhering the unsealing prohibition seal 250 to the opening prohibition seal 250, both case pieces cannot be opened without breaking the unsealing prohibition seal 250.例文帳に追加That is, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are provided with sealing portions 212 and 222 at one end edge in the longitudinal direction, respectively. . That is, both the sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided at substantially the same position on one longitudinal edge of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, so that when the both case pieces are closed, the sealing portions 212 and 222 are closed. Aligned to form a sealing base (untamperable seal bond).

In this embodiment, the unsealable seal adhesion portion (seal adhesion portion) A is composed of both sealing portions 212 and 222, and the cutting member 230 is supported in a state of being sandwiched between the two projecting pieces. The cutting member 230 may be supported (temporarily locked) on the outer surface of one of the protruding pieces, or the unsealing prevention seal adhered portion A may be configured from only one protruding piece, and the one surface of this one protruding piece may A cutting member may be supported.
In other words, the cutting member 230 may be held by at least one of the case pieces (protruding pieces) at the unsealing prevention seal adhered portion.
The substantially plate-shaped cutting member 230 is sandwiched between the sealing portions 212 and 222 (between the edges) of the two lower case pieces 210 and the upper case piece 220 in the closed state.
The front end surface of the unsealable seal adhesion part A (each front end surface of both the sealing parts 212 and 222) constitutes the first adhesion surface A1, and the outer surfaces of the sealing parts 212 and 222 orthogonal to the first adhesion surface A1 are A second adhesive surface A2 is constructed (FIGS. 99 and 100).
A housing space S for housing the cutting member 230 is provided inside the first adhesive surface A1 and the second adhesive surface A2 (FIG. 100).

A first opening O1 communicating with the housing space S is formed on the first bonding surface A1, and a second opening O2 (a guide slit 224) communicating with the housing space S is formed on the second bonding surface A2. ing. In this embodiment, the upper case piece 220 is formed with two second openings O2, and the lower case piece 210 is formed with one second opening O2.
The unsealing prevention seal 250 includes a first seal adhesive portion 250A that covers all or part of the first opening O1 and is adhered to the first adhesive surface A1, and a second adhesive that covers a portion of the second opening O2. and a second seal bond portion 250B bonded to the surface A2 (FIG. 104).

The cap 240 is detachably attached to the outer surface of the sealing base 310 so as to surround (cover) the tamper-proof seal 250 adhered to the outer surface of the sealing base 310 . The cap 240 is sandwiched between a cap body 241 that surrounds the outer surfaces of both protruding pieces (sealing base portion 310) including an unsealable seal 250, and the sealing portions 212 and 222 when attached to the sealing base portion 310. A locking portion 242 (FIG. 85) that elastically engages with the cutting member 230 (locked portion 236) in the closed state, and the cutting member is integrally removed when the cap is removed from the sealing base. By doing so, the unsealing prohibition seal is ruptured and detached.
A tubular crimping member 203A (third screw-stopping piece 93) is provided on one side surface of the cap 240, and as shown in FIGS. When the cap is attached, the center hole of the crimping member 203A communicates with the holes of the crimping member 203B ((first screw stop piece 91, second screw piece 92) provided at corresponding positions of the upper and lower case pieces. The cap is fixed to the upper and lower case pieces by inserting and crimping a crimping pin 94 (FIG. 85).
In the illustrated embodiment, the cap 240 surrounds the entire sealing portion 212, 222 including the unsealable seal, but the cap is sealed so as to surround at least a portion of the unsealable seal. It is sufficient that it is attached to at least a part of the base portion (unsealing prevention seal adhesion portion=cap attachment portion) 310 .

The cutting member 230 intersects the cutting edge (first broken piece) 231 provided at the tip edge in the direction (b) (FIG. 86) in which the cap 240 is separated from the sealing base portion 310 and the direction (b) in which the cap 240 is separated. and a broken piece (second broken piece) 233 projecting in the (orthogonal) direction. One broken piece 233 is provided on the surface of the lower case piece on the side of the sealing portion 212 , and two broken pieces 233 are provided on the surface of the upper case piece on the side of the projecting piece 222 .
One second opening O2 (guide slit 224) for receiving one broken piece 233 is formed in the sealing portion 212 of the lower case piece, and two broken pieces 233 are formed in the projecting piece 222 on the upper case side. Two second openings O2 (guide slits 224) are formed for respectively receiving the .
By forming the cutting member 230 as a separate member from each case piece, the shape of the cutting means such as the blade portion 231 can be formed and processed independently and arbitrarily, and a configuration that significantly breaks the unsealing prohibition seal can be achieved. It becomes possible.

(Procedure for assembling each member and procedure for breaking the unsealable seal)
Next, referring to FIG. 101, the procedure for assembling the cutting member 230, the unsealing prevention seal 250, and the cap 240 to the sealing base portion 310 will be described focusing on the projecting piece 222 of the upper case piece.
In this embodiment, the cutting member 230 is configured to be temporarily locked against the inner surface of the projecting piece 222 of the upper case piece. A pair of locking portions (temporary locking portions) 223 are protruded from the inner surface (cutting member supporting portion) of the projecting piece 222, and these locking portions 223 are mounted in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 101(a). The cutting member 230 is configured to engage with and hold down the inner edge portions of two recesses (temporary locking portions) 232 provided at the rear edge of the cutting member 230 . A broken piece 233 is projected from the surface side of the cutting member, and a guide slit 224 protrudes for allowing the passage of the broken piece 233 when the cutting member is attached to the inner surface of the projecting piece 222 in the direction of the arrow. It is formed in strip 222 . Therefore, when the cutting member 230 is moved in the direction of the arrow as shown in FIG. It can be worn while At this time, since the broken piece 233 moves while being fitted in the guide slit 224, it does not become an obstacle during mounting.

By providing the broken pieces 233 on both sides of the cutting member 230 and providing the guide slits 224 in both the sealing portions 212 and 222 as in the present embodiment, the cutting member is separated from the unsealing prohibition seal adhesion portion A together with the cap. At the same time, the unsealable seals adhered to the outer surfaces of both sealing portions 212 and 222 can be broken at the same time.
In this embodiment, a configuration example in which the cutting member supporting portion is provided on the protruding piece 222 on one side of the upper case is shown, but it is also possible to provide a cutting portion supporting portion on the inner surface of the sealing portion 212 on one side of the lower case. be.

Furthermore, the cutting member 230 is provided with elastically deformable claw-like locked portions 236 on both edges in the longitudinal direction (direction orthogonal to the mounting direction). When the cutting member 230 is sandwiched between the sealing portions 212 and 222 (see FIGS. 99(b) and 99(c)), the locked portion 236 is exposed to the outside through the gap between the projecting pieces. It is in. Therefore, the cap and the cutting member can be engaged when the cap is attached to the sealing base. Since the tip edge of the cutting member is also exposed through the gap between the protruding pieces, it is possible to smoothly separate the cutting member from the sealing base together with the cap and to break the unsealing prohibition seal.
After the cutting member 230 is attached to the protruding piece 222 in this way, the lower case piece 210 is attached to the upper case piece 220, and the unsealing prohibition seal 250 is adhered across both the sealing portions 212 and 222. do.

Next, FIG. 99(b) shows the unsealing prevention seal adhered to the sealing base portion in a state where the lower case piece 210 is omitted, and FIGS. showing.
The cap 240 has a projecting locking portion 242 that can be engaged with the locked portion 236 of the cutting member 230 inside the cap body 241, and the cap is attached to the sealing base portion as shown in FIG. 99(c). When attached, each engaging portion 242 elastically engages with the distal end portion of each engaged portion 236 to be temporarily integrated.
In this state, when the cap 240 is detached from the sealing base portion as shown in FIGS. It is pulled out from the gap between the stop portions 212 and 222 . At this time, the blade portion 231 and the broken piece 233 of the cutting member break the unsealable seal. That is, the blade portion 231 is configured to be detachable from the gap (first opening O1) between the sealing portions 212 and 222 to the outside (outside), while the broken piece 233 is provided on the projecting piece 222. Since it is configured to be detachable from the inside of the guide slit 224 to the outside (outside), each part of the unsealing prohibition seal located on the moving path of the blade portion 231 and the broken piece 233 can be broken.
Each broken piece (second broken piece) 233 protrudes from a portion of each second opening O2 that is not covered by the unsealable seal.

In the configuration example of the unsealing prohibition seal shown in FIG. 104, when the unsealing prohibition seal 250 is adhered to both protruding pieces, the identification region 251 composed of random micro-characters is a broken piece (second broken piece) provided on the cutting member 230. 233 travel path. Therefore, the identification area 251 is broken (destroyed) by the breaking piece 233 when the cutting member is removed together with the cap.
When the identification region 251 is provided at a position corresponding to the blade portion 231 on the tip edge of the cutting member, the identification portion is broken by the blade portion 231 (FIG. 103).
In this embodiment, an unsealing prevention seal 250 is adhered to the outer surface of the sealing base portion 310 of the main substrate case so as to straddle the sealing portions 212 and 222 of both case pieces, and the outer surface of the sealing base portion is At this time, the cutting member 230 held between the sealing portions 212 and 222 and the cap 240 are engaged and integrated. Therefore, before the main circuit board case is opened, that is, during the process of removing the cap 240 from the sealing base, the cutting member 230 breaks the unsealing prohibition seal 250 .

Since the cutting member 230 has a jagged blade portion 231 at its tip (the tip in the detachment direction), when the cutting member 230 protrudes outside from the butted position of the two sealing portions 212 and 222, the unsealing prohibition seal is formed. , the first seal bond portion 250A is broken. Therefore, it is possible to know that the main board case has been illegally opened.
Furthermore, the cutting member 230 has a broken piece 233 that protrudes in a direction (one side of the upper case) that intersects the direction in which the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion 310 , and is broken when the cutting member 230 is attached to the protruding piece 222 . The fragment 233 projects from the guide slit 224 provided in the projecting piece 222 of the upper case piece 220 to the surface of the projecting piece 222 . If the unsealing prohibition seal is adhered to the surface of the protruding piece 222 in this state, the broken piece 233 is always in contact with the unsealing prohibition seal 250 and interferes with it. Therefore, when the cutting member moves in the separating direction by separating the cap 240 from the sealing base portion, the broken piece moves along the guide slit 224, thereby breaking the unsealable seal linearly. can. Since the unsealable seal portion (second seal adhesive portion 250B) torn by the broken piece 233 corresponds to the surface of the protruding piece 222, it can be viewed directly from the back side of the gaming machine, preventing fraud. Evidence of what has been done can be easily discovered from this break.
When the main circuit board case is opened by rotating it with respect to the pedestal as shown in FIG. 83, the opposite side of the cap 240 can be visually recognized.

In this embodiment, assuming that the unsealing prohibition seal 250 is adhered across both sealing portions 212 and 222, the cutting member 230 includes a blade portion 231 for cutting the identification region 251 unrecoverably, Although each of the broken pieces 233 is provided to ensure that the trace of breakage is left on the outside, this is only an example, and only the blade portion 231 at the tip or only the broken piece 233 on the other surface may be provided. In particular, if the unsealing prohibition seal 250 is not adhered across both the sealing portions 212 and 222 but is adhered only to the outer surface of one projecting piece, for example, the projecting piece 222 on the upper case side, the cutting member 230 will break. It suffices to provide the segment 233 . In other words, according to the present invention, it is possible to cope with both the case where the unsealing prohibition seal is adhered across both protruding pieces and the case where it is adhered only to one of the protruding pieces.

In the example shown in FIG. 103, when the main circuit board case 200 is opened, the unsealing prohibition seal (unsealing prohibition seal) 250 is broken so that the QR code (registered trademark) 253 cannot be read.
However, it is desirable to configure the blade portion 231 so that the unsealable seal 250 is broken in a state in which the QR code (registered trademark) 253 is readable.

(Payout control board protection case)
Next, the configuration of the payout control board protection case in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be described.
FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the component layout of the payout control base in this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 105, the payout control board 60 includes a one-chip microcomputer (IC chip) 601 that integrates (integrates) a payout CPU 60a, a payout ROM 60b, and a payout RAM 60c; and an error indicator 610 for displaying error information.
The error indicator 610 may consist of one 7-segment liquid crystal or 7-segment LED. The 7-segment liquid crystal is a liquid crystal display device composed of 7 segments that can be individually turned on/off to represent a single number.
A 7-segment LED is an LED display device composed of 7 segments that can be individually turned on/off in order to represent a single numeral.
The error indicator 610 may further include segments for displaying dots in addition to seven segments for displaying numbers, like the performance display monitor 600 and setting display monitor 650 described below.
Not only the error indicator 610 but also the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 described below can use a 7-segment liquid crystal or a 7-segment LED having segments for displaying dots.
Although detailed description is omitted, in the printed wiring board 701 of the payout control board 60, as with the main control board 50, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component surface of the printed wiring board. A single-sided mounting method is used for mounting.

FIG. 106 is a view for explaining the configuration of the payout control board protection case, (a) is a perspective view, (b) is a side view, and (c) is a front view.
107 and 108 are exploded perspective views of the payout control board case.
A payout control board protection case (hereinafter referred to as payout board case 400 ) is composed of an upper case piece 410 and a lower case piece 420 .
As in the case of the main board case 200, the upper case piece 410 and the lower case piece 420 are provided with control board housing portions 411 and 421 for housing the payout control board 60, respectively.
Further, each of the control board housing portions 411 and 421 includes a plate portion formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and a flange portion projecting from the peripheral edge portion of the plate portion and surrounding one side surface of each plate portion. It is formed into a shape that has

Of the flange portion forming the control board housing portion 411 of the upper case piece 410 , a hooking piece 412 formed in an L shape is provided on the portion projecting along two long sides of the upper case piece 410 . are formed by 5 each.
On the other hand, of the flange portion that constitutes the control board housing portion 421 of the lower case piece 420, the portion protruding along the two long sides of the lower case piece is formed in a double-walled shape. An insertion groove portion 422 into which the hooking piece 412 of the upper case piece 410 can be inserted is provided between the walls forming the double wall. A hooking piece 423 is formed in each insertion groove portion 422 .

When the upper case piece 410 and the lower case piece 420 are combined, the hook piece 412 of the upper case piece 410 is inserted into the insertion groove 422 of the lower case piece 420 .
Then, the upper case piece 410 is slid in the direction of arrow α in FIG. Then, the hooking piece 412 is engaged with the hooking piece 423, so that the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined so as not to come off unless they move in the direction opposite to the arrow α.
When combined in this manner, the upper case piece 410 and the lower case piece 420 form a box-shaped inner package portion shielded from the outside by the control board storage portions 411 and 421, and the payout control board 60 is placed in the inner package portion. is stored. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the payout control board 60 and the integrated payout ROM 601 are illegally exchanged.
In addition, a protective cover is arranged below the upper case piece 410 to cover the connecting portion between the internal connector provided on the internal payout control board 60 and the external connector.

In this embodiment, the lower case piece 420 and the upper case 410 are fixed by a crimping member with the payout control board 60 interposed therebetween.
A crimping fastening portion 450 using a crimping member is arranged at an appropriate position along the edge of the dispensing substrate case 400, and by driving the crimping member into the crimping fastening portion 450, the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 are connected. Locked in the closed state. By removing (breaking) the caulking member driven into the fastening hole 451, the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 become openable and detachable.
In the dispensing board case 400 of the present embodiment, two crimping fastening portions are provided (crimping fastening portions 450A and 450B).

An upper fastening piece 455 is provided along the edge of the upper case piece 410 , and a through fastening hole 456 is provided in the upper fastening piece 455 .
A lower fastening piece 455 protrudes from a portion corresponding to the upper fastening piece 455 on the inner surface of the lower case piece 420 . A fastening hole 457 is formed in the lower fastening piece 455 .
When the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 are engaged using the hook pieces 412 and 423 and the insertion groove portion 422, the through fastening hole 456 of the upper fastening piece 455 and the fastening hole 457 of the lower fastening piece are aligned. communicate. By driving a crimping member into the communicating fastening holes (crimping fastening holes), the engagement between the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 cannot be released.
Therefore, it is impossible to access the payout control board 60 housed inside the payout board case.
Only one caulking fastening portion is used to fasten the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 once. After the crimping member is removed and the fastening is adjusted (after the delivery board case 400 is opened), the crimping member is driven into the other remaining crimping fastening hole to fasten again. That is, the dispensing board case of the present embodiment can be opened up to twice.
A position display portion similar to that of the main board case 200 is provided at the lower left side and the lower center of the front surface of the upper case piece 410 .
A seal portion (error display seal) 1565 indicating the content of error display is attached to the lower left position display portion, and the person who opened the dispensed substrate case and the opening date and time are entered in the lower center position display portion. A seal portion (opener display seal) 1566 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 107, the position display portion and seal portions 1565 and 1566 are formed and attached on the outer surface side of the upper case piece 410 , but they are formed and attached on the inner surface side of the upper case piece 410 . good too. This is the same as the seal portions 542 , 1560 , 1561 of the main board case 200 .
The position display section may also be provided on the outer surface side of the upper case piece 410 or on the inner surface side, as described with reference to FIGS.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the position display portion 541, which is a sticking position mark indicating the sticking position of the seal portion, can take the following forms.
That is, the position display portion 541 is a mark that surrounds the entire periphery of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 on the same surface or the back surface of the upper case surface to which the seal portions 1565 and 1566 are attached, and the upper case surface to which the seal portions 1565 and 1566 are attached. It is the mark on the L-shaped side on the same side or the back side of .
The position display portion 541 is a linear convex portion provided so as to surround the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .
The position display portion 541 is a linear concave portion provided so as to surround the seal portions 1565 and 1566 on the same surface as the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .
The position display portion 541 is a linear protrusion provided on the rear surface of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .
The position display portion 541 is a linear concave portion provided so as to surround the periphery of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 on the rear surface of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .

The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear projection provided so as to surround predetermined corners of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 on the same plane as the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear recess provided so as to surround predetermined corners of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 on the same surface as the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear convex portion and concave portion provided so as to surround predetermined corners on the back surfaces of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .
The position display portion 541 is a position mark which is neither a projection nor a recess provided so as to surround the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .

106 to 108, the position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear projection provided on the same surface as the seal (front side of the upper case piece), but is not limited to this. can take any form.
The seal portion 1565 is attached near the error indicator 610 provided in the payout control board 60 housed in the payout board case 400 and indicates the content of the error display displayed on the error indicator 610 .
The error indicator 610 displays the number of the error shown on the seal portion 1565 .
When multiple errors occur, only the most serious error among the errors occurring is displayed on the error indicator 610 . Alternatively, all of the multiple errors that have occurred are sequentially displayed on the error indicator 610 .
Alternatively, a plurality of LEDs each associated with an error number may be arranged as the error indicator 610, and an error may be notified by causing the LED corresponding to the error that has occurred to emit light.
Here, for example, beside the plurality of error numbers displayed on the seal portion 1565, the corresponding LEDs are arranged vertically.
For example, when a "dispensed quantity abnormal error" corresponding to error number 0 occurs, the LED arranged next to error number "0" on the seal portion 1565 is turned on, and "main control not performed" corresponding to error number 1 is turned on. When "connection error" occurs, the LED arranged next to the error number "1" on the seal portion 1565 is turned on.
The seal portion 1566 is made of a transparent material. For example, an error display number and the content of the error indicated by the number are printed in white within a frame printed in white.
The transparent material is exposed except for the display of the frame, number, and error content, and the electronic parts on the payout control board 60 can be confirmed through the transparent material.
That is, the error indicator 610 can visually recognize the transparent material of the seal portion 1566 . Alternatively, the seal portion 1566 is attached to the dispensing board case 400 that does not overlap the error indicator 610 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the error indicator 610 is always visible.
The seal portion 1565 is attached at a position where the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated payout ROM 601 on the payout control board 60 can be visually recognized from all angles through a transparent material.

As shown in FIG. 106(c), the seal portion 1565 (error display description seal) describes, for example, the following contents corresponding to errors detected by the main control board and various sensors.
i.e.
0 Dispensing number error 1 Main control disconnection error 2 Dispensing switch abnormality detection error 1
3 Dispensing switch abnormality detection error 2
4 Payout case error 5 Main control case error 6 Full tank error 7 Ball out error 8 Game ball lending device unconnected seller 9 Game ball lending device communication error.

In addition, "plate full error", "counter case error", "counter switch error", "excess payout error", "game ball lending device disconnection error", "game ball lending device communication error", "door open Error", "Abnormal winning error 1", "Abnormal winning error 2", "Ejection error", "Magnet detection error", "Abnormal prize frequency error", "Abnormal door opening error" The display may be performed by the error indicator 610, and the contents of the corresponding error display may be displayed on the sticker portion 1565 (error display explanation sticker).
A "dish full error" is an error that occurs when the tray is full due to the payout of prize balls or when the tray is full due to ball lending.
A "counter case error" is an error that occurs due to ball clogging between the tank and dispensing mechanism.
A "counter switch error" is an error that occurs when the wiring that connects the payout control board and the dispensing device relay terminal board or the wiring that connects the dispensing device relay terminal board and the parts in the dispensing mechanism is not correctly connected. .

"Excess payout error", an error that occurs when more than the requested number of payouts is made.
"Payout command error" is an error that occurs when the signal sent from the main control board to the payout control board is not normal.
"Game ball lending device unconnected error" is an error that occurs because the game ball lending device is not connected to the gaming machine.
"Game ball lending device communication error" is an error that occurs when the payout control board detects that the signal from the game ball lending device is invalid.
"Door open error" is an error that occurs because the upper decoration is opened.
A "switch unconnected error" is an error that occurs when disconnection or poor connection of switches on the game board such as gates and prize-winning ports is detected.

"Abnormal Prize Winning Error 1" is the detection of five or more prizes to the right starting port between the end of the operation of the normal electric accessory and the start of the next operation, or the time from the start of the operation of the normal electric accessory after turning on the power. Since one or more prizes were detected during this period, a prize was detected in the upper right big prize opening when the upper right special electric role was not activated. This is an error that occurs due to detection.
"Abnormal Winning Error 2" is an error that occurs because the switch in each winning hole detects a game ball for a remarkably long time.
A "discharge error" is an error that occurs when the error between the number of game balls that have passed through the switch in each winning hole and the number of game balls that have passed through the out switch exceeds 49.
"Magnet detection error" is an error that occurs when a magnetic force is detected near the left windmill, near the upper left winning opening, near the middle left winning opening, near the lower left winning opening, near the middle starting opening, or at the lower right part of the game board surface.
"Frequency Abnormal Error" is caused by detecting an abnormal number of winnings in either the middle starting opening, the lower left winning opening, the left middle winning opening, the upper left winning opening, or the right winning opening when reaching a certain number of shot balls. This is the error that occurs.
"Abnormal door open error" is an error that occurs when the inner frame is opened when the upper decoration is closed.

As shown in FIG. 106(c), a seal portion 1566 (opener indication seal/dispensed board management seal) has an entry area 1567 for entering the person who opened the delivered board case 400 and the date of opening. Prepare.
The seal portion 1566 is made of a transparent material and is not subjected to processing such as watermarking. For example, three entry areas 1567 are formed in a black frame with a heading such as "payout control board".
A writing area 1567 is a white background formed on a transparent material and which can be written with a pen or the like.
Headings such as "opener" and "opening date" are printed in black above the entry area 1567, and circled numbers indicating the number of the entry area are printed on the left side of each entry area.
The transparent material is exposed except for each print and entry area 1567 (white background), and the electronic components on the payout control board 60 can be confirmed through the transparent material.
The seal portion 1566 is attached at a position where the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated payout ROM 601 on the payout control board 60 can be visually recognized from all angles through a transparent material.
The seal portion 1566 is provided so that the three entry areas 1567 are positioned so as not to overlap the integrated payout ROM 601 from all angles.

In addition, in the seal portion 1566 shown in FIG. 106(c), an entry area 1567 is integrated with columns for entering "opener" and "opening date". On the other hand, in the same way as the seal portion 1560 of the main circuit board case 200 shown in FIGS. 93 and 97, the columns for entering the opening person and the date of opening are separated, and a viewing portion made of a transparent material is provided between them. can be By doing so, it becomes easier to check the electronic components on the payout control board 60 through the seal portion 1566 .

As described above, similarly to the main board case 200, the payout board case 400 of this embodiment has a crimped portion.
Two crimped portions are provided in the dispensing board case 400 . On the other hand, there are three writing areas 1567 provided on the seal portion 1566 .
In the dispensing board case 400, the number of crimped portions does not match the number of times the person who opened the seal portion 1566 can write (the number of writing areas 1567).
The number of crimped portions provided in the delivered board case 400 is equal to or smaller than the number of entry fields for the opening person and opening date provided in the delivered board management seal (seal portion 1566).
By providing more entry fields than the actual number of openings possible, it is possible to deal with typos and other errors. is.

Especially the upper case piece 410 of the payout board case 400 does not have a ventilation hole.
A seal portion 1562 is attached to the payout ROM 60b (payout chip) 601 .
As described above, the seal portion 1562 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the seal portion 1562 is printed with the model name “CR AIU GH101” and the manufacturer name “AA Company” as predetermined information. Specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as identification display 1596 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".
The seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated payout ROM 601 may have the same color as the seal portion 1562 having the same contents attached to the main ROM of the main control board 50, or may have a different color.

The payout board case 400 and the main board case 200 differ in the number of times that information such as the opening person can be written in the seal portions 1560 and 1566 . Alternatively, the sizes of the writable areas in the seal portions 1560 and 1566 are different.
In the description of FIG. 106, the seal portions 1565 and 1566 are different seal portions, but the seal portions 1565 and 1566 may be integrated.
That is, one seal including the descriptions of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 may be attached.

(Production control board protection case)
Next, the configuration of the effect control board protection case in this embodiment will be described.
First, the substrate structure of the image control substrate will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110. FIG.
109A and 109B are diagrams for explaining the structure of the image control board, FIG. 109A is a diagram showing the configuration of the component side (surface) of the image control board, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of the solder surface (rear surface) of the substrate;
110A and 110B are diagrams showing the configuration of the printed circuit board used for the image control circuit board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a solder surface (rear surface) of a printed circuit board; FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 109 and 110, the image control board 70 is mounted with many electronic components including a VDP.
The image control board 70 uses a printed wiring board 801 having wiring patterns formed on both sides of the printed board.
In this embodiment, the printed wiring board 801 is used as the image control board 70, but this is only an example. A multilayer printed wiring board having a pattern formed thereon may be used.
As a mounting method for mounting electronic components on the printed wiring board 801, various surface-mounted electronic components and A surface mounting method is used to mount connectors and the like. That is, the image control board 70 is configured using a surface-mounted printed wiring board 801 .

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured by the printed wiring board 701 having through holes into which the leads of the insertion mounting type electronic components (hereinafter referred to as "insertion mounting components") can be inserted. Substrates other than the main control substrate 50 are printed wiring boards 801 having connection electrodes connectable to connection terminals of surface-mounted electronic components (hereinafter referred to as "surface-mounted components").

FIG. 111 is an enlarged view of a part of the printed wiring board used for the image control board.
As shown in FIG. 111, on a printed wiring board 801, land groups 811 and 812 are formed by lands 802 that are respectively connected to connection terminals of one surface-mounted component. For example, if the surface-mounted component is an IC 850 shown in FIG. 109(a), a land group 811 for the IC 850 is formed by a plurality of lands 802 connected to a plurality of lead terminals of the IC 850 on the printed wiring board 801. be. In this specification, a plurality of lands 802 each connected to a plurality of lead terminals of one surface mount component are called a land group.
Similarly, if the surface-mounted component is a connector 851 shown in FIG. A group 812 is constructed.
A plurality of lands 802 constituting these land groups 811 and 812 are composed of first lands 802a and second lands 802b having a different shape from the first lands 802a.
Specifically, among the plurality of lands 802 forming each of the land groups 811 and 812, the four corner lands 802b are made larger than the other lands 802a (for example, about 1.5 times larger).

FIG. 112 is a front view explaining the configuration of the effect control board protection case.
113 and 114 are exploded perspective views of the effect control board case.
As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the image control board 70 in the effect control board case (effect board case) 700 is mounted with many electronic components including a host CPU, VDP and image ROM.
As described above, in the printed wiring board of the image control board 70, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, a double-sided mounting method is adopted in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted on both the component side and the solder side of the printed wiring board. be.

The effect board case 700 includes a lower case piece 710 and an upper case piece 720. - 特許庁
An effect control board and an image control board 70 are housed in an encapsulating part constituted by a control board housing part 711 provided in the lower case piece 710 and a control board housing part 721 provided in the upper case piece 720 .
The effect board case 700, particularly the upper case piece 720, is provided with a ventilation hole 725 unlike the main board case 200 and the payout board case 400 described above.
In addition, on the upper case piece 720 of the effect board case 700, the seal portions 1560 and 1566 for entering the opening person and opening date pasted on the main board case 200 and the dispensing board case 400 are pasted. not
Therefore, the effect board case 700 is not provided with a crimping portion for sealing the effect board case 700, which is provided in the main board case 200 and the payout board case 400. - 特許庁

On the other hand, on the upper case piece 720 of the effect board case 700, an opaque seal portion 1580 describing an explanation related to volume setting is attached near the volume changeover switch .
Correspondingly, a position display portion 541 is provided on the rear surface of the upper case piece 720 of the effect board case 700 .
As described above, the image control board 70 is a double-sided mounting board, and the electronic components mounted on the front side (game board side) cannot be directly visually inspected for inspection.
In addition, unlike the main control board 50 and the payout control board 60, the image control board 70 simply has a function of outputting an effect image and an effect sound, so there is a risk that the ROM chip or the like may be illegally replaced. is low.
Therefore, since it is less necessary to visually recognize the board surface through the seal, the opaque seal portion 1580 can be attached to the presentation board case 700 .
Also, for the same reason, a crimped portion (sealing portion) for sealing the effect board case 700 is not provided.
As a result, the seal portion 1566 having the entry area 1567 for entering the person who opened the effect board case 700 and the date of opening is not attached.

The position display portion 541 may be provided on the front side of the upper case piece 720 .
In the present embodiment, the position display portion 541, which is a sticking position mark indicating the sticking position of the seal portion 1580, can take the following forms.
That is, the position display portion 541 is a mark that surrounds the entire circumference of the seal portion 1580 on the same surface or the back surface of the upper case to which the seal portion 1580 is attached, and This is the mark on the L-shaped side.
The position display portion 541 is a linear convex portion provided so as to surround the seal portion 1580 .
Position display portion 541 is a linear concave portion provided so as to surround seal portion 1580 on the same plane as seal portion 1580 .
The position display portion 541 is a linear convex portion provided on the back surface of the seal portion 1580 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 1580 .
Position display portion 541 is a linear concave portion provided to surround seal portion 1580 on the back surface of seal portion 1580 .

The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear projection provided so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portion 1580 on the same plane as the seal portion 1580 .
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear concave portion provided so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portion 1580 on the same plane as the seal portion 1580 .
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear convex portion and concave portion provided so as to surround a predetermined corner portion on the back surface of the seal portion 1580 .
The position display portion 541 is a position mark provided to surround the seal portion 1580 and is neither a protrusion nor a recess.

The seal portion 1561 provided on the surface of the upper case piece 220 of the main circuit board case 200 , the seal portion 1560 as the main circuit board control number seal, and the QR code (registered trademark) of the unsealing prohibition seal 250 extend the main control circuit board 50 . different distances from the virtual plane. The distance of the QR code (registered trademark) of the unsealing prohibition sticker 250 from the virtual plane (main control board 50) is shorter (closer).
This is because, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the QR code (registered trademark) 253 of the unsealing prohibition seal 250 is positioned lower than the upper surface of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200 .

The board cases of the gaming machine, including the main board case 200, payout board case 400, and effect board case 700, are provided with information displays such as case seals, ROM seals, lead resistor color codes, network resistor identification codes, IC There are model number code, capacitor model number code, display information of performance display monitor, setting display monitor, etc.
These pieces of information are different in distance from each control board housed in the board case (main board case 200, payout board case 400, effect board case 700). Also, the distance from the top surface of the board case is different. As explained above, the top surface of the board case is the place where the seal portion is affixed, and is the highest point in the board case.
The seal part of the board case is pasted on the highest point of the board case, the ROM sticker is pasted on the ROM mounted on the board in the case, and the display information of the performance display monitor and setting display monitor is on the board. displayed on the performance display monitor and setting display monitor provided in the It is natural that the height of these pieces of information is different on the basis of the control board.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ROM legs of the control boards (main control board 50, payout control board 60, image control board 70) housed in the board case are visible, and the ROM legs are not hidden by the seal. , Paste the seal on the top surface of the board case. When the board case is viewed from above, even part of the ROM leg is not hidden by the seal.
In this embodiment, the electronic parts including the ROM may be hidden when viewed from above, but can be seen from the viewing section when viewed from a different angle.
A transparent connector is installed as a connecting part of the ROM to the control board (main control board 50, payout control board 60, image control board 70) so that it can be seen at a glance that the ROM leg has not been tampered with.
The identification information provided on the case piece of the board case has indications of different distances to the control boards (main control board 50, payout control board 60, image control board 70). For example, the identification information displayed on the upper case piece, the lower case piece, and (in the case of the main board case) the cap is based on the control board (main control board 50, payout control board 60, image control board 70). They are different, and the positional relationship is also different. Also, in the control board (main control board 50, payout control board 60, image control board 70), the color of the area where the electronic components are installed is different from the color of the area where the manufacturer's name is displayed.

(Board structure of main control board)
The configuration (layout) of the main control board accommodated in the main board case of the present embodiment is not limited to those described above, such as FIG.
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining another configuration of the main control board according to the present embodiment, and in particular is a diagram showing the configuration of the component side (surface) of the main control board.
The basic configuration of the main control board is the same as in FIGS. 95 and 96, but in the example shown in FIG. 115(a), the main control board has a performance display monitor (performance display section) 600 and a setting display monitor (setting display section) 650 . The main control board 50 also has a setting key switch 660 and an RWM clear switch 680 .

The performance display monitor 600 displays the base value of the gaming machine.
The base value is a numerical value that indicates the performance of the game machine, how much there is a payout in the normal state (low probability, short time, no time), excluding special states such as jackpots, probability variable game states, and time-saving game states. be.
For example, if there are 50 prize balls when the player hits 100 game balls in a low-probability, short-time, no-time period, the base value is "50".
The number of game balls hit by the player is called the number of outs, and in the gaming machine 1, a low number is calculated for each total number of outs (usually 60,000) in all game states including the jackpot, variable probability game state, and time-saving game state. A base value for short working hours and non-working hours is calculated and displayed on the performance display monitor 600. - 特許庁
The base value at the time of low probability of short working hours is represented by (the number of payouts at the time of low probability of short working hours / the number of out of the time of low probability of short working hours).

The performance display monitor 600 will be explained. The performance display monitor 600 has a display and a circuit section on the main control board 50 . A display in which the display section and the circuit section are unitized may be mounted on the main control board 50 .
The display displays four digits side by side. A dot point is provided below the number. Of the 4-digit number, the left two digits are the identification seg and the right two digits are the ratio seg.

FIG. 115(b) is a diagram for explaining the display of the performance display monitor.
displays the following four types of information repeatedly in sequence.
As shown in (b-1) to (b-4), in the identification segment, the values of "bL.", "b1.", "b2." The segment displays the base value corresponding to it.
The display switching time of "bL.", "b1.", "b2.", and "b3." is about 5.0 seconds.
For example, "bL.xx" is displayed for 5.0 seconds, "b1.yy" is displayed for 5.0 seconds, "b2.zz" is displayed for 5.0 seconds, and "b3.ww" is displayed for 5.0 seconds. second, and then display "bL.xx" again for 5.0 seconds.
"bL." Shown in (b-1) indicates the base value for each 60,000 total out numbers, which is a real-time value during measurement.
"b1." Shown in (b-2) indicates the base value at the time of low probability short working hours in the total number of outs 60,000 one time before.
"b2." Shown in (b-3) indicates the base value at the time of low probability short working hours in the total out number 60,000 two times before.
"b3." Shown in (b-4) indicates the base value at the time of low probability short working hours in 60,000 total out number three times before.

Here, performance display processing by the main control board 50 will be described.
The main CPU 50a starts counting the number of outs (total number of outs) in all gaming states from the initial power-on (RWM all clear).
In (b-1), the main CPU 50a causes the identification segment to blink "bL." and the ratio segment to display "--" until the total number of outs reaches an arbitrary number less than 300. In (b-2), "b1." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment. In (b-3), "b2." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment. In (b-4), "b3." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.

After that, the main CPU 50a initializes the total number of outs, the number of payouts without low-probability short working hours (low-probability payout number), and the number of outs without low-probability short working hours (low-probability out number), and starts the first measurement. .
The main CPU 50a performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the first time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL."
When the low probability out number is 0 to 5,999, "bL." is flashed, and when the low probability out number is 6,000 or more, "bL."
In (b-2), "b1." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-3), "b2." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-4), "b3." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
Then, the main CPU 50a saves the final value of the ratio segment of the identification segment "bL." of the first measurement as AA.

When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the first time, the main CPU 50a initializes the total number of outs, the number of low-probability payouts, and the number of low-probability outs, and starts counting for the second time.
The main CPU 50a performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL."
In addition, when the number of low-probability outs is 0 to 5999, "bL."
In (b-2), "b1." is lit in the identification segment, and the saved AA is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-3), "b2." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-4), "b3." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
Save the ratio segment final value of the identification segment "bL." of the first measurement as AA.
Save the ratio segment final value of the identification segment "bL." of the second measurement as BB.

When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time, the main CPU 50a initializes the total number of outs, the number of low-probability payouts, and the number of low-probability outs, and starts counting for the third time.
The main CPU 50a performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL."
In addition, when the low probability out number is 0 to 5999, "bL."
In addition, in (b-2), "b1." is lit in the identification segment, and the stored BB is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-3), "b2." is lit in the identification segment, and the saved AA is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-4), "b3." is caused to blink in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
Save the ratio segment final value of the identification segment "bL." of the first measurement as AA.
Save the ratio segment final value of the identification segment "bL." of the second measurement as BB.
Save the ratio segment final value of the identification segment "bL." of the third measurement as CC.

When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time, the main CPU 50a initializes the total number of outs, the number of low-probability payouts, and the number of low-probability outs, and starts the fourth measurement.
The main CPU 50a performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 in the fourth time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL."
In addition, when the low probability out number is 0 to 5999, "bL."
In (b-2), "b1." is lit in the identification segment, and the saved CC is displayed in the ratio segment.
In addition, in (b-3), "b2." is lit in the identification segment, and the stored BB is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-4), "b3." is blinked in the identification segment, and the saved AA is displayed in the ratio segment.
When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 next time, the main CPU 50a repeats the fifth and subsequent measurements in the same manner as described above.

The board case 200 of the present embodiment may be used to accommodate the main control board of a spinning machine (pachi-slot machine). Pachislot machine) information such as the role ratio is displayed.
The performance display monitor 600 described above is a kind of game information display device that indicates the game information of the game machine. Also includes information such as
A game information display that displays information such as the role ratio of a pachislot machine is called a role ratio monitor.
The role ratio monitor is
(1) Cumulative advantageous section ratio (2) Consecutive role ratio every 6,000 games (3) Role ratio every 6,000 games (4) Cumulative consecutive role ratio (5) Cumulative role ratio is displayed.
Here, the advantageous interval ratio is the ratio of the number of advantageous interval games to the total number of games. Also, the advantageous section is a section in which it is possible to give an instruction such as push order navigation.
The role ratio and the consecutive role ratio are ratios of the number of payouts of accessories (so-called bonuses) to the total number of payouts.
The role ratio is calculated with respect to all the roles, and the continuous role ratio is calculated with respect to the operation of the consecutively operating device.
The game information display device that shows the game information of the gaming machine may also include such a role ratio monitor. A detailed description of the ratio monitor is omitted.

Next, the setting display monitor 650 will be described. The setting display monitor 650 displays setting values of the gaming machine 1 .
As described above, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can change the probability of winning a big win by changing the settings.
The setting display monitor 650 is mounted in the main control board case 200, has a one-digit display as shown in FIG. can be displayed.
These setting values may be displayed on the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 may not be provided.

The setting display monitor 650 will be described. The setting display monitor 650 is installed for the purpose of clearly indicating to the player that the setting changing device is installed, to clearly indicating the operation method to the staff of the game arcade, and to prevent illegality related to the setting.
Numerical or non-numeric symbols can be used to indicate settings. When a numerical value is used, any one of the numerical values "1", "2", "3", and "4" is used to display the setting according to the setting value. If the set value is from "1" to "6", select one of the numerical values "1", "2", "3", "4", "5" and "6" according to the set value. use.

For the setting operation, for example, the setting key switch 660 and the setting switch 670 described above are used.
The setting key switch 660 is a switch that triggers transition to the "setting change state" and the "setting confirmation state". It is operated using a key (key).
The setting key switch 660 can take two states of OFF/ON and maintain each state. Also, the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state.
The setting key switch 660 is mounted inside the main control board case 200 .
The setting switch 670 is a switch for switching settings in a setting change state, and is mounted at an arbitrary position that cannot be operated by the player.
The setting switch 670 can also be used as the RWM clear switch 680 and the like.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned ON and the RWM clear switch 680 turned ON, the gaming machine 1 shifts to a "setting change state" for changing settings.
When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned ON and the RWM clear switch 680 turned OFF, the gaming machine 1 shifts to a "setting confirmation state" for confirming the settings.

Setting change processing by the main control board 50 will be described.
(1) When the gaming machine 1 is powered off, the setting display monitor 650 is turned off. (2) The setting key switch 660 is turned on by the operation of a setting person such as an amusement store staff. The setting display monitor 650 is still turned off. (3) When the RWM clear switch 680 is turned on by the operator, and the game machine is powered on in this state, the main CPU 50a shifts the game machine 1 to the "setting change state". The main CPU 50a causes the setting display monitor 650 to display the current setting state. (4) When the setting switch 670 (or the RWM clear switch 680) is pressed in this state, the main CPU 50a sequentially changes the setting values, and displays the changed setting values (under setting) on the setting display monitor 650. display. (5) When the setting key switch 660 is turned off by the operator, the main CPU 50a confirms the setting value and turns off the setting display monitor 650. FIG.
When the performance display monitor 600 also serves as the setting display monitor 650, the main CPU 50a displays the setting value in the "setting change state" on any segment (digit) of the performance display monitor 600. conduct.
When the setting key switch 660 is turned off by the operator to confirm the setting value, the main CPU 50a starts the above-described performance display on the performance display monitor 600. FIG.

A setting confirmation process by the main control board 50 will be described.
(1) When the gaming machine 1 is powered off, the setting display monitor 650 is off.
(2) The setting key switch 660 is turned on by the operator's operation. The setting display monitor 650 is still off.
(3) In this state, if the gaming machine is powered on without turning on the RWM clear switch 680, the main CPU 50a shifts the gaming machine 1 to the setting confirmation state. The main CPU 50a causes the setting display monitor 650 to display the current setting state.
When the setting key switch 660 is turned off by the operation of the setting person, the main CPU 50a terminates the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display monitor 650. FIG.
When the performance display monitor 600 also serves as the setting display monitor 650, the main CPU 50a uses any segment (digit) of the performance display monitor 600 to display the setting value in the "setting confirmation state". conduct.
When the setting key switch 660 is turned off by the operator to end the setting confirmation state, the main CPU 50 a starts the above-described performance display on the performance display monitor 600 .

By the way, as shown in FIG. 115, the main control board 50 has connectors 771 to 776 on its component surface.
A plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from left to right at the lower end of the main control board 50 .
Although not shown in FIG. 116 below, the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are similar to those shown in FIG. It is arranged inside the portion 779 .
Both the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 provided on the component side of the main control board 50 are provided on the upper end side of the main control board 50 .
That is, the connectors 771 to 776, the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650 are provided at opposite positions on the main control board 50. FIG.
With such an arrangement, the cables and harnesses connected to the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 do not obstruct the visual recognition of the inspector who checks the performance display monitor 600 and setting display monitor 650 .
In particular, since the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 are provided at the upper end sufficiently separated from the connectors 771 to 776, the cables and harnesses hanging down from the connectors do not interfere with the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display. There is no interference with the field of view of the examiner who tries to view the monitor 650 .

The configuration of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 50 of FIG. 115 is the same as that of FIG. 95(b).
Also, in the main control board 50 of FIG. 115, a printed wiring board 701 having wiring patterns formed on both sides of the printed board is used as in FIGS. 96(a) and (b).
In the printed wiring board 701, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, a single-sided mounting method is adopted in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component surface 701a of the printed wiring board 701. FIG. The printed wiring board 701 is the same as in FIGS. 96(a) and 96(b), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

116A and 116B are diagrams showing the main board case of the present embodiment in which the main control board explained in FIG. Figure shows. 117 is an exploded perspective view including the base of the main board case shown in FIG. 115. FIG.
In the description of FIGS. 116 and 117, members having the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
A seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to the main substrate case shown in FIGS.
94, 97 to 98, identification marks 520 are attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240. FIG.

The seal portion 1560 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided on the lower left side in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main circuit board case 200 . The seal portion 1561 is attached to the position display portion 561 provided on the upper right portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200 .
Both of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a material having optical transparency, and in this embodiment, as an example, they are transparent (made of a transparent material).
Each of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is arranged across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 83). 116, illustration of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 83) positioned in front of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is omitted.

The seal portion 1560 will be described.
The seal portion 1560 is a seal for main board management.
In this example, a seal portion main body (base portion) 1560A of the seal portion 1560 is provided with a watermark for anti-counterfeiting. That is, the seal portion 1560 (opener display seal) is a processed seal obtained by watermarking the seal portion main body 1560A.
A "watermark" is, for example, a display that looks different depending on the viewing angle, and can be applied to various types, such as using a hologram, or something that looks different depending on the physical shape. .
However, the seal member main body 1560A is transparent even though it is subjected to a predetermined processing (watermark processing), and at least has high translucency to ensure a certain level of visibility.

The seal portion 1560 has a white entry area (entry column) 1570, a code portion 1572, and an information display portion 1573 in a black frame with a headline such as "main board control number" on the seal portion main body 1560A. I have it.
The entry area 1570, the code part 1572, the information display part 1573, and the character display associated with these areas, which will be described later, are non-transparent with low translucency because the transparent material of the seal part main body 1560A is not exposed. Department.
The seal portion 1560 has a plurality of non-light-transmitting portions, and it is difficult to visually recognize the main control board 50 inside the main board case 200 through these non-light-transmitting portions.
The code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, and the writing area 1570 as the non-light-transmitting portion are provided on the seal portion main body 1560A so as not to overlap the integrated main ROM 502, the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650. FIG.

On the other hand, areas other than the entry area 1570, the code part 1572, the information display part 1573, and the character display accompanying these areas in the seal part main body 1560A are translucent because the transparent material of the seal part main body 1560A is exposed. is the translucent portion 1574 with a high .
The translucent part 1574 is the above-described viewing part that allows the electronic component 595 on the main control board 50 in the main board case 200 to be seen and confirmed through the transparent material.

In the main board case 200 , the main control board 50 can be visually recognized through the seal member 1560 and the main board case 200 .
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control board 50 . Therefore, the inspector can check the main control board 50 through the seal member 1560 and easily determine whether or not there is fraud. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the light-transmitting portion and non-light-transmitting portion, the seal portion 1560 is attached at a position where the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 can be visually recognized from all angles. ing.
In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent portion and the non-translucent portion, the entirety of the sealing portion 1560, including the entry area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, does not overlap the integrated main ROM 502 from any angle. position.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the integrated main ROM 502 can always be visually recognized through the main board case 200 .
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the integrated main ROM 502 . Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Regardless of whether or not there is a translucent portion or non-translucent portion, the entirety of the sealing portion 1560, including the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, can be viewed from any angle on the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor. It is provided so as not to overlap with 650 .
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 can be visually recognized through the main board case 200 .

In FIG. 116, it cannot be said that the seal portion 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are located close to each other, but the seal portion 1560 does not overlap the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600, and the performance display monitor 600 does not overlap. is sufficiently separated from the connectors 771 to 776 and the seal portion 1561 does not overlap the performance display monitor 600, the seal portion 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are positioned close to each other. There may be. For example, the performance display monitor 600 may be at the position indicated by the dashed line above the seal portion 1560 in FIG. 116(b).
In this case, the inspector can simultaneously check the performance display monitor 600 and the seal portion 1560 at a glance.

The contents displayed on the seal portion 1560 will be described in detail below.
The entry area 1570 is an area for entering the person who opened the main circuit board case 200 and the opening date.
A writing area 1570 is a white background formed on a transparent material and on which writing can be performed with a pen or the like.
As an example, the entry areas 1570 are provided in three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction for a total of six entry areas 1570, in which three sets of "opener" and "date of opening" can be entered.
The entry area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) background.
Headings such as "opener" and "opening date" are printed in black above the entry area 1570, and circled numbers indicating the number of the entry area are printed on the left side of each entry area.
That is, above the entry area 1570 on the upper left, "opener" is printed in black. Above the entry area 1570 on the upper right, "date of opening" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed to the left of the upper left writing area 1570 . A circle 2 is printed to the left of the entry area 1570 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed to the left of the lower left writing area 1570 .
For example, when the inspector opens the main board case 200, the inspector writes the name of the inspector in the entry area 1570 on the left side, and the date of opening the main board case 200 in the entry area 1570 on the right side. . It should be noted that the inspector may enter in the entry area 1570 the date and the like when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was tampered with.

Cord portion 1572 is provided at the upper left portion of seal portion 1560 . Code portion 1572 includes predetermined information. The code part 1572 is a part where information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), a bar code, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. there is In this embodiment, as an example, the code section 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code portion 1572 is associated with, for example, information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 stored in a device other than the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as “other device”).
For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code portion 1572, is read by a camera provided in a mobile information terminal or the like. The information portable terminal uses the URL to access the other device via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the information portable terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 50 (for example, the name of the store where the game machine 1 was delivered) and whether the game machine 1 has been discarded. It contains information such as This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 and information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the information on the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not there has been fraudulent installation of the main control board 50 from a different delivery destination. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

The information display portion 1573 contains various information. The information display portion 1573 may include information similar to the identification display 529, for example. In this embodiment, as an example, in the information display section 1573, a character string “EF001” is printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. The character string is, for example, the management number of the main control board 50 . With this management number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from the information associated with the management number held by the manufacturer. Note that the character string of the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model number, and the like. Also, the rectangular region of the information display portion 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code portion 1572 are connected in the horizontal direction.

A translucent portion (peeping portion) 1574 included in the sealing portion 1560 will be described.
Translucent portion 1574 includes entry area 1570, code portion 1572, information display portion 1573, notation of “main board control number”, frame, opening person, notation of opening date, circle 1 to circle It is an area other than the notation of 3.
The translucent part 1574 is, for example, an area extending in the left-right direction that exists between the writing areas 1570 of three lines in the vertical direction.
The translucent portion 1574 is also an area extending in the left-right direction between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged side by side and the upper two entry areas 1570 .
The translucent part 1574 is also an area extending vertically between the writing areas 1570 in two rows in the horizontal direction.
The inspector can confirm the electronic component 595 (see FIG. 62(a)) through the translucent portion 1574 . Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 595 has been tampered with, compared to the case where the translucent portion 1574 is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

The seal portion 1561 will be described.
The seal portion 1561 is attached at a position where the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 is visible from all angles.
The seal portion 1561 is provided so as not to overlap the integrated main ROM 502 from all angles.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the integrated main ROM 502 can always be visually recognized through the main board case 200 .
The seal portion 1561 is provided so as not to overlap the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 from all angles.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 can be visually recognized through the main board case 200 .
Descriptions of the sealing portion 1561 are the same as those in FIG. 44, and thus description thereof is omitted.
A seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502 . Since the sealing portion 1562 is the same as in FIGS. 93 and 97, detailed description thereof is omitted.

The main control board 50 shown in FIGS. 116 and 117 is equipped with a setting key switch 660 and an RWM clear switch 680 .
The RWM clear switch 680 will be explained.
As shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, the RWM clear switch 680 on the main control board 50 is not directly exposed. The upper case piece 220 of the board case 200 is provided with a recess 688 inside, and an opening 687 is provided in the recess 688 .
116(b) and 117, the operation member 685 is provided at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 680, and when the staff or the like presses the operation member 685, the pressed operation member 685 RWM clear switch 680 is pressed. This causes the RWM clear switch 680 to be operated.
A cover member 686 is provided within the recess 688 . The cover member 686 is pivotally supported in the recess 688 so as to be rotatable between a first position in which the operation member 685 is closed and inoperable and a second position in which the operation member 685 is opened and operable. It is By moving the operating member 685 to the second position, the RWM clear switch 680 can be operated.
By doing so, it is only necessary to provide an opening 687 large enough to insert the operation member 685 in the board case 200 . Further, the operation member 685 cannot be operated unless the cover member 686 is opened. Therefore, unauthorized access into the board case 200 can be prevented.
RWM clear switch 680 may have an end exposed through opening 687 so that it can be operated directly without being operated using operating member 685 .

The setting key switch 660 is provided with a key hole for inserting a key in the end face of a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 50 .
An end face of the setting key switch 660 having a keyhole is exposed from an opening 661 provided in the upper case piece 220 of the board case 200 . A staff or the like can insert a key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 660 to operate.
The end face of the setting key switch 660 provided with the keyhole is slightly lower than the surface of the board case 200 .

FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining still another configuration of the main control board according to the present embodiment, and in particular, a diagram showing the configuration of the component side (surface) of the main control board.
The basic configuration of the main control board 50 is the same as in FIG. 115, but in the example shown in FIG. A setting display monitor 650 is not provided.
The function of the setting display monitor 650 is shared by the performance display monitor 600, and an independent setting display monitor 650 is not provided.
Alternatively, the main control board 50 shown in FIG. 118 is the main control board of a gaming machine that does not have the setting change function.
Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 115, the main control board 50 has connectors 771 to 776 on its component surface.
A plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from left to right at the lower end of the main control board 50 .

Although not shown in FIG. 116 below, the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are similar to those shown in FIG. It is arranged inside the portion 779 .
A performance display monitor 600 , which is provided on the component side of the main control board 50 and can also serve as the setting display monitor 650 , is provided on the upper end side of the main control board 50 .
That is, the connectors 771 to 776 and the performance display monitor 600 are provided on the main control board 50 at opposite positions.
With such an arrangement, the cables and harnesses connected to the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 do not obstruct the visual recognition of the inspector who checks the performance display monitor 600 .
In particular, since the performance display monitor 600 is provided at the upper end portion sufficiently separated from the connectors 771 to 776, the cables and harnesses hanging from the connectors are not visible to the inspector who tries to view the performance display monitor 600. No interference.

The configuration of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 50 in FIG. 118 is the same as in FIG. 95(b).
Further, in the main control board 50 of FIG. 118, a printed wiring board 701 having wiring patterns formed on both sides of the printed board is used as in FIGS. 96(a) and (b).
In the printed wiring board 701, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, a single-sided mounting method is adopted in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component surface 701a of the printed wiring board 701. FIG. The printed wiring board 701 is the same as in FIGS. 96(a) and 96(b), and detailed description thereof is omitted.

119A and 119B are diagrams showing the main board case of the present embodiment in which the main control board explained in FIG. Figure shows. 120 is an exploded perspective view including the base of the main board case shown in FIG. 119. FIG.
In the description of FIGS. 118 and 119, members having the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiment (particularly, FIGS. 94, 97, and 98) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
A seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to the main substrate case shown in FIGS.
94, 97 to 98, identification marks 520 are attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240. FIG.
The seal portion 1560 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided on the lower left side in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main circuit board case 200 . The seal portion 1561 is attached to the position display portion 561 provided on the upper right portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200 .

Both of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a light-transmissive material, and in this embodiment, as an example, they are transparent. Each of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is arranged across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 83). 116, illustration of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 83) positioned in front of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is omitted.
In this example, a watermark for anti-counterfeiting is provided on the seal portion main body (base portion) 1560A of the seal portion 1560 .
Since the configuration of the seal portion 1560, which is a processed seal, is the same as in FIGS. 97 and 116, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Except for the code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, and the entry area 1570 (white background), the transparent material of the seal portion main body 1560A is exposed, and the electronic components on the main control board 50 can be confirmed through the transparent material. can be done.
In the main board case 200 , the main control board 50 can be visually recognized through the seal member 1560 and the main board case 200 .
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control board 50 . Therefore, the inspector can check the main control board 50 through the seal member 1560 and easily determine whether or not there is fraud. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the light-transmitting portion and non-light-transmitting portion, the seal portion 1560 is attached at a position where the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 can be visually recognized from all angles. ing.
In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent portion and the non-translucent portion, the entirety of the sealing portion 1560, including the entry area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, does not overlap the integrated main ROM 502 from any angle. position.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the integrated main ROM 502 can always be visually recognized through the main board case 200 .
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the integrated main ROM 502 . Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
The seal portion 1560 is located at a position where the entire seal portion 1560, including the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, does not overlap the performance display monitor 600 from any angle, regardless of whether or not there is a translucent portion or non-translucent portion. It is provided so that
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the performance display monitor 600 can be visually recognized through the main board case 200 .

In FIG. 119, although it cannot be said that the seal portion 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are located close to each other, the seal portion 1560 does not overlap the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600, and the performance display monitor 600 does not overlap. is sufficiently spaced from the connectors 771 to 776, and the seal portion 1561 does not overlap with the performance display monitor 600, even if the seal portion 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are positioned near each other. good. For example, the performance display monitor 600 may be in the position indicated by the dashed line above the seal portion 1560 in FIG.
At this time, the inspector can simultaneously check the performance display monitor 600 and the seal portion 1560 at a glance.

Descriptions of the sealing portion 1561 and the like are the same as those in FIG. 97, so description thereof will be omitted.
A seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502 .
The seal portion 1562 is the same as in FIGS. 93 and 97, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

As described above, the main control board 50 is mounted with the integrated main ROM 502 that controls the game, the performance display monitor 600 that displays the performance of the gaming machine, and other board components 595 different from these. there is A transparent sealing member 1560 is attached to the main control board 50 .
As a result, other board components 595 can be visually recognized through the transparent seal portion 1560 and the main board case 200 . Also, the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600 can be directly viewed through the main board case 200 .
Duplication of the seal portion 1560 can be prevented by watermarking the transparent portion of the predetermined seal portion 1560 having a transparent portion and a plurality of non-transparent portions, which must be adhered to the main substrate case 200 .
In addition, by attaching the sticker 1560 to a position that does not cover the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600, the integrated main ROM 502, which is an important board component, is not affected by watermarking or multiple non-transparent portions. It is possible to reliably ensure the visibility of the performance display monitor 600 that must be read accurately.
As for the substrate component 595, which is less important than the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600, the state can be confirmed through watermark processing through the gaps between the plurality of non-transparent portions and the surrounding transparent portion (peek portion 1574). can. Even if there are a plurality of non-transparent portions, the visibility of the substrate component can be ensured by the transparent portions.
Further, the non-transparent portion can display predetermined information, for example, necessary information such as identifying the integrated main ROM 502 . Different information can be displayed or written in the plurality of non-transparent portions.

In addition, when the main control board 50 is separately provided with the setting display monitor 650, watermarking and multiple The visibility of the integrated main ROM 502, which is an important board component, the performance display monitor 600 that must be read accurately, and the setting display monitor 650 can be ensured without being affected by a certain non-transparent portion.
The substrate component 595, which is less important than the integrated main ROM 502, the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650, can be viewed through watermarking through gaps between multiple non-transparent portions and surrounding transparent portions (peek portion 1574). can be confirmed. Even if there are a plurality of non-transparent portions, the visibility of the substrate component can be ensured by the transparent portions.

The performance display monitor 600 may be arranged on the lower end side of the main control board 50 instead of the upper end side. In that case, the connectors 771 to 776 are desirably arranged on the upper end side opposite to the performance display monitor 600 (opposite).
The performance display monitor 600 may be arranged on the left end side or the right end side of the main control board 50 . In that case, the connectors 771 to 776 are desirably arranged at the opposite (opposite) ends to the performance display monitor 600 .
Also, as described above, the performance display monitor 600 may be arranged inside the main control board 50 instead of at the end. Even in that case, they must be arranged at positions that do not overlap the cables, harnesses, and sealing portion 1560 extending from the connectors 771 to 776 .
In the present embodiment, the RWM clear switch 680 is described as being arranged on the main control board 50, but is not limited to this and may be provided on the payout control board 60.
Also, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 660 is described as being arranged on the main control board 50, but it is not limited to this.
If the setting key switch 660 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 , it can be arranged at another position apart from the main control board 50 .
The RWM clear switch 680 and the setting key switch 660 may be used together.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device and the performance display unit when the RWM is cleared.
In the following description, the configurations of the performance display section and the setting display section conform to the configurations shown in FIGS. 115(b) and 115(c).
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105 is ON.
When performing RWM clear, in (1), the gaming machine 1 is powered on with the setting key switch 660 turned off and the RMW clear switch 680 turned on.
After the power is turned on, in (2), a display such as "POWER ON" is displayed on the image display device 31 to indicate that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.
When the RWM clearing process is finished, in (3), a display such as "RWM clearing finished" is displayed on the image display device 31 to notify that the RWM clearing is finished.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation of turning on all segments and then turning them off for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds ends, at (4), the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying performance values as described in FIG. 115(b). In the image display device 31, the RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device and the performance display section when the settings are changed in the case where the gaming machine has the performance display section that also serves as the setting display section.
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105 is ON.
When changing the setting, in (1), the gaming machine 1 is powered on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RMW clear switch 680 turned on.
After the power is turned on, in (2), a display such as "POWER ON" is displayed on the image display device 31 to indicate that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.

At (3), the performance display monitor 600 displays the current set values. When only one level of setting is prepared, "P" or "1" is displayed.
The set value is displayed, for example, in the leftmost segment among the four-digit segments of the performance display monitor 600, but may be displayed in another segment. The setting value is displayed with a dot, regardless of which digit it appears in.
On the image display device 31, a display such as "setting is being changed" is displayed to notify that the setting is being changed. The setting values are never displayed on the image display device 31 . The voice output device 34 also outputs a voice such as "setting is being changed" to notify that the setting is being changed. The frame lamp 101 and the board lamp 100 may emit light in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) to notify that the setting is being changed.

When the setting person operates the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 that doubles as the setting switch 670, in (4), the performance display monitor 600 displays the set value for each change operation. The change operation can be performed any number of times until the setting change is completed, and the setting value is changed by one step each time the operation is performed.
As described above, according to the operation of the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 that also serves as the setting switch 670, the value increases by one step from "1" to "2", etc., and when the setting reaches "6", it reaches "1". return. No dots are displayed with the set value during the change operation.
During this time, the image display device 31 continues to display a message such as "setting is being changed" to notify that the setting is being changed. The setting values are never displayed on the image display device 31 . The audio output device 34 also continues to output the audio notifying that the setting is being changed. The frame lamp 101 and the board lamp 100 also continue to emit light.
A setting change history may be displayed on the image display device 31 in response to an operation using the cross key 6f, effect button 6a, or the like during the setting change.

When the setting person turns off the setting key switch 660, in (5), the setting value currently displayed on the performance display monitor 600 is determined. The performance display monitor 600 displays any set value with a dot.
At this time, the display and sound to notify that the setting is being changed may be continued or terminated. The image display device 31 and the voice output device 34 provide a display and sound output such as "The setting change is completed" to notify that the setting change is completed instead of the display and sound that notify that the setting change is in progress. You can go with

After that, in (6), the image display device 31 displays a message such as "RWM clearing completed" to notify that the RWM clearing has been completed.
Along with such a display, the audio output device 34 may output a voice such as "RWM clearing has been completed" to notify that the RWM clearing has been completed.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation of turning on all segments and then turning them off for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds ends, in (7) the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying performance values. In the image display device 31, the RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device, the performance display section, and the setting display section when the settings are changed when the gaming machine is separately provided with the performance display section and the setting display section.
It is a major premise that the open detection switch 105 is ON.
When changing the setting, in (1), the gaming machine 1 is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RMW clear switch 680 turned on.
After the power is turned on, in (2), a display such as "POWER ON" is displayed on the image display device 31 to indicate that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 remain off.

At (3), the setting display monitor 650 displays the current setting values. If only one level of setting is prepared, "P" or "1" is displayed. The set value is displayed with a dot.
On the image display device 31, a display such as "setting is being changed" is displayed to notify that the setting is being changed. The frame lamp 101 and the board lamp 100 may emit light in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) to notify that the setting is being changed.
The setting values are never displayed on the image display device 31 . The performance display monitor 600 remains off.

When the setting person operates the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 which also serves as the setting switch 670, in (4), the setting display monitor 650 displays the set value for each change operation. The change operation can be performed any number of times until the setting change is completed, and the setting value is changed by one step each time the operation is performed.
As described above, according to the operation of the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 that also serves as the setting switch 670, the number increases by one step from "1" to "2" and so on. return. No dots are displayed with the set value during the change operation.
During this time, the image display device 31 continues to display a message such as "setting is being changed" to notify that the setting is being changed. The setting values are never displayed on the image display device 31 . The performance display monitor 600 remains off.
A setting change history may be displayed on the image display device 31 in response to an operation using the cross key 6f, effect button 6a, or the like during the setting change.

When the setting key switch 660 is turned off by the setting person, the setting change ends, and in (5), the setting value currently displayed on the setting display monitor 650 is confirmed. After that, the setting display monitor 650 is turned off.
At this time, the display and sound to notify that the setting is being changed may be continued or terminated. The image display device 31 and the audio output device 34 provide a display and audio output such as "The setting change is completed" to notify that the setting change is completed instead of the display and voice that notify that the setting is being changed. You can go with
After that, in (6), the image display device 31 displays a message such as "RWM clearing completed" to notify that the RWM clearing has been completed.
Along with such a display, the voice output device 34 may output a voice such as "RWM clearing has been completed" to notify that the RWM clearing has been completed.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation of turning on all segments and then turning them off for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds ends, in (7) the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying performance values. In the image display device 31, the RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 124 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device and the performance display unit at the time of setting confirmation when the game machine has the performance display unit that also serves as the setting display unit.
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105 is ON.
When changing the setting, in (1), the game machine 1 is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RMW clear switch 680 turned off.
After the power is turned on, in (2), a display such as "POWER ON" is displayed on the image display device 31 to indicate that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.

At (3), the performance display monitor 600 displays the current set values. When only one level of setting is prepared, "P" or "1" is displayed.
The set value is displayed, for example, in the leftmost segment among the four-digit segments of the performance display monitor 600, but may be displayed in another segment. The setting value is displayed with a dot, regardless of which digit it appears in.
On the image display device 31, a display such as "Confirming setting" is displayed to notify that the setting is being confirmed. Also, a voice such as "Confirming settings" is output to notify that the settings are being confirmed. The setting values are never displayed on the image display device 31 . The frame lamp 101 and the board lamp 100 may emit light in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) to notify that the setting confirmation is in progress.
During confirmation of the settings, a history of setting changes may be displayed on the image display device 31 in response to operations using the cross key 6f, the effect button 6a, and the like.

When the configurator turns off the setting key switch 660, the setting confirmation ends, and the setting confirmation notification using the voice and display ends.
At this time, the display and sound announcing that the setting confirmation is in progress may be continued or terminated. The image display device 31 and the audio output device 34 provide a display and sound output such as "setting confirmation completed" to notify that the setting confirmation is completed, instead of the display and sound that indicate that the setting confirmation is in progress. You can go with
After that, in (4), the image display device 31 displays a message such as "Power has been restored" to notify that the power has been restored.
Along with such a display, the audio output device 34 may output a voice such as "Power has been restored" to notify that the power has been restored.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation of turning on all segments and then turning them off for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds ends, in (5) the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying performance values. In the image display device 31, the RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 125 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device, the performance display section, and the setting display section at the time of setting confirmation when the gaming machine is separately provided with the performance display section and the setting display section.
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105 is ON.
When changing the setting, in (1), the gaming machine 1 is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RMW clear switch 680 turned off.
After the power is turned on, in (2), a display such as "POWER ON" is displayed on the image display device 31 to indicate that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 remain off.

At (3), the setting display monitor 650 displays the current setting values. When only one level of setting is prepared, "P" or "1" is displayed. The set value is displayed with a dot.
On the image display device 31, a display such as "Confirming setting" is displayed to notify that the setting is being confirmed. In addition, the voice output device 34 outputs a voice such as "setting is being changed" to notify that the setting is being changed.
The frame lamp 101 and the board lamp 100 may emit light in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) to notify that the setting confirmation is in progress. The setting values are never displayed on the image display device 31 . The performance display monitor 600 remains off.
During confirmation of the settings, a history of setting changes may be displayed on the image display device 31 in response to operations using the cross key 6f, the effect button 6a, and the like.

When the setting person turns off the setting key switch 660, the setting confirmation ends, and the setting confirmation notification using the voice and display ends. The setting display monitor 650 is turned off.
At this time, the display and sound announcing that the setting confirmation is in progress may be continued or terminated. The image display device 31 and the audio output device 34 display and output a message such as "setting confirmation is finished" to notify that the setting confirmation is completed, instead of the display and sound that indicate that the setting confirmation is in progress. you can go
After that, in (4), the image display device 31 displays a message such as "Power has been restored" to notify that the power has been restored.
Along with such a display, the audio output device 34 may output a voice such as "Power has been restored" to notify that the power has been restored.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation of turning on all segments and then turning them off for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds ends, in (5) the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying performance values. In the image display device 31, the RWM clear notification continues.

(Technical features of the present invention corresponding to the above embodiments)
◆ A first configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows.
This gaming machine includes a main control unit (main ROM 502) for controlling games, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and other board parts different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A board (main control board 50) on which (a plurality of electronic components 595) are mounted, a board case (main board case 200) that houses the board, and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) subjected to watermark processing. , wherein the processing seal includes a light-transmitting portion (light-transmitting portion 1574) with high light-transmitting property and a plurality of non-light-transmitting portions (non-light-transmitting portions 1570, 1572, 1573) with low light-transmitting property. The processing sticker is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, and the light transmitting portion and the substrate between the plurality of non-light transmitting portions The other board component can be visually recognized through the case, the main control section can be visually recognized through the board case, and the information display section can be visually recognized through the board case. (Fig. 115, Fig. 116).

◆ A second configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows.
This gaming machine includes a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control substrate 50) on which components (a plurality of electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) that houses the substrate, and a watermark processed seal (processed seal 1560). and the processed seal includes a light-transmitting portion (light-transmitting portion 1574) having high light-transmitting property, a plurality of non-light-transmitting portions (non-light-transmitting portions 1570, 1572, 1573) having low light-transmitting property, and and the processing sticker is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the information display portion, and the light transmitting portion between the plurality of non-light transmitting portions and the other It is characterized in that the board component can be visually recognized and the information display section can be visually recognized through the board case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

◆ A third configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows.
This gaming machine includes a board (main control board 50) on which a main control section (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games and an information display section (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information are mounted, and the board and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) subjected to watermarking, wherein the processed seal includes a highly translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) and a , and a plurality of non-light-transmitting portions (non-light-transmitting portions 1570, 1572, and 1573) having low light-transmitting properties, and the processed seal includes the main control portion and the information display portion on the substrate case. , and the main control unit can be visually recognized through the substrate case, and the information display unit can be visually recognized through the substrate case (Fig. 115, Figure 116).

◆ A fourth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows.
This gaming machine includes a board (main control board 50) on which a main control section (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games and an information display section (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information are mounted; and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) subjected to watermarking, wherein the processed seal includes a highly translucent translucent portion (translucent portion 1574), and a plurality of non-light-transmitting portions (non-light-transmitting portions 1570, 1572, 1573) having low light-transmitting properties, and the processed seal is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the information display portion. , wherein the information display section is visible through the board case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

◆ A fifth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows.
This gaming machine includes a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control substrate 50) on which components (a plurality of electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) that houses the substrate, and a watermarked processed seal (processed seal 1560). and the processed seal has a light-transmitting portion (light-transmitting portion 1574) with high light-transmitting property and a non-light-transmitting portion (non-light-transmitting portions 1570, 1572, 1573) with low light-transmitting property. The processing sticker is attached to a position on the board case that does not overlap the main control section and the information display section, and the other board component is not visible through the light transmitting section and the board case. 115 and 116, the main control unit is visible through the substrate case, and the information display unit is visible through the substrate case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

◆ A sixth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is realized as the following game machine.
This gaming machine includes a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control substrate 50) on which components (a plurality of electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) that houses the substrate, and a watermarked processed seal (processed seal 1560). and the processed seal has a light-transmitting portion (light-transmitting portion 1574) with high light-transmitting property and a non-light-transmitting portion (non-light-transmitting portions 1570, 1572, 1573) with low light-transmitting property. The processing sticker is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the information display portion, and the other substrate component can be visually recognized through the light-transmitting portion and the substrate case. 115 and 116).

◆ A seventh configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows.
This gaming machine includes a board (main control board 50) on which a main control section (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games and an information display section (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information are mounted, and the board and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) subjected to watermarking, wherein the processed seal includes a highly translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) and a , non-light-transmitting portions (non-light-transmitting portions 1570, 1572, 1573) having low light-transmitting properties, and the processing seal includes, on the substrate case, the main control portion, the information display portion, 115 and 116, the main control section can be visually recognized through the substrate case, and the information display section can be visually recognized through the substrate case. ).

◆ The eighth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is realized as the following game machine.
This gaming machine includes a board (main control board 50) on which a main control section (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games and an information display section (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information are mounted, and the board and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) subjected to watermarking, wherein the processed seal includes a highly translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) and a , non-translucent portions (non-translucent portions 1570, 1572, 1573) with low translucency, and the processing seal is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the information display portion, It is characterized in that the information display section can be visually recognized through the board case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

◆ A ninth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a gaming machine as follows.
This gaming machine includes a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A board (main control board 50) on which components (a plurality of electronic components 595) are mounted, a board case (main board case 200) that houses the board, and a light-transmitting portion (light-transmitting portion 1574), and a seal (processing seal 1560) having a plurality of entry fields (white entry area 1570) that can be filled in by an administrator. and the information display section, and the other board component is visible through the board case and the translucent section between the plurality of entry fields, and through the board case. The main control section is visible, and the information display section is visible through the substrate case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

◆ A tenth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows.
This gaming machine includes a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A board (main control board 50) on which components (a plurality of electronic components 595) are mounted, a board case (main board case 200) that houses the board, and a light-transmitting portion (light-transmitting portion 1574), and a seal (processing seal 1560) having a plurality of entry fields (white entry area 1570) that can be filled in by an administrator, and the seal is provided on the substrate case in the information display section The other board component is visible through the light-transmitting part and the board case between the plurality of entry fields, and the information display part is visible through the board case. (Fig. 115, Fig. 116).

◆An eleventh configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a gaming machine as follows.
This gaming machine includes a board (main control board 50) on which a main control section (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games and an information display section (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information are mounted, and the board a substrate case (main substrate case 200) that accommodates , a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) with high translucency, and a plurality of entry fields (white entry area 1570) that can be entered by an administrator. and a seal (processed seal 1560), the seal being attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, and the main control unit through the substrate case. 115, 116).

◆ A twelfth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is realized as the following game machine.
This gaming machine includes a board (main control board 50) on which a main control section (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games and an information display section (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information are mounted, and the board a substrate case (main substrate case 200) that accommodates , a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) with high translucency, and a plurality of entry fields (white entry area 1570) that can be entered by an administrator. a seal (processed seal 1560), wherein the seal is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the information display section, and the information display section can be visually recognized through the substrate case. It is characterized (Fig. 115, Fig. 116).

◆ A thirteenth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is realized as the following game machine.
This gaming machine includes a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A board (main control board 50) on which components (a plurality of electronic components 595) are mounted, a board case (main board case 200) that houses the board, and a light-transmitting portion (light-transmitting portion 1574) and a seal (processing seal 1560) having an entry field (white entry area 1570) that can be filled in by an administrator. It is attached at a position that does not overlap with the information display section, the other board component is visible through the light transmitting section and the board case, and the main control section is visible through the board case. and the information display unit is visible through the substrate case,
(Figs. 115 and 116).

◆ A fourteenth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a gaming machine as follows.
This gaming machine includes a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A board (main control board 50) on which components (a plurality of electronic components 595) are mounted, a board case (main board case 200) that houses the board, and a light-transmitting portion (light-transmitting portion 1574), and a seal (processing seal 1560) having an entry field (white entry area 1570) that can be filled in by an administrator, and the seal overlaps the information display section on the board case. The other board component is visible through the translucent part and the board case, and the information display part is visible through the board case. 115, Fig. 116).

◆ A fifteenth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as the following game machine.
This gaming machine includes a board (main control board 50) on which a main control section (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games and an information display section (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information are mounted, and the board a substrate case (main substrate case 200) that accommodates a seal ( A process seal 1560) is provided on the substrate case, and the seal is attached to a position not overlapping the main control unit and the information display unit on the substrate case, and the main control unit is displayed through the substrate case. It is characterized in that the information display section can be visually recognized through the substrate case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

◆ A sixteenth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a gaming machine as follows.
This gaming machine includes a board (main control board 50) on which a main control section (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games and an information display section (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information are mounted, and the board a substrate case (main substrate case 200) that accommodates a seal ( and a processed seal 1560), wherein the seal is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the information display portion, and the information display portion can be visually recognized through the substrate case. (Fig. 115, Fig. 116).

◆ A seventeenth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as the following game machine.
This gaming machine includes a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A board (main control board 50) on which components (a plurality of electronic components 595) are mounted, a board case (main board case 200) that houses the board, and a light-transmitting portion (light-transmitting portion 1574), and a seal (processed seal 1560) having an information writing portion (white entry area 1570) on which predetermined information is written, and the seal is placed on the substrate case on the main control and the information display section, the other board component can be visually recognized through the light-transmitting section and the board case, and the main control section can be operated through the board case. 115 and 116, the information display section is visible through the substrate case.

◆ The 18th configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is realized as the following game machine.
This gaming machine includes a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A board (main control board 50) on which components (a plurality of electronic components 595) are mounted, a board case (main board case 200) that houses the board, and a light-transmitting portion (light-transmitting portion 1574), and a seal (processed seal 1560) having an information writing portion (white entry area 1570) on which predetermined information is written, and the seal is provided on the substrate case to display the information It is attached at a position that does not overlap the part, the other board component can be visually recognized through the light transmitting part and the board case, and the information display part can be visually recognized through the board case. (Fig. 115, Fig. 116).

◆ A nineteenth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows.
This gaming machine includes a board (main control board 50) on which a main control section (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games and an information display section (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information are mounted, and the board a substrate case (main substrate case 200) that houses the , a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) with high translucency, and an information writing portion (white entry area 1570) where predetermined information is written and a seal (processed seal 1560) having, the seal is affixed to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, and the main control unit and the information display unit It is characterized in that the control section can be visually recognized and the information display section can be visually recognized through the substrate case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

◆ A twentieth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows.
This gaming machine includes a board (main control board 50) on which a main control section (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games and an information display section (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information are mounted, and the board a substrate case (main substrate case 200) that houses the , a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) with high translucency, and an information writing portion (white entry area 1570) where predetermined information is written and a seal (processed seal 1560), wherein the seal is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the information display portion, and the information display portion can be visually recognized through the substrate case. (Figs. 115 and 116).

◆ A twenty-first configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a gaming machine as follows.
This gaming machine includes a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control substrate 50) on which components (a plurality of electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) that houses the substrate, and a watermark processed seal (processed seal 1560). and the processed seal includes a light-transmitting portion (light-transmitting portion 1574) having high light-transmitting property, a plurality of non-light-transmitting portions (non-light-transmitting portions 1570, 1572, 1573) having low light-transmitting property, and The processing sticker is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, and the light-transmitting portion between the plurality of non-light-transmitting portions and the The other board component is visible through the board case, the main control section is visible through the board case, and the information display section is visible through the board case. (Figs. 115 and 116).

◆ The 22nd configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is realized as the following game machine.
This gaming machine includes a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control substrate 50) on which components (a plurality of electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) that houses the substrate, and a watermark processed seal (processed seal 1560). and the processed seal includes a light-transmitting portion (light-transmitting portion 1574) having high light-transmitting property, a plurality of non-light-transmitting portions (non-light-transmitting portions 1570, 1572, 1573) having low light-transmitting property, and and the processing sticker is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the information display portion, and the light transmitting portion between the plurality of non-light transmitting portions and the other It is characterized in that the board component can be visually recognized and the information display section can be visually recognized through the board case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

◆ The 23rd configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as the following game machine.
This gaming machine includes a board (main control board 50) on which a main control section (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games and an information display section (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information are mounted, and the board and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) subjected to watermarking, wherein the processed seal includes a highly translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) and a , and a plurality of non-light-transmitting portions (non-light-transmitting portions 1570, 1572, and 1573) having low light-transmitting properties, and the processed seal includes the main control portion and the information display portion on the substrate case. , and the main control unit can be visually recognized through the substrate case, and the information display unit can be visually recognized through the substrate case (Fig. 115, Figure 116).

◆ A twenty-fourth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as the following game machine.
This gaming machine includes a board (main control board 50) on which a main control section (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games and an information display section (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information are mounted, and the board and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) subjected to watermarking, wherein the processed seal includes a highly translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) and a , and a plurality of non-light-transmitting portions (non-light-transmitting portions 1570, 1572, 1573) having low light-transmitting properties, and the processed seal is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the information display portion. 115 and 116, wherein the information display section is visible through the substrate case.

◆ The twenty-fifth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as the following game machine.
This gaming machine includes a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control substrate 50) on which components (a plurality of electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) that houses the substrate, and a watermark processed seal (processed seal 1560). and the processed seal has a light-transmitting portion (light-transmitting portion 1574) with high light-transmitting property and a non-light-transmitting portion (non-light-transmitting portions 1570, 1572, 1573) with low light-transmitting property. The processing sticker is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, and the other substrate component is displayed through the light transmission unit and the substrate case. 115 and 116, the main control unit is visible through the substrate case, and the information display unit is visible through the substrate case.

◆ The twenty-sixth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as the following game machine.
This gaming machine includes a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A substrate (main control substrate 50) on which components (a plurality of electronic components 595) are mounted, a substrate case (main substrate case 200) that houses the substrate, and a watermark processed seal (processed seal 1560). and the processed seal has a light-transmitting portion (light-transmitting portion 1574) with high light-transmitting property and a non-light-transmitting portion (non-light-transmitting portions 1570, 1572, 1573) with low light-transmitting property. and the processing sticker is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the information display portion, and the other substrate component can be visually recognized through the light-transmitting portion and the substrate case. 115, 116).

◆ The twenty-seventh configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is realized as the following game machine.
This gaming machine includes a board (main control board 50) on which a main control section (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games and an information display section (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information are mounted, and the board and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) subjected to watermarking, wherein the processed seal includes a highly translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) and a , non-light-transmitting portions (non-light-transmitting portions 1570, 1572, 1573) having low light-transmitting properties, and the processing seal includes, on the substrate case, the main control portion, the information display portion, 115 and 116, the main control section can be visually recognized through the substrate case, and the information display section can be visually recognized through the substrate case. ).

◆ The twenty-eighth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is realized as the following game machine.
This gaming machine includes a board (main control board 50) on which a main control section (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games and an information display section (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information are mounted, and the board and a processed seal (processed seal 1560) subjected to watermarking, wherein the processed seal includes a highly translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) and a , non-translucent portions (non-translucent portions 1570, 1572, 1573) with low translucency, and the processing seal is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the information display portion, It is characterized in that the information display section can be visually recognized through the board case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

◆ The twenty-ninth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is realized as the following game machine.
This gaming machine includes a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A board (main control board 50) on which components (a plurality of electronic components 595) are mounted, a board case (main board case 200) that houses the board, and a light-transmitting portion (light-transmitting portion 1574), and a seal (processing seal 1560) having a plurality of entry fields (white entry area 1570) that can be filled in by an administrator. and the information display section, and the other board component is visible through the board case and the translucent section between the plurality of entry fields, and through the board case. The main control section is visible, and the information display section is visible through the substrate case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

◆ A thirtieth configuration for achieving the above objects of the present invention is implemented as a gaming machine as follows.
This gaming machine includes a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A board (main control board 50) on which components (a plurality of electronic components 595) are mounted, a board case (main board case 200) that houses the board, and a light-transmitting portion (light-transmitting portion 1574), and a seal (processing seal 1560) having a plurality of entry fields (white entry area 1570) that can be filled in by an administrator, and the seal is provided on the substrate case in the information display section The other board component is visible through the light-transmitting part and the board case between the plurality of entry fields, and the information display part is visible through the board case. (Fig. 115, Fig. 116).

◆ The 31st configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is realized as the following game machine.
This gaming machine includes a board (main control board 50) on which a main control section (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games and an information display section (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information are mounted, and the board a substrate case (main substrate case 200) that accommodates , a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) with high translucency, and a plurality of entry fields (white entry area 1570) that can be entered by an administrator. and a seal (processed seal 1560), the seal being attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, and the main control unit through the substrate case. 115, 116).

◆ A thirty-second configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows.
This gaming machine includes a board (main control board 50) on which a main control section (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games and an information display section (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information are mounted, and the board a substrate case (main substrate case 200) that accommodates , a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) with high translucency, and a plurality of entry fields (white entry area 1570) that can be entered by an administrator. a seal (processed seal 1560), wherein the seal is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the information display section, and the information display section can be visually recognized through the substrate case. It is characterized (Fig. 115, Fig. 116).

◆ The 33rd configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is realized as the following game machine.
This gaming machine includes a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A board (main control board 50) on which components (a plurality of electronic components 595) are mounted, a board case (main board case 200) that houses the board, and a light-transmitting portion (light-transmitting portion 1574) and a seal (processing seal 1560) having an entry field (white entry area 1570) that can be filled in by an administrator. It is attached at a position that does not overlap with the information display section, the other board component is visible through the light transmitting section and the board case, and the main control section is visible through the board case. It is characterized in that the information display section can be visually recognized through the board case (FIGS. 115 and 116).

◆ A thirty-fourth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a gaming machine as follows.
This gaming machine includes a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A board (main control board 50) on which components (a plurality of electronic components 595) are mounted, a board case (main board case 200) that houses the board, and a light-transmitting portion (light-transmitting portion 1574), and a seal (processing seal 1560) having an entry field (white entry area 1570) that can be filled in by an administrator, and the seal overlaps the information display section on the board case. The other board component is visible through the translucent part and the board case, and the information display part is visible through the board case. 115, Fig. 116).

◆ A thirty-fifth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a gaming machine as follows.
This gaming machine includes a board (main control board 50) on which a main control section (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games and an information display section (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information are mounted, and the board a substrate case (main substrate case 200) that accommodates a seal ( A process seal 1560) is provided on the substrate case, and the seal is attached to a position not overlapping the main control unit and the information display unit on the substrate case, and the main control unit is displayed through the substrate case. 115 and 116, the information display section is visible through the substrate case.

◆ A thirty-sixth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a gaming machine as follows.
This gaming machine includes a board (main control board 50) on which a main control section (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games and an information display section (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information are mounted, and the board a substrate case (main substrate case 200) that accommodates a seal ( and a processed seal 1560), wherein the seal is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the information display portion, and the information display portion can be visually recognized through the substrate case. (Fig. 115, Fig. 116).

◆ A thirty-seventh configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a gaming machine as follows.
This gaming machine includes a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A board (main control board 50) on which components (a plurality of electronic components 595) are mounted, a board case (main board case 200) that houses the board, and a light-transmitting portion (light-transmitting portion 1574) and an information writing portion (information display portion 1573) on which predetermined information is written (processed seal 1560), and the seal is placed on the substrate case by the main control unit and the information display section, and the other board component can be visually recognized through the light-transmitting section and the board case, and the main control section can be visually recognized through the board case. 115 and 116, the information display section can be visually recognized through the board case.

◆ A thirty-eighth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a gaming machine as follows.
This gaming machine includes a main control unit (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games, an information display unit (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information, and a board different from the main control unit and the information display unit. A board (main control board 50) on which components (a plurality of electronic components 595) are mounted, a board case (main board case 200) that houses the board, and a light-transmitting portion (light-transmitting portion 1574) and a seal (processed seal 1560) having an information writing portion (information display portion 1573) on which predetermined information is written, and the seal is placed on the substrate case so that the information display portion and the other substrate component can be visually recognized through the translucent portion and the substrate case, and the information display portion can be visually recognized through the substrate case. (Fig. 115, Fig. 116).

◆ A thirty-ninth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a gaming machine as follows.
This gaming machine includes a board (main control board 50) on which a main control section (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games and an information display section (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information are mounted, and the board a substrate case (main substrate case 200) that accommodates the , a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) with high translucency, and an information writing portion (information display portion 1573) in which predetermined information is written. and a seal (processed seal 1560), the seal being attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, and the main control unit through the substrate case. 115, 116).

◆ The 40th configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as the following game machine.
This gaming machine includes a board (main control board 50) on which a main control section (integrated main ROM 502) for controlling games and an information display section (performance display monitor 600) for displaying game information are mounted, and the board a substrate case (main substrate case 200) that accommodates, a translucent portion (translucent portion 1574) with high translucency, and a transparent information writing portion (information display portion 1573) in which predetermined information is written and a seal (processed seal 1560), wherein the seal is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the information display portion, and the information display portion can be visually recognized through the substrate case. (Figs. 115 and 116).

1 game machine 6a production button 16 image display device 17A-17C movable production member 110 main control board 130 production control board 130m production control section 140 image control section 150 lamp control section

Claims (1)

Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game when a first start condition is established or a second start condition is established, and a gaming machine capable of executing the special game according to the determination result of the determination means,
A game state can be controlled between a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
a notification effect for notifying whether or not the special game is to be executed by executing a second effect after the first effect based on the establishment of the start condition; and a vibration effect for vibrating an operation means operable by the player. , is provided with a production control means capable of executing
The vibration effect is
a first vibration effect that generates an operation effective period and performs an operation prompting display, and is executed in response to an operation of the operating means during the operation prompting display;
a second vibration effect that does not generate the operation valid period and is executed without the operation prompting display,
The first vibration effect is
executable in a suggestive effect suggesting whether or not the special game in the second effect is to be executed,
The second vibration effect is
executable during the first production, and
Execution is possible according to the result of preliminary determination whether or not to execute the special game performed before the determination by the determination means,
Execution is possible so that the vibration period in the first vibration effect associated with the suggestive effect is longer than the vibration period in the second vibration effect,
When the first vibration effect accompanying the suggestive effect is executed than when the second vibration effect is executed, the predetermined role object effect is more likely to be executed,
The first start condition in the first game state is higher than the notification effect for notifying the execution of the special game based on the establishment of the first start condition in the second game state. The game machine is characterized in that the second vibration performance is more likely to be executed during the first performance when the notification performance for reporting the execution of the special game is executed based on the establishment of.